This is a modern-English version of Popular Technology; or, Professions and Trades. Vol. 1 (of 2), originally written by Hazen, Edward.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
POPULAR TECHNOLOGY;
OR,
PROFESSIONS AND TRADES.

BY EDWARD HAZEN, A. M.,
"THE SYMBOLICAL SPELLING-BOOK," "THE SPELLER AND DEFINER," AND "A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR."
EMBELLISHED WITH EIGHTY-ONE ENGRAVINGS.
IN TWO VOLUMES.
VOL. 1.
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS.
HarperCollins,
In the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New York.
CONTENTS
OF
THE FIRST VOLUME.
PREFACE.
The following work has been written for the use of schools and families, as well as for miscellaneous readers. It embraces a class of subjects in which every individual is deeply interested, and with which, as a mere philosophical inspector of the affairs of men, he should become acquainted.
The following work has been created for schools, families, and general readers. It covers a range of topics that everyone is genuinely interested in and that, as a casual observer of human affairs, one should understand.
They, however, challenge attention by considerations of greater moment than mere curiosity; for, in the present age, a great proportion of mankind pursue some kind of business as means of subsistence or distinction; and in this country especially, such pursuit is deemed honorable and, in fact, indispensable to a reputable position in the community.
They, however, grab attention with concerns that are more important than just curiosity; because, in today's world, a lot of people engage in some sort of work to make a living or stand out. In this country in particular, such efforts are seen as honorable and, in fact, essential for a respectable position in society.
Nevertheless, it is a fact that cannot have escaped the attention of persons of observation, that many individuals mistake their appropriate calling, and engage in employments for which they have neither mental nor physical adaptation; some learn a trade who should have studied a profession; others study a profession who should have learned a trade. Hence arise, in a great measure, the ill success and discontent which so frequently attend the pursuits of men.
Nevertheless, it’s a fact that can’t be missed by observant people that many individuals confuse their true calling and get involved in jobs they aren’t suited for, either mentally or physically. Some learn a trade when they should have pursued a profession, while others study a profession when they should have learned a trade. This largely leads to the disappointment and lack of success that often accompany people's careers.
For these reasons, parents should be particularly cautious in the choice of permanent employments for their children; and, in every case, capacity should be especially regarded, without paying much attention to the comparative favor in which the several employments may be held; for a successful prosecution of an humble business is far more honorable than inferiority or failure in one which may be greatly esteemed.
For these reasons, parents should be especially careful when choosing permanent jobs for their kids; in every case, their abilities should be prioritized over how much prestige different jobs have. Succeeding in a modest job is much more respectable than being inferior or failing in a highly regarded one.
To determine the particular genius of children, parents should give them, at least, a superficial knowledge of the several trades and professions. To do this effectually, a systematic course of instruction[viii] should be given, not only at the family fireside and in the schoolroom, but also at places where practical exhibitions of the several employments may be seen. These means, together with a competent literary education, and some tools and other facilities for mechanical operations, can scarcely fail of furnishing clear indications of intellectual bias.
To identify the unique talents of children, parents should provide them with at least a basic understanding of various trades and professions. To do this effectively, a structured teaching approach[viii] should be implemented, not just at home and in the classroom, but also at locations where practical demonstrations of different jobs can be observed. These methods, along with a solid literary education and access to some tools and resources for hands-on work, will likely reveal clear signs of their intellectual inclinations.
The course just proposed is not only necessary to a judicious choice of a trade or profession, but also as means of intellectual improvement; and as such it should be pursued, at all events, even though the choice of an employment were not in view.
The course just proposed is not only essential for making a wise choice about a trade or profession, but also for personal intellectual growth; therefore, it should be pursued in any case, even if employment is not the goal.
We are endowed with a nature composed of many faculties both of the intellectual and the animal kinds, and the reasoning faculties were originally designed by the Creator to have the ascendency. In the present moral condition of man, however, they do not commonly maintain their right of precedence. This failure arises from imbecility, originating, in part, from a deficiency in judicious cultivation, and from the superior strength of the passions.
We have a nature made up of many abilities, both intellectual and instinctual, and the reasoning abilities were originally intended by the Creator to be the dominant ones. However, in today's moral state of humanity, they don't usually keep their rightful position of superiority. This struggle comes from weakness, partly due to a lack of thoughtful development, and partly because the passions are stronger.
This condition is particularly conspicuous in youth, and shows itself in disobedience to parents, and in various other aberrations from moral duty. If, therefore, parents would have their children act a reasonable part, while in their minority, and, also, after they have assumed their stations in manhood, they must pursue a course of early instruction, calculated to secure the ascendency of the reasoning faculties.
This behavior is especially noticeable in young people and manifests as disobedience to parents and other moral missteps. Therefore, if parents want their children to behave sensibly while they're still minors, and even after they've grown into adulthood, they need to provide early guidance aimed at fostering their reasoning skills.
The subjects for instruction best adapted to the cultivation of the young mind are the common things with which we are surrounded. This is evident from the fact, that it uniformly expands with great rapidity under their influence during the first three or four years of life; for, it is from them, children obtain all their ideas, as well as a knowledge of the language by which they are expressed.
The best subjects for teaching young minds are the everyday things around us. This is clear because these things consistently help the mind grow quickly in the first three or four years of life. Children gather all their ideas and learn the language used to express them from these common experiences.
The rapid progress of young children in the acquisition of knowledge often excites the surprise of parents of observation, and the fact that their improvement is almost imperceptible, after they have attained[ix] to the age of four or five years, is equally surprising. Why, it is often asked, do not children continue to advance in knowledge with equal and increased rapidity, especially, as their capabilities increase with age?
The quick progress that young children make in learning often surprises attentive parents, and it's equally surprising that their development becomes almost unnoticeable after they reach the age of four or five. People often wonder why children don't continue to learn at the same fast pace, especially since their abilities grow as they get older.
The solution of this question is not difficult. Children continue to improve, while they have the means of doing so; but, having acquired a knowledge of the objects within their reach, at least, so far as they may be capable at the time, their advancement must consequently cease. It is hardly necessary to remark, that the march of mind might be continued with increased celerity, were new objects or subjects continually presented.
The answer to this question isn't hard. Kids keep getting better as long as they have the resources to do so; however, once they’ve learned about the things they can access, at least to the extent they're able, their progress will naturally slow down. It’s almost unnecessary to point out that the development of the mind could continue more rapidly if new topics or things were consistently introduced.
In supplying subjects for mental improvement, as they may be needed at the several stages of advancement, there can be but little difficulty, since we are surrounded by works both of nature and of art. In fact, the same subjects may be presented several times, and, at each presentation, instructions might be given adapted to the particular state of improvement in the pupil.
In providing topics for mental growth, as they are needed at different stages of development, there isn’t much difficulty because we are surrounded by both natural and artistic works. In fact, the same topics can be presented multiple times, and with each presentation, instructions can be tailored to the specific level of improvement of the student.
Instructions of this nature need never interfere injuriously with those on the elementary branches of education, although the latter would undoubtedly be considered of minor importance. Had they been always regarded in this light, our schools would now present a far more favorable aspect, and we should have been farther removed from the ignorance and the barbarism of the middle ages.
Instructions like these should never negatively impact the basic subjects of education, even though those subjects might be seen as less important. If they had always been viewed this way, our schools would look much better today, and we would be much further away from the ignorance and barbarism of the Middle Ages.
Were this view of education generally adopted, teachers would soon find, that the business of communicating instructions to the young has been changed from an irksome to a pleasant task, since their pupils will have become studious and intellectual, and, consequently, more capable of comprehending explanations upon every subject. Such a course would also be attended with the incidental advantage of good conduct on the part of pupils, inasmuch as the elevation of the understanding over the passions uniformly tends to this result.
If this approach to education were widely accepted, teachers would quickly realize that teaching the young would shift from a frustrating job to an enjoyable one. Their students would become eager and thoughtful learners, making them better equipped to understand lessons on any topic. This method would also naturally lead to better behavior among students because developing their minds over their emotions typically leads to that outcome.
For carrying into practice a system of intellectual[x] education, the following work supplies as great an amount of materials as can be embodied in the same compass. Every article may be made the foundation of one lecture or more, which might have reference not only to the particular subject on which it treats, but also to the meaning and application of the words.
For implementing a system of intellectual[x] education, this work provides as much material as can fit in the same space. Each article can serve as the basis for one or more lectures, which can address not only the specific topic it covers but also the meaning and usage of the words.
The articles have been concisely written, as must necessarily be the case in all works embracing so great a variety of subjects. This particular trait, however, need not be considered objectionable, since all who may desire to read more extensively on any particular subject, can easily obtain works which are exclusively devoted to it.
The articles have been written concisely, which is necessary for any work covering such a wide range of topics. However, this characteristic shouldn’t be seen as a drawback, since anyone looking to read more in-depth about a specific subject can easily find books that focus solely on it.
Prolix descriptions of machinery and of mechanical operations have been studiously avoided; for it has been presumed, that all who might have perseverance enough to read such details, would feel curiosity sufficient to visit the shops and manufactories, and see the machines and operations themselves. Nevertheless, enough has been said, in all cases, to give a general idea of the business, and to guide in the researches of those who may wish to obtain information by the impressive method of actual inspection.
Long-winded descriptions of machines and mechanical processes have been deliberately avoided; it’s assumed that anyone with enough perseverance to read those details would also have the curiosity to visit the shops and factories to see the machines and processes themselves. Still, enough has been conveyed in every case to provide a general understanding of the business and to assist those who may want to gather information through the more impactful method of firsthand observation.
A great proportion of the whole work is occupied in recounting historical facts, connected with the invention and progress of the arts. The author was induced to pay especial attention to this branch of history, from the consideration, that it furnishes very clear indications of the real state of society in past ages, as well as at the present time, and also that it would supply the reader with data, by which he might, in some measure, determine the vast capabilities of man.
A large part of the entire work focuses on recounting historical facts related to the invention and advancement of the arts. The author was motivated to pay special attention to this area of history because it provides clear insights into the true condition of society in both the past and present, and it also offers readers information that can help them gauge the immense potential of humanity.
This kind of historical information will be especially beneficial to the youthful mind, by inducing a habit of investigation and antiquarian research. In addition to this, a knowledge of the origin and progress of the various employments which are in active operation all around, will throw upon the busy world an aspect exceedingly interesting.
This type of historical information will be especially helpful for young minds by encouraging a habit of inquiry and exploration into the past. Additionally, understanding the origin and development of the various jobs that are actively happening all around will give a really intriguing perspective on the busy world.
It may be well, however, to caution the reader[xi] against expecting too much information of this kind, in regard to most of the trades practised in very ancient times. Many of the most useful inventions were effected, before any permanent means of record had been devised; and, in after ages, among the Greeks and Romans, the useful arts were practised almost exclusively by slaves. The latter circumstance led to their general neglect by the writers among these distinguished people.
It might be a good idea to warn the reader[xi] not to expect too much information about most of the trades that were practiced in ancient times. Many of the most useful inventions were made before any permanent recording methods were developed; and later, among the Greeks and Romans, the useful arts were mainly carried out by slaves. This situation resulted in their overall neglect by the writers of these notable cultures.
The information which may be obtained from this work, especially when accompanied by the inspection of the operations which it describes, may be daily applied to some useful purpose. It will be particularly valuable in furnishing subjects for conversation, and in preventing the mind from continuing in, or from sinking into, a state of indifference in regard to the busy scenes of this world.
The information that you can get from this work, especially when paired with checking out the operations it talks about, can be used for something useful every day. It will be especially helpful for sparking conversations and keeping the mind from becoming indifferent or slipping into apathy about the bustling events of this world.
In the composition of this work, all puerile expressions have been avoided, not only because they would be offensive to adult individuals of taste, but because they are at least useless, if not positively injurious, to younger persons. What parent of reflection would suffer his children to peruse a book calculated to induce or confirm a manner of speaking or writing, which he would not have them use after having arrived to manhood? Every sentence may be rendered perfectly plain by appropriate explanations and illustrations.
In creating this work, all immature expressions have been avoided, not just because they would offend discerning adults, but because they are at least pointless, if not actually harmful, to younger people. What thoughtful parent would allow their children to read a book that encourages a way of speaking or writing that they wouldn’t want them to use when they grow up? Every sentence can be made completely clear with suitable explanations and examples.
No formal classification of the professions and trades has been adopted, although those articles which treat of kindred subjects have been placed near each other, and in that order which seemed to be the most natural. The paragraphs of the several articles have been numbered for the especial accommodation of classes in schools, but this particular feature of the work need meet with no serious objection from miscellaneous readers, as it has no other effect, in reference to its use by them, than to give it the aspect of a school-book.
No formal classification of professions and trades has been established, although related topics have been grouped together in an order that feels most natural. The sections of the different articles have been numbered for the convenience of school classes, but this specific feature shouldn't cause any major issues for casual readers since it only makes the work look like a textbook.
While writing the articles on the different subjects, the author consulted several works which embraced[xii] the arts and sciences generally, as well as many which were more circumscribed in their objects. He, however, relied more upon them for historical facts than for a knowledge of the operations and processes which he had occasion to detail. For this he depended, as far as practicable, upon his own personal researches, although in the employment of appropriate phraseology, he acknowledges his obligations to predecessors.
While writing articles on various topics, the author referred to several works covering[xii] the arts and sciences in general, as well as many that were more focused on specific subjects. He primarily relied on these sources for historical facts rather than for understanding the operations and processes he needed to describe. For that, he relied as much as possible on his own personal research, though he recognizes his debt to past authors for the use of appropriate language.
With the preceding remarks, the author submits his work to the public, in the confident expectation, that the subjects which it embraces, that the care which has been taken in its composition, and that the skill of the artists employed in its embellishment, will secure to it an abundant and liberal patronage.
With these remarks, the author presents his work to the public, confidently expecting that the topics it covers, the attention to detail in its creation, and the talent of the artists who contributed to its design will earn it generous support and patronage.

THE AGRICULTURIST.
1. Agriculture embraces, in its broad application, whatever relates to the cultivation of the fields, with the view of producing food for man and those animals which he may have brought into a state of domestication.
1. Agriculture covers, in its wide scope, everything related to growing crops, aimed at producing food for people and the animals that have been domesticated.
2. If we carry our observations so far back as to reach the antediluvian history of the earth, we shall find, from the authority of Scripture, that the cultivation of the soil was the first employment of man, after his expulsion from the garden of Eden, when he was commanded to till the ground from which he had been taken. We shall also learn from the same source of information, that "Cain was a husbandman," and that "Abel was a keeper of sheep." Hence it may be inferred, that Adam instructed his sons[14] in the art of husbandry; and that they, in turn, communicated the knowledge to their posterity, together with the superadded information which had resulted from their own experience. Improvement in this art was probably thenceforth progressive, until the overwhelming catastrophe of the flood.
2. If we trace our observations back to the ancient history of the earth, we'll find from Scripture that farming was the first job of humans after they were expelled from the Garden of Eden, where they were told to work the ground they came from. We also learn from the same source that "Cain was a farmer," and "Abel was a shepherd." Therefore, we can infer that Adam taught his sons[14] the skills of farming; and they, in turn, passed that knowledge on to their descendants, along with the extra insights they gained from their own experiences. Improvements in this craft likely continued until the great disaster of the flood.
3. After the waters had retired from the face of the earth, Noah resorted to husbandry, as the certain means of procuring the necessaries and comforts of life. The art of cultivating the soil was uninterruptedly preserved in many branches of the great family of Noah; but, in others, it was at length entirely lost. In the latter case, the people, having sunk into a state of barbarism, depended for subsistence on the natural productions of the earth, and on such animals as they could contrive to capture by hunting and fishing. Many of these degenerate tribes did not emerge from this condition for several succeeding ages; while others have not done so to the present day.
3. After the waters receded from the earth, Noah took up farming as a sure way to get the basics and comforts of life. The skill of cultivating the land was continuously passed down through many branches of Noah's family; however, in others, it was eventually completely lost. In those cases, the people fell into a primitive state and relied on the natural resources of the earth and on animals they could manage to catch through hunting and fishing. Many of these declining tribes remained in this condition for several ages; while others still haven't emerged from it today.
4. Notwithstanding the great antiquity of agriculture, the husbandmen, for several centuries immediately succeeding the deluge, seem to have been but little acquainted with any proper method of restoring fertility to exhausted soils; for we find them frequently changing their residence, as their flocks and herds required fresh pasturage, or as their tillage land became unproductive. As men, however, became more numerous, and as their flocks increased, this practice became inconvenient and, in some cases, impracticable. They were, therefore, compelled, by degrees, to confine their flocks and herds, and their farming operations, to lands of more narrow and specified limits.
4. Even though agriculture is very old, farmers for several centuries after the flood seemed to have little knowledge of how to restore fertility to worn-out soils. They often moved their homes as their livestock needed fresh pasture or as their farmland became less productive. However, as the population grew and their herds expanded, this way of life became inconvenient and sometimes impossible. They had to gradually limit their livestock and farming activities to smaller, defined areas of land.
5. The Chaldeans were probably the people who first adopted the important measure of retaining perpetual possession of the soil which they had cultivated; and, consequently, were among the first who became[15] skilful in agriculture. But all the great nations of antiquity held this art in the highest estimation, and usually attributed its invention to superhuman agency. The Egyptians even worshipped the image of the ox in gratitude for the services of the living animal in the labours of the field.
5. The Chaldeans were likely the first people to take the important step of keeping permanent ownership of the land they farmed, and as a result, they became some of the first to be skilled in agriculture. However, all the great ancient civilizations valued this art highly and often credited its invention to divine intervention. The Egyptians even worshipped the image of the ox in appreciation for the help the living animal provided in their farming work.
6. The reader of ancient history can form some idea of the extent to which this art was cultivated in those days, from the warlike operations of different nations; for, from no other source, could the great armies which were then brought into the field, have been supplied with the necessary provisions. The Greeks and the Romans, who were more celebrated than any other people for their military enterprise, were also most attentive to the proper cultivation of the soil; and many of their distinguished men, especially among the Romans, were practical husbandmen.
6. A reader of ancient history can get a sense of how much this art was practiced back then by looking at the military activities of different nations; because it's from no other source that the large armies assembled in the field could have received the essential supplies. The Greeks and the Romans, who were more renowned than any other people for their military ventures, also paid careful attention to farming the land; and many of their notable figures, particularly among the Romans, were hands-on farmers.
7. Nor was agriculture neglected by the learned men of antiquity. Several works on this subject, by Greek and Latin authors, have descended to our times; and the correctness of many of the principles which they inculcate, has been confirmed by modern experience.
7. The educated people of ancient times didn't overlook agriculture. Several works on this topic, written by Greek and Latin authors, have survived to this day; and the accuracy of many of the principles they teach has been supported by modern experience.
8. Throughout the extensive empire of Rome, agriculture maintained a respectable standing, until the commencement of those formidable invasions of the northern hordes, which, finally, nearly extinguished the arts and sciences in every part of Europe. During the long period of anarchy which succeeded the settlement of these barbarians in their newly-acquired possessions, pasturage was, in most cases, preferred to tillage, as being better suited to their state of civilization, and as affording facilities of removal, in cases of alarm from invading enemies. But, when permanent governments had been again established, and when the nations enjoyed comparative peace, the regular cultivation of the soil once more revived.[16]
8. Across the vast Roman Empire, agriculture held a respectable position until the onset of the major invasions from northern tribes, which nearly wiped out the arts and sciences throughout Europe. During the long period of chaos that followed the settlement of these barbarians in their newly-acquired lands, raising livestock was often favored over farming, as it suited their level of civilization better and allowed for easier relocation in case of threats from invading enemies. However, once stable governments were reestablished and the nations experienced a relative peace, regular farming practices began to flourish again.[16]
9. The art of husbandry was at a low ebb in England, until the fourteenth century, when it began to be practised with considerable success in the midland and south-western parts of the island; yet, it does not seem to have been cultivated as a science, until the latter end of the sixteenth century. The first book on husbandry, printed and published in the English language, appeared in 1534. It was written by Sir A. Fitzherbert, a judge of the Common Pleas, who had studied the laws of vegetation, and the nature of soils, with philosophical accuracy.
9. The practice of farming was pretty weak in England until the fourteenth century when it started to be done with notable success in the midlands and south-western parts of the country; however, it doesn't seem to have been approached as a science until the late sixteenth century. The first book on farming, printed and published in English, came out in 1534. It was written by Sir A. Fitzherbert, a judge of the Common Pleas, who had studied plant growth and soil types with great detail.
10. Very little improvement was made on the theory of this author, for upwards of a hundred years, when Sir Hugh Platt discovered and brought into use several kinds of substances for fertilizing and restoring exhausted soils.
10. Very little progress was made on this author's theory for over a hundred years, until Sir Hugh Platt discovered and started using several types of substances for fertilizing and rejuvenating depleted soils.
11. Agriculture again received a new impulse, about the middle of the eighteenth century; and, in 1793, a Board of Agriculture was established by an act of Parliament, at the suggestion of Sir John Sinclair, who was elected its first president. Through the influence of this board, a great number of agricultural societies have been formed in the kingdom, and much valuable information on rural economy has been communicated to the public, through the medium of a voluminous periodical under its superintendence.
11. Agriculture got a fresh boost around the mid-eighteenth century, and in 1793, a Board of Agriculture was created by an act of Parliament, thanks to Sir John Sinclair's suggestion, who was chosen as its first president. Because of this board's influence, many agricultural societies have been established across the country, and a wealth of valuable information on farming practices has been shared with the public through a lengthy publication overseen by the board.
12. After the example of Great Britain, agricultural societies have been formed, and periodical journals published, in various parts of the continent of Europe, as well as in the United States. The principal publications devoted to this subject in this country, are the American Farmer, at Baltimore; the New-England Farmer, at Boston; and the Cultivator, at Albany.
12. Following the example set by Great Britain, agricultural societies have been established and regular journals have been published in various parts of Europe, as well as in the United States. The main publications focused on this topic in the U.S. are the American Farmer in Baltimore, the New-England Farmer in Boston, and the Cultivator in Albany.
13. The modern improvements in husbandry consist, principally, in the proper application of manures,[17] in the mixture of different kinds of earths, in the use of plaster and lime, in the rotation of crops, in adapting the crop to the soil, in the introduction of new kinds of grain, roots, grasses, and fruits, as well as in improvements in the breeds of domestic animals, and in the implements with which the various operations of the art are performed.
13. The latest advancements in agriculture mainly involve the effective use of fertilizers,[17] mixing different types of soils, using gypsum and lime, rotating crops, matching crops to the soil, introducing new varieties of grains, root vegetables, grasses, and fruits, as well as improving the breeds of farm animals and the tools used for various farming tasks.
14. For many of the improved processes which relate to the amelioration of the soil, we are indebted to chemistry. Before this science was brought to the aid of the art, the cultivators of the soil were chiefly guided by the precept and example of their predecessors, which were often inapplicable. By the aid of chemical analysis, it is easy to discover the constituent parts of different soils; and, when this has been done, there is but little difficulty in determining the best mode of improving them, or in applying the most suitable crops.
14. Many of the advancements in processes related to improving soil are thanks to chemistry. Before this science supported agriculture, farmers mostly followed the advice and practices of those before them, which often didn’t apply well. With chemical analysis, we can easily identify the components of various soils, and once that's done, it's relatively simple to figure out the best ways to enhance them or to choose the most appropriate crops.
15. In the large extent of territory embraced within the United States, there is great variation of soil and climate; but, in each state, or district, the attention of the cultivators is directed to the production of those articles which, under the circumstances, promise to be the most profitable. In the northern portions of our country, the cultivators of the soil are called farmers. They direct their attention chiefly to the production of wheat, rye, corn, oats, barley, peas, beans, potatoes, pumpkins, and flax, together with grasses and fruits of various kinds. The same class of men, in the Southern states, are usually denominated planters, who confine themselves principally to tobacco, rice, cotton, sugar-cane, or hemp. In some parts of that portion of our country, however, rye, wheat, oats, and sweet potatoes, are extensively cultivated; and, in almost every part, corn is a favourite article.
15. In the vast territory of the United States, there’s a wide range of soil and climate; however, in each state or region, farmers focus on producing the crops that are likely to be the most profitable given the local conditions. In the northern parts of the country, those who farm are called farmers. They primarily grow wheat, rye, corn, oats, barley, peas, beans, potatoes, pumpkins, and flax, along with various grasses and fruits. In the Southern states, this same group is typically referred to as planters, who mostly grow tobacco, rice, cotton, sugar cane, or hemp. In some areas of the South, though, rye, wheat, oats, and sweet potatoes are also widely cultivated; and almost everywhere, corn is a popular crop.
16. The process of cultivating most of the productions[18] which have been mentioned, is nearly the same. In general, with the occasional exception of new lands, the plough is used to prepare the ground for the reception of the seed. Wheat, rye, barley, oats, peas, and the seeds of hemp and flax, are scattered with the hand, and covered in the earth with the harrow. In Great Britain, such seeds are sown in drills; and this method is thought to be better than ours, as it admits of the use of the hoe, while the vegetable is growing.
16. The process of growing most of the products[18] that have been mentioned is pretty much the same. Generally, except for some new lands, a plow is used to prepare the soil for planting the seeds. Wheat, rye, barley, oats, peas, and the seeds of hemp and flax are scattered by hand and then covered with earth using a harrow. In Great Britain, these seeds are sown in rows, and this method is considered better than ours because it allows for the use of a hoe while the plants are growing.
17. Corn, beans, potatoes, and pumpkins, are covered in the earth with the hoe. The ground is ploughed several times during the summer, to make it loose, and to keep down the weeds. The hoe is also used in accomplishing the same objects, and in depositing fresh earth around the growing vegetable.
17. Corn, beans, potatoes, and pumpkins are covered with soil using a hoe. The ground is tilled multiple times over the summer to keep it loose and manage the weeds. The hoe is also used for these purposes and to add fresh soil around the growing vegetables.
18. When ripe, wheat, barley, oats, and peas, are cut down with the sickle, cradle, or scythe; while hemp and flax are pulled up by the roots. The seeds are separated from the other parts of the plants with the flail, or by means of horses or oxen driven round upon them. Of late, threshing machines are used to effect the same object. Chaff, and extraneous matter generally, are separated from the grain, or seeds, by means of a fanning-mill, or with a large fan made of the twigs of the willow. The same thing was formerly, and is yet sometimes, effected by the aid of a current of air.
18. When ripe, wheat, barley, oats, and peas are cut down with a sickle, cradle, or scythe, while hemp and flax are pulled up by the roots. The seeds are separated from the other parts of the plants using a flail, or by having horses or oxen driven over them. Recently, threshing machines are used to achieve the same result. Chaff and other unwanted materials are separated from the grain or seeds with a fanning mill, or with a large fan made from willow twigs. This was previously done, and still sometimes is, by using a current of air.
19. When the corn, or maize, has become ripe, the ears, with the husks, and sometimes the stalks, are deposited in large heaps. To assist in stripping the husks from the ears, it is customary to call together the neighbours. In such cases, the owner of the corn provides for them a supper, together with some means of merriment and good cheer.
19. When the corn, or maize, is ripe, the ears, along with the husks and sometimes the stalks, are gathered into large piles. To help remove the husks from the ears, it's common to invite the neighbors over. In these situations, the corn owner provides them with dinner, along with some entertainment and good times.
20. This custom is most prevalent, where the greater part of the labour is performed by slaves. The blacks, when assembled for a husking match, choose[19] a captain, whose business it is to lead the song, while the rest join in chorus. Sometimes, they divide the corn as nearly as possible into two equal heaps, and apportion the hands accordingly, with a captain to each division. This is done to produce a contest for the most speedy execution of the task. Should the owner of the corn be sparing of his refreshments, his want of generosity is sure to be published in song at every similar frolic in the neighborhood.
20. This practice is most common where most of the work is done by slaves. When the black workers gather for a husking match, they choose[19] a captain whose job is to lead the songs, while everyone else sings along. Sometimes, they divide the corn into two equal piles and assign workers to each, with a captain for each group. This creates a competition to see who can finish the task the fastest. If the corn owner is stingy with refreshments, everyone is sure to sing about their lack of generosity at every similar gathering in the area.
21. Maize, or Indian corn, and potatoes of all kinds, were unknown in the eastern continent, until the discovery of America. Their origin is, therefore, known with certainty; but some of the other productions which have been mentioned, cannot be so satisfactorily traced. This is particularly the case with regard to those which have been extensively cultivated for many centuries.
21. Maize, or Indian corn, and all types of potatoes were unknown on the eastern continent until America was discovered. Their origin is, therefore, clearly established; however, some of the other mentioned crops cannot be traced as clearly. This is especially true for those that have been widely grown for many centuries.
22. The grasses have ever been valuable to man, as affording a supply of food for domestic animals. Many portions of our country are particularly adapted to grazing. Where this is the case, the farmers usually turn their attention to raising live stock, and to making butter and cheese. Grass reserved in meadows, as a supply of food for the winter, is cut at maturity with a scythe, dried in the sun, and stored in barns, or heaped in stacks.
22. Grasses have always been important to people because they provide food for farm animals. Many areas in our country are especially suited for grazing. When that happens, farmers typically focus on raising livestock and producing butter and cheese. Grass that is saved in meadows for winter feed is cut when it's mature with a scythe, dried in the sun, and then stored in barns or piled into stacks.
23. Rice was first cultivated in the eastern parts of Asia, and, from the earliest ages, has been the principal article of food among the Chinese and Hindoos. To this grain may be attributed, in a great measure, the early civilization of those nations; and its adaptation to marshy grounds caused many districts to become populous, which would otherwise have remained irreclaimable and desolate.
23. Rice was first grown in the eastern parts of Asia, and from ancient times, it has been the main food source for the Chinese and Indians. This grain has played a significant role in the early development of these cultures, and its ability to thrive in marshy areas led to the growth of many regions that would otherwise have remained uninhabitable and empty.
24. Rice was long known in the east, before it was introduced into Egypt and Greece, whence it spread over Africa generally, and the southern parts of Europe.[20] It is now cultivated in all the warm parts of the globe, chiefly on grounds subject to periodical inundations. The Chinese obtain two crops a year from the same ground, and cultivate it in this way from generation to generation, without applying any manure, except the stubble of the preceding crop, and the mud deposited from the water overflowing it.
24. Rice was well-known in the East long before it was brought to Egypt and Greece, and from there, it spread across Africa and into southern Europe.[20] It is now grown in all warm regions of the world, mainly on land that experiences seasonal flooding. The Chinese harvest two crops a year from the same field and have been doing this for generations without using any fertilizers, other than the leftover stubble from the previous crop and the mud left behind by the flooding.
25. Soon after the waters of the inundation have retired, a spot is inclosed with an embankment, lightly ploughed and harrowed, and then sown very thickly with the grain. Immediately, a thin sheet of water is brought over it, either by a stream or some hydraulic machinery. When the plants have grown to the height of six or seven inches, they are transplanted in furrows; and again water is brought over them, and kept on, until the crop begins to ripen, when it is withheld.
25. Soon after the floodwaters recede, an area is enclosed with an embankment, lightly plowed and harrowed, and then sown very densely with grain. Immediately, a thin layer of water is applied, either through a stream or some hydraulic equipment. When the plants have grown to about six or seven inches tall, they are transplanted into furrows; and once again, water is applied and maintained until the crop starts to ripen, at which point it is withheld.
26. The crop is cut with a sickle, threshed with a flail, or by the treading of cattle; and the husks, which adhere closely to the kernel, are beaten off in a stone mortar, or by passing the grain through a mill, similar to our corn-mills. The mode of cultivating rice in any part of the world, varies but little from the foregoing process. The point which requires the greatest attention, is keeping the ground properly covered with water.
26. The crop is harvested with a sickle, threshed with a flail, or by having cattle tread on it; and the husks that stick tightly to the kernels are removed in a stone mortar or by grinding the grain through a mill, like our corn mills. The method of growing rice around the world is not very different from this process. The most important thing to focus on is keeping the ground properly covered with water.
27. Rice was introduced into the Carolinas in 1697, where it is now produced in greater perfection than in any other part of the world. The seeds are dropped along, from the small end of a gourd, into drills made with one corner of the hoe. The plants, when partly grown, are not transferred to another place, as in Asia, but are suffered to grow and ripen in the original drills. The crop is secured like wheat, and the husks are forced from the grain by a machine, which leaves the kernels more perfect than the methods adopted in other countries.[21]
27. Rice was brought to the Carolinas in 1697, where it’s now grown more successfully than anywhere else in the world. The seeds are dropped in rows from the small end of a gourd into furrows made with the corner of a hoe. Unlike in Asia, the plants aren’t moved to another location when they’re partly grown; instead, they’re allowed to grow and mature in the original rows. The harvest is gathered like wheat, and a machine removes the husks from the grain, resulting in kernels that are more intact than those processed in other countries.[21]
28. Cotton is cultivated in the East and West Indies, North and South America, Egypt, and in many other parts of the world, where the climate is sufficiently warm for the purpose. There are several species of this plant; of which three kinds are cultivated in the southern states of the Union—the nankeen cotton, the green seed cotton, and the black seed, or sea island cotton. The first two, which grow in the middle and upland countries, are denominated short staple cotton: the last is cultivated in the lower country, near the sea, and on the islands near the main land, and is of a fine quality, and of a long staple.
28. Cotton is grown in the East and West Indies, North and South America, Egypt, and many other warm regions around the world. There are several types of this plant; of which three kinds are farmed in the southern states of the U.S.—the nankeen cotton, the green seed cotton, and the black seed, or sea island cotton. The first two, found in the midland and upland areas, are referred to as short staple cotton: the last one is grown in the lowlands, near the coast, and on islands close to the mainland, and is of high quality with a long staple.
29. The plants are propagated annually from seeds, which are sown very thickly in ridges made with the plough or hoe. After they have grown to the height of three or four inches, part of them are pulled up, in order that the rest, while coming to maturity, may stand about four inches apart. It is henceforth managed, until fully grown, like Indian corn.
29. The plants are grown every year from seeds, which are sown very densely in ridges created with a plow or hoe. Once they reach a height of about three or four inches, some are pulled up so that the remaining ones, as they mature, can be spaced about four inches apart. From that point on, they are cared for until fully grown just like corn.
30. The cotton is inclosed in pods, which open as fast as their contents become fit to be gathered. In Georgia, about eighty pounds of upland cotton can be gathered by a single hand in a day; but in Alabama and Mississippi, where the plant thrives better, two hundred pounds are frequently collected in the same time.
30. The cotton is contained in pods that open as soon as their contents are ready to be picked. In Georgia, a single person can pick about eighty pounds of upland cotton in a day, but in Alabama and Mississippi, where the plant grows better, it's common to collect two hundred pounds in the same amount of time.
31. The seeds adhere closely to the cotton, when picked from the pods; but they are properly separated by machines called gins; of which there are two kinds,—the roller-gin, and the saw-gin. The essential parts of the former are two cylinders, which are placed nearly in contact with each other. By their revolving motion, the cotton is drawn between them, while the size of the seeds prevents their passage. This machine, being of small size, is worked by hand.
31. The seeds stick closely to the cotton when picked from the pods, but they are effectively separated by machines called gins, which come in two types: the roller-gin and the saw-gin. The main components of the roller-gin are two cylinders that are positioned almost touching each other. As they rotate, the cotton gets pulled between them, while the size of the seeds stops them from passing through. This machine is compact and operated by hand.
32. The saw-gin is much larger, and is moved by animal, steam, or water power. It consists of a receiver,[22] having one side covered with strong wires, placed in a parallel direction about an eighth of an inch apart, and a number of circular saws, which revolve on a common axis. The saws pass between these wires, and entangle in their teeth the cotton, which is thereby drawn through the grating, while the seeds, from their size, are forced to remain on the other side.
32. The saw-gin is much larger and is powered by animals, steam, or water. It has a receiver,[22] with one side covered in strong wires, set parallel about an eighth of an inch apart, and several circular saws that rotate on a common axis. The saws move between these wires, catching the cotton in their teeth, which pulls it through the grating, while the seeds, due to their size, are kept on the other side.
33. Before the invention of the saw-gin, the seeds were separated from the upland cottons by hand,—a method so extremely tedious, that their cultivation was attended with but little profit to the planter. This machine was invented in Georgia by Eli Whitney, of Massachusetts. It was undertaken at the request of several planters of the former state, and was there put in operation in 1792.
33. Before the saw-gin was invented, farmers had to separate the seeds from upland cotton by hand, which was such a time-consuming process that it didn’t yield much profit for the planter. This machine was created in Georgia by Eli Whitney from Massachusetts. He developed it at the request of several planters in Georgia, and it started operating there in 1792.
34. In the preceding year, the whole crop of cotton in the United States was only sixty-four bales; but, in 1834, it amounted to 1,000,617. The vast increase in the production of this article has arisen, in part, from the increased demand for it in Europe, and in the Northern states, but, chiefly, from the use of the invaluable machine just mentioned.
34. In the previous year, the entire cotton crop in the United States was just sixty-four bales; however, in 1834, it reached 1,000,617 bales. The huge rise in production of this commodity has come, in part, from the growing demand for it in Europe and the Northern states, but mostly due to the use of the invaluable machine mentioned earlier.
35. Sugar-cane was cultivated by the Chinese, at a very early period, probably two thousand years before it was known in Europe; but sugar, in a candied form, was used in small quantities by the Greeks and Romans in the days of their prosperity. It was probably brought from Bengal, Siam, or some of the East India Islands, as it is supposed, that it grew nowhere else at that time.
35. The Chinese started cultivating sugarcane a very long time ago, likely around two thousand years before it appeared in Europe. However, sugar was used in small amounts in candied form by the Greeks and Romans during their heyday. It likely came from Bengal, Siam, or some of the East India Islands, as it's believed it didn't grow anywhere else back then.
36. In the thirteenth century, soon after the merchants of the West began to traffic in Indian articles of commerce, the plant was introduced into Arabia Felix, and thence into Egypt, Nubia, Ethiopia, and Morocco. The Spaniards obtained it from the Moors, and, in the fifteenth century, introduced it into the[23] Canary Islands. It was brought to America, and to the West India Islands, by the Spaniards and Portuguese. It is now cultivated in the United States, below the thirty-first degree of latitude, and in the warm parts of the globe generally.
36. In the 1300s, shortly after Western merchants started trading Indian goods, the plant was introduced to Arabia Felix and then spread to Egypt, Nubia, Ethiopia, and Morocco. The Spaniards got it from the Moors and, in the 1400s, brought it to the [23] Canary Islands. It was later taken to America and the West Indian Islands by the Spaniards and Portuguese. Today, it's grown in the United States, south of the 31st parallel, and in warm regions around the world.
37. Previous to the year 1466, sugar was known in England chiefly, as a medicine; and, although the sugar-cane was cultivated, at that time, in several places on the Mediterranean, it was not more extensively used on the continent. Now, in extent of cultivation, it ranks next to wheat and rice, and first in maritime commerce.
37. Before the year 1466, sugar was mainly known in England as a medicine; and even though the sugarcane was grown in various spots around the Mediterranean at that time, it wasn’t widely used on the continent. Today, it ranks second in cultivation after wheat and rice, and is the top product in maritime trade.
38. The cultivators of sugar-cane propagate the plant by means of cuttings from the lower end of the stalks, which are planted in the spring or autumn, in drills, or in furrows. The new plants spring from the joints of the cuttings, and are fit to be gathered for use in eight, ten, twelve, or fourteen months. While growing, sugar-cane is managed much like Indian corn.
38. Sugarcane growers propagate the plant using cuttings from the bottom of the stalks, which are planted in the spring or fall, in rows or furrows. New plants grow from the joints of the cuttings and are ready to be harvested in eight, ten, twelve, or fourteen months. While it's growing, sugarcane is tended to much like corn.
39. When ripe, the cane is cut and brought to the sugar-mill, where the juice is expressed between iron or stone cylinders, moved by steam, water, or animal power. The juice thus obtained is evaporated in large boilers to a syrup, which is afterwards removed to coolers, where it is agitated with wooden instruments called stirrers. To accelerate its cooling, it is next poured into casks, and, when yet warm, is conveyed to barrels, placed in an upright position over a cistern, and pierced in the bottom in several places. The holes being partially stopped with canes, the part which still remains in the form of syrup, filters through them into the cistern beneath, while the rest is left in the form of sugar, in the state called muscovado.
39. When the cane is ripe, it’s cut and taken to the sugar mill, where the juice is squeezed out between iron or stone rollers powered by steam, water, or animals. The juice is then boiled until it turns into syrup, which is moved to coolers where it’s mixed with wooden tools called stirrers. To speed up the cooling process, it’s poured into casks, and while it's still warm, it's transferred to barrels standing upright over a tank, with holes drilled in the bottom in several spots. The holes are partly blocked with cane pieces, allowing the syrup to filter through into the tank below, while the remaining substance is left as sugar in a form known as muscovado.
40. This sugar is of a yellow colour, being yet in a crude, or raw state. It is further purified by various[24] processes, such as redissolving it in water, and again boiling it with lime and bullocks' blood, or with animal charcoal, and passing the syrup through several canvas filters.
40. This sugar is yellow because it’s still in a crude or raw state. It’s further refined through various[24] processes, like redissolving it in water, boiling it again with lime and animal blood, or with animal charcoal, and filtering the syrup through several canvas filters.
41. Loaf-sugar is manufactured by pouring the syrup, after it has been purified, and reduced to a certain thickness by evaporation, into unglazed earthen vessels of a conical shape. The cones have a hole at their apex, through which may filter the syrup which separates from the sugar above. Most of the sugar is imported in a raw or crude state, and is afterward refined in the cities in sugar-houses.
41. Loaf sugar is made by pouring purified syrup, which has been thickened through evaporation, into unglazed cone-shaped clay pots. The cones have a hole at the top that allows the syrup to drain away from the sugar above. Most sugar is brought in as raw or unrefined, and then it's processed in sugar factories in the cities.
42. Molasses is far less free from extraneous substances than sugar, as it is nothing more than the drainings from the latter. Rum is distilled from inferior molasses, and other saccharine matter of the cane, which will answer for no other purpose.
42. Molasses has way more impurities than sugar, since it’s just the leftovers from sugar production. Rum is made from lower-quality molasses and other sugary materials from the cane that aren’t good for anything else.
43. Sugar is also manufactured from the sap of the sugar-maple, in considerable quantities, in the northern parts of the United States, and in the Canadas. The sap is obtained by cutting a notch, or boring a hole, in the tree, and applying a spout to conduct it to a receiver, which is either a rude trough, or a cheap vessel made by a cooper. This operation is performed late in the winter, or early in the spring, when the weather is freezing at night, and thawing in the day.
43. Sugar is also produced from the sap of the sugar maple in large amounts in the northern parts of the United States and Canada. The sap is collected by cutting a notch or boring a hole in the tree and placing a spout to direct it into a container, which can be a simple trough or an inexpensive vessel made by a cooper. This process is done late in winter or early in spring when the nights are freezing and the days are warming up.
44. The liquid in which the saccharine matter is suspended, is evaporated by heat, as in the case of the juice of the cane. During the process of evaporation, slices of pork are kept in the kettle, to prevent the sap or syrup from boiling over.
44. The liquid that holds the sugary substance is evaporated using heat, similar to how cane juice is processed. While evaporation is happening, slices of pork are placed in the kettle to stop the sap or syrup from overflowing.
45. When a sufficient quantity of syrup, of a certain thickness, has been obtained, it is passed through a strainer, and, having been again placed over the fire, it is clarified with eggs and milk, the scum, as it rises, being carefully removed with a skimmer.[25] When sufficiently reduced, it is usually poured into tin pans, or basins, in which, as it cools, it consolidates into hard cakes of sugar.
45. When you've got enough syrup that's a certain thickness, you strain it and then put it back over the heat. It's clarified with eggs and milk, and the foam that rises is carefully skimmed off. [25] Once it's reduced enough, it's typically poured into tin pans or basins, where it hardens into solid sugar cakes as it cools.
46. Most of the lands in a state of nature, are covered with forest trees. This is especially the case in North America. When this division of our continent was first visited by Europeans, it was nearly one vast wilderness, throughout its entire extent; and even now, after a lapse of three centuries, a great portion of it remains in the same condition. The industrious settlers, however, are rapidly clearing away the natural encumbrances of the soil; and, before a similar period shall have passed away, we may expect, that civilized men will have occupied every portion of this vast territory, which may be worthy of cultivation.
46. Most of the land in its natural state is covered with trees. This is especially true in North America. When Europeans first visited this part of the continent, it was mostly just a huge wilderness everywhere; and even now, after three centuries, a large part of it is still the same. However, hardworking settlers are quickly clearing away the natural obstacles on the land, and before another similar period passes, we can expect that civilized people will have taken over every part of this vast territory that is fit for farming.
47. The mode of clearing land, as it is termed, varies in different parts of the United States. In Pennsylvania, and in neighborhoods settled by people from that state, the large trees are deadened by girdling them, and the small ones, together with the underbrush, are felled and burned. This mode is very objectionable, for the reason, that the limbs on the standing trees, when they have become rotten, sometimes peril the lives of persons and animals underneath. It seems, however, that those who pursue this method, prefer risking life in this way to wearing it out in wielding the axe, and in rolling logs.
47. The way of clearing land, as it's called, varies in different parts of the United States. In Pennsylvania, and in areas settled by people from that state, the large trees are killed by girdling them, while the smaller ones and the underbrush are cut down and burned. This method is quite problematic because the limbs of standing trees, once they decay, can pose a danger to people and animals below. However, it seems that those who use this technique choose to risk lives this way rather than wear themselves out swinging an axe and rolling logs.
48. A very different plan is pursued by settlers from New-England. The underbrush is first cut down, and piled in heaps. The large trees are then felled, to serve as foundations for log-heaps; and the smaller ones are cut so as to fall as nearly parallel to these as practicable. The smaller trees, as well as the limbs of the larger ones, are cut into lengths of twelve or fifteen feet.
48. A completely different approach is taken by settlers from New England. They start by clearing the underbrush and piling it into heaps. Next, they cut down the larger trees to create bases for log piles, and the smaller ones are cut to fall as close to parallel with these as possible. The smaller trees, along with the branches of the larger trees, are cut into lengths of about twelve to fifteen feet.
49. At a proper season of the year, when the brush[26] has become dry enough, fire is applied, which consumes much of the small stuff. The logs are next hauled together with oxen or horses, and rolled into heaps with handspikes. The small stuff which has escaped the first burning, is thrown upon the heaps, and, fire being applied, the whole is consumed together.
49. At the right time of year, when the brush[26] is dry enough, fire is set, burning away a lot of the small debris. Next, the logs are pulled together using oxen or horses and stacked into piles with handspikes. Any remaining small debris that didn't burn the first time is added to the piles, and once fire is applied, everything is burned together.
50. In the Northern, Middle, and Western states, where a great proportion of the timber is beech, maple, and elm, great quantities of ashes are obtained in this mode of clearing land. From these ashes are extracted the pot and pearl ashes of commerce, which have been, and which still are, among the principal exports of the United States.
50. In the Northern, Middle, and Western states, where a large amount of the timber consists of beech, maple, and elm, a significant quantity of ashes is produced through this method of clearing land. From these ashes, commercial pot and pearl ashes are extracted, which have been, and continue to be, among the main exports of the United States.
51. The usual process of making potash is as follows: the crude ashes are put into large tubs, or leeches, with a small quantity of salt and lime. The strength of this mixture is extracted by pouring upon it hot water, which passes through it into a reservoir. The water thus saturated is called black ley, which is evaporated in large kettles. The residuum is called black salts, which are converted into potash by applying to the kettle an intense heat.
51. The typical way of making potash is as follows: the raw ashes are placed in large tubs, or leeches, along with a small amount of salt and lime. The potency of this mixture is drawn out by pouring hot water over it, which seeps through into a container below. The resulting water, now infused with the mixture, is known as black ley and is evaporated in large kettles. The leftover substance is called black salts, which are turned into potash by applying a high heat to the kettle.
52. The process of making pearlash is the same, until the ley has been reduced to black salts, except that no lime or salt is used. The salts are baked in large ovens, heated by a blazing fire, which proceeds from an arch below. Having been thus scorched, the salts are dissolved in hot water. The solution is allowed to be at rest, until all extraneous substances have settled to the bottom, when it is drawn off and evaporated as before. The residuum is called white salts. Another baking, like the former, completes the process.
52. The process of making pearlash is the same, until the ley has been reduced to black salts, except that no lime or salt is used. The salts are baked in large ovens, heated by a blazing fire from an arch below. After being scorched, the salts are dissolved in hot water. The solution is left to sit until all impurities settle at the bottom, then it is poured off and evaporated as before. The residue is called white salts. Another baking, similar to the previous one, finishes the process.
53. Very few of the settlers have an ashery, as it is called, in which the whole process of making either pot or pearl ash is performed. They usually sell the[27] black salts to the store-keepers in their neighborhood, who complete the process of the manufacture.
53. Very few of the settlers have an ashery, where the entire process of making either pot or pearl ash takes place. They usually sell the[27] black salts to the store owners in their area, who finish the manufacturing process.
54. The trade in ashes is often profitable to the settlers; some of them even pay, in this way, the whole expense of clearing their land. Pot and pearl ashes are packed in strong barrels, and sent to the cities, where, previous to sale, they are inspected, and branded according to their quality.
54. The trade in ashes is often profitable for the settlers; some even cover the entire cost of clearing their land this way. Potash and pearl ash are packed in sturdy barrels and shipped to the cities, where they are inspected and labeled based on their quality before being sold.

THE HORTICULTURIST.
1. The Creator of the Universe, having formed man from the dust of the ground, provided a magnificent garden for his residence, and commanded him "to dress it and to keep it:" but, having transgressed the commandment of his lawful Sovereign, he was driven from this delightful paradise, thenceforth to gain a subsistence from the earth at large, which had been cursed with barrenness, thorns, thistles, and briars.
1. The Creator of the Universe, after making man from the dust of the ground, set up a beautiful garden for him to live in and instructed him "to take care of it and maintain it." However, after breaking the command of his rightful Sovereign, he was expelled from this wonderful paradise and had to earn a living from the broader earth, which was now cursed with infertility, thorns, thistles, and briars.
2. Scripture does not inform us, that Adam turned his attention to gardening; nor have we any means of determining the state of this art, in the centuries previous to the flood; but it is highly probable, that it had arrived to considerable perfection, before the advent of this destructive visitation from Heaven.[29]
2. The Scriptures don't tell us that Adam took up gardening, and we have no way to know the status of this skill in the centuries leading up to the flood. However, it's quite likely that it had reached a significant level of development before this catastrophic event from Heaven.[29]
3. Gardens, for useful purposes, were probably made, soon after the waters had subsided; and the statement in Scripture, that "Noah planted a vineyard," may, perhaps, be regarded as evidence sufficient to establish it as a fact. If this were the case, the art, doubtless, continued progressive among those descendants of Noah, who did not sink into a state of barbarism, after the confusion of tongues.
3. Gardens were likely created for practical reasons soon after the waters receded, and the biblical account that "Noah planted a vineyard" might be seen as strong evidence to support this. If that’s true, the practice certainly continued to evolve among Noah's descendants who didn’t fall into a state of savagery after the confusion of languages.
4. Among savage nations, one of the first indications of advancement towards a state of civilization, is the cultivation of a little spot of ground for raising vegetables; and the degree of refinement among the inhabitants of any country, may be determined, with tolerable certainty, by the taste and skill exhibited in their gardens.
4. In primitive societies, one of the first signs of progress towards civilization is the cultivation of a small area of land for growing vegetables. The level of sophistication among the people of any country can be fairly accurately gauged by the taste and skill shown in their gardens.
5. Ornamental gardening is never attended to, in any country, until the arts in general have advanced to a considerable degree of perfection; and it uniformly declines with other fine or ornamental arts. Accordingly, we do not read of splendid gardens among the Babylonians, Egyptians, Jews, Greeks, Romans, and other nations of antiquity, until they had reached an exalted state of refinement; and when these nations descended from this condition, or were overthrown by barbarians, this art declined or disappeared.
5. Ornamental gardening isn't taken seriously in any country until the arts have significantly progressed. It usually fades away alongside other fine or decorative arts. Therefore, we don't find descriptions of magnificent gardens among the Babylonians, Egyptians, Jews, Greeks, Romans, and other ancient nations until they achieved a high level of sophistication; when these nations fell from this state or were conquered by barbarian groups, this art diminished or vanished.
6. During the period of mental darkness, which prevailed between the eighth and thirteenth centuries, the practice of ornamental gardening had fallen into such general disuse, that it was confined exclusively to the monks. After this period, it began again to spread among the people generally. It revived in Italy, Germany, Holland, and France, long before any attention was paid to it in England.
6. During the dark ages between the eighth and thirteenth centuries, ornamental gardening had become so uncommon that it was mostly practiced by monks. After this time, it started to spread among the general population again. It saw a revival in Italy, Germany, Holland, and France long before anyone in England took notice of it.
7. In the latter country, but few culinary vegetables were consumed before the beginning of the sixteenth century, and most of these were brought from[30] Holland; nor was gardening introduced there, as a source of profit, until about one hundred years after that period. Peaches, pears, plums, nectarines, apricots, grapes, cherries, strawberries, and melons, were luxuries but little enjoyed in England, until near the middle of the seventeenth century. The first hot and ice houses known on the island, were built by Charles II., who ascended the British throne in 1660, and soon after introduced French gardening at Hampton Court, Carlton, and Marlborough.
7. In that country, very few vegetables were eaten before the early sixteenth century, and most of these were imported from[30] Holland; gardening for profit didn’t really take off there until about a hundred years later. Fruits like peaches, pears, plums, nectarines, apricots, grapes, cherries, strawberries, and melons were considered luxuries and were not widely enjoyed in England until around the mid-seventeenth century. The first hot and ice houses recorded on the island were constructed by Charles II, who became king in 1660 and soon after brought French gardening styles to Hampton Court, Carlton, and Marlborough.
8. About the beginning of the eighteenth century, this art attracted the attention of some of the first characters in Great Britain, who gave it a new impulse in that country. But the style which they imitated was objectionable, inasmuch as the mode of laying out the gardens, and of planting and trimming the trees, was too formal and fantastical.
8. Around the early eighteenth century, this art caught the interest of some prominent figures in Great Britain, who revitalized it in that country. However, the style they were imitating was problematic because the way they designed the gardens and arranged and shaped the trees was too rigid and fanciful.
9. Several eminent writers, among whom were Pope and Addison, ridiculed this Dutch mode of gardening, as it was called, and endeavoured to introduce another, more consistent with genuine taste. Their views were, at length, seconded by practical horticulturists; and those principles of the art which they advocated, were adopted in every part of Great Britain. The English mode has been followed and emulated by the refined nations of the Eastern continent and by many opulent individuals in the United States.
9. Several well-known writers, including Pope and Addison, mocked this Dutch style of gardening, as it was called, and tried to promote a style that was more in line with true taste. Eventually, their ideas were supported by practical gardeners, and the principles of the art they championed were embraced across Great Britain. The English style has been adopted and admired by cultured nations in the East and by many wealthy people in the United States.
10. Since the beginning of the present century horticultural societies have been formed in every kingdom of Europe. In Great Britain alone, there are no less than fifty; and, it is satisfactory to add, that there are also several of these institutions in the United States. The objects of the persons who compose these societies are, to collect and disseminate information on this interesting art, especially in regard to the introduction of new and valuable articles of cultivation.[31]
10. Since the start of this century, gardening societies have been established in every country across Europe. In Great Britain alone, there are at least fifty; and I'm pleased to say that there are also several of these organizations in the United States. The members of these societies aim to gather and share information about this fascinating art, particularly concerning the introduction of new and valuable crops.[31]
11. The authors who have written upon scientific and practical gardening, at different periods, and in different countries, are very numerous. Among the ancient Greek writers, were Hesiod, Theophrastus, Xenophon, and Ælian. Among the Latins, Varo was the first; to whom succeeded, Cato, Pliny the elder, Columella, and Palladius.
11. There are many authors who have written about scientific and practical gardening at various times and in different countries. Some of the ancient Greek writers include Hesiod, Theophrastus, Xenophon, and Ælian. Among the Roman writers, Varo was the first, followed by Cato, Pliny the Elder, Columella, and Palladius.
12. Since the revival of literature, horticulture, in common with agriculture, has shared largely in the labours of the learned; and many works, on this important branch of rural economy, have been published in every language of Europe. But the publications on this subject, which attract the greatest attention, are the periodicals under the superintendence of the great horticultural societies. Those of London and Paris, are particularly distinguished.
12. Since the revival of literature, horticulture, just like agriculture, has greatly benefited from the efforts of scholars, and many works on this important area of rural economy have been published in every European language. However, the publications on this topic that draw the most interest are the periodicals overseen by major horticultural societies. The ones from London and Paris stand out in particular.
13. It is impossible to draw a distinct line between horticulture and agriculture; since so many articles of cultivation are common to both, and since a well-regulated farm approaches very nearly to a garden.
13. It’s impossible to clearly separate horticulture from agriculture because many crops are shared between the two, and a well-managed farm is very similar to a garden.
14. The divisions of a complete garden, usually adopted by writers on this subject, are the following: 1st. the culinary garden; 2d. the flower garden; 3d. the orchard, embracing different kinds of fruits; 4th. the vineyard; 5th. the seminary, for raising seeds; 6th. the nursery, for raising trees to be transplanted; 7th. the botanical garden, for raising various kinds of plants; 8th. the arboretum of ornamental trees; and, 9th. the picturesque, or landscape garden. To become skilful in the management of even one or two of these branches, requires much attention; but to become proficient in all, would require years of the closest application.
14. The typical divisions of a complete garden, often outlined by writers on this topic, are as follows: 1st. the vegetable garden; 2nd. the flower garden; 3rd. the orchard, which includes various types of fruits; 4th. the vineyard; 5th. the seed nursery, for growing seeds; 6th. the tree nursery, for cultivating trees to be transplanted; 7th. the botanical garden, for growing a variety of plants; 8th. the arboretum of ornamental trees; and, 9th. the scenic or landscape garden. Mastering even one or two of these areas requires a lot of focus; however, mastering all of them would take years of dedicated effort.
15. In Europe, the professed gardeners constitute a large class of the population. They are employed either in their own gardens, or in those of the wealthy, who engage them by the day or year. There are[32] many in this country who devote their attention to this business; but they are chiefly from the other side of the Atlantic. In our Southern states, the rich assign one of their slaves to the garden.
15. In Europe, professional gardeners make up a significant portion of the population. They work either in their own gardens or in the gardens of the wealthy, who hire them by the day or year. There are[32] many people in this country who focus on this work, but most are from across the Atlantic. In the Southern states, the affluent assign one of their slaves to manage the garden.
16. In the United States, almost every family in the country, and in the villages, has its garden for the production of vegetables, in which are also usually reared, a few flowers, ornamental shrubs, and fruit-trees: but horticulture, as a science, is studied and practised here by very few, especially that branch of it called picturesque, or landscape. To produce a pleasing effect, in a garden of this kind, from twenty to one hundred acres are necessary, according to the manner in which the ground may be situated. In an area of that extent, every branch of this pleasing art can be advantageously embraced.
16. In the United States, almost every family across the country, including those in rural areas, has a garden for growing vegetables, which often also has a few flowers, decorative bushes, and fruit trees. However, very few people study or practice horticulture as a science here, especially the part that's focused on aesthetics or landscaping. To create an appealing effect in this type of garden, you need between twenty to one hundred acres, depending on the layout of the land. With that much space, every aspect of this enjoyable art can be effectively incorporated.
17. Delicate exotic plants, which will not bear exposure to the open air during the winter, are preserved from the effects of the cold in hot or green houses, which may be warmed by artificial heat. A hot-house is exhibited in the representation of a garden, at the head of this article. It is composed chiefly of window-glass set in sashes of wood. A green-house is usually larger; and is designed for the preservation of those plants requiring less heat.
17. Delicate exotic plants that can't handle the cold winter air are kept safe from freezing temperatures in hot or greenhouses, which can be heated artificially. A hot-house is shown in the illustration of a garden at the start of this article. It's mainly made of window glass framed in wooden sashes. A greenhouse is typically larger and is meant for plants that need less heat to thrive.
18. The vegetables commonly cultivated in gardens for the table, are,—corn, potatoes, tomatoes, peas, beans, squashes, cucumbers, melons, strawberries, raspberries, blackberries, gooseberries, currants, beets, parsnips, carrots, onions, radishes, cabbages, asparagus, lettuce, grapes, and various kinds of fruits. The flowers, ornamental shrubs, and trees, are very numerous, and are becoming more so by accessions from the forests, and from foreign countries.
18. The vegetables usually grown in gardens for eating are corn, potatoes, tomatoes, peas, beans, squash, cucumbers, melons, strawberries, raspberries, blackberries, gooseberries, currants, beets, parsnips, carrots, onions, radishes, cabbages, asparagus, lettuce, grapes, and various types of fruits. The flowers, decorative shrubs, and trees are very numerous and increasing due to contributions from forests and foreign countries.
19. The scientific horticulturist, in laying off his garden, endeavours to unite beauty and utility, locating the flowers, ornamental shrubs, and trees, where[33] they will be most conspicuous, and those vegetables less pleasing to the eye, in more retired situations, yet, in a soil and exposure adapted to their constitution. In improving the soil of his garden, he brings to his aid the science of chemistry, together with the experience of practical men. He is also careful in the choice of his fruit-trees, and in increasing the variety of their products by engrafting, and by inoculation.
19. The modern horticulturist, when designing their garden, aims to combine beauty and practicality by placing flowers, ornamental shrubs, and trees where[33] they will stand out the most, while positioning the less visually appealing vegetables in more secluded areas, yet still in soil and conditions suited to their needs. To enhance the soil in their garden, they utilize chemistry along with the insights of experienced gardeners. They also pay attention to selecting fruit trees and expanding the variety of their yield through grafting and inoculation.

THE MILLER.
1. The Miller belongs to that class of employments which relates to the preparation of food and drinks for man. His business consists, chiefly, in reducing the farinaceous grains to a suitable degree of fineness.
1. The Miller is part of a group of jobs that involves preparing food and drinks for people. His work mainly involves grinding grains into a fine enough texture.
2. The simplest method by which grain can be reduced to meal, or flour, is rubbing or pounding it between two stones; and this was probably the one first practised in all primitive conditions of society, as it is still pursued among some tribes of uncivilized men.
2. The easiest way to turn grain into meal or flour is by rubbing or pounding it between two stones; this was probably the first method used in all early societies, and it's still used by some tribes of uncivilized people.
3. The first machine for comminuting grain, of which we have any knowledge, was a simple hand-mill, composed of a nether stone fixed in a horizontal position, and an upper stone, which was put in motion[35] with the hand by means of a peg. This simple contrivance is still used in India, as well as in some sequestered parts of Scotland, and on many of the plantations in the Southern states of our Union. But, in general, where large quantities of grain are to be ground, it has been entirely superseded by mills not moved by manual power.
3. The first machine for grinding grain that we know of was a simple hand mill, made up of a lower stone set in a horizontal position and an upper stone that was turned by hand using a peg. This basic device is still used in India, as well as in some remote areas of Scotland and on many plantations in the Southern states of the U.S. However, where large amounts of grain need to be ground, it has mostly been replaced by mills powered by other means.[35]
4. The modern corn and flour mill differs from the primitive hand-mill in the size of the stones, in the addition of an apparatus for separating the hulls and bran from the farinaceous part of the grain, and in the power applied for putting it in motion.
4. The modern corn and flour mill is different from the basic hand-mill in the size of the stones, the addition of a mechanism for separating the husks and bran from the starchy part of the grain, and the power used to operate it.
5. The grinding surfaces of the stones have channels, or furrows, cut in them, which proceed obliquely from the centre to the circumference. The furrows are cut slantwise on one side, and perpendicular on the other; so that each of the ridges which they form, has a sharp edge; and, when the upper stone is in motion, these edges pass one another, like the blades of a pair of scissors, and cut the grain the more easily, as it falls upon the furrows.
5. The grinding surfaces of the stones have channels, or grooves, carved into them, running diagonally from the center to the edge. The grooves are angled on one side and straight on the other; this means that each ridge they create has a sharp edge. When the top stone moves, these edges slide past each other, like the blades of scissors, making it easier to cut the grain as it falls onto the grooves.
6. By a careful inspection of the following picture, the whole machinery of a common mill may be understood.
6. By closely examining the following picture, you can understand the entire operation of a typical mill.

A represents the water-wheel; B, the shaft to which is attached the cog-wheel C, which acts on the trundle-head, D; and this, in turn, acts on the moveable stone. The spindle, trundle-head, and upper stone, all rest entirely on the beam, F, which can be elevated or depressed, at pleasure, by a simple apparatus; so that the distance between the stones can be easily regulated, to grind either fine or coarse. The grain about to be submitted to the action of the mill, is thrown into the hopper, H, whence it passes by the shoe, or spout I, through a hole in the upper stone, and then between them both.
A represents the water wheel; B is the shaft connected to the cogwheel C, which interacts with the trundle-head D; and this, in turn, affects the movable stone. The spindle, trundle-head, and upper stone all rest completely on the beam F, which can be raised or lowered as needed using a simple mechanism; this allows for easy adjustment of the distance between the stones to grind either fine or coarse. The grain meant for milling is thrown into the hopper H, from where it passes through the shoe or spout I, through a hole in the upper stone, and then between both stones.
7. The upper stone is a little convex, and the other a little concave. There is a little difference, however, between the convexity and the concavity of the two stones: this difference causes the space between them to become less and less towards their edges; and the grain, being admitted between them, is, consequently, ground finer and finer, as it passes out in that direction, in which it is impelled by the centrifugal power of the moving stone.
7. The top stone is slightly rounded outward, while the bottom stone is slightly curved inward. However, there’s a small difference between the outward curve and inward curve of the two stones: this difference means that the gap between them gets smaller and smaller toward the edges; and as the grain gets squeezed between them, it becomes finer and finer as it moves outwards, pushed by the centrifugal force of the rotating stone.
8. If the flour, or meal, is not to be separated from the bran, the simple grinding completes the operation; but, when this separation is to be made, the comminuted grain, as it is thrown out from between the stones, is carried, by little leathern buckets fastened to a strap, to the upper end of an octagonal sieve, placed in an inclined position in a large box. The coarse bran passes out at the lower end of the sieve, or bolt, and the flour, or fine particles of bran, through the bolting-cloth, at different places, according to their fineness. At the head of the bolt, the superfine flour passes; in the middle, the fine flour; and at the lower end, the coarse flour and fine bran; which, when mixed, is called canel, or shorts.
8. If the flour or meal isn’t going to be separated from the bran, then simple grinding finishes the job. However, when separation is needed, the ground grain, as it comes out from between the stones, is moved by small leather buckets attached to a strap to the top of an octagonal sieve, which is set at an angle in a large box. The coarse bran falls out at the bottom of the sieve, or bolt, while the flour and finer bran particles go through the bolting cloth at different points based on their fineness. At the top of the bolt, the superfine flour comes out; in the middle, the fine flour; and at the bottom, the coarse flour and fine bran, which when mixed are called canel or shorts.
9. The best material of which mill-stones are made, is the burr-stone, which is brought from France[37] in small pieces, weighing from ten to one hundred pounds. These are cemented together with plaster of Paris, and closely bound around the circumference with hoops made of bar iron. For grinding corn or rye, those made of sienite, or granite rock, are frequently used.
9. The best material for making millstones is burr stone, which is imported from France[37] in small pieces that weigh between ten and one hundred pounds. These pieces are bonded together with plaster of Paris and tightly secured around the edges with iron hoops. For grinding corn or rye, stones made from sienite or granite are commonly used.
10. A mill, exclusively employed in grinding grain, consumed by the inhabitants of the neighborhood, is called a grist or custom mill; and a portion of the grist is allowed to the miller, in payment for his services. The proportion is regulated by law; and, in our own country, it varies according to the legislation of the different states.
10. A mill that is only used for grinding grain for the local residents is called a grist or custom mill; the miller is allowed to keep a portion of the grain as payment for his services. The amount is set by law and varies based on the regulations of each state in our country.
11. Mills in which flour is manufactured, and packed in barrels for sale, are called merchant mills. Here, the wheat is purchased by the miller, or by the owner of the mill, who relies upon the difference between the original cost of the grain, and the probable amount of its several products, when sold, to remunerate him for the manufacture, and his investments of capital. In Virginia, and, perhaps, in some of the other states, it is a common practice among the farmers, to deliver to the millers their wheat, for which they receive a specified quantity of flour.
11. Mills where flour is made and packaged in barrels for sale are called merchant mills. Here, the miller or the mill owner buys the wheat, counting on the difference between the original cost of the grain and the expected amount of its various products when sold to cover the manufacturing costs and their capital investments. In Virginia, and possibly in some other states, it’s common for farmers to bring their wheat to the millers, receiving a set amount of flour in return.
12. The power most commonly employed to put heavy machinery in operation, is that supplied by water. This is especially the case with regard to mills for grinding grain; but, when this cannot be had, a substitute is found in steam, or animal strength. The wind is also rendered subservient to this purpose. The wind-mill was invented in the time of Augustus Cæsar. During the reign of this emperor, and probably long before, mules and asses were employed by both the Greeks and Romans in turning their mills. The period at which water-mills began to be used cannot be certainly determined. Some writers place it as far back as the Christian era.[38]
12. The most common power source used to operate heavy machinery is water. This is especially true for mills that grind grain; however, when water isn’t available, alternatives like steam or animal power are used. Wind can also serve this purpose. The windmill was invented during the time of Augustus Caesar. During his reign, and likely long before, both the Greeks and Romans used mules and donkeys to turn their mills. The exact time when water mills started being used is unclear. Some writers suggest it dates back to the Christian era.[38]
13. Wheat flour is one of the staple commodities of the United States, and there are mills for its manufacture in almost every part of the country, where wheat is extensively cultivated; but our most celebrated flour-mills are on the Brandywine Creek, Del., at Rochester, N. Y., and at Richmond, Va.
13. Wheat flour is a staple product in the United States, and there are mills producing it in almost every region where wheat is widely grown; however, our most famous flour mills are located on the Brandywine Creek in Delaware, in Rochester, New York, and in Richmond, Virginia.
14. In our Southern states, hommony is a favorite article of food. It consists of the flinty portions of Indian corn, which have been separated from the hulls and eyes of the grain. To effect this separation, the corn is sometimes ground very coarsely in a mill; but the most usual method is that of pounding it in a mortar.
14. In our Southern states, hominy is a popular food. It consists of the hard bits of corn that have been removed from the husks and kernels. To achieve this separation, the corn is sometimes ground very coarsely in a mill; but the most common method is to pound it in a mortar.
15. The mortar is excavated from a log of hard wood, between twelve and eighteen inches in diameter. The form of the excavation is similar to that of a common iron mortar, except that it is less flat at the bottom, to prevent the corn from being reduced to meal during the operation. The pestle is usually made by confining an iron wedge in the split end of a round stick, by means of an iron ring.
15. The mortar is carved out of a piece of hardwood that's about twelve to eighteen inches in diameter. The shape of the mortar is similar to a standard iron mortar, but it's less flat at the bottom to stop the corn from turning into flour during use. The pestle is typically made by securing an iron wedge in the split end of a round stick using an iron ring.
16. The white flint corn is the kind usually chosen for hommony; although any kind, possessing the requisite solidity, will do. Having been poured into the mortar, it is moistened with hot water, and immediately beaten with the pestle, until the eyes and hulls are forced from the flinty portions of the grain. The part of the corn which has been reduced to meal by the foregoing process, is removed by means of a sieve, and the hulls, by the aid of the wind.
16. The white flint corn is typically the variety selected for hommony, but any type that has the right firmness will work. Once it's poured into the mortar, hot water is added, and it's quickly pounded with a pestle until the eyes and husks separate from the hard parts of the grain. The corn that has been ground into meal is then sifted out using a sieve, while the husks are removed with the help of the wind.
17. Hommony is prepared for the table by boiling it in water for twelve hours with about one fourth of its quantity of white beans, and some fat bacon. It is eaten while yet warm, with milk or butter; or, if suffered to get cold, is again warmed with lard or some other fat substance, before it is brought to the table.
17. Hommony is made for the table by boiling it in water for twelve hours with about a quarter of its amount of white beans and some fatty bacon. It’s eaten while still warm, with milk or butter; or if it cools down, it's reheated with lard or another type of fat before serving.

THE BAKER.
1. The business of the Baker consists in making bread, rolls, biscuits, and crackers, and in baking various kinds of provisions.
1. The work of the baker involves making bread, rolls, biscuits, and crackers, and baking different types of goods.
2. Man appears to be designed by nature, to eat all substances capable of affording nourishment to his system; but, being more inclined to vegetable than to animal food, he has, from the earliest times, used farinaceous grains, as his principal means of sustenance. As these, however, cannot be eaten in their native state without difficulty, means have been contrived for extracting their farinaceous part, and for converting it into an agreeable and wholesome aliment.
2. Humans seem to be naturally meant to eat all kinds of food that can nourish them; however, they're generally more inclined to plant-based foods than animal ones. Since ancient times, they have relied on starchy grains as their main source of sustenance. Yet, because these grains are hard to eat in their raw form, methods have been developed to extract the starchy part and turn it into a tasty and healthy food.
3. Those who are accustomed to enjoy all the advantages of the most useful inventions, without reflecting[40] on the labour expended in their completion, may fancy that there is nothing more easy than to grind grain, to make it into paste, and to bake it in an oven; but it must have been a long time, before men discovered any better method of preparing their grain, than roasting it in the fire, or boiling it in water, and forming it into viscous cakes. Accident, probably, at length furnished some observing person a hint, by which good and wholesome bread could be made by means of fermentation.
3. Those who are used to enjoying all the benefits of the most useful inventions, without thinking about the effort that went into creating them, might believe that grinding grain, turning it into dough, and baking it in an oven is easy. However, it took a long time for people to find better ways to prepare grain than just roasting it over a fire or boiling it in water to make sticky cakes. Eventually, some observant person likely stumbled upon the idea that good and healthy bread could be made through fermentation.
4. Before the invention of the oven, bread was exclusively baked in the embers, or ashes, or before the fire. These methods, with sometimes a little variation, are still practised, more or less, in all parts of the world. In England, the poor class of people place the loaf on the heated hearth, and invert over it an iron pot or kettle, which they surround with embers or coals.
4. Before ovens were invented, bread was only baked in the embers, ashes, or in front of the fire. These methods, with some minor variations, are still practiced in various parts of the world. In England, poorer people place the loaf on the heated hearth and cover it with an iron pot or kettle, which they then surround with embers or coals.
5. The invention of the oven must have added much to the conveniences and comforts of the ancients; but it cannot be determined, at what period, or by whom, it was contrived. During that period of remote antiquity, in which the people were generally erratic in their habits, the ovens were made of clay, and hardened by fire, like earthenware; and, being small, they could be easily transported from place to place, like our iron bake-ovens. Such ovens are still in use in some parts of Asia.
5. The creation of the oven must have greatly improved the convenience and comfort of ancient people, but we can’t pinpoint exactly when or by whom it was invented. In that distant time when people were mostly nomadic, ovens were made from clay and fired to harden, similar to pottery; and since they were small, they could be easily moved around, much like our metal bake ovens today. Ovens like these are still used in some parts of Asia.
6. There are few nations that do not use bread, or a substitute for it. Its general use arises from a law of our economy, which requires a mixture of the animal fluids, in every stage of the process of digestion. The saliva is, therefore, essential; and the mastication of dry food is required, to bring it forth from the glands of the mouth.
6. There are very few countries that don’t use bread or something similar. Its widespread use comes from an economic principle that needs a combination of animal fluids throughout the entire digestion process. Saliva is therefore essential, and chewing dry food is necessary to release it from the glands in the mouth.
7. The farinaceous grains most usually employed in making bread, are,—wheat, rye, barley, maize, and[41] oats. The flour or meal of two of these are often mixed; and wheat flour is sometimes advantageously combined with rice, peas, beans, or potatoes.
7. The starchy grains most commonly used for making bread are wheat, rye, barley, corn, and[41] oats. The flour or meal from two of these grains is often mixed together, and wheat flour is sometimes effectively combined with rice, peas, beans, or potatoes.
8. The component parts of wheat, rye, and barley flour, are,—fecula, or starch, gluten, and saccharine mucilage. Fecula is the most nutritive part of grain. It is found in all seeds, and is especially abundant in the potato. Gluten is necessary to the production of light bread; and wheat flour, containing it in the greatest proportion, answers the purpose better than any other. The saccharine mucilage is equally necessary, as this is the substance on which yeast and leaven act, in producing the internal commotion in the particles of dough during fermentation.
8. The main components of wheat, rye, and barley flour are starch, gluten, and sugary mucilage. Starch is the most nutritious part of grain. It’s found in all seeds and is especially high in potatoes. Gluten is essential for making light bread, and wheat flour, which has the highest amount of it, works best for this purpose. The sugary mucilage is also crucial, as it's the substance that yeast and leaven work on to create the internal movement in the dough particles during fermentation.
9. There are three general methods of making bread; 1st. by mixing meal or flour with water, or with water and milk; 2d. by adding to the foregoing materials a small quantity of sour dough, or leaven, to serve as a fermenting agent; and, 3d. by using yeast, to produce the same general effect.
9. There are three main ways to make bread: 1st. by mixing flour or meal with water or a combination of water and milk; 2nd. by adding a little bit of sour dough or leaven to act as a fermenting agent; and 3rd. by using yeast to achieve the same overall effect.
10. The theory of making light bread, is not difficult to be understood. The leaven or yeast acts upon the saccharine mucilage of the dough, and, by the aid of heat and moisture, disengages carbonaceous matter, which, uniting with oxygen, forms carbonic acid gas. This, being prevented from escaping by the gluten of the dough, causes the mass to become light and spongy. During the process of baking, the increased heat disengages more of the fixed air, which is further prevented from escaping by the formation of the crust. The superfluous moisture having been expelled, the substance becomes firm, and retains that spongy hollowness which distinguishes good bread.
10. The theory of making light bread isn’t hard to understand. The leaven or yeast interacts with the sugary mucilage of the dough and, with the help of heat and moisture, releases carbon-rich matter, which combines with oxygen to create carbon dioxide gas. This gas gets trapped by the gluten in the dough, making the mixture light and airy. While baking, the rising heat releases more of the trapped air, which is also prevented from escaping by the crust that forms. Once the extra moisture is removed, the bread becomes firm and keeps that airy texture that defines good bread.
11. Many other substances contain fermenting qualities, and are, therefore, sometimes used as substitutes for yeast and leaven. The waters of several mineral springs, both in Europe and America, being[42] impregnated with carbonic acid gas, are occasionally employed in making light bread.
11. Many other substances have fermenting properties and are sometimes used as alternatives to yeast and leaven. The waters from several mineral springs, both in Europe and America, being[42] infused with carbonic acid gas, are occasionally used in making light bread.
12. The three general methods of making bread, and the great number of materials employed, admit of a great variety in this essential article of food; so much so, that we cannot enter into details, as regards the particular modes of manufacture adopted by different nations, or people. There are, comparatively, but few people on the globe, among whom this art is not practised in some way or other.
12. The three main methods of making bread, along with the many different ingredients used, allow for a wide variety of this essential food. It's such a broad topic that we can't go into specifics about the different manufacturing techniques used by various countries or cultures. In fact, there are relatively few people in the world who don't practice this art in some form.
13. It is impossible to ascertain, at what period of time the process of baking bread became a particular profession. It is supposed, that the first bakers in Rome came from Greece, about two hundred years before the Christian era; and that these, together with some freemen of the city, were incorporated into a college, or company, from which neither they nor their children were permitted to withdraw. They held their effects in common, without possessing any individual power of parting with them.
13. It's hard to determine when baking bread became a specific profession. It’s believed that the first bakers in Rome came from Greece around two hundred years before the start of the Christian era, and these bakers, along with some local freemen, formed a guild that neither they nor their children could leave. They shared their resources as a group and didn’t have the individual authority to sell or give away their shares.
14. Each bake-house had a patron, or superintendent; and one of the patrons had the management of the rest, and the care of the college. So respectable was this class of men in Rome, that one of the body was occasionally admitted, as a member of the senate; and all, on account of their peculiar corporate association, and the public utility of their employment, were exempted from the performance of the civil duties to which other citizens were liable.
14. Each bakery had a manager, or superintendent; and one of the managers oversaw the others and took care of the college. This group of men was so respected in Rome that occasionally, one of them was admitted as a member of the senate; and all of them, due to their unique corporate connection and the public benefit of their work, were exempt from the civil duties that other citizens had to perform.
15. In many of the large cities of Europe, the price and weight of bread sold by bakers, are regulated by law. The weight of the loaves of different sizes must be always the same; but the price may vary, according to the current cost of the chief materials. The law was such in the city of London, a few years ago, that if a loaf fell short in weight a single ounce, the baker was liable to be put in the[43] pillory; but now, he is subject only to a fine, varying from one to five shillings, according to the will of the magistrate before whom he may be indicted.
15. In many large cities across Europe, the price and weight of bread sold by bakers are regulated by law. The weight of loaves, regardless of size, must always be consistent; however, the price can fluctuate based on the current cost of key ingredients. A few years ago in London, the law stated that if a loaf was underweight by even one ounce, the baker could be put in the[43] pillory; now, though, they only face a fine ranging from one to five shillings, based on the discretion of the magistrate handling the case.
16. In this country, laws of a character somewhat similar have been enacted by the legislatures of several states, and by city authorities, with a view to protect the community against impositions; but whether there is a law or not, the bakers regulate the weight, price, and quality of their loaves by the general principles of trade.
16. In this country, similar laws have been created by the legislatures of several states and city authorities to protect the community from being taken advantage of; however, whether there is a law or not, bakers determine the weight, price, and quality of their loaves based on the general principles of trade.
17. There is, perhaps, no business more laborious than that of the baker of loaf bread, who has a regular set of customers to be supplied every morning. The twenty-four hours of the day are systematically appropriated to the performance of certain labours, and to rest.
17. There’s probably no job more demanding than that of a bread baker who has a steady group of customers to serve every morning. The entire day is carefully divided between specific tasks and rest.
18. After breakfast, the yeast is prepared, and the oven-wood provided: at two or three o'clock, the sponge is set: the hours from three to eight or nine o'clock, are appropriated to rest. The baking commences at nine or ten o'clock at night; and, in large bakeries, continues until five o'clock in the morning. From that time until the breakfast hour, the hands are engaged in distributing the bread to customers. For seven months in the year, and, in some cases, during the whole of it, part of the hands are employed, from eleven to one o'clock, in baking pies, puddings, and different kinds of meats, sent to them from neighboring families.
18. After breakfast, the yeast is prepared, and the firewood for the oven is gathered. Around two or three o'clock, the sponge is set: the time from three to eight or nine o'clock is reserved for resting. Baking starts around nine or ten o'clock at night and, in larger bakeries, goes on until five o'clock in the morning. From then until breakfast, the staff works on distributing the bread to customers. For seven months a year, and in some cases all year long, part of the staff is busy from eleven to one o'clock baking pies, puddings, and various kinds of meats sent to them from neighboring families.
19. In large cities, the bakers usually confine their attention to particular branches of the business. Some bake light loaf bread only; others bake unleavened bread, such as crackers, sea-biscuit, and cakes for people of the Jewish faith. Some, again, unite several branches together; and this is especially the case in small cities and towns, where the demand for different kinds of bread is more limited.
19. In big cities, bakers typically focus on specific areas of the business. Some only make light loaf bread; others produce unleavened bread, like crackers, sea biscuits, and cakes for people of the Jewish faith. Some, however, combine several areas together, which is especially common in small cities and towns where the demand for different types of bread is more limited.

THE CONFECTIONER.
1. The Confectioner makes liquid and dry confects, jellies, marmalades, pastes, conserves, sugar-plums, ice-creams, candies, and cakes of various kinds.
1. The Confectioner creates both liquid and solid sweets, including jellies, marmalades, pastes, preserves, candies, ice creams, and various types of cakes.
2. Many of the articles just enumerated, are prepared in families for domestic use; but, as their preparation requires skill and practice, and is likewise attended with some trouble, it is sometimes better to purchase them of the confectioner.
2. Many of the items just listed are made at home for family use; however, since making them requires skill and practice, and can also be a bit of a hassle, it’s sometimes easier to buy them from a pastry chef.
3. Liquid and dry confects are preserves made of various kinds of fruits and berries, the principal of which are,—peaches, apricots, pears, quinces, apples, plums, cherries, grapes, strawberries, gooseberries, currants, and raspberries. The fruit, of whatever kind it may be, is confected by boiling it in a thick clarified syrup of sugar, until it is about half cooked.[45] Dry confects are made by boiling the fruit a little in syrup, and then drying it with a moderate heat in an oven. The ancients confected with honey; but, at present, sugar is deemed more suitable for this purpose, and is almost exclusively employed.
3. Liquid and dry confects are preserves made from various fruits and berries, mainly—peaches, apricots, pears, quinces, apples, plums, cherries, grapes, strawberries, gooseberries, currants, and raspberries. The fruit, whatever the type, is cooked by boiling it in a thick clarified syrup of sugar until it’s about half done.[45] Dry confects are created by boiling the fruit briefly in syrup, and then drying it at a moderate temperature in an oven. The ancients used honey for confecting; however, nowadays, sugar is considered more suitable for this purpose and is used almost exclusively.
4. Jellies resemble a thin transparent glue, or size. They are made by mixing the juice of the fruits mentioned in the preceding paragraph, with a due proportion of sugar, and then boiling the composition down to a proper consistence. Jellies are also made of the flesh of animals; but such preparations cannot be long kept, as they soon become corrupt.
4. Jellies look like a thin, clear glue or gel. They're made by mixing the juice of the fruits mentioned earlier with the right amount of sugar, then boiling the mixture down to the right thickness. Jellies can also be made from animal flesh, but these versions don't last long since they spoil quickly.
5. Marmalades are thin pastes, usually made of the pulp of fruits that have some consistence, and about an equal weight of sugar. Pastes are similar to marmalades, in their materials, and mode of preparation. The difference consists only in their being reduced by evaporation to a consistence, which renders them capable of retaining a form, when put into moulds, and dried in an oven.
5. Marmalades are thin spreads, usually made from the pulp of fruits that have some texture, mixed with about the same weight of sugar. Pastes are similar to marmalades in terms of ingredients and how they're made. The only difference is that they are cooked down by evaporation to a consistency that allows them to hold their shape when placed in molds and dried in an oven.
6. Conserves are a species of dry confects, compounded of sugar and flowers. The flowers usually employed, are,—roses, mallows, rosemary, orange, violets, jessamine, pistachoes, citrons, and sloes. Orange-peel is also used for the same purpose.
6. Conserves are a type of dry sweets made from sugar and flowers. The flowers typically used include roses, marshmallows, rosemary, orange blossoms, violets, jasmine, pistachios, citrons, and sloe berries. Orange peel is also used for this purpose.
7. Candies are made of clarified sugar, reduced by evaporation to a suitable degree of consistence. They receive their name from the essence, or substance, employed in giving them the required flavour.
7. Candies are made from clarified sugar, which is concentrated by evaporation until it reaches the right consistency. They get their name from the essence or ingredients used to give them the desired flavor.
8. Sugar-plums are small fruits, seeds, little pieces of bark, or odoriferous and aromatic roots, incrusted with hard sugar. These trifles are variously denominated; but, in most cases, according to the name of the substance inclosed by the incrustation.
8. Sugar-plums are small fruits, seeds, little pieces of bark, or fragrant and aromatic roots, coated with hard sugar. These items are called different names; however, in most cases, they are named based on the substance inside the coating.
9. Ice-cream is an article of agreeable refreshment in hot weather. It is sold in confectionary shops, as well as at the public gardens, and other places of temporary[46] resort in cities. It is composed, chiefly, of milk or cream, fruit, and lemon-juice. It is prepared by beating the materials well together, and rubbing them through a fine hair sieve. The congelation is effected by placing the containing vessel in one which is somewhat larger, and filling the surrounding vacancy with a mixture of salt and fine ice.
9. Ice cream is a tasty treat that helps you cool off in hot weather. It's available at candy shops, public parks, and other popular spots in cities. It's mainly made from milk or cream, fruit, and lemon juice. To make it, you mix the ingredients together thoroughly and strain them through a fine sieve. To freeze it, you put the container inside a larger one and fill the space between them with a mix of salt and crushed ice.
10. Cakes are made of a great variety of ingredients; the principal of which are, flour, butter, eggs, sugar, water, milk, cream, yeast, wine, brandy, raisins, currants, caraway, lemon, orange, almonds, cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, cloves, and ginger. The different combinations of these materials, produce so great a variety of cakes, that it would be tedious to detail even their names.
10. Cakes are made from a wide range of ingredients, the main ones being flour, butter, eggs, sugar, water, milk, cream, yeast, wine, brandy, raisins, currants, caraway, lemon, orange, almonds, cinnamon, nutmeg, allspice, cloves, and ginger. The various combinations of these ingredients create such a vast assortment of cakes that listing even their names would be exhausting.
11. The confectioner, in addition to those articles which may be considered peculiar to his business, deals in various kinds of fruits and nuts, which grow in different climates. He also sells a variety of pickles, which he usually procures from those who make it a business to prepare them.
11. The candy maker, besides the items specific to his trade, offers different types of fruits and nuts from various climates. He also sells a range of pickles, which he typically gets from those who specialize in making them.
12. Soda-water is likewise often sold by the confectioner. This agreeable drink is merely water, impregnated with carbonic acid gas, by means of a forcing-pump. The confectioners, however, in large cities, seldom prepare it themselves, as they can procure it at less expense, and with less trouble, ready made.
12. Soda water is often sold by candy shops too. This refreshing drink is just water infused with carbon dioxide using a pump. However, candy shops in big cities rarely make it themselves since they can get it pre-made at a lower cost and with less hassle.
13. Sometimes, the business of the pastry-cook is united with that of the confectioner, especially with that branch of it which relates to making cakes. Pies and tarts consist of paste, which, in baking, becomes a crust, and some kind of fruit or meat, or both, with suitable seasoning. The art of making pies and tarts is practised, more or less, in every family: it is not, therefore, essential to be particular in naming the materials employed, or the manner in which they are combined.
13. Sometimes, the work of the pastry chef is combined with that of the candy maker, especially when it comes to making cakes. Pies and tarts are made from dough, which turns into a crust when baked, filled with some type of fruit or meat, or both, along with the right seasonings. The skill of making pies and tarts is practiced in almost every household, so it’s not necessary to specify the ingredients used or how they are mixed together.

THE BREWER, AND THE DISTILLER.
THE BREWER.
1. Brewing is the art of preparing a liquor, which has received the general denomination of beer. This beverage can be brewed from any kind of farinaceous grain; but, on various accounts, barley is usually preferred. It is prepared for the brewer's use by converting it into malt, which is effected by the following process.
1. Brewing is the craft of making a drink commonly known as beer. This beverage can be made from any type of starchy grain, but for several reasons, barley is usually the grain of choice. It’s prepared for brewing by turning it into malt, which is done through the following process.
2. The grain is soaked in a cistern of water about two days, or until it is completely saturated with that fluid. It is then taken out, and spread upon a floor in a layer nearly two feet thick. When the inside of this heap begins to grow warm, and the kernels to germinate, the maltster checks the rapid growth of the grain in that situation by changing it to the outside.[48] This operation is continued, until the saccharine matter in the barley has been sufficiently evolved by the natural process of germination.
2. The grain is soaked in a tank of water for about two days, or until it’s completely soaked. It is then taken out and spread on a floor in a layer about two feet thick. When the inside of this heap starts to get warm and the kernels begin to sprout, the maltster moves the grain outside to slow down its rapid growth. This process continues until the sugars in the barley have developed enough through the natural germination process.[48]
3. The grain is next transferred to the kiln, which is an iron or tile floor, perforated with small holes, and moderately heated beneath with a fire of coke or stone coal. Here, the grain is thoroughly dried, and the principle of germination completely destroyed. The malt thus made is prepared for being brewed, by crushing it in a common mill, or between rollers. Malting, in Great Britain, and in some other parts of Europe, is a business distinct from brewing; but, in the United States, the brewers generally make their own malt.
3. The grain is then moved to the kiln, which has an iron or tile floor with small holes and is heated underneath by a fire of coke or coal. Here, the grain is fully dried, and the process of germination is completely halted. The malt created this way is ready for brewing by being crushed in a regular mill or between rollers. In Great Britain and some other parts of Europe, malting is a separate business from brewing; however, in the United States, brewers typically make their own malt.
4. The first part of the process of brewing is called mashing. This is performed in a large tub, or tun, having two bottoms. The upper one, consisting of several moveable pieces, is perforated with a great number of small holes; the other, though tight and immoveable at the edges, has several large holes, furnished with ducts, which lead to a cistern beneath.
4. The first step in the brewing process is called mashing. This takes place in a large container, or tun, with two bottoms. The upper one, made of several movable sections, is filled with lots of small holes; the lower one, which is fixed and sealed at the edges, has several large openings with pipes that direct the liquid to a tank below.
5. The malt, designed for one mashing, is spread in an even layer on the upper bottom, and thoroughly saturated and incorporated with water nearly boiling, by means of iron rakes, which are made to revolve and move round in the tub by the aid of machinery. The water, together with the soluble parts of the malt, at length passes off, through the holes before mentioned, into the reservoir beneath.
5. The malt, intended for a single mashing, is spread out evenly on the bottom and thoroughly soaked and mixed with nearly boiling water using iron rakes that are turned and moved around in the tub with the help of machinery. Eventually, the water, along with the soluble components of the malt, drains through the previously mentioned holes into the reservoir below.
6. The malt requires to be mashed two or three times in succession with fresh quantities of water; and the product of each mashing is appropriated to making liquors of different degrees of strength.
6. The malt needs to be mashed two or three times in a row with fresh amounts of water, and the result of each mashing is used to create drinks with different levels of strength.
7. The product of the mashing-tun is called wort, which, being transferred to a large copper kettle, is boiled for a considerable time with a quantity of hops, and then drawn off into large shallow cisterns,[49] called coolers. When the mixture has become cool enough to be submitted to fermentation, it is drawn off into the working tun.
7. The result of the mashing-tun is called wort, which, after being moved to a large copper kettle, is boiled for a long time with a certain amount of hops, and then poured into large shallow containers,[49] known as coolers. Once the mixture cools down enough for fermentation, it is transferred to the working tun.
8. The fermentation is effected with yeast, which, acting on the saccharine matter, disengages carbonic acid gas. This part of the process requires from eighteen to forty-eight hours, according to the degree of heat which may be in the atmosphere.
8. The fermentation happens with yeast, which acts on the sugar, releasing carbon dioxide. This part of the process takes anywhere from eighteen to forty-eight hours, depending on the temperature in the atmosphere.
9. The beer is then drawn off into casks of different dimensions, in which it undergoes a still further fermentation, sometimes called the brewer's cleansing. During this fermentation, the froth, or yeast, works out at the bung-hole, and is received in a trough, on the edges of which the casks have been placed. The froth thus discharged from the beer, is the yeast used by the brewers.
9. The beer is then transferred into casks of various sizes, where it goes through an additional fermentation process, sometimes referred to as the brewer's cleansing. During this fermentation, the foam, or yeast, spills out at the bung-hole and is collected in a trough set up around the casks. The foam that comes out of the beer is the yeast that the brewers use.
10. The products of the brewery are denominated beer, ale, and porter. The difference between these liquors arises, chiefly, from the manner in which the malt has been prepared, the relative strength imparted to each, and the extent to which the fermentation has been carried.
10. The products of the brewery are called beer, ale, and porter. The differences between these drinks mainly come from how the malt is processed, the amount of strength given to each, and how far the fermentation has gone.
11. There are several kinds of beer; such as table beer, half and half, and strong beer. They are adapted to use soon after being brewed, and differ from each other but little, except in the degree of their strength.
11. There are several types of beer, like table beer, half and half, and strong beer. They are meant to be consumed soon after being brewed and differ only slightly, mainly in their strength.
12. Ale and porter are called stock liquors; because, not being designed for immediate consumption, they are kept for a considerable time, that they may improve in quality. Porter is usually prepared for consumption by putting it into bottles. This is done either at the brewery, or in bottling establishments. In the latter case, the liquor is purchased in large quantities from the brewer by persons who make it their business to supply retailers and private families.
12. Ale and porter are referred to as stock liquors because they're not meant to be consumed right away; they're stored for a significant period to enhance their quality. Porter is typically bottled for consumption. This can happen either at the brewery or at bottling facilities. In the latter scenario, the liquor is bought in bulk from the brewer by those whose job is to supply retailers and private households.
13. We have evidence that fermented liquor was[50] in use three thousand years ago. It was first used in Egypt, whence it passed into adjacent countries, and afterward into Spain, France, and England. It was sometimes called the wine of barley; and one kind of it was denominated Pelusian drink, from the city Pelusium, where it was first made.
13. We have evidence that fermented drinks were[50] in use three thousand years ago. It originated in Egypt, then spread to nearby countries, and later to Spain, France, and England. It was sometimes referred to as barley wine, and one type was called Pelusian drink, named after the city of Pelusium, where it was first produced.
14. Among the nations of modern times, the English are the most celebrated for brewing good liquors. London porter is especially in great repute, not only in that city, but in distant countries. Much fermented liquor of the different kinds, is consumed in the United States, where it is also made in considerable perfection.
14. Among today's nations, the English are the most well-known for making great drinks. London porter is particularly famous, not just in that city but also in far-off places. A lot of different types of alcoholic beverages are consumed in the United States, where they are also produced quite well.
THE DISTILLER.
1. Although alcohol can be extracted from any substance containing saccharine matter, yet sugar-cane, grapes, apples, peaches, rye, corn, and rice, on account of their abundance, and superior adaptation to the purpose, are more commonly used than any other. As whiskey is the chief article of this kind, manufactured in the United States, it will be selected to illustrate the general principles of distillation.
1. While alcohol can be made from any substance that has sugar, sugarcane, grapes, apples, peaches, rye, corn, and rice are more commonly used due to their availability and better suitability for this process. Since whiskey is the main type produced in the United States, it will be chosen to demonstrate the basic principles of distillation.
2. Corn and rye are the materials from which this liquor is mostly extracted; and these are used either together or separately, at the option of the distiller. The meal is scalded and mashed in a large tub: it is then permitted to stand, until it has become a little sweet, when more water is poured upon it, and, at a suitable temperature, a quantity of yeast is added. To aid in producing rapid fermentation, a little malt is sprinkled on the top.
2. Corn and rye are mainly used to make this liquor, and the distiller can choose to use them together or separately. The grains are heated and mashed in a big tub, then left to sit until they turn slightly sweet. After that, more water is added, and once it's at the right temperature, some yeast is mixed in. To encourage quick fermentation, a bit of malt is sprinkled on top.
3. After an adequate fermentation has taken place, the beer, as it is called, is transferred to a large close tub, from the top of which leads a tube extending to the worm in another tub filled with cold water. The[51] worm is a long pewter tube, twisted spirally, that it may occupy a small space.
3. After sufficient fermentation has happened, the beer is moved to a large closed tank, from the top of which a tube leads to the worm in another tank filled with cold water. The[51] worm is a long pewter tube twisted in a spiral so it takes up less space.
4. The beer is heated in the close tub, by means of steam, which is conveyed to it, from a large kettle or boiler, by a copper or iron pipe. The heat causes the alcoholic particles to rise like vapour, and pass into the worm, where they are condensed into a watery fluid, which passes out into a receiver.
4. The beer is heated in the closed tub using steam, which is delivered from a large kettle or boiler through a copper or iron pipe. The heat causes the alcohol particles to rise like vapor and flow into the worm, where they're condensed into a liquid that flows out into a receiver.
5. At first, pure alcohol distils from the worm; but the produce becomes gradually weaker, until, at length, the spirit in the beer being exhausted, it consists only of water condensed from steam. The remains of the beer are given as feed to hogs and cattle.
5. At first, pure alcohol is distilled from the worm, but over time, the output becomes weaker, until eventually, when the alcohol in the beer is depleted, it’s just water that condenses from the steam. The leftover beer is given as feed for pigs and cattle.
6. Brandy is distilled from grapes, rum from sugar-cane, arrack from rice, whiskey from various kinds of grain, peach-brandy from peaches, and cider-brandy from apples.
6. Brandy is made by distilling grapes, rum comes from sugarcane, arrack is made from rice, whiskey is produced from different types of grain, peach brandy is made from peaches, and cider brandy is derived from apples.
7. The great variety of articles employed in the productions of different kinds of ardent spirits, must necessarily vary the process of distillation in some particulars; but, in all cases, fermentation and heat are necessary to disengage the alcoholic properties of the saccharine matter, and also an apparatus for condensing the same from a gaseous to a liquid form. In some countries, the alembic is used as a condenser, instead of a worm. The form of this instrument is much like that of the retort; and when applied, it is screwed upon the top of the boiler.
7. The wide range of materials used in producing different types of spirits will inevitably change some details of the distillation process; however, fermentation and heat are essential to extract the alcoholic properties from the sugary substances, along with equipment to convert the alcohol from gas to liquid. In some countries, the alembic is used as a condenser instead of a worm. This instrument resembles a retort, and when used, it is screwed onto the top of the boiler.
8. Spirits, which come to market in a crude state, are sometimes distilled for the purpose of improving their quality, or for disguising them with drugs and colouring substances, that they may resemble superior liquors. The process by which they are thus changed, or improved, is called rectification. Many distilleries in large cities, are employed in this branch of business.[52]
8. Spirits, which are initially sold in a rough form, are sometimes distilled to enhance their quality or to mask them with additives and colorings, making them look like higher-end liquors. The process of changing or improving them is known as rectification. Many distilleries in big cities are involved in this line of work.[52]
9. There is, perhaps, no kind of merchandise in which the public is more deceived, than in the quality of ardent spirits and wines. To illustrate this, it is only necessary to observe, that Holland gin is made by distilling French brandy with juniper-berries; but most of the spirits which are vended under that name, consist only of rum or whiskey, flavoured with the oil of turpentine. Genuine French brandy is distilled from grapes; but the article usually sold under that denomination, is whiskey or rum coloured with treacle or scorched sugar, and flavoured with the oil of wine, or some kind of drug.
9. There is probably no type of product where the public is more misled than with the quality of spirits and wines. To show this, it’s enough to point out that Dutch gin is made by distilling French brandy with juniper berries; however, most of the spirits sold under that name are really just flavored rum or whiskey mixed with turpentine oil. Authentic French brandy is made from grapes, but what’s commonly sold as that is actually whiskey or rum colored with molasses or burnt sugar, and flavored with wine oil or some kind of synthetic additive.
10. The ancient Greeks and Romans were acquainted with an instrument for distillation, which they denominated ambix. This was adopted, a long time afterward, by the Arabian alchemists, for making their chemical experiments; but they made some improvements in its construction, and changed its name to alembic.
10. The ancient Greeks and Romans knew about a distillation instrument called ambix. This was later adopted by Arab alchemists for their chemical experiments, but they made some improvements to its design and renamed it alembic.
11. The ancients, however, knew nothing of alcohol. The method of extracting this intoxicating substance, was probably discovered some time in the twelfth or thirteenth century; but, for many ages after the discovery, it was used only as a medicine, and was kept for sale exclusively in apothecary shops. It is now used as a common article of stimulation, in almost every quarter of the globe.
11. However, the ancients knew nothing about alcohol. The method for extracting this intoxicating substance was probably discovered sometime in the twelfth or thirteenth century; but for many years after its discovery, it was only used as medicine and was sold exclusively in apothecary shops. Now, it’s commonly used as a stimulant in nearly every part of the world.
12. But the opinion is becoming general, among all civilized people, that the use of alcohol, for this purpose, is destructive of health, and the primary cause of most of the crimes and pauperism in all places, where its consumption is common. The formation of Temperance Societies, and the publication of their reports, together with the extensive circulation of periodical papers, devoted to the cause of temperance, have already diminished, to a very great extent, the use of spirituous liquors.[53]
12. It's becoming widely accepted among all civilized people that using alcohol for this purpose harms health and is the main cause of most crimes and poverty in places where it's commonly consumed. The establishment of Temperance Societies and the publication of their reports, along with the widespread distribution of periodicals dedicated to the temperance movement, have already significantly reduced the use of alcoholic beverages.[53]
13. Although the ancients knew nothing of distilling alcohol, yet they were well versed in the art of making wine. We read of the vineyard, as far back as the time of Noah, the second father of nations; and, from that period to the present, the grape has been the object of careful cultivation, in all civilized nations, where the climate and soil were adapted to the purpose.
13. Although ancient people didn’t know how to distill alcohol, they were skilled at making wine. We read about vineyards dating back to the time of Noah, the second father of nations; and from that time until now, grapes have been carefully cultivated in all civilized nations where the climate and soil were suitable for it.
14. The general process of making wine from grapes, is as follows. The grapes, when gathered, are crushed by treading them with the feet, and rubbing them in the hands, or by some other means, with the view to press out the juice. The whole is then suffered to stand in the vat, until it has passed through what is termed the vinous fermentation, when the juice, which, in this state, is termed must, is drawn off into open vessels, where it remains until the pressing of the husks is finished.
14. The general process of making wine from grapes is as follows. The grapes, when harvested, are crushed by stomping on them with feet and rubbing them with hands, or by other methods, to extract the juice. The mixture is then allowed to sit in the vat until it undergoes what’s known as vinous fermentation, at which point the juice, referred to as must, is drained into open containers, where it stays until the pressing of the husks is complete.
15. The husks are submitted, in hair bags, to the press; and the must which is the result of this operation, is mixed with that drawn from the vat. The whole is then put into casks, where it undergoes another fermentation, called the spirituous, which occupies from six to twelve days. The casks are then bunged up, and suffered to stand a few weeks, when the wine is racked off from the lees, and again returned to the same casks, after they have been perfectly cleansed. Two such rackings generally render the wine clear and brilliant.
15. The husks are put into hair bags and sent to the press; the must that results from this process is mixed with what comes from the vat. Everything is then placed into casks, where it goes through another fermentation, called the spirituous, which lasts from six to twelve days. The casks are then sealed up and left to sit for a few weeks, after which the wine is separated from the lees and returned to the same casks, once they have been thoroughly cleaned. Generally, two such rackings make the wine clear and sparkling.
16. In many cases, sugar, brandy, and flavouring substances, are necessary, to render the wine palatable; but the best kinds of grapes seldom require any of these additions. Wine-merchants often adulterate their wines in various ways, and afterwards sell them for those which are genuine. To correct acidity, and some other unpleasant qualities, lead, copper, antimony, and corrosive sublimate, are often used[54] by the dealers in wine; though the practice is attended with deleterious effects to the health of the consumers.
16. In many cases, sugar, brandy, and flavoring agents are needed to make the wine palatable; however, the best types of grapes rarely need any of these extras. Wine merchants often mix their wines in various ways and then sell them as if they are genuine. To fix acidity and other unpleasant qualities, lead, copper, antimony, and corrosive sublimate are often used[54] by wine dealers, even though this practice has harmful effects on consumers' health.
17. The wines most usually met with in this country, are known by the following denominations, viz., Madeira and Teneriffe, from islands of the same names; Port, from Portugal; Sherry and Malaga, from Spain; Champagne, Burgundy, and Claret, from France; and Hock, from Germany.
17. The wines most commonly found in this country are known by the following names: Madeira and Teneriffe, from the islands of the same names; Port, from Portugal; Sherry and Malaga, from Spain; Champagne, Burgundy, and Claret, from France; and Hock, from Germany.

THE BUTCHER.
1. Man is designed by nature, to subsist on vegetable and animal food. This is obvious, from the structure of his organs of mastication and digestion. It does not follow, however, that animal food is, in all cases, positively required. In some countries, the mass of the people subsist chiefly or entirely on vegetables. This is especially the case in the East Indies, where rice and fruits are the chief articles of food.
1. Humans are naturally meant to eat both plant and animal food. This is clear from the way our teeth and digestive system are built. However, this doesn't mean that animal food is always necessary. In some places, most people primarily or entirely eat vegetables. This is especially true in the East Indies, where rice and fruits are the main staples.
2. On the other hand, the people who live in the higher latitudes subsist principally on the flesh of animals. This is preferred, not only because it is better suited to brace the system against the rigours of the climate, but because it is most easily provided.[56] In temperate climates, a due proportion of both animal and vegetable substances is consumed.
2. On the other hand, people living in higher latitudes mainly rely on animal meat. This choice is favored not only because it helps the body withstand the harsh climate, but also because it's more readily available.[56] In temperate climates, a balanced mix of both animal and plant foods is consumed.
3. Although the skins of beasts were used for the purpose of clothing, soon after the fall of man, we have no intimation from the Scriptures, that their flesh, or that of any other animal, was used, until after the flood. The Divine permission was then given to Noah and his posterity, to use, for this purpose, "every moving thing that liveth." But in the law of Moses, delivered several centuries after this period, many exceptions are to be found, which were intended to apply only to the Jewish people. These restrictions were removed, on the introduction of Christianity. The unbelieving Jews, however, still adhere to their ancient law.
3. Although animal skins were used for clothing shortly after mankind fell, the Scriptures do not indicate that their flesh, or that of any other animal, was consumed until after the flood. At that point, God allowed Noah and his descendants to eat "every moving thing that lives." However, in the law of Moses, given several centuries later, there were many exceptions meant only for the Jewish people. These restrictions were lifted with the advent of Christianity. The unbelieving Jews, however, still follow their ancient laws.
4. The doctrine of transmigration has had a great influence in diminishing the consumption of animal food. This absurd notion arose somewhere in Central Asia, and, at a very early period, it spread into Egypt, Greece, Italy, and finally among the remote countries of the ancient world. It is still entertained by the heathen nations of Eastern Asia, by the tribes in the vicinity of Mount Caucasus, and by some of the American savages, and African negroes.
4. The belief in reincarnation has played a significant role in reducing the consumption of meat. This strange idea originated in Central Asia and, early on, spread to Egypt, Greece, Italy, and eventually to far-off regions of the ancient world. It is still held by some of the non-Christian groups in East Asia, tribes near Mount Caucasus, as well as certain Indigenous peoples in the Americas and Africa.
5. The leading feature of this doctrine is, that the souls of departed men reappear on earth in the bodies of animals, both as a punishment for crimes committed during life, and as a means of purification from sin. This dogma was adopted by the Pythagoreans, a sect of Grecian philosophers; and, as a natural consequence, it led them, as it has ever done the votaries of this opinion, to the veneration of animals, and to abstinence from their flesh, lest they might devour that of some of their deceased friends or relatives.
5. The main idea of this belief is that the souls of people who have died come back to earth in the bodies of animals, both as a punishment for crimes committed during their lives and as a way to cleanse themselves of sin. This belief was adopted by the Pythagoreans, a group of Greek philosophers; and, as a natural result, it led them, as it has for those who believe in this idea, to respect animals and to avoid eating their flesh, so they wouldn’t accidentally consume the flesh of some of their deceased friends or family members.
6. People who dwell thinly scattered in the country, rear and slaughter the animals for the supply of their own tables; but, in villages, large towns, and[57] cities, the inhabitants depend chiefly on the butcher for their meat. The animals commonly slaughtered are, sheep, cattle, and hogs.
6. People who live sparsely in the countryside raise and kill animals for their own food. In contrast, those in villages, larger towns, and[57] cities mainly rely on butchers for their meat. The animals that are typically slaughtered include sheep, cattle, and pigs.
7. The butchers obtain their animals from the farmers, or from drovers, who make it a business to purchase them in the country, and drive them to market. The farmers near large cities, who have good grazing farms, are accustomed to buy lean cattle, brought from a distance, with a view to fatten them for sale. There are also persons in the cities, who might, with propriety, be called cattle brokers; since they supply the butchers of small capital with a single animal at a time, on a credit of a few days.
7. The butchers get their animals from farmers or from drovers, who buy them in the countryside and drive them to market. Farmers near large cities, with good grazing land, typically buy lean cattle from afar to fatten them up for sale. There are also people in the cities who could be called cattle brokers, as they provide butchers with limited funds a single animal at a time, on a few days of credit.
8. Every butcher who carries on the business, has a house in which he kills his animals, and prepares them for sale. When it is intended to slaughter an ox, a rope is thrown about his horns or neck, with which he is forced into the slaughter-house, and brought to the floor by the aid of a ring. The butcher then knocks him on the head, cuts his throat, deprives him of his hide, takes out his entrails, washes the inside of his body with water, and cuts him up into quarters. The beef is now ready to be conveyed to the market-house. The process of dressing other quadrupeds varies but little from this in its general details. The cellular substance of mutton, lamb and veal, is often inflated with air, that the meat may appear fat and plump.
8. Every butcher who runs a business has a place where he slaughters his animals and prepares them for sale. When it's time to kill a cow, a rope is put around its horns or neck to force it into the slaughterhouse, where it's brought down with the help of a ring. The butcher then hits it on the head, cuts its throat, removes its hide, takes out its insides, washes the inside of its body with water, and cuts it into quarters. The beef is now ready to be taken to the market. The method for preparing other quadrupeds is mostly similar in its general steps. The cellular tissue of mutton, lamb, and veal is often puffed up with air to make the meat look fat and plump.
9. In large cities and towns, the meat is chiefly sold in the market-house, where each butcher has a stall rented from the corporation. It is carried there in a cart, and cut into suitable pieces with a saw, knife, and a broad iron cleaver.
9. In big cities and towns, meat is mainly sold in the market, where each butcher has a stall rented from the city. It is brought there in a cart and cut into appropriate pieces using a saw, knife, and a large iron cleaver.
10. In some of the large cities, it is a practice among the butchers, to employ runners to carry the meat to the houses, of those customers who may desire this accommodation. In villages, where there is[58] no market-house, the butcher carries his meats from door to door in some kind of vehicle.
10. In some big cities, butchers often hire runners to deliver meat to customers who want this service. In villages, where there is[58] no market, the butcher takes his meat from door to door in some sort of vehicle.
11. Those who follow this occupation usually enjoy good health, and, as they advance in years, in most cases, become corpulent. Their good health arises from exercise in the open air; and their corpulency, from subsisting principally on fresh meats. It is thought, however, that their longevity is not so great as that of men in many other employments.
11. People in this occupation generally have good health and, as they get older, often become overweight. Their good health comes from exercising outdoors, while their weight gain is mainly due to eating a lot of fresh meat. However, it's believed that they don't live as long as those in many other jobs.

THE TOBACCO PLANTER, AND THE TOBACCONIST
THE TOBACCO PLANTER.
1. Tobacco is a native production of America, which was in common use among nearly all of the Indian tribes, when this continent was discovered by Europeans. Its original name among the nations of the islands, was yoli; whilst, with those of the continent, it was termed petum. The Spaniards, however, chose to call it tobacco, a term in the Haytian language, which designated the instrument in which the herb was smoked.
1. Tobacco is a native crop of America that was commonly used by nearly all the Native American tribes when Europeans discovered this continent. Its original name among the island nations was yoli, while on the mainland it was called petum. However, the Spaniards decided to call it tobacco, a term from the Haitian language that referred to the tool used to smoke the herb.
2. This plant was first introduced into Spain, then into Portugal and France, and, at length, into other countries of the Eastern continent. Sir Walter Raleigh carried it from Virginia to England, and taught his countrymen the various methods of consuming it among the natives.[60]
2. This plant was first brought to Spain, then to Portugal and France, and eventually to other countries in the Eastern continent. Sir Walter Raleigh brought it from Virginia to England and showed his fellow countrymen the different ways the natives used it.[60]
3. The introduction of this nauseous plant into Europe, was everywhere attended with ridicule and opposition. Hundreds of pamphlets were published, in various languages, dissuading from its use in the strongest terms. Even James the First, king of Great Britain, did not regard it as inconsistent with the royal dignity to take up his pen on the subject. In his "Counterblast to Tobacco," published in 1603, occurs the following remarkable passage: "It is a custom loathsome to the eye, hateful to the nose, harmful to the brain; and, in the black fume thereof, nearest resembling the horrible Stygian smoke of the pit that is bottomless."
3. The introduction of this disgusting plant to Europe faced widespread mockery and resistance. Numerous pamphlets were published in different languages, strongly discouraging its use. Even James the First, king of Great Britain, didn’t see it as beneath his dignity to speak out about it. In his "Counterblast to Tobacco," published in 1603, he wrote the following notable passage: "It is a sight awful to behold, repugnant to the nose, damaging to the mind; and, in the dark fumes it produces, it closely resembles the dreadful Stygian smoke of the endless pit."
4. Pope Urban VIII. excommunicated those who took tobacco in churches; and Queen Elizabeth also prohibited its use in houses of public worship. In 1689, an ordinance was published in Transylvania, threatening those who should plant tobacco with the confiscation of their estates. The grand-duke of Moscow, and the king of Persia, prohibited its use under the penalty of the loss of the nose, and even of life. At present, however, the consumption of tobacco is looked upon with so much greater indulgence, that all the sovereigns of Europe, and most of those of other nations, derive a considerable revenue from the trade in this article.
4. Pope Urban VIII excommunicated anyone who smoked tobacco in churches, and Queen Elizabeth also banned its use in places of worship. In 1689, an ordinance was issued in Transylvania, threatening anyone who planted tobacco with having their property confiscated. The grand duke of Moscow and the king of Persia banned its use, with penalties that included amputation of the nose and even death. However, today, tobacco use is viewed with much more tolerance, and all the rulers of Europe, as well as most leaders of other countries, make a significant profit from the tobacco trade.
5. But it is truly astonishing, that a nauseous weed, of an acrid taste, disagreeable odour, and deleterious qualities, should have had so great an influence on the social condition of nations; that its culture should have spread more rapidly than that of the most useful plants; and that it should, consequently, have become an article of extensive commerce.
5. But it’s truly amazing that a disgusting plant, with a bitter taste, unpleasant smell, and harmful properties, has had such a huge impact on the social conditions of countries; that its cultivation has spread faster than that of the most useful plants; and that it has, as a result, become a widely traded commodity.
6. Of this plant there are several species, which differ from each other, in size, strength, and flavour. Some one or more of these varieties, are cultivated in various parts of the world: but especially in North[61] and South America, and in the West Indies. It is one of the staple productions of Maryland, Virginia, Kentucky, and Ohio. The whole value of the tobacco, exported annually from the United States, amounts to about five millions of dollars.
6. This plant has several species that vary in size, strength, and flavor. Some of these varieties are grown in different parts of the world, especially in North[61] and South America, and the West Indies. It's a major crop in Maryland, Virginia, Kentucky, and Ohio. The total value of tobacco exported from the United States each year is about five million dollars.
7. The following description of the mode of cultivating this plant, and preparing it for the tobacconist, is applicable to the state of Maryland. A little variation in some of the details, would render it applicable to other parts of the world.
7. The following description of how to grow this plant and prepare it for the tobacconist applies to Maryland. A few changes in some details would make it relevant to other parts of the world.
8. A small piece of ground, say one-sixteenth of an acre, is prepared by burning a large quantity of brush upon it. The surface is rendered light and even, by means of a hoe and rake; and the seeds, mixed with ashes, are sown as equally as possible. After they have been covered with earth, the ground is trodden down with the bare feet. The tobacco beds are made in March, and the plants become fit for the field in eight or ten weeks.
8. A small piece of land, about one-sixteenth of an acre, is prepared by burning a lot of brush on it. The surface is made light and even using a hoe and rake, and the seeds, mixed with ashes, are sown as evenly as possible. After covering them with soil, the ground is pressed down with bare feet. The tobacco beds are made in March, and the plants are ready for the field in eight to ten weeks.
9. The field, in which the cultivation of the crop is to be continued, is ploughed two or three times, and then cross-ploughed into equal checks, in each of which is made a hill. Immediately after a rain, the plants are transferred to these hills, in the same manner in which cabbages are transplanted. While the tobacco is growing, the ground is ploughed several times, in order to keep it light, and to aid in destroying the weeds. When the plants are nearly grown, the tops are lopped or cut off, to prevent them from running to seed, and to cause the leaves to grow larger and thicker.
9. The field where the crop will continue to be grown is plowed two or three times and then cross-plowed into equal squares, with a hill made in each one. Right after it rains, the plants are moved to these hills, just like how cabbages are transplanted. While the tobacco is growing, the ground is plowed several times to keep it loose and to help eliminate weeds. When the plants are almost fully grown, the tops are trimmed or cut off to stop them from going to seed and to encourage the leaves to grow larger and thicker.
10. In July or August, the tobacco-worms begin to make their appearance, and to threaten the whole crop with destruction. To arrest the ravages of these insidious enemies, all hands, both great and small, together with all the turkeys that can be mustered, are brought into the field. These worms are[62] produced from the eggs of a large insect, called the horn-bug.
10. In July or August, the tobacco worms start showing up and pose a serious threat to the entire crop. To stop these sneaky pests from causing havoc, everyone—big and small—along with all the turkeys we can gather, is sent into the fields. These worms are[62] produced from the eggs of a large insect known as the horn bug.
11. The tobacco, when ripe, is cut near the ground, and hung on small sticks about five feet in length, generally by pegs driven into the stalks. These sticks are then laid upon poles, arranged at proper distances from each other in the tobacco-house, shed, or hovel, as the case may be. It is then suffered to dry gradually in the atmosphere; or a large fire is made in the tobacco-house, to effect the drying more rapidly.
11. When the tobacco is ripe, it is cut close to the ground and hung on small sticks about five feet long, usually by pegs inserted into the stalks. These sticks are then placed on poles spaced appropriately apart in the tobacco house, shed, or hovel, depending on the situation. It is then left to dry gradually in the air, or a large fire is lit in the tobacco house to speed up the drying process.
12. The leaves are next stripped from the stalks, and tied in small bunches according to their quality. This can only be done when in order, or rather, when the leaves are rendered tough by the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. These bunches, when the leaves are so damp that they will not break, and so dry that they will not heat, are packed in hogs-heads by the aid of a large lever press. The tobacco is inspected in public warehouses, by men who have been appointed for the purpose by the public authorities.
12. Next, the leaves are stripped from the stalks and tied into small bunches based on their quality. This can only be done when in order, or rather, when the leaves become tough from absorbing moisture from the air. These bunches, when the leaves are damp enough not to break but dry enough not to heat up, are packed into hogsheads using a large lever press. The tobacco is inspected in public warehouses by individuals appointed for this task by the public authorities.
THE TOBACCONIST.
1. It is the business of the tobacconist to convert the leaves of the tobacco plant into snuff, cigars, and smoking and chewing tobacco.
1. The tobacconist’s job is to turn the leaves of the tobacco plant into snuff, cigars, and smoking and chewing tobacco.
2. Although there may seem to be a great variety of snuffs, yet they may be all reduced to three kinds, viz., Scotch, rappee, and maccouba. These are variously modified by the quality of the tobacco, by some little variation in the manufacture, and by the articles employed in communicating the desired flavour.
2. While there might be a wide range of snuffs, they can all be categorized into three types: Scotch, rappee, and maccouba. These are slightly changed by the quality of the tobacco, by minor differences in the production process, and by the ingredients used to achieve the desired flavor.
3. In manufacturing snuff, the tobacco is ground in a mill of a peculiar construction. Before the weed is submitted to this operation, it is reduced to a certain[63] degree of fineness, by means of a cutting machine; and then spread in a heap, one or two feet thick, and sprinkled with water, that it may heat and sweat. The time required in this preparation depends upon the state of the weather, and the kind of snuff for which the tobacco is designed.
3. In snuff manufacturing, the tobacco is ground in a uniquely designed mill. Before this process, the tobacco is ground to a certain[63] level of fineness using a cutting machine, then piled in a heap one or two feet thick and sprayed with water so it can heat and sweat. The time needed for this preparation varies based on the weather and the type of snuff being produced.
4. Scotch snuff is made of the strongest sort of tobacco, and is put up in bladders and bottles without being scented. Rappee and maccouba are put up in jars and bottles; and the former is generally scented with bergamot, and the latter with the ottar of roses. Sometimes, several ingredients, agreeable to the olfactory nerves, are employed.
4. Scotch snuff is made from the strongest type of tobacco and is stored in sacks and bottles without any added fragrance. Rappee and maccouba are stored in jars and bottles; usually, the former is scented with bergamot, while the latter is infused with rose oil. Sometimes, a mix of other pleasant-smelling ingredients is used.
5. Cigars are composed of two parts, called the wrapper and the filling. The former is made of pieces of thin leaves, cut to a proper shape, and the latter of those which are more broken. In all cases, the leaves used in the manufacture of cigars are deprived of the stems, which are reserved, either to be converted into inferior kinds of snuff, or for exportation to Holland, where they are usually flattened between rollers, and afterwards cut fine for smoking tobacco, to be sold to the poorer class of people.
5. Cigars are made up of two parts, known as the wrapper and the filling. The wrapper is made from thin leaves, cut into the right shape, while the filling consists of smaller, broken pieces. In all cases, the leaves used to make cigars have their stems removed, which are either turned into low-quality snuff or exported to Holland, where they are usually flattened between rollers and then finely cut for smoking tobacco, sold to lower-income individuals.
6. The value of cigars depends chiefly on the quality of the tobacco. The best kind for this purpose, grows on the island of Cuba, near Havana. Tobacco from this seed is raised in many other places; and such, among tobacconists, is called seed; but it passes, among smokers of limited experience, for the real Havana. A very fine silky tobacco of this sort, is cultivated in Connecticut, which is much esteemed.
6. The value of cigars mostly comes from the quality of the tobacco. The best tobacco for this purpose grows on the island of Cuba, near Havana. Tobacco from this seed is grown in many other places, and among tobacconists, it's referred to as seed; however, smokers with limited experience often mistake it for the real Havana. A very fine, silky tobacco of this type is also grown in Connecticut and is highly regarded.
7. An expert hand will make five or six hundred Spanish cigars in a day, or from one thousand to fifteen hundred of those composed of Maryland or Kentucky tobacco. Making cigars, being light work, is well adapted to females, of whom great numbers are regularly employed in this branch of business. Tobacco[64] intended for the pipe, is cut in a machine; and, after having been properly dried, it is put up in papers of different sizes.
7. A skilled worker can make five or six hundred Spanish cigars in a day, or between one thousand and fifteen hundred cigars made from Maryland or Kentucky tobacco. Making cigars is relatively easy work, which is why many women are routinely employed in this field. Tobacco[64] meant for pipes is cut by a machine, and after it has been dried properly, it is packaged in papers of various sizes.
8. Chewing tobacco is almost exclusively prepared from the species of this plant which is cultivated in Virginia, chiefly in the vicinity of James river. It is better adapted to this purpose than any other, on account of its superior strength, and the great amount of resinous matter which it contains.
8. Chewing tobacco is mostly made from the type of this plant that is grown in Virginia, especially around the James River. It’s better suited for this use than any other because of its stronger flavor and the high amount of resinous material it has.
9. The first operation in preparing chewing tobacco, is that of depriving the leaves of the stems. The former are then twisted by hand into plugs of different sizes, or spun into a continued thread by the aid of the tobacco-wheel, which is a simple machine moved by a crank. The thread thus produced is formed into bunches, or twists, containing a definite amount of tobacco.
9. The first step in making chewing tobacco is to remove the stems from the leaves. The leaves are then twisted by hand into plugs of various sizes or spun into a continuous thread using a tobacco-wheel, a simple machine operated by a crank. The resulting thread is shaped into bunches or twists, each containing a specific amount of tobacco.
10. The tobacco, having been put into the form desired, is moistened with water, packed in strong kegs, and then pressed with powerful screw-presses. The whole process is completed by heating the kegs, with their contents, for several days, in an oven or a tight room made for the purpose. The same change in the quality of the tobacco is also produced by suffering it to stand nine or twelve months, before it is disposed of to the consumers.
10. The tobacco, once shaped as desired, is dampened with water, packed into strong barrels, and then pressed with heavy screw-presses. The entire process is finished by heating the barrels and their contents for several days in an oven or a specially designed room. The same change in the quality of the tobacco can also occur by letting it sit for nine to twelve months before it's sold to consumers.
11. Snuff is very commonly used in the Southern states, as a dentifrice; or, at least, it is applied to the teeth with this ostensible object. The application is made by means of a small stick, having the fibres minutely divided at one end. Although the tobacco seems to have the desired effect upon the teeth, so far as respects their appearance, yet its stimulating and narcotic powers are more to be dreaded in this mode of using it than in any other. Many females ruin their complexion and constitution, by rubbing snuff;[65] and the deleterious effects of the practice are so well known, that few are willing to avow it.
11. Snuff is commonly used in the Southern states as a teeth cleaner; or at least, it's used for that purpose. It’s applied with a small stick that has finely divided bristles on one end. While the tobacco seems to make the teeth look good, its stimulating and narcotic effects are more concerning in this way of using it than in any other. Many women damage their skin and health by rubbing snuff; [65] and the harmful effects of this practice are so well known that few are willing to admit it.
12. Tobacco is used, in some one of its various forms, by a great majority of mankind; and, although it is generally acknowledged to be, in most cases, injurious to the constitution, and often destructive of health, yet its consumption seems to be on the increase. It is one of the objects of trade, even in the most obscure parts of the world; and its devotees must and will have a supply, even though they stint themselves in food and clothing.
12. Tobacco is used, in one of its many forms, by a large majority of people; and, although it's widely recognized to be harmful to the body and often detrimental to health, its use appears to be growing. It’s a trade commodity, even in the most remote areas of the world; and its fans will find a way to get it, even if it means cutting back on food and clothing.
13. As regards the influence which this plant assumes over its votaries, it may be classed with alcohol and opium; although its effects are not so destructive; nor is the expense so considerable; yet this is an item by no means unworthy of attention, as the aggregate sum annually expended for this useless narcotic in the United States, would be sufficient for the support of common schools in every part of the country.
13. When it comes to the impact this plant has on its users, it can be compared to alcohol and opium; although its effects aren’t as harmful, and it’s not as expensive. Still, this is something worth noting, as the total amount spent each year on this pointless drug in the United States could easily fund public schools everywhere in the country.
14. The general use of tobacco is perpetuated from generation to generation, by the desire, common to children and young people, to act and appear like older persons. Few ever begin the use of this nauseous weed, because it is agreeable to the senses to which it is applied; but because they fancy, in their childish simplicity, that it confers upon them some additional importance.
14. The widespread use of tobacco continues from one generation to the next, fueled by the common desire among kids and teenagers to behave and look like adults. Few people start using this disgusting plant because it actually pleases the senses; rather, they believe, in their youthful innocence, that it gives them some extra significance.

THE MANUFACTURER OF CLOTH.
1. Men, in the primitive ages, were clad with the skins of animals, until they had acquired sufficient skill to employ a better material. It cannot be determined from history, at what time cloth began to be manufactured from animal or vegetable fibre; but it is evident, that it was done at a very early period, even long before the flood.
1. In ancient times, men wore animal skins until they learned how to use better materials. It's unclear from history when cloth started being made from animal or plant fibers, but it's clear that it happened quite early, even long before the flood.
2. The fibres of the vegetable kind, most commonly applied to this purpose, are the bark of several kinds of trees, together with hemp, flax, and cotton; and those of the animal kingdom are, silk, the wool of the sheep and lama, and the hair, or wool, of the goat and camel.
2. The plant fibers most commonly used for this purpose include the bark from various trees, as well as hemp, flax, and cotton; from the animal kingdom, we have silk, sheep and llama wool, and the hair or wool from goats and camels.
3. That the general process of manufacturing cloth may be perfectly understood, the manner of performing[67] several operations must be separately described. For the purpose of illustration, cotton, wool, and flax, will be selected; because these are the materials of which our clothing is principally fabricated. The operations of making cloth, may be comprised under carding and combing, spinning, weaving, and dressing.
3. To fully understand how cloth is made, we need to describe how to carry out[67] each operation separately. For illustration, we'll focus on cotton, wool, and flax, as these are the main materials used to make our clothing. The process of making cloth includes carding and combing, spinning, weaving, and dressing.
4. Carding and Combing.—Wool and cotton are carded, with the view of disentangling the fibres, and arranging them longitudinally in small rolls. This is done by means of the teeth of two instruments, called cards, used by hand on the knee, or by the carding machine, which acts on the same principle, although far more expeditiously.
4. Carding and Combing.—Wool and cotton are carded to untangle the fibers and align them lengthwise into small rolls. This process is done using the teeth of two tools called cards, which can be used by hand on the knee or by a carding machine, which operates on the same principle but is much faster.
5. Machines for carding wool are to be found in every district of country in the United States, in which the people manufacture much of their woollen cloths in their own families. On account of the roughness of the fibres of wool, it is necessary to cover them well with grease or oil, that they may move freely on each other during the carding and spinning.
5. You can find wool carding machines in every region of the United States where families make a lot of their own woolen fabrics. Because wool fibers are coarse, it's important to coat them thoroughly with grease or oil so they can easily slide against each other during the carding and spinning processes.
6. Long, coarse, or hard wools, used in the manufacture of camlets, bombazines, circassians, and other worsted fabrics, are not carded, but combed. In England, and in other countries where much of this kind of wool is used, wool-combing forms a distinct trade. The operation consists, chiefly, in drawing the locks through steel combs, the teeth of which are similar to our common flax-hatchel. The comb is heated to a certain temperature, to cause the fibres to straighten, and to remove from them the roughness which might otherwise cause the cloth made of them to thicken in washing, like flannel.
6. Long, coarse, or hard wools, used to make camlets, bombazines, circassians, and other worsted fabrics, aren't carded but combed. In England and other countries where this type of wool is commonly used, wool-combing is a specific trade. The process mainly involves pulling the locks through steel combs, the teeth of which are similar to those on our regular flax hatchel. The comb is heated to a certain temperature to straighten the fibers and remove any roughness that might otherwise make the cloth thick when washed, like flannel.
7. The old method of combing wool, however, has been in part superseded by the application of machines, the first of which was invented by Edmund Cartwright, of England, about the year 1790. The fibres of flax are arranged in a parallel direction,[68] and freed from tow, by drawing them through a hatchel.
7. The traditional way of combing wool has been partially replaced by machines, the first of which was invented by Edmund Cartwright in England around 1790. The fibers of flax are aligned in a parallel direction,[68] and separated from tow by pulling them through a hackle.
8. Spinning.—The process of spinning consists in twisting the fibres into threads. The most simple method by which this is effected, is that by the common spinning-wheel. Of this well-known machine there are two kinds; one of which is applied to spinning wool, cotton, and tow, and the other, to spinning flax.
8. Spinning.—The process of spinning involves twisting fibers into threads. The simplest method for achieving this is with a regular spinning wheel. There are two types of this well-known machine; one is used for spinning wool, cotton, and tow, while the other is used for spinning flax.
9. This operation is, in most cases, performed by females in the following manner. The roll of cotton or wool is attached to the spindle, which is put in rapid motion by a band passing over it from the rim, or periphery of the wheel. While the spinster is turning the wheel with the right hand, she brings back from the spindle her left, with which she has laid hold of the roll a few inches from the upper end. When the yarn thus produced has been sufficiently twisted, she turns it upon the spindle, and repeats the same operation, until it is full. This yarn is formed into skeins by winding it upon a reel.
9. This process is usually done by women in the following way. They attach a roll of cotton or wool to the spindle, which spins quickly thanks to a band running over it from the edge of the wheel. While the spinner turns the wheel with her right hand, she pulls the yarn from the spindle with her left hand, holding the roll a few inches from the top. Once the yarn has been twisted enough, she winds it onto the spindle and keeps repeating this until it’s full. This yarn is then turned into skeins by winding it onto a reel.
10. The mode of spinning tow is a little different. The material having been formed into bats by hand-cards, the fibres are drawn out from between the fingers and thumb by the twisted thread, while the spinster gradually moves backward. Worsted is spun from combed wool nearly in the same manner.
10. The way tow is spun is slightly different. After the material is shaped into bats using hand cards, the fibers are pulled out from between the fingers and thumb by the twisted thread, while the spinner gradually moves backward. Worsted is spun from combed wool almost the same way.
11. The flax or little wheel is moved by the foot, so that both hands of the spinster are used in supplying, disposing, and occasionally wetting the fibres, as they are drawn from the distaff. Two bands pass from the periphery of the wheel, each of which performs a distinct office: the one keeps in motion the spindle, which twists the thread; the other moves the fliers, which wind the thread upon a spool, as fast as it is produced.
11. The flax or little wheel is operated by the foot, allowing both hands of the spinner to be used for managing, arranging, and occasionally moistening the fibers as they are pulled from the distaff. Two bands extend from the edge of the wheel, each serving a different function: one keeps the spindle moving, which twists the thread; the other drives the fliers, which wrap the thread onto a spool as quickly as it's made.
12. Spinning was almost exclusively performed in[69] the modes just described, until the year 1767, when Richard Heargreaves, of England, invented a machine for spinning cotton, which he called a jenny. This consisted, at first, of eight spindles, moved by a common wheel, or cylinder, which was turned by hand. The number of spindles was afterwards increased to eighty-four.
12. Spinning was almost entirely done in[69] the ways mentioned earlier, until 1767, when Richard Heargreaves from England invented a machine for spinning cotton, which he named a jenny. Initially, it had eight spindles, driven by a common wheel or cylinder that was operated by hand. Later, the number of spindles was increased to eighty-four.
13. In 1769, Richard Arkwright, also an Englishman, invented the water-spinning-frame. The essential and most important feature of this invention, consists in drawing out the cotton, by causing it to pass between successive pairs of rollers, which revolve with different velocities, and which act as substitutes for the thumb and fingers, as applied in common spinning. These rollers are combined with the spindle and fliers of the common flax-wheel.
13. In 1769, Richard Arkwright, also an Englishman, invented the water-spinning-frame. The key and most significant aspect of this invention is that it pulls the cotton by passing it through successive pairs of rollers that rotate at different speeds, acting like the thumb and fingers used in traditional spinning. These rollers are integrated with the spindle and flyers of the conventional flax-wheel.
14. Another machine was invented by Samuel Crompton, in 1779. It is called a mule, because it combines the principles of the two preceding machines. It produces finer yarn than either of them, and has nearly superseded the jenny. Before the cotton is submitted to the spinning machine, it is prepared by several others, by which it is carded, extended, and partially twisted.
14. Another machine was invented by Samuel Crompton in 1779. It's called a mule because it combines the principles of the two previous machines. It produces finer yarn than either of them and has almost replaced the jenny. Before the cotton is fed into the spinning machine, it's prepared by several other machines that card, stretch, and partially twist it.
15. In the manufactories, the fine, short wools, used in the fabrication of broadcloths, flannels, and a variety of other cloths, are carded by machinery, and spun on a slubbing or roving-machine, or on a jenny or mule, in each of which the spindles are mounted on a carriage, which is moved backwards in stretching and twisting the material, and forwards in winding the thread upon the spindle.
15. In the factories, the fine, short wools used to make broadcloths, flannels, and a variety of other fabrics are carded by machines and spun on a slubbing or roving machine, or on a jenny or mule. In each of these, the spindles are mounted on a carriage that moves backward to stretch and twist the material and forward to wind the thread onto the spindle.
16. Worsted still continues to be spun, in most cases, on the common spinning-wheel, as it can be done more perfectly in this way, than by any other machine which has hitherto been invented. Several machines have been constructed, which spin coarse[70] threads of flax very well, and with great rapidity; but the materials for fine linen fabrics are still spun on the ancient flax-wheel.
16. Worsted is still mostly spun on the traditional spinning wheel because it can be done more effectively this way than with any other machine that's been invented so far. Several machines have been created that spin coarse[70] threads of flax very well and quickly; however, the materials for fine linen fabrics are still spun on the old flax wheel.
17. Weaving.—The first step preparatory to weaving, is to form a warp, consisting of a number of threads, which extend through the whole piece. To produce this parallel arrangement, the yarn is wound upon spools, which are afterwards placed in a frame perpendicularly by means of rods, on which they move as upon an axle. From these spools, the yarns are stretched upon pegs to the length of the proposed web, and are carried round or doubled a sufficient number of times to make it the proper width. The same object is more expeditiously effected, by winding the yarn spirally on a revolving frame.
17. Weaving.—The first step in preparing for weaving is to create a warp, which consists of several threads running the entire length of the piece. To achieve this parallel layout, the yarn is wound onto spools, which are then placed vertically in a frame using rods that function like an axle. The yarns from these spools are stretched over pegs to match the desired length of the fabric and are wrapped or doubled enough times to achieve the right width. This process can be done more quickly by winding the yarn in a spiral on a rotating frame.
18. The next step consists in winding the warp on a cylindrical beam, which is usually about ten inches in diameter. The threads, having been put through a harness, composed of moveable parts, called heddles, and also through a sley, or reed, are fastened on the other side to a large rod, from which three ropes extend to another cylinder, on which the cloth is wound, as fast as it is woven.
18. The next step is to wind the warp onto a cylindrical beam, which is typically about ten inches in diameter. The threads, after passing through a harness made of movable parts called heddles, and through a sley, or reed, are attached on the other side to a large rod. From this rod, three ropes lead to another cylinder, where the cloth is wound as quickly as it is woven.
19. The heddles are suspended from cross-pieces, on the top of the loom, by means of cords and pulleys, and, during the operation of weaving, are moved up and down alternately by the aid of treadles. This reciprocal motion causes the web to open; and, while in this position, a shuttle, containing the woof, weft, or filling on a quill or bobbin, is passed through from right to left, or from left to right, as often as the position of the warp is changed. The threads of the filling are beaten up by the reed, or sley, which is placed in the lay.
19. The heddles are hung from cross-pieces at the top of the loom using cords and pulleys, and during weaving, they are moved up and down alternately with the help of treadles. This back-and-forth motion opens up the web; and while in this position, a shuttle containing the woof, weft, or filling on a quill or bobbin is passed through from right to left or left to right, depending on the position of the warp. The reed, or sley, which is located in the lay, pushes the threads of the filling together.
20. Weaving is a business extensive in its application, being divided into almost as many branches as there are woven fabrics. Plain cotton, linen, woollen,[71] and twilled cloths, silks, satins, carpets, &c., are all woven in looms of some kind, constructed on the same general principles. Power-looms, driven by water or steam, are now generally introduced into the cotton and woollen manufactories, both in Europe and in this country. One person can attend to two of these looms at the same time, and each one will weave between twenty and forty yards in a day.
20. Weaving is a broad industry with many different branches, almost as many as there are types of woven fabrics. Plain cotton, linen, wool, [71] twilled cloth, silks, satins, carpets, etc., are all produced on looms of various kinds, built on similar basic principles. Power looms, powered by water or steam, are now commonly used in cotton and wool manufacturing, both in Europe and here. One person can operate two of these looms at once, and each loom can weave between twenty and forty yards per day.
21. Dressing.—Cotton fabrics, when the webs are taken from the loom, are covered with an irregular nap, or down, formed by the protruding ends of the fibres. From the finest cottons, this is removed, by drawing them rapidly over an iron cylinder, kept red-hot by a fire within. The flame of coal-gas has recently been applied, to effect the same object.
21. Dressing.—When cotton fabrics come off the loom, they are covered with an uneven nap or fluff created by the exposed ends of the fibers. For the finest cottons, this is removed by quickly passing them over an iron cylinder that's kept red-hot by a fire inside. Recently, coal-gas flames have been used to achieve the same result.
22. Common domestic fabrics are taken from the loom, and, without further preparation, are folded up into pieces for sale. Finer articles are usually whitened and calendered, before they pass from the hand of the manufacturer. Stuffs of all kinds, made of vegetable fibres, are now whitened by immersing them in a solution of oxymuriate of lime. Cotton and linen goods, with a view of making them smooth and glossy, are calendered, or pressed, between steel rollers.
22. Common household fabrics are taken straight from the loom and folded into pieces for sale without any additional preparation. Finer items are usually whitened and smoothed out before leaving the manufacturer. Fabrics made from plant fibers are now whitened by soaking them in a solution of bleaching lime. Cotton and linen goods are pressed between steel rollers to make them smooth and glossy.
23. Many of the fine cottons are converted into calicoes, by transferring to them various colors. The process by which this is done, is called calico-printing, which will be described in a separate article.
23. Many of the high-quality cottons are turned into calicoes by applying different colors to them. This process is known as calico-printing, and it will be explained in a separate article.
24. The texture of the fabrics made of worsted, or long wool, is completed, when issued from the loom. The pieces are subsequently dyed, and then pressed between heated metallic plates, to communicate to them the required gloss. But weaving does not always complete the texture of the stuffs made of the short wools. When taken from the loom, the web is too loose and open, to answer the purposes to[72] which such cloths are usually applied. It is, therefore, submitted to another process, called fulling.
24. The texture of the fabrics made from worsted, or long wool, is finished when it comes out of the loom. The pieces are then dyed and pressed between heated metal plates to give them the desired shine. However, weaving doesn't always finish the texture of fabrics made from short wools. When taken from the loom, the fabric is too loose and open to serve the purposes for[72] which such cloths are typically used. Therefore, it goes through another process called fulling.
25. Fulling, in common with almost every other operation pertaining to the manufacture of cloth, constitutes a separate trade. The art is only applied to stuffs composed of wool, or hair, as these only possess the properties which render it applicable. The practicability of fulling cloth depends on a certain roughness of the fibres, which admits of motion in one way, and retards it in another. This may be more fully understood by consulting the article on making hats.
25. Fulling, like almost every other process involved in cloth production, is a distinct trade. This technique is only used for materials made from wool or hair, as these are the only ones with the qualities that make it suitable. The effectiveness of fulling cloth relies on a particular roughness in the fibers, which allows movement in one direction while restricting it in another. You can gain a better understanding of this by looking at the article on making hats.
26. The cloth, having been prepared by a proper cleansing, is deposited in a strong box, with a quantity of water and fuller's earth or soap, and submitted to the action of the pestles, or stampers, which are moved in a horizontal direction, backwards and forwards, by means of appropriate machinery. This operation reduces the dimensions of the cloth, and greatly improves the beauty and stability of the texture. The cloth is afterwards dried in the open air on frames prepared for the purpose.
26. The cloth, after being properly cleaned, is placed in a sturdy box along with some water and fuller's earth or soap, and then subjected to the action of the pestles or stampers, which are moved back and forth horizontally using specialized machinery. This process shrinks the cloth and significantly enhances its appearance and durability. The cloth is then dried in the open air on frames designed for this purpose.
27. After the cloth has been dyed, a nap is raised on one side of it by means of the common teazle. The nap is next cut off to an even surface. This was formerly done with a huge pair of shears; but, within a few years, it has most commonly been effected by a machine, the essential part of which is a spiral blade, that revolves in contact with another blade, while the cloth is stretched over a bed, or support, just near enough for the projecting filaments to be cut off at a uniform length, without injuring the main texture. Pressing and folding the cloth complete the whole process.
27. After the cloth has been dyed, a nap is raised on one side using a common teazle. The nap is then cut off to create an even surface. This used to be done with a large pair of shears, but in recent years, it's mostly done by a machine. The key part of the machine is a spiral blade that spins while in contact with another blade, as the cloth is stretched over a bed or support, just close enough for the projecting fibers to be cut off at a uniform length without damaging the main texture. Pressing and folding the cloth finish the entire process.
28. A great proportion of the woollen fabrics worn in the United States, are manufactured in families, part of which is sent to the clothiers to be dressed. Much cotton yarn, spun at the manufactories, is purchased[73] for domestic use. Formerly, the raw material was procured, and spun into yarn on the big wheel. Coarse linens are also extensively manufactured in families, especially among the German population.
28. A large portion of the wool fabrics worn in the United States is made by families, some of which is sent to clothing makers for finishing. A lot of cotton yarn, spun at factories, is bought for personal use. In the past, the raw material was obtained and spun into yarn on the big wheel. Coarse linens are also widely produced by families, especially within the German community.
29. The manufacture of cloth from wool was introduced into Britain by the Romans, some time in the Augustan age. At Winchester, they conducted the business on a scale sufficiently large to supply their army. After the Romans withdrew from the island, in the fifth century, the art was comparatively neglected, and gradually declined, until the reign of Edward III. This monarch invited into his dominions workmen from Flanders, in which country the manufacture had, for a long time, been in a flourishing condition.
29. The Romans brought the production of wool fabric to Britain sometime during the Augustan era. At Winchester, they operated on a scale large enough to supply their army. After the Romans left the island in the fifth century, this craft was mostly forgotten and slowly declined until the reign of Edward III. This king invited skilled workers from Flanders, where the textile industry had been thriving for a long time.
30. Shortly after the first immigration of the Flemish manufacturers into England, an act was passed prohibiting the wearing of cloths made in any other country; and, in the time of Elizabeth, the manufacture had become so extensive, that the exportation of the raw material was forbidden by law.
30. Soon after the initial wave of Flemish manufacturers immigrated to England, a law was enacted banning the wearing of fabrics made in any other country. By the time of Elizabeth, the industry had grown so large that exporting raw materials was illegal.
31. It is supposed that there are now, in Great Britain, thirty millions of sheep; whose annual produce of wool is worth, on an average, about seven millions of pounds sterling; to this may be added five millions of pounds weight from foreign countries. This amount is increased in value, by manufacturing skill, to twenty or thirty millions of pounds. Not less than three millions of persons are supposed to be employed in this branch of British industry.
31. It's estimated that there are currently around thirty million sheep in Great Britain, producing wool worth about seven million pounds each year. On top of that, five million pounds of wool comes from foreign countries. This total value is boosted by skilled manufacturing to between twenty and thirty million pounds. It's believed that at least three million people are employed in this sector of British industry.
32. Both the woollen and cotton manufactures have arisen to great importance, of late years, in the United States; and, from the mechanical skill of our countrymen, the abundance of the raw material, and the vast amount of water-power, there is every reason[74] to anticipate a rapid and continual increase in these divisions of American enterprise.
32. Recently, both the wool and cotton industries have become very important in the United States. Thanks to the mechanical skill of our people, the availability of raw materials, and the large amount of water power, we have every reason[74] to expect rapid and ongoing growth in these areas of American business.
THE SILK-WORM.
1. Silk is the production of a worm, of the caterpillar species, which, in due course, passes through several transformations, and at length becomes a butterfly, like others of the genus. It is produced from an egg, and when about to die, or rather again to change its form, spins for itself an envelope, called a cocoon. The worm then changes to a chrysalis, and, after remaining in this state from 5 to 8 days, the butterfly, or moth, comes out, forcing its way through the cocoon. The moths, or butterflies, eat nothing, and die as soon as they have provided for the propagation of their species. Enough of these are suffered to come to maturity, to provide a sufficient stock of eggs. The rest are killed, in a few days after they have spun their task, either by heating them in an oven, or by exposing them to the rays of the sun.
1. Silk is made by a worm, specifically a caterpillar, which eventually goes through several changes and ultimately turns into a butterfly, like others in its group. It starts from an egg, and when it's about to die or change its form again, it spins a covering for itself called a cocoon. The worm then transforms into a chrysalis, and after staying in this state for about 5 to 8 days, the butterfly or moth emerges, breaking through the cocoon. The moths or butterflies don’t eat anything and die shortly after ensuring the continuation of their species. Enough of them are allowed to grow up to produce a sufficient number of eggs. The others are killed a few days after they’ve completed their task, either by heating them in an oven or exposing them to sunlight.
2. The fibres are wound upon a reel. To render this practicable, the cocoons are put into water heated to a suitable temperature, which dissolves the gummy substance that holds the fibres together. A number of threads being detached, and passed through a hole in an iron bar, form, by the aid of the remaining glutinous matter, one thread, which is wound upon a reel into skeins.
2. The fibers are wound onto a reel. To make this possible, the cocoons are placed in water heated to an appropriate temperature, which dissolves the sticky substance that binds the fibers together. Several threads are separated and passed through a hole in an iron bar, creating one single thread with the help of the leftover gluey material, which is then wound onto a reel into skeins.
3. The raw silk, thus produced and prepared, is sold to the manufacturers, who twist and double the fibres variously, and finally form them into threads for sewing; or weave them into a great variety of fabrics, which are too well known to need particular description here.
3. The raw silk that's produced and prepared is sold to manufacturers, who twist and double the fibers in different ways, and eventually turn them into threads for sewing; or they weave them into a wide range of fabrics, which are so well known that they don't need to be described in detail here.
4. According to the ancients, the silk-worm was originally a native of China, and the neighboring[75] parts of Asia, and had there been domesticated for a long time, before it was known in Europe. For many years after silk was sold among the nations of the West, even the merchants were ignorant of both the manner and place of its production.
4. According to ancient sources, the silk-worm originally came from China and nearby[75] areas of Asia, where it had been domesticated for a long time before it was recognized in Europe. For many years after silk started being sold among Western nations, even the merchants were unaware of how and where it was produced.
5. The Greeks became acquainted with silk, soon after the time of Alexander the Great; and the Romans knew little of the article, until the reign of Augustus. Dresses, composed entirely of this material, were seldom worn; but the fabrics which had been closely woven in the East, were unravelled, and the threads were recomposed in a looser texture, intermixed with linen or woollen yarn.
5. The Greeks discovered silk shortly after the time of Alexander the Great, and the Romans didn't know much about it until the reign of Augustus. Dresses made entirely of this material were rarely worn; instead, fabrics that had been tightly woven in the East were unraveled, and the threads were re-woven into a looser texture, mixed with linen or wool yarn.
6. The prodigal Hehogabalus is said to have been the first individual, in the Roman empire, who wore a robe of pure silk. It is also stated, that the Emperor Aurelian refused his wife a garment of this description, on account of its exorbitant price. At that time, as well as at previous periods, it usually sold for its weight in gold.
6. The extravagant Heliogabalus is said to have been the first person in the Roman Empire to wear a robe made of pure silk. It is also noted that Emperor Aurelian denied his wife a garment like this because of its outrageous cost. Back then, as well as in earlier times, it typically sold for its weight in gold.
7. A kind of gauze, originally made by the women on the island of Cos, was very celebrated. It was dyed purple, with the substance usually employed in communicating that colour in those days; but this was done before it was woven, as in that state it was too frail to admit of the process. Habits, made of this kind of stuff, were denominated "dresses of glass:" because the body could be seen through them.
7. A type of gauze, originally made by the women on the island of Cos, was very famous. It was dyed purple using the dye typically used for that color back then; however, this was done before it was woven, since in that form it was too delicate to handle the process. Outfits made from this kind of fabric were called "dresses of glass" because you could see the body through them.
8. The Roman empire had been supplied with silk through the medium of the Persians, until the time of Justinian, in the year 555. This emperor, having become indignant at the rapacity of the silk-merchants, determined, if possible, to supply his people from the insect itself.
8. The Roman Empire had been getting silk from the Persians until the time of Justinian in 555 AD. This emperor, upset by the greed of the silk merchants, decided to find a way to provide silk for his people directly from the insect itself.
9. After many unsuccessful attempts, he at length obtained a small quantity of the eggs from India, by the assistance of two Persian monks, who had contrived[76] to conceal them in the hollow of their canes. The seeds of the mulberry-tree, on the leaves of which the worm feeds, were also procured at the same time, together with instructions necessary for the management of the worms.
9. After many failed attempts, he finally got a small amount of eggs from India, with the help of two Persian monks who managed[76] to hide them in the hollow of their canes. He also obtained the seeds of the mulberry tree, which the worms eat, along with the instructions needed to take care of the worms.
10. For six hundred years after the period just mentioned, the rearing of these worms, in Europe, was confined to the Greek empire; but, in the twelfth century, Roger, king of Sicily, introduced it into that island, whence it gradually spread into Italy, Spain, France, and other European countries.
10. For six hundred years after the period just mentioned, the farming of these worms in Europe was limited to the Greek empire. However, in the twelfth century, Roger, the king of Sicily, brought it to that island, and from there it slowly spread to Italy, Spain, France, and other European countries.
11. The silk-worm was introduced into England by James the First; but it has never succeeded well in that country, on account of the dampness and coldness of the climate. The manufacture of fabrics from silk, however, is there very extensive, the raw material being obtained, chiefly, from Bengal and Italy. In the latter of these countries, in France, and other parts of Europe, as well as in Asia, the manufacture is also extensive.
11. The silk worm was brought to England by James I, but it hasn't thrived there due to the damp and cold climate. However, the production of silk fabrics is quite extensive in the country, with the raw material mainly sourced from Bengal and Italy. In Italy, France, and other parts of Europe, as well as in Asia, the production is also widespread.
12. Some attention has been paid to the rearing of silk-worms in the United States, and attempts have been made to introduce the manufacture of silks. The mulberry has been planted in various parts of the Union; and it is highly probable, that, in a few years, we shall be able to obtain excellent silks, without sending for them to foreign countries.
12. Some focus has been put on raising silkworms in the United States, and efforts have been made to start silk production. Mulberry trees have been planted in different regions of the country, and it’s very likely that, in a few years, we will be able to produce high-quality silk without having to import it from other countries.

THE DYER, AND THE CALICO-PRINTER.
THE DYER.
1. The art of dyeing consists in impregnating flexible fibres with any color which may be desired, in such a manner, that it will remain permanent, under the common exposures to which it may be liable.
1. The art of dyeing involves saturating flexible fibers with any desired color in a way that makes it last, even with the typical wear and tear it might face.
2. The union of the coloring matter with the fibres receiving the dye, is purely chemical, and not mechanical, as in the case of the application of paints. Wool has the greatest attraction for coloring substances; silk comes next to it; then cotton; and, lastly, hemp and flax. These materials, also, absorb dye-stuffs in different proportions.
2. The way the dye bonds with the fibers is purely chemical, not mechanical like when you use paints. Wool has the strongest affinity for dyes, followed by silk, then cotton, and finally hemp and flax. These materials also absorb dyes in varying amounts.
3. Previous to the application of the dye, the greasy substance which covers the fibres of wool, and the gluey matter on those of silk, are removed by some[78] kind of alkali. Their natural color is, also, discharged by the fumes of sulphur. The resinous matter and natural color of cotton and linen, are removed by bleaching.
3. Before applying the dye, any greasy substances that coat the fibers of wool and the sticky residue on silk are removed using some[78] type of alkali. Their natural color is also taken away by sulfur fumes. The resin and natural color of cotton and linen are eliminated through bleaching.
4. The materials used in dyeing are divided into two classes—substantive and adjective. The former communicates durable tints without the aid of any other substance previously applied; the latter requires the intervention of some agent which possesses an attraction for both the coloring matter and the stuff to be dyed, in order to make the color permanent. The substances used for this purpose are usually termed mordants.
4. The materials used in dyeing are divided into two types—substantive and adjective. The former creates lasting colors without the need for any other substances beforehand; the latter needs the use of an agent that attracts both the dye and the material being dyed to make the color stay. The substances used for this purpose are typically called mordants.
5. Agents capable of acting in some way as mordants, are very numerous; but alumina, alum, the sulphate or acetate of iron, the muriate of tin, and nut-galls, are principally employed. The mordant not only fixes the color, but, in many cases, alters and improves the tints. It is always dissolved in water, in which the stuffs are immersed, previous to the application of the dye. Dyeing substances are also very numerous; but a few of the most important have, in practice, taken precedence of the others.
5. There are many agents that can act as mordants, but alumina, alum, iron sulfate or iron acetate, tin chloride, and nut-galls are the most commonly used. The mordant not only sets the color but also often changes and enhances the shades. It is always dissolved in water, where the materials are soaked before applying the dye. There are also many dyeing substances, but a few of the most significant ones have become more prominent in practice than the others.
6. Blue, red, yellow, and black, are the chief colors, for which appropriate coloring substances are applied; but, by a judicious combination of these same materials, and by a proper application of mordants, intermediate hues of every shade are produced; thus, a green is communicated by forming a blue ground of indigo, and then adding a yellow by means of quercitron bark.
6. Blue, red, yellow, and black are the main colors for which suitable coloring substances are used. However, by skillfully combining these materials and applying mordants correctly, a wide range of intermediate shades can be created. For example, a green can be achieved by starting with a blue base of indigo and then adding yellow using quercitron bark.
7. The blue dye is made of indigo; the red dye, of madder, cochineal, archil, Brazil-wood, or safflowers; the yellow dye, of quercitron bark, turmeric, hickory, weld, fustic, or saffron; the black dye, of the oxide of iron combined with logwood, or the bark of the common red, or soft maple, and the sulphate or acetate[79] of iron. The dyes made of some of these substances require the aid of mordants, and those from others do not.
7. The blue dye is made from indigo; the red dye comes from madder, cochineal, archil, Brazil-wood, or safflowers; the yellow dye is derived from quercitron bark, turmeric, hickory, weld, fustic, or saffron; the black dye is created from iron oxide combined with logwood or the bark of the common red or soft maple, and the sulphate or acetate[79] of iron. Some of these dyes need mordants, while others don’t.
8. In communicating the intermediate hues, the different dye-stuffs forming the leading colors, are sometimes mixed; and, at other times, they are made into separate dyes, and applied in succession.
8. When communicating the intermediate shades, the various dye materials that create the main colors are sometimes blended together; at other times, they are made into individual dyes and applied one after the other.
9. In this country, the business of the dyer is often united with that of the clothier; but, where the amount of business will justify it, as in manufactories, and in cities or large towns, it is a separate business. The dyers sometimes confine their attention to particular branches. Some dye wool only or silk, while others confine themselves to certain colors, such as scarlet and blue. The principal profits of the dyer, when unconnected with manufacturing establishments, arise from dyeing garments or stuffs which have been partly worn.
9. In this country, the work of the dyer is often combined with that of the clothier; however, when the volume of business is sufficient, like in factories and in cities or large towns, it operates as a separate business. Some dyers focus on specific areas. Some only dye wool or silk, while others specialize in certain colors, like scarlet and blue. The main profits for a dyer, when not linked to manufacturing companies, come from dyeing clothes or fabrics that have been used before.
10. The origin of the art of dyeing is involved in great obscurity, as the ancients have not furnished even a fable, which might guide us in our researches. It is evident, however, that the art must have made considerable progress, long before authentic history begins. Moses speaks of stuffs dyed blue, purple, and scarlet, and of sheep-skins dyed red. The knowledge of the preparation of these colors, implies an advanced state of the art, at that early period.
10. The origins of dyeing are quite mysterious, as ancient sources haven't provided even a myth to help with our inquiries. However, it's clear that the art must have advanced significantly long before recorded history starts. Moses mentions fabrics dyed blue, purple, and scarlet, as well as sheep skins dyed red. The understanding of how to create these colors suggests that the art was already quite developed during that early time.
11. Purple was the favorite color of the ancients, and appears to have been the first which was brought to a state of tolerable perfection. The discovery of the mode of communicating it, is stated to have been accidental. A shepherd's dog, while on the sea-shore, incited by hunger, broke a shell, the contents of which stained his mouth with a beautiful purple; and the circumstance suggested the application of the shell-fish, as a coloring substance. This discovery is[80] thought to have been made about fifteen hundred years before the advent of Christ.
11. Purple was the favorite color of the ancient people and seems to have been the first one that was created with decent quality. The way it was discovered is said to have been by chance. A shepherd's dog, while at the beach and driven by hunger, broke open a shell, and the insides stained its mouth with a beautiful purple color; this led to the idea of using the shellfish as a dye. This discovery is[80] believed to have happened around fifteen hundred years before Christ.
12. The Jews esteemed this color so highly, that they consecrated it especially to the service of the Deity, using it in stuffs for decorating the tabernacle, and for the sacred vestments of the high-priests. The Babylonians and other idolatrous nations clothed their idols in habits of purple, and even supposed this color capable of appeasing the wrath of the gods.
12. The Jews valued this color so much that they dedicated it specifically for divine service, using it in fabrics to decorate the tabernacle and for the sacred garments of the high priests. The Babylonians and other idol-worshipping nations dressed their idols in purple robes and even believed this color could calm the anger of the gods.
13. Among the heathen nations of antiquity generally, purple was appropriated to the use of kings and princes, to the exclusion of their subjects. In Rome, at a later period, purple habits were worn by the chief officers of the republic, and, at length, by the opulent, until the emperors reserved to themselves the distinguished privilege.
13. In ancient times, most pagan nations reserved purple for kings and princes, keeping it away from the common people. Later in Rome, high-ranking officials wore purple garments, and eventually, the wealthy did too, until the emperors claimed it as their exclusive privilege.
14. There were several kinds of shell-fish, from which this coloring substance was obtained, each of which communicated a shade somewhat different from the others. The kind collected near Tyre was the best; and hence the Tyrian purple acquired especial celebrity. So highly was it esteemed by the Romans, in the time of Augustus, that wool imbued with this color was sold for one thousand denarii per pound, which, in our currency, amounts to one hundred and sixty-eight dollars.
14. There were several types of shellfish that produced this dye, each giving a slightly different shade. The ones gathered near Tyre were the finest, which is why Tyrian purple became especially famous. It was so valued by the Romans during Augustus’s time that wool dyed with this color sold for one thousand denarii per pound, which is equivalent to one hundred and sixty-eight dollars today.
15. After all, the boasted purple of antiquity is supposed to have been a very inferior dye, when compared with many which we now possess; and this is only one among many instances, wherein modern science has given us a decided superiority over the ancients.
15. After all, the famous purple from ancient times was actually considered a pretty low-quality dye compared to many we have today; and this is just one of many examples where modern science has given us a clear advantage over the ancients.
16. The color, second in repute with the people of antiquity, was scarlet. This color was communicated by means of an insect, called coccus, and which is now denominated kermes. Besides the various hues of purple and scarlet, several others were in[81] some degree of favor; such as green, orange, and blue. The use of vegetable dyes appears to have been but little known to the Romans; but the Gauls had the knowledge of imparting various colors, even the purple and scarlet, with the juice of certain herbs.
16. The color that was second in popularity among people in ancient times was scarlet. This color was created using an insect called coccus, now known as kermes. In addition to the various shades of purple and scarlet, several other colors were somewhat favored, like green, orange, and blue. The Romans seemed to have little knowledge of using plant-based dyes, but the Gauls were skilled at producing a range of colors, including purple and scarlet, from the juices of certain herbs.
17. The irruption of the northern barbarians into the Roman empire, destroyed this, with the rest of the arts of civilization, in the western parts of Europe; but, having been preserved, more or less, in the East, it was again revived in the West, principally by means of the intercourse arising from the Crusades.
17. The invasion of the northern tribes into the Roman Empire wiped out the empire and the rest of civilization in western Europe. However, since it was somewhat preserved in the East, it was later revived in the West, mainly through the exchanges that happened during the Crusades.
18. Although indigo seems to have been known to the ancient Greeks and Romans, yet it does not appear to have been used for dyeing. The first that was applied to this purpose in Europe, was brought from India by the Dutch; but its general use was not established without much opposition from interested individuals. It was strictly prohibited in England, in the reign of Elizabeth, and, about the same time, in Saxony. Many valuable acquisitions were made to the materials employed in this art, on the discovery of America, among which may be enumerated, cochineal, logwood, Brazil-wood, and Nicaragua, together with the soft maple and quercitron barks.
18. Although indigo seems to have been known to the ancient Greeks and Romans, it doesn't seem to have been used for dyeing. The first to be used for this purpose in Europe was brought from India by the Dutch, but its widespread use faced a lot of opposition from those with vested interests. It was strictly banned in England during the reign of Elizabeth, and around the same time, in Saxony. Many valuable materials were added to this craft with the discovery of America, including cochineal, logwood, Brazil-wood, and Nicaragua, as well as the soft maple and quercitron barks.
19. The first book on the art of dyeing was published in 1429. This, of course, appeared in manuscript, as the art of printing had not then been discovered. An edition was printed in 1510. The authors to whom the world is most indebted for correct information on this subject, are Dufuy, Hallet, Macquir, and Berthollet, of France; and Henry and Bancroft, of England; all of whom wrote in the eighteenth century.[82]
19. The first book on the art of dyeing was published in 1429. At that time, it was only available in manuscript form since the printing press had not yet been invented. An edition was later printed in 1510. The authors who have contributed the most accurate information on this topic are Dufuy, Hallet, Macquir, and Berthollet from France, as well as Henry and Bancroft from England, all of whom wrote in the eighteenth century.[82]
THE CALICO-PRINTER.
1. Calico-printing is a combination of the arts of dyeing, engraving, and printing, wherewith colors are applied in definite figures. This art is applicable to woven fabrics, and chiefly to those of which the material is cotton.
1. Calico printing is a mix of dyeing, engraving, and printing techniques that apply colors in specific patterns. This art form is used on woven fabrics, especially those made from cotton.
2. The first object, after preparing the stuffs, as in dyeing, is to apply a mordant to those parts of the piece which are to receive the color. This is now usually done by means of a steel or copper cylinder, on which have been engraved the proposed figures, as on plates for copperplate-printing.
2. The first step, after getting everything ready, like in dyeing, is to apply a mordant to the sections of the fabric that will get the color. This is now typically done with a steel or copper cylinder that has the intended designs engraved on it, similar to plates used for copperplate printing.
3. During the printing, the cylinder, in one part of its revolution, becomes charged with the mordant, the superfluous part of which is scraped off by a straight steel edge, leaving only the portion which fills the lines of the figures. As the cylinder revolves, the cloth comes into forcible contact with it, and receives the complete impression of the figures, in the pale color of the mordant.
3. During the printing process, the cylinder, at one point in its rotation, gets coated with the mordant, with any excess being scraped off by a straight steel edge, leaving just the part that fills the lines of the designs. As the cylinder turns, the fabric comes into strong contact with it and takes on the full impression of the designs in the light color of the mordant.
4. The cloth, after having been washed and dried, is passed through the coloring bath, in which the parts previously printed, become permanently dyed with the intended color. Although the whole piece receives the dye, yet, by washing the cloth, and bleaching it on the grass in the open air, the color is discharged from those parts not impregnated with the mordant.
4. The fabric, after being washed and dried, is placed in the coloring bath, where the areas that were previously printed become permanently dyed with the intended color. While the entire piece gets dyed, washing the fabric and bleaching it outdoors on the grass removes the color from areas that weren't treated with the mordant.
5. By the use of different mordants, successively applied, and a single dye, several colors are often communicated to the same piece of cloth; thus, if stripes are first made with the acetate of alumina, and then others with the acetate of iron, a coloring bath of madder will produce red and brown stripes. The same mordants, with a dye of quercitron bark, give yellow and olive or drab.
5. By using different mordants applied one after the other, along with a single dye, you can often achieve several colors on the same piece of cloth. For example, if you first use aluminum acetate to create stripes and then apply iron acetate for additional ones, a dye bath of madder will result in red and brown stripes. Similarly, using the same mordants with quercitron bark dye will yield yellow and olive or drab colors.
6. Sometimes, the second mordant is applied by[83] means of engravings on wooden blocks. Cuts, designed for this purpose, are engraved on the side of the grain, and not on the end, like those for printing books.
6. Sometimes, the second mordant is applied by[83] using engravings on wooden blocks. The cuts made for this purpose are engraved on the side of the grain, not on the end, like those used for printing books.
7. Calico-printing, so far as chemical affinities are concerned, is the same with dyeing. The difference consists, chiefly, in the mode of applying the materials, so as to communicate the desired tints and figures. The dye-stuffs, most commonly employed by calico-printers, are indigo, madder, and quercitron bark; by a dexterous application of these and the mordants, a great variety of colors can be produced. Indigo, being a substantive color, does not require the aid of mordants, but, like them, when other dyes are used, is applied directly to the cloth, sometimes by the engraved cylinder or block, and at others with the pencil by hand.
7. Calico-printing, in terms of chemical bonds, is similar to dyeing. The main difference lies in how the materials are applied to create the desired colors and patterns. The dye materials most commonly used by calico printers are indigo, madder, and quercitron bark; through skillful application of these along with the mordants, a wide variety of colors can be achieved. Indigo, being a strong color, does not need mordants, but like them, when other dyes are used, it is applied directly to the fabric, sometimes using an engraved cylinder or block, and at other times by hand with a brush.
8. Calico-printing was practised in India twenty-two centuries ago, when Alexander the Great visited that country with his victorious army. The operation was then performed with a pencil. This method is still used in the East to the exclusion of every other. The art was also practised in Egypt in Pliny's time.
8. Calico printing was done in India twenty-two centuries ago when Alexander the Great came to that country with his victorious army. Back then, it was done using a pencil. This method is still used in the East to the exclusion of all others. The art was also practiced in Egypt during Pliny's time.
9. Calicoes were first brought to England in the year 1631. They derive their name from the city of Calicut, whence they were first exported to Europe. This branch of business was introduced into London in the year 1676. Since that time, it has been encouraged by several acts of Parliament; but it never became extensive in England, until the introduction of machinery for spinning cotton. It is supposed, that the amount of cottons annually printed in the United States, cannot be less than twenty millions of yards.
9. Calicoes were first brought to England in 1631. They get their name from the city of Calicut, where they were first exported to Europe. This business started in London in 1676. Since then, several acts of Parliament have supported it, but it never became widespread in England until cotton-spinning machinery was introduced. It's estimated that the amount of cotton printed annually in the United States is no less than twenty million yards.

THE HATTER.
1. The business, peculiar to the hatter, consists in making hats from the fur or hair of animals, by the process called felting. The hair of animals is the only material which can be firmly matted together in this way; yet, that of every animal is not suitable for this purpose. The fur of the beaver, the otter, the seal, the muskrat, the rabbit, the hare, the coney, and the nutria, together with the wool of the lama, sheep, and camel, are employed to the exclusion of almost every other.
1. The hat-making business involves crafting hats from the fur or hair of animals through a process called felting. Animal hair is the only material that can be tightly matted together like this; however, not every type of animal hair works for this purpose. The fur from beavers, otters, seals, muskrats, rabbits, hares, coneys, and nutrias, along with the wool from llamas, sheep, and camels, is used, excluding almost all other materials.
2. The skin of all animals having fur, is covered with two kinds of hair; the one, long and coarse; the other, short, fine, and thickly set. The coarse hair is pulled out from the skin, by the aid of a shoe-knife, and thrown away, while the fine, which is the[85] fur, is cut from it with one of a circular form, such as the saddlers and harness-makers use in cutting leather.
2. The fur of all animals that have hair is covered with two types of hair: one is long and coarse, while the other is short, fine, and densely packed. The coarse hair is pulled out from the skin using a shoe knife and discarded, whereas the fine hair, known as the[85] fur, is cut off using a circular tool, similar to those used by saddlers and harness makers for cutting leather.
3. In the application of the materials, the first object of the hatter is to make the body. In the common three, four, and five dollar hats, the body is composed of the wool of the sheep; but, in those of greater value, it is usually made of the wool of the lama, and different kinds of cheap furs. In describing the process of making hats, one of the latter kind will be selected.
3. In making hats, the first goal of the hat maker is to create the body. For the common three, four, and five-dollar hats, the body is made from sheep's wool; however, for more expensive hats, it's typically made from llama wool and various types of affordable furs. When explaining how hats are made, we will focus on one of the cheaper types.
4. A sufficient quantity of the materials for the body is weighed out, and divided into two equal parts. One of these is placed on a table, or, as the hatters call it, a hurl. The individual hairs composing this portion, are separated, and lightly and regularly spread out into a proper form, by the vibrations of a bow-string, which is plucked with a wooden pin.
4. A sufficient amount of the materials for the body is measured out and split into two equal parts. One of these is placed on a table, or, as the hatters call it, a hurl. The individual hairs in this portion are separated and evenly spread into the correct shape by the vibrations of a bowstring, which is plucked with a wooden pin.
5. The fur is then carefully compressed with a flat piece of wicker-work, denominated a hatter's basket, and covered with a damp piece of linen cloth, in which it is afterwards folded, pressed, and worked, with the hands, until it becomes matted together into a bat. This bat is next folded over a triangular piece of paper, and formed into a conical cap.
5. The fur is then carefully compressed with a flat wicker basket, called a hatter's basket, and covered with a damp piece of linen cloth. It is then folded, pressed, and worked by hand until it becomes matted together into a bat. This bat is next folded over a triangular piece of paper and shaped into a conical cap.
6. When another bat has been made in the same way, from the other half of the materials, the two are put together to form one, which is then worked in the damp cloth as before, until it is much contracted and matted together. After this, having been conveyed to another room, it is rolled in a woollen cloth, pressed, rubbed, and worked, with the hands and a rolling-pin, around a kettle of hot water, into which it is often plunged during the operation, which is called planking.
6. When another bat is made in the same way, using the other half of the materials, the two are combined to create one, which is then worked with damp cloth as before, until it’s significantly contracted and matted together. After this, it is moved to another room, rolled in a woollen cloth, pressed, rubbed, and worked with hands and a rolling pin around a kettle of hot water, into which it is often dipped during the process, referred to as planking.
7. In this way, the materials are consolidated into felt, and the body contracted to the proper size. The[86] reason why the process just described produces this effect, may be found in the nature of the fibres themselves. Upon a close examination, it will be observed, that these are covered with little scales, or beards, which admit of motion in one direction, but retard it in the other. This peculiar formation causes them to interlock in such a way as to become closely matted together.
7. This way, the materials are merged into felt, and the body is shrunk to the right size. The[86] reason this process produces this effect lies in the nature of the fibers themselves. A close look reveals that these fibers are covered with tiny scales, or beards, that allow movement in one direction but slow it down in the opposite direction. This unique structure makes them intertwine and become tightly matted together.
8. When the body has been dried, and shaved on the knee with a sharp knife, to free it from projecting filaments, it is stiffened with gum-shellac dissolved in alcohol, and then steamed in a box, to cause the stiffening to set. It is now prepared for being napped.
8. When the body has been dried and shaved on the knee with a sharp knife to remove any sticking out fibers, it is stiffened with gum-shellac dissolved in alcohol, and then steamed in a box to make the stiffening set. It is now ready to be napped.
9. The fur for the nap is prepared on the hurl, like the conical cap first described. In applying the nap to the body, the latter is wet with hot water, and flakes of the former are matted down upon it, by working it on the planks around the kettle. After three layers have been put on in this way, the cap is beaten, while wet, with sticks, to raise the nap, and then drawn over a cylindrical block, which gives it the general form of a hat.
9. The fur for the nap is prepared on the hurl, just like the conical cap described earlier. To apply the nap to the body, it’s dampened with hot water, and flakes of the fur are pressed onto it by working it on the planks around the kettle. After three layers have been added this way, the cap is beaten, while still wet, with sticks to raise the nap, and then pulled over a cylindrical block, which shapes it into the general form of a hat.
10. The nap having been raised with a card, the hat is prepared to be colored. The dye is made, chiefly, of the extract of logwood, copperas, and verdigris. The hats, to the number of forty-eight or more, are hung upon a wheel by means of pegs, which pass through the centre of the blocks. This wheel can be turned, so as to keep one half of the hats alternately in the dye. After having been properly colored, they are taken from the blocks, washed, and dried.
10. Once the nap has been lifted with a card, the hat is ready to be dyed. The dye is mostly made from logwood extract, copperas, and verdigris. Forty-eight or more hats are hung on a wheel using pegs that go through the center of the blocks. This wheel can be turned to keep one half of the hats alternately in the dye. After they’ve been properly dyed, they are removed from the blocks, washed, and dried.
11. The hat is now prepared for the finisher, who first whips up the nap with a ratan, and, after having rendered it pliable with steam, draws it over the finishing block. The fibres composing the nap, are properly disposed with a card and brush, and rendered smooth and glossy by means of a hot iron. The superfluous[87] part of the rim is cut off with a blade, placed in a gauge. The hat is finished by adding suitable trimmings, the nature of which, and the mode of application, can be easily learned by examining different kinds of hats.
11. The hat is now ready for the finisher, who first raises the nap with a rattan, and after making it flexible with steam, stretches it over the finishing block. The fibers that make up the nap are properly arranged with a card and brush, and made smooth and shiny with a hot iron. The excess[87] part of the rim is trimmed with a blade using a gauge. The final touches are added with appropriate trimmings, which can be easily learned by looking at different types of hats.
12. Hats of various colors have been worn; but those most in use are black, white, and drab. The white hats, which are intended only for ladies and children, have a nap of rabbits' fur, selected from the white skins. Drab hats are also made of stuffs of the natural color, assorted for that purpose.
12. Hats in different colors have been worn; however, the most common ones are black, white, and gray. The white hats, intended exclusively for women and children, are made from rabbit fur, chosen from the white pelts. Gray hats are also made from materials in their natural color, specifically selected for that purpose.
13. The value of hats depends, of course, upon the workmanship, and the cost of the materials used in the manufacture. So great is the difference in these respects, that their price ranges between seventy-five cents and fifteen dollars. The woollen bodies used by hatters are now often procured from persons, who devote their attention exclusively to their manufacture.
13. The value of hats depends on the quality of workmanship and the cost of the materials used to make them. There's such a wide range in these aspects that prices vary from seventy-five cents to fifteen dollars. Hat makers often get the woolen materials from people who focus solely on producing them.
14. Several years ago, woollen cloths were made in England, by the process of felting; but, on trial, they were found to be deficient in firmness and durability. Since the year 1840, an American citizen has been manufacturing cloths by this method; but, whether they are liable to the objection just mentioned, is yet uncertain.
14. Several years ago, woolen fabrics were produced in England through felting; however, they were found to be lacking in strength and durability. Since 1840, an American has been making fabrics using this technique, but it's still unclear if they have the same issues mentioned earlier.
15. Some kind of covering for the head, either for defence or ornament, appears to have been usually worn in all ages and countries, where the inhabitants have made the least progress in the arts of civilized life.
15. Some sort of head covering, whether for protection or decoration, seems to have been commonly worn throughout history in all cultures where people have made minimal advancements in the arts of civilized life.
16. The form, substance, and color, of this article of dress, have been exceedingly various in different ages, according to the circumstances or humor of the wearer. The ancient Persians wore turbans, similar to those of the modern Turks; and the nations inhabiting the Indian Peninsula, wore a kind of head-dress[88] so large, that it divested the person of all proportion.
16. The style, material, and color of this piece of clothing have varied greatly over different time periods, depending on the circumstances or preferences of the wearer. The ancient Persians wore turbans similar to those of modern Turks, while the people living on the Indian Peninsula wore a type of headwear[88] that was so large it made the person look out of proportion.
17. The imperial turban is said to have been composed of a great many yards of muslin, twisted and formed into a shape nearly oval, and surmounted with a woollen cap, encircled with a radiated crown. The turban of the prime minister was smaller in its dimensions, but of greater altitude. The chief magi, on account of his superior eminence, wore a higher turban than those of the monarch and minister united. Those worn by the inferior magi, were regulated by the dignity of the stations which they held.
17. The imperial turban is said to have been made from a large amount of muslin, twisted and shaped into an almost oval form, topped with a wool cap surrounded by a radiant crown. The prime minister's turban was smaller in size but taller. The chief magus, due to his higher status, wore a taller turban than both the monarch and the minister combined. The turbans worn by the lower-ranking magi were based on the level of dignity associated with their positions.
18. The Jewish people and the neighboring nations borrowed the turban from the Persians; but, at a later period, they very commonly adopted the cap which the Romans were accustomed to give to their slaves, on their manumission.
18. The Jewish people and the neighboring nations borrowed the turban from the Persians; however, later on, they frequently adopted the cap that the Romans used to give to their slaves upon their release.
19. The ancient helmet, made of steel, brass, and sometimes of more costly materials, was worn as a piece of defensive armor in war, instead of the ordinary coverings, used while engaged in peaceful occupations.
19. The old helmet, made of steel, brass, and sometimes fancier materials, was worn as a type of protective gear in battle, instead of the regular headgear used during peaceful activities.
20. Roman citizens went bare-headed, except upon occasions of sacred rites, games, and festivals; or when engaged in travelling or in war. They were accustomed, however, in the city, to throw over their head the lappet of their toga, as a screen from the wind or sun. The people of Scotland used to wear a kind of bonnet, as in some parts of that country they do at the present time; and the English, before the invention of felt hats, covered the head with knit caps and cloth hoods, and sometimes with hats made of thrummed silk.
20. Roman citizens went without hats, except during religious ceremonies, games, and festivals, or when traveling or fighting. However, in the city, they were used to draping the edge of their toga over their heads for protection from the wind or sun. People in Scotland traditionally wore a type of bonnet, similar to what is still worn in some areas today; and the English, before felt hats were invented, covered their heads with knitted caps and cloth hoods, and sometimes with hats made from thick silk.
21. The Chinese do not wear hats, but use a cap of peculiar structure, which the laws of civility will not allow them to put off in public. The form and material of this is varied with the change of the season.[89] That used in summer is shaped like a cone, is made of a beautiful kind of mat, and lined with satin; to this is added, at the top, a large tuft of red silk, which falls all round to the lower part of the cap, and which fluctuates gracefully on all sides, while the wearer is in motion. The kind worn in winter is made of shaggy cloth, bordered with some kind of fur, and ornamented in a similar manner.
21. The Chinese don't wear hats but use a uniquely structured cap that they are expected to keep on in public. Its design and material change with the seasons.[89] The summer cap is cone-shaped, made of a beautiful mat, and lined with satin; it has a large tuft of red silk on top that hangs down around the cap and sways gracefully when the wearer moves. The winter version is made of shaggy cloth, trimmed with fur, and decorated similarly.
22. Head-dresses, from their variety, simplicity, and mutability, were but little regulated by commercial or manufacturing interests, until the introduction of felt hats, which has occasioned a uniformity in this article of dress, unknown in former ages.
22. Headwear, due to its variety, simplicity, and tendency to change, was not heavily influenced by commercial or manufacturing interests until the arrival of felt hats, which brought about a level of uniformity in this type of clothing that was unheard of in earlier times.
23. Curiosity is naturally excited to become acquainted with the particulars of the invention of the hat, and the subsequent stages of improvement in the manufacture. But the operation of individual interest, so generally connected with the useful arts, seems to have concealed the whole in obscurity; and little information on the subject can now be obtained.
23. People are naturally curious to learn about the details of how the hat was invented and the later improvements in its production. However, the personal interests often tied to useful arts seem to have shrouded the whole process in mystery, making it difficult to find much information on the topic today.
24. The hatters have a tradition, that the art of felting originated with St. Clement, the fourth bishop of Rome. Under this impression, in Catholic countries, they adopt him as their patron saint, and hold an annual festival in his honor. The principle of felting is said to have been suggested to his mind by the following circumstance; while fleeing from his persecutors, his feet became blistered, and, to obtain relief, he placed wool between them and his sandals. On continuing his journey, the wool, by the perspiration, motion, and pressure of the feet, assumed a compact form.
24. Hatters have a tradition that the art of felting started with St. Clement, the fourth bishop of Rome. Because of this belief, in Catholic countries, they consider him their patron saint and hold an annual festival in his honor. The idea of felting is said to have come to him during a particular incident; while escaping from his persecutors, his feet became blistered, and to find relief, he put wool between them and his sandals. As he continued on his journey, the wool, due to sweat, movement, and pressure from his feet, formed into a solid shape.
25. Notwithstanding this tradition, it appears, that felt hats were invented at Paris, by a Swiss, about the commencement of the fifteenth century; but they were not generally known, until Charles the Seventh made his triumphal entry into Rouen, in the year[90] 1492, when he astonished the people by wearing a hat, lined with red silk, and surmounted with a plume of feathers.
25. Despite this tradition, it seems that felt hats were created in Paris by a Swiss person around the beginning of the fifteenth century; however, they didn't become widely recognized until Charles the Seventh made his triumphant entrance into Rouen in the year [90] 1492, when he amazed the crowd by wearing a hat lined with red silk and topped with a feather plume.
26. When some of the clergy first adopted this article of dress, it was considered an unwarrantable indulgence. Councils were held, and regulations published, forbidding any priest or monk to appear abroad wearing a hat; and enjoining them to keep to the use of chaperons, or hoods, made of black cloth, with decent cornets; if they were poor, they were, at least to have cornets fastened to their hats, upon penalty of suspension and excommunication.
26. When some clergy members first started wearing this type of clothing, it was seen as an unacceptable luxury. Councils were convened, and rules were established that prohibited any priest or monk from going out in a hat; they were required to wear chaperons or hoods made of black cloth with proper cornets. If they were poor, they at least had to have cornets attached to their hats, under the threat of suspension and excommunication.
27. At length, however, the pope permitted even the cardinals to wear hats; but, enjoined them to wear those of a red color at public ceremonials, in token of their readiness to spill their blood for their religion.
27. Eventually, the pope allowed even the cardinals to wear hats; however, he instructed them to wear red ones during public ceremonies as a symbol of their willingness to shed their blood for their faith.
28. In England, considerable opposition was made to the use of the hat. By a statute, enacted in the thirteenth year of the reign of Elizabeth, every person between certain ages was obliged, on Sundays and holidays, to wear a woollen cap, made by some of the cappers of that kingdom, under the penalty of three shillings and four-pence for every day's neglect. This law continued in force, for about twenty-five years. The manufacture of hats was commenced, in England, in the time of Henry the Eighth, by Dutchmen and Spaniards.
28. In England, there was a lot of opposition to wearing hats. A law passed in the thirteenth year of Elizabeth's reign required everyone within certain age groups to wear a woolen cap made by local cap-makers on Sundays and holidays, with a fine of three shillings and four pence for each day they didn't comply. This law remained active for about twenty-five years. Hat production started in England during the time of Henry the Eighth, introduced by Dutch and Spanish craftsmen.
29. Hats made of plaited straw, grass, or chip, are much used in the summer; and caps of cloth or fur are now frequently substituted for hats, in cold weather. Silk hats have also been much worn, since the year 1825. They are made of the common hat body, and a texture of silk with a long nap. The silk is fastened to the body with glue.
29. Straw, grass, or woven chip hats are commonly worn in the summer, and cloth or fur caps are often used instead of hats during colder weather. Silk hats have also been popular since 1825. They are made of a standard hat base and a silky fabric with a long nap. The silk is attached to the base with glue.

THE ROPE-MAKER.
1. Ropes may be made of any vegetable substance which has a fibre sufficiently flexible and tenacious. The Chinese and other orientals, in making ropes, use the ligneous parts of certain bamboos and reeds, the fibrous covering of the cocoa-nut, the filaments of the cotton pod, and the leaves of certain grasses; but the bark of plants and trees, is the most productive of fibrous matter suitable to this manufacture. That of the linden-tree, the willow, and the bramble is frequently used. In Europe and America, however, the fibres of hemp and flax are more frequently employed, for this purpose, than any other material.
1. Ropes can be made from any plant material that has fibers that are flexible and strong. The Chinese and other people in the East use the woody parts of certain bamboos and reeds, the fibrous covering of coconuts, cotton fibers, and the leaves of specific grasses to make ropes. However, the bark of various plants and trees is the most abundant source of suitable fibers for this purpose. The bark from linden trees, willows, and brambles is commonly used. In Europe and America, though, hemp and flax fibers are more often used for this than any other materials.
2. The operations of rope-making are commonly performed in rope-walks, which are sometimes more than a quarter of a mile in length. These are usually[92] covered with a slight shed, the nature and appearance of which are well exhibited in the preceding picture.
2. The process of making ropes usually takes place in rope-walks, which can be over a quarter of a mile long. These are typically[92] covered with a simple shed, the design and look of which are clearly shown in the picture above.
3. The first part of the process consists in spinning the material into yarn. The principle on which this is effected, is the same as that by which cotton or wool is drawn out and twisted into threads, although the machinery, and the mode of operating, are different.
3. The first part of the process involves spinning the material into yarn. The principle behind this is the same as the way cotton or wool is pulled out and twisted into threads, although the machinery and methods used are different.
4. The kind of wheel employed in spinning rope-yarn, is also exhibited in the cut. A band passes around the periphery, and over the semicircle above it, in which is placed a number of wheels, the pivots of which terminate, on the other side, in a small hook.
4. The type of wheel used for spinning rope yarn is also shown in the image. A band goes around the edge and over the semicircle above it, where several wheels are positioned. The pivots of these wheels end on the other side with a small hook.
5. The spinner, having a quantity of the material properly disposed about the waist, attaches a number of fibres to one of the hooks, which, being put in motion by the band passing over the whirl, twists them rapidly into yarn. The part already twisted draws along with it more fibres from the bundle, and, as the spinner is regulating their uniform arrangement, he walks backward towards the other end of the walk.
5. The spinner, with a bundle of material securely fastened around the waist, attaches several fibers to one of the hooks. When the band passing over the spindle starts moving, it quickly twists them into yarn. The already twisted part pulls more fibers from the bundle, and as the spinner adjusts their even arrangement, he walks backward toward the other end of the path.
6. When the thread has been spun to the proposed length, the spinner cries out to another, who immediately takes it off from the hook, gives it to a third person, and, in turn, attaches his own fibres to the same hook. In the meantime, the first spinner keeps fast hold of the end of his yarn, to prevent it from untwisting or doubling; and, as it is wound on the reel, proceeds up the walk, keeping the yarn of an equal tension throughout.
6. When the thread has been spun to the desired length, the spinner calls out to another person, who quickly takes it off the hook, hands it to a third person, and then adds their own fibers to the same hook. Meanwhile, the first spinner holds the end of their yarn tightly to keep it from unraveling or doubling; and as it is wound on the reel, they move up the path, maintaining an even tension on the yarn throughout.
7. The second part of the process consists in forming the yarn into various kinds of ropes. The component parts of cordage are called strands; and the operation of uniting them with a permanent twist, is[93] called laying, when applied to small ropes, and closing, when applied to cables or other large ropes.
7. The second part of the process involves turning the yarn into different types of ropes. The individual parts of cordage are known as strands, and the action of twisting them together in a permanent way is [93] called laying for small ropes and closing for cables or other large ropes.
8. The simplest twist is formed of two strands. The thread used by sail-makers, and pack-thread, furnish examples of this kind; but cordage with two strands is not much used; that with three is the most usual. Lines and cords less than one and a half inches in circumference, are laid by means of the spinning-wheel. Preparatory to this operation, the workman fastens the hither end of the yarns to separate whirl-hooks, and the remote ends to the hook of a swivel, called the loper.
8. The simplest twist is made from two strands. Examples of this include the thread used by sail-makers and pack-thread; however, cordage with two strands isn't very common; three strands are more typical. Lines and cords that are less than one and a half inches in circumference are created using a spinning wheel. Before starting this process, the worker attaches one end of the yarns to separate whirl-hooks and the other ends to the hook of a swivel known as the loper.
9. The strands having been properly distended, the spinning-wheel is turned in the same direction as when twisting the yarns. A further twisting of the strands, during this part of the process, is prevented by the motion of the loper, which gives way to the strain, and, at the same time, causes the strands to entwine about each other, and form a cord. To prevent them from entwining too rapidly, an instrument is interposed, which, from its form, is called the top. It has two or more notches, which terminate at the apex, and a handle, called a staff. As the top is moved from the loper to the wheel, it regulates the degree of twist which the cord or rope is to receive.
9. Once the strands have been properly stretched, the spinning wheel is turned in the same direction as when twisting the yarn. The further twisting of the strands during this part of the process is prevented by the motion of the loper, which eases the strain and simultaneously causes the strands to wrap around each other, forming a cord. To keep them from intertwining too quickly, a tool is used, which is shaped like a top. It has two or more notches that end at the point and a handle called a staff. As the top is moved from the loper to the wheel, it controls the amount of twist the cord or rope gets.
10. The principle on which large cordage is laid, or closed, is the same, although some part of the machinery is different. The strands for large ropes and cables are formed of many yarns, and require considerable hardening. This cannot be done with whirls driven by a wheel-band; it requires the power of a crank, turned by hand, or by some other considerable force. The strands, also, when properly hardened, become very stiff, and, when bent round the top, cannot transmit force enough to close the unpliant rope: it is, therefore, necessary that the loper, also, be moved by a crank.[94]
10. The method for laying or closing large cordage is the same, even though some parts of the machinery differ. The strands for large ropes and cables are made up of many yarns and need significant hardening. This can't be done with whirls driven by a wheel-band; it requires the power of a crank, turned by hand, or some other considerable force. When the strands are properly hardened, they become very stiff, and when bent around the top, they can't transmit enough force to close the inflexible rope: therefore, it's necessary for the loper to also be moved by a crank.[94]
11. Cordage, which is to be exposed to the alternate action of air and water, is usually tarred. The application of this substance is made, in most cases, while the material is in a state of yarn. In effecting this object, the threads are drawn through boiling tar, and then passed between rollers, or through holes surrounded with oakum, to remove the superfluous tar. In like manner, ropes and cables are superficially tarred.
11. Rope that will be exposed to both air and water is usually coated with tar. This is typically done while the material is still in yarn form. To achieve this, the threads are pulled through boiling tar and then passed between rollers or through openings filled with oakum to get rid of the excess tar. Similarly, ropes and cables are coated with tar on the surface.
12. Various improvements have been made in the machinery, for performing the different operations of rope-making; but, these not having been generally adopted, it is unnecessary to notice them more particularly; especially, as they do not affect the general principles of the art.
12. Various improvements have been made to the machinery used for different operations in rope-making; however, since these improvements haven't been widely adopted, there's no need to go into detail about them, especially since they don't change the fundamental principles of the craft.
13. Within a few years, cotton-yarn has been employed in the manufacture of ropes; but this material has not yet been sufficiently tested, to determine its fitness for the purpose. A kind of vegetable fibre, brought from Manilla, and hence called Manilla hemp, is very extensively applied in making ropes, and, for some purposes, is preferred to other materials.
13. In just a few years, cotton yarn has been used to make ropes; however, this material hasn't been thoroughly tested yet to see if it's suitable for that. A type of plant fiber from Manila, known as Manila hemp, is widely used in rope making and is preferred over other materials for certain purposes.
14. The intestines of animals are composed of very powerful fibres, and those of sheep and lambs are manufactured into what is called cat-gut, for the use of musical instrument-makers, hatters, watch-makers, and a variety of other artificers. Animal hair, as that from the tail and mane of horses, is frequently employed as the material for ropes; and such are durable, elastic, and impervious to moisture. They, however, are not applicable in cases, where the rope is subject to considerable friction.
14. The intestines of animals are made up of very strong fibers, and those from sheep and lambs are turned into what is called cat-gut, for use by musical instrument makers, hat makers, watch makers, and many other craftsmen. Animal hair, like that from the tails and manes of horses, is often used to make ropes; these ropes are durable, flexible, and resistant to moisture. However, they are not suitable for situations where the rope will experience a lot of friction.
15. Hemp is cultivated in various parts of the world, and especially in Russia, whence it is exported to other countries in great quantities. It is also produced, to a considerable extent, in the state of Kentucky, and in many other parts of the United States.[95] Flax is still more generally cultivated than hemp; but its chief application is to the manufacture of cloth, as it does not answer well for any cordage larger than a bed-cord. The formation of cloth from hemp is also very common; and, in this case, the yarn for the coarse cloths is spun on the rope-maker's wheel in the manner already described. The cloth is generally used for making bags, sacking-bottoms for beds, and sails for vessels.
15. Hemp is grown in various parts of the world, especially in Russia, from where it is exported to other countries in large quantities. It's also produced significantly in Kentucky and many other areas of the United States.[95] Flax is even more widely cultivated than hemp; however, its primary use is for making cloth, as it isn't suitable for any cordage thicker than a bed cord. Creating cloth from hemp is also quite common, and in this case, the yarn for the rough textiles is spun using a rope-maker's wheel in the way previously described. The cloth is usually used to make bags, sacking bottoms for beds, and sails for boats.
16. Rope-making is a manufacture of general utility, as cordage of some kind is used more or less in every family in all civilized communities; nor are there many trades capable of being carried on, with convenience, without it. But the great utility of cordage, in all its varieties, is most conspicuous in the rigging and equipment of vessels; and the extensive demand for it, in this application, renders rope-making one of the most important and extensive of the primitive trades.
16. Rope-making is a process that's incredibly useful because everyone in civilized communities uses some type of cord in their homes. Not many trades can function smoothly without it. However, the real importance of cordage, in all its forms, is most visible in the rigging and outfitting of ships; the huge demand for it in this area makes rope-making one of the most significant and widespread of the traditional trades.
17. Nor does the utility of cordage end with its application to the purposes for which it was originally designed. Old ropes are converted into oakum by untwisting and picking them to pieces. The oakum thus produced is driven into the seams of vessels, to render them water-tight.
17. The usefulness of ropes doesn't stop with their original purpose. Old ropes can be turned into oakum by untwisting and breaking them apart. The oakum that's created is then packed into the seams of boats to make them waterproof.
18. As regards the invention of this art, nothing can be gathered from ancient records. We only know, in general, that cordage was in considerable use among the nations of antiquity, especially among the Greeks and Romans, who probably learned its application to rigging vessels from the Phœnicians.
18. When it comes to the invention of this craft, we can't find much in ancient records. All we know is that rope-making was widely used by ancient civilizations, especially the Greeks and Romans, who likely learned how to use it for ship rigging from the Phoenicians.

THE TAILOR.
1. The business of the tailor consists, principally, in cutting out and making clothes for men and boys, together with habits and cloaks for ladies. It is usual for persons who carry on this business in cities and large towns, to keep a stock of cloths and other stuffs adapted to the season, which they make up into garments to the order of customers. In such cases, they are termed merchant tailors.
1. The job of a tailor mainly involves cutting and creating clothing for men and boys, as well as dresses and coats for women. It's common for people running this business in cities and large towns to have a selection of fabrics and materials suited for the season, which they tailor into garments based on customer requests. In these situations, they are referred to as merchant tailors.
2. The operation, preparatory to cutting out the cloth for a garment, is that of taking the measure of the person for whom it is designed. This is done with a narrow strip of paper or parchment, and the dimensions are either marked on the measure with the scissors, or entered in a pattern-book kept for the purpose.[97]
2. The first step before cutting the fabric for a piece of clothing is measuring the person it’s for. This is done using a narrow strip of paper or parchment, and the measurements are either marked on the strip with scissors or recorded in a pattern-book kept for this purpose.[97]
3. The cloth is cut to the proper shape, with a large pair of shears. This is performed either by the individual who carries on the business, or by a foreman. The parts are sewed together, and the trimmings applied, by means of thread and silk; this is commonly done by those who devote their attention to this branch of the trade. It sometimes happens, however, that the same person performs the whole of the work, particularly in country places, where the business is very limited in extent.
3. The fabric is cut into the right shape using a large pair of scissors. This is done either by the business owner or by a supervisor. The pieces are stitched together, and the finishing touches are added, using thread and silk; this is usually done by those who focus on this part of the trade. However, it’s sometimes the case that one person does all the work, especially in rural areas where the business is quite small.
4. Females often serve an apprenticeship to this business. Many of them learn to cut out, and make with skill, certain kinds of garments, and are after wards employed in families, or by the tailors. Most of the ready-made clothing, kept for sale in cities, is made up by females.
4. Women often train in this profession. Many of them learn to cut and skillfully make certain types of clothing, and are later employed by families or tailors. Most of the ready-made clothes available for sale in cities are produced by women.
5. The instruments employed in performing the operations of the tailor, are few and simple; the principal of these are the shears, the scissors, the needle, the thimble, the bodkin, the goose, and the press-board.
5. The tools used by tailors for their work are few and straightforward. The main ones are shears, scissors, a needle, a thimble, a bodkin, a goose, and a press-board.
6. The great art of a master tailor consists in fitting the dress to his customer, in such a manner as to conceal any defect of form, and display his person to the best advantage. He should, therefore, be a good judge of the human figure; as, from this knowledge, arises, chiefly, the superiority of one workman over another in this branch of the business.
6. The true skill of a master tailor lies in making clothes that fit his customer perfectly, hiding any flaws in their shape, and showing off their best features. Therefore, he needs to have a keen eye for the human figure; this knowledge is what mainly sets one craftsman apart from another in this field.
7. The first hint on the art of clothing the human body, was given to man by the Deity himself; for we read in the Scriptures, that "Unto Adam and to his wife, the Lord God made coats of skins, and clothed them." From that time to the present, the art of cutting out garments, and of sewing their different parts together, has been practised, more or less, in every place, where there has been any degree of civilization.[98]
7. The first clue about the art of dressing the human body was given to people by God himself; because we read in the Scriptures that "God made tunics of skins for Adam and his wife, and clothed them." Since then, the skill of designing clothes and sewing their various parts together has been practiced, to some extent, everywhere there's been any level of civilization.[98]
8. For a long time, it is probable, that thongs and the sinews of animals were used, for want of thread made of silk or vegetable fibre; and, doubtless, the same necessity caused the substitution of pointed bones and thorns, instead of needles. Such rude materials and instruments are still employed for similar purposes by savage nations. The dresses of the people of Greenland are sewed together with thongs made of the intestines of the seal, or of some fish, which they have the skill to cut fine, after having dried them in the air; and even the inhabitants of Peru, although considerably advanced in civilization, when that country was first visited by the Spaniards, made use of long thorns, in sewing and fixing their clothes.
8. For a long time, it’s likely that thongs and animal sinews were used because there was no thread made from silk or plant fibers. Necessity probably led to the use of pointed bones and thorns as substitutes for needles. These basic materials and tools are still used for similar purposes by primitive societies. The clothing of the people in Greenland is sewn together with thongs made from seal intestines or fish, which they skillfully cut into thin strips after drying them in the air. Even the people of Peru, who were quite advanced in civilization when the Spaniards first arrived, used long thorns to sew and fasten their clothes.
9. We have no means of determining the period of the world, when this art was first practised, as a particular profession. We know, in general, that the dress of the ancients was usually more simple in its construction than that of the people of modern times; and, consequently, it required less skill to put the materials in the required form. It may, therefore, be inferred, that either the females or the slaves of each family usually made up the clothing of all its members.
9. We have no way of figuring out when this art was first practiced as a specific profession. Generally, we know that ancient clothing was usually simpler in design than what people wear today, and because of that, it took less skill to shape the materials into the desired form. Therefore, it can be assumed that either the women or the slaves in each household typically made the clothing for everyone in the family.
10. The distinguishing dress of the Romans was the toga, or gown; as that of the Greeks was the pallium, or cloak. The toga was a loose, woollen robe, and covered nearly the whole person; it was round and close at the bottom, and open at the top, having no sleeves, but a large flap, or lappet, which was either thrown over the left shoulder, or over the head, to protect it from the heat or cold.
10. The distinctive outfit of the Romans was the toga, or gown; just as the Greeks wore the pallium, or cloak. The toga was a loose, wool robe that covered almost the entire body; it was rounded and fitted at the bottom, and open at the top, with no sleeves but a large flap, or lappet, that could be draped over the left shoulder or over the head for protection against heat or cold.
11. The Romans, at an early period of their history, used no other dress, and it was also, at that time, worn by the women. Afterwards, they wore, under the toga, a white woollen vest called tunica,[99] which extended a little below the knee. At first it was without sleeves. Tunics, reaching to the ancles, or having sleeves, were reckoned effeminate; but, under the emperors, they became fashionable.
11. In the early days of their history, the Romans wore only one type of clothing, which women also wore at that time. Later on, under the toga, they began to wear a white wool vest called tunica,[99] that fell just below the knee. Initially, it didn't have sleeves. Tunics that reached the ankles or had sleeves were considered feminine, but during the emperors' reign, they became trendy.
12. The toga was usually assumed at the age of seventeen. Until then, the youth wore a kind of gown, bordered with purple, denominated toga prætexta; and such a garment was also worn by females, until they were married. The youthful dress was laid aside, and the toga virilis, or manly toga, assumed with great solemnity; as, by this act, the individual assumed the responsibilities of a citizen. The toga was worn chiefly in the city, and only by Roman citizens.
12. The toga was typically put on at the age of seventeen. Until then, young boys wore a kind of gown trimmed with purple called toga prætexta; this garment was also worn by girls until they got married. The youthful outfit was replaced, and the toga virilis, or manly toga, was worn with great seriousness; this act marked the person's acceptance of the responsibilities of a citizen. The toga was mainly worn in the city and only by Roman citizens.

THE MILLINER, AND THE LADY'S DRESS-MAKER.
THE MILLINER.
1. The milliner is one who manufactures and repairs bonnets and hats for ladies and children. Her business requires the use of pasteboard, wire, buckram, silks, satins, muslins, ribands, artificial flowers, spangles, and other materials too numerous to be mentioned.
1. A milliner is someone who makes and repairs hats and bonnets for women and kids. Her work involves using materials like cardboard, wire, buckram, silk, satin, muslin, ribbons, artificial flowers, sequins, and many other items too many to list.
2. The first part of the process of making a hat, or bonnet, consists in forming a crown of buckram; which operation is performed on a block of suitable size and shape; and to this is applied pasteboard, or buckram, edged with wire, to form the front part. The foundation having been thus laid, it is usually covered and lined with some of the materials just enumerated, and finished by applying to it the trimmings[101] required by the fashion, or by the individual customer.
2. The first step in making a hat or bonnet involves shaping a crown from buckram, which is done using a block of the right size and shape. Then, pasteboard or buckram with wire edges is added to create the front part. Once the base is set, it’s typically covered and lined with some of the materials mentioned earlier and finished off with the trimmings[101] needed for the current fashion or requested by the customer.
3. Ladies' hats are also made of rye straw, and a kind of grass, which grows in Italy; those made of the latter material are called Leghorns, from the name of the city, in or near which they are principally made. A few years since, these had almost superseded those made of straw; but the latter, of late, have nearly regained their former ascendency.
3. Women's hats are also made from rye straw and a type of grass that grows in Italy; those made from the latter material are called Leghorns, named after the city where they're mostly produced. A few years ago, these had almost replaced those made of straw, but recently, straw hats have nearly regained their previous popularity.
4. In the United States, and likewise in various parts of Europe, there are several establishments for making straw hats, in which the proprietors employ females to perform the whole labor. The straw is first cut into several pieces, so as to leave out the joints, and then whitened by smoking them with the fumes of brimstone. They are next split longitudinally into several pieces by a simple machine, and afterwards plaited with the fingers and thumbs. The braid, or plait, thus produced, is sewn together to form hats adapted to the prevailing fashion.
4. In the United States, as well as in different parts of Europe, there are many businesses that make straw hats, where the owners hire women to do all the work. The straw is first cut into several pieces to remove the joints, and then it is whitened by being smoked with sulfur fumes. Next, it is split lengthwise into several pieces using a simple machine, and then it is braided by hand. The braid created this way is sewn together to make hats that fit the current fashion.
5. Great quantities of straw are, also, plaited in families, especially in the New-England states, and sold to neighboring merchants, who, in turn, dispose of it to those who form it into hats. The milliners usually keep a supply of Leghorn and straw hats, which they line and trim according to the fancy of their customers.
5. Large amounts of straw are also woven in families, especially in the New England states, and sold to local merchants, who then sell it to those who make hats. Milliners usually stock Leghorn and straw hats, lining and trimming them according to their customers' preferences.
6. Head-dresses were probably used nearly as early as any other part of dress; and their form and material have likewise been equally variable. In the early days of Rome, the head-dress of the women of that city was very simple; and, when they went abroad, which was seldom, they covered their faces with a veil; but, when riches and luxury had increased, dress became, with many, the principal object of attention; hence, a woman's toilet and ornaments were called her world.[102]
6. Head-dresses were likely used almost as early as any other clothing item, and their style and materials have also varied widely. In the early days of Rome, women’s head-dresses were quite simple; when they ventured out, which was rare, they covered their faces with a veil. However, as wealth and luxury grew, clothing became the main focus for many, leading to a woman’s outfit and accessories being referred to as her world.[102]
7. The head-dresses of the ladies, in various parts of Europe, especially in the eighteenth century, were particularly extravagant, being sometimes so high, that the face seemed to be nearly in the centre of the body. In 1714, this fashion was at its height in France; but two English ladies visiting the court of Versailles, introduced the low head-dresses of their own country.
7. The hairstyles of women in different regions of Europe, especially during the eighteenth century, were extremely extravagant, often so tall that their faces appeared to be almost in the middle of their bodies. In 1714, this trend reached its peak in France; however, two English ladies visiting the court of Versailles brought in the low hairstyles typical of their own country.
8. The high head-dresses had no sooner fallen into disuse in France, than they were adopted in England, and even carried to a greater degree of extravagance. To build one of these elevated structures in the fashionable style, both the barber and milliner were necessary. The head-dresses of the ladies of the present age, are characterized by great simplicity, when compared with those of several periods in preceding ages.
8. As soon as the tall headdresses went out of style in France, they were picked up in England and taken to an even more extravagant level. To create one of these towering styles, both a barber and a milliner were needed. The hairstyles of today's women are marked by a lot more simplicity compared to those from various periods in the past.
THE LADY'S DRESS-MAKER.
1. This business is nearly allied to the foregoing, and is, therefore, often carried on in conjunction with it. This is especially the case in villages and small towns, where sufficient business cannot be obtained in the exclusive pursuit of one branch.
1. This business is closely related to the one mentioned before, and is often operated alongside it. This is particularly true in villages and small towns, where there isn't enough work available by focusing on just one area.
2. The customers of the lady's dress-maker are not always easily pleased, as they frequently expect more from her skill than it is possible to accomplish. She, however, can do much towards concealing the defects of nature; and, by padding and other means, can sometimes render the person tolerably well proportioned, when, in its natural shape, it would be quite inelegant. It is to be regretted, however, that dress-makers are guided by fashion and whim in moulding the external form of females, rather than by the best specimens of the human figure, as exhibited by eminent painters and sculptors.
2. The customers of the lady's dressmaker are not always easy to please, as they often expect more from her skills than is realistically achievable. However, she can do a lot to hide natural flaws; by using padding and other techniques, she can sometimes make a person look relatively well-proportioned, even when their natural shape is quite ungraceful. Sadly, it’s unfortunate that dressmakers follow fashion trends and personal whims when shaping women's external appearance, instead of taking inspiration from the best examples of the human figure, as shown by renowned painters and sculptors.
3. The dress-maker should have some acquaintance[103] with the anatomy and functions of those parts to which pressure is usually applied; for, who that knows the structure, size, and office of the liver, and other internal organs of digestion and vitality, would venture to apply to them a compressive force calculated to interfere most seriously, if not dangerously, with their healthful action?
3. The dressmaker should have a basic understanding[103] of the anatomy and functions of the areas where pressure is typically applied; because who, knowing the structure, size, and role of the liver and other internal organs involved in digestion and vitality, would dare to apply a compressive force that could seriously disrupt, if not endanger, their healthy functioning?
4. The fashions for ladies' dresses are chiefly procured from France, and the dress-makers from that country are, therefore, often preferred by fashionable ladies. Sometimes, however, a dress-maker, having a name with a French termination, will answer the purpose.
4. The styles for women's dresses are mostly sourced from France, so fashionable women often prefer dressmakers from that country. However, sometimes a dressmaker with a name that has a French ending will also work.
5. Corset-making is frequently a separate branch of business; but corsets have become less necessary; inasmuch as small waists are less admired by the gentlemen than formerly. On this account, also, the ladies have discovered that tight lacing is somewhat uncomfortable, especially in hot weather, and in crowded assemblies.
5. Making corsets is often its own line of work; however, corsets are not as essential anymore since guys don't admire small waists as much as they used to. Because of this, women have also realized that tight lacing can be quite uncomfortable, especially in hot weather and crowded gatherings.

THE BARBER.
1. It is the business of the barber to cut and dress the hair, to make wigs and false curls, and to shave the beards of other men. In ancient times, he used also to trim the nails; and even at the present day, in Turkey, this is a part of his employment.
1. It's the job of the barber to cut and style hair, make wigs and fake curls, and shave men's beards. In ancient times, he also used to trim nails; and even today, in Turkey, that's still part of his work.
2. The period, when men began to shave their beards, is not certainly known. It appears that the practice was common among the Israelites in the time of Moses; as that legislator has left on record a prohibitory law concerning it. They probably borrowed the custom from the Egyptians. It is stated by Plutarch, that Alexander the Great ordered his men to be shaved, that their enemies might not lay hold of their beards in time of battle. Before this time, however, many of the Greeks shaved their beards.[105]
2. The exact time when men started shaving their beards isn't clear. It seems that this practice was common among the Israelites during Moses' time, as he recorded a law against it. They likely adopted this custom from the Egyptians. Plutarch mentions that Alexander the Great ordered his soldiers to shave their beards so that enemies couldn't grab them in battle. However, before this, many Greeks were already shaving their beards.[105]
3. The practice does not appear to have been introduced amongst the ancient Romans, until about the year 296 before the Christian era, when Paulus Ticinius Mænas brought to Rome a number of barbers from Sicily. Scipio Africanus was the first man who shaved his beard every day.
3. The practice doesn't seem to have been introduced among the ancient Romans until around 296 BC, when Paulus Ticinius Mænas brought several barbers from Sicily to Rome. Scipio Africanus was the first person to shave his beard daily.
4. At first, the barbers had no shops, but shaved their customers at the corners of the streets. After a while, they followed their vocation in shops, or shades; and, at this period, it was customary for females to officiate in the various branches of the art. These places, however, were frequented only by the poorer class of the people, as opulent families generally kept slaves for the performance of these duties. The day on which a young Roman first cut off his beard, was celebrated by him and his friends as one of peculiar interest; and this much-desired indication of manhood was consecrated to some one of the gods, generally to Jupiter Capitolinus.
4. At first, barbers had no shops and would shave their customers on street corners. After some time, they started working in shops or shaded areas, and during this time, it was common for women to take on various roles in the profession. However, these places were mostly visited by poorer people because wealthy families usually had slaves to handle these tasks. The day when a young Roman first shaved off his beard was celebrated by him and his friends as a special occasion, and this much-awaited sign of manhood was dedicated to one of the gods, usually Jupiter Capitolinus.
5. The return of barbarism, in the fifth and sixth centuries, banished this custom from the Western empire; nor was it again revived in Europe, until the seventeenth century. During the reigns of Louis XIII. and Louis XIV. of France, both of whom ascended the throne in boyhood, the courtiers and fashionable people began to use the razor, that they might appear with smooth chins, and thus resemble, in this particular, the youthful monarchs. From France, the fashion, at length, spread all over Europe. At one time, in the reign of the English queen Elizabeth, the fellows of Lincoln's Inn were compelled by statute to shave their beards, at least, once in two weeks. Omission was punished with fine, loss of commons, and finally with expulsion.
5. The return of barbarism in the fifth and sixth centuries eliminated this practice from the Western empire, and it didn't come back in Europe until the seventeenth century. During the reigns of Louis XIII and Louis XIV of France, both of whom became kings as boys, courtiers and fashionable people started using razors to have smooth chins, resembling the young monarchs in that way. Eventually, this trend spread throughout Europe. At one point, during the reign of Queen Elizabeth I of England, the fellows of Lincoln's Inn were required by law to shave their beards at least once every two weeks. Failure to do so resulted in fines, loss of common meals, and ultimately expulsion.
6. The custom of shaving was introduced into Russia by Peter the Great, who compelled his subjects to pay a tax for the privilege of retaining their beards.[106] This singular impost was exceedingly unpopular, and excited greater complaints amongst the people than any other measure of that emperor. The decree was rigidly enforced, and every one who would not, or could not, pay the tax, was forcibly deprived of this favorite ornament, if he would not remove it voluntarily. Some of the people saved the sad trimmings of their chins; and, that they might never be entirely separated from these precious relics, ordered that they should be deposited with their bodies in their coffins.
6. The practice of shaving was brought to Russia by Peter the Great, who forced his subjects to pay a tax for the right to keep their beards.[106] This unusual tax was extremely unpopular and caused more complaints among the people than any other action by that emperor. The law was strictly enforced, and anyone who wouldn’t or couldn’t pay the tax had their beloved beards forcibly removed if they didn’t do it willingly. Some people saved the sad remnants of their beards, ensuring that they would never be completely separated from these cherished keepsakes by requesting that they be buried with them in their coffins.
7. Among the European nations that have been curious in whiskers, the Spaniards have been particularly distinguished; and the loss of honor among them used to be punished by depriving the individual of his whiskers.
7. Among the European nations that have been fascinated by facial hair, the Spaniards have stood out; losing honor among them used to be punished by shaving off the person's whiskers.
8. The Portuguese were but little, if at all, behind the Spaniards in their estimate of these valuable ornaments. As an evidence of this, it is stated, that, in the reign of Catharine, Queen of Portugal, the brave John de Castro, having taken the castle of Diu in India, and being afterwards in want of money, applied to the inhabitants of Goa to loan him one thousand piastres, and, as security for that sum, sent them one of his whiskers, telling them that "All the gold in the world cannot equal the value of this natural ornament of my valor." The people, in admiration of his magnanimity, sent him the money, and, at the same time, returned his incomparable whisker.
8. The Portuguese were not far behind the Spaniards in valuing these precious ornaments. To illustrate this, during the reign of Catharine, Queen of Portugal, the brave John de Castro captured the castle of Diu in India. Later, when he needed money, he asked the people of Goa to lend him one thousand piastres. As collateral, he sent them one of his whiskers, stating, "No amount of gold in the world can match the worth of this natural symbol of my bravery." The people, impressed by his generosity, sent him the money and also returned his unique whisker.
9. In the reign of Louis XIII. of France, whiskers attained the highest degree of favor. They also continued in fashion during the early part of the succeeding reign. Louis XIV. and the great men of France, took a pride in wearing them. It was no uncommon thing, at that time, for the ladies to comb and dress the whiskers of their beaux; and the men of fashion[107] were particular in providing whisker-wax, and every article necessary to this agreeable pastime.
9. During the reign of Louis XIII of France, sideburns became very popular. They remained in style into the early part of the next reign. Louis XIV and the prominent men of France took pride in wearing them. It was quite common for ladies to comb and style the sideburns of their partners, and fashionable men[107] were careful to have whisker wax and all the tools needed for this enjoyable activity.
10. The whiskers belonging to the image of the Chinese philosopher Confucius, which is preserved by his countrymen, are supposed to be capable of conferring upon those who might wear them, a portion of the wisdom and manly beauty of that illustrious sage. Great care, however, is taken that none shall enjoy these great personal qualifications by such easy means; as decapitation is the penalty for plucking the whiskers from the position which they occupy.
10. The whiskers from the image of the Chinese philosopher Confucius, kept by his countrymen, are believed to give anyone who wears them a bit of the wisdom and manly good looks of that famous sage. However, great care is taken to ensure that no one gains these impressive traits so easily; decapitation is the punishment for plucking the whiskers from their place.
11. When the practice of shaving off the beard was again revived in Europe, instrumental music was employed in the barber's shop, to amuse customers waiting their turn; but, at the present time, newspapers are furnished for this purpose. In taking off the beard, soft water, good soap, a brush, and a sharp razor, are the usual requisites. The razor should be placed nearly flat on the face, and be moved from point to heel. Barbers have usually some regular customers, many of whom have a box of soap and a brush appropriated to their individual use.
11. When the trend of shaving off beards returned in Europe, barbershops started playing music to entertain customers waiting their turn; nowadays, newspapers are provided for that purpose. To shave off a beard, you typically need soft water, good soap, a brush, and a sharp razor. The razor should be held nearly flat against the face and moved from the tip down to the chin. Barbers often have regular customers, many of whom keep their own soap and brush specifically for personal use.
12. In ancient times, great attention was paid to dressing the hair. The Hebrew women plaited, and afterwards confined it with gold and silver pins; they also adorned it with precious stones. The Greeks, both male and female, at every period of their ancient history, wore long hair, which they usually permitted to hang gracefully upon the shoulders, back, and sometimes upon the breast.
12. In ancient times, a lot of focus was placed on hairstyles. Hebrew women braided their hair and then secured it with gold and silver pins, often decorating it with precious stones. The Greeks, men and women alike, wore long hair throughout their ancient history, typically letting it flow gracefully over their shoulders, back, and sometimes onto their chests.
13. Adult males, among the Romans, usually wore their hair short, and dressed with great care, especially in later ages, when attention to this part of the person was carried to such excess, that ointments and perfumes were used even in the army. The hair was cut for the first time, when the boy had attained his seventh year, and the second time, when he was fourteen[108] years old. His locks, at each cutting, were commonly dedicated to Apollo or Bacchus.
13. Roman adult males typically had short hair and dressed very carefully, especially in later times when grooming became so important that even soldiers used ointments and perfumes. A boy’s hair was cut for the first time when he turned seven, and then again at fourteen[108]. His hair was usually offered to Apollo or Bacchus after each cut.
14. Both men and women, among the Greeks and Romans, sometimes permitted their hair to grow in honor of some divinity. The Jews, also, when under the vow of a Nazarite, were not permitted to trim their hair or beards. In grief and mourning, the Romans suffered their hair and beards to grow. The Greeks, on the contrary, when in grief, cut their hair and shaved their beards, as likewise did some of the barbarous nations of early time.
14. Both men and women in ancient Greece and Rome sometimes allowed their hair to grow to honor a god. Similarly, Jews who took a Nazarite vow were not allowed to cut their hair or beards. Romans let their hair and beards grow as a sign of grief and mourning. In contrast, Greeks cut their hair and shaved their beards when they were grieving, just like some early barbarian nations did.
15. Artificial hair began to be fashionable, at an early period, and was used by the Greeks, Carthaginians, and Romans. In the time of Ovid, blond hair was in great favour at Rome; and those ladies who did not choose to wear wigs, powdered their hair with a kind of gold dust. They wore hanging curls all round the head, to which they were fastened with circular pins of silver. Every wealthy Roman lady of fashion kept at least one slave to frizzle and curl the hair.
15. Artificial hair became stylish early on and was used by the Greeks, Carthaginians, and Romans. During Ovid's time, blonde hair was very popular in Rome; and those women who didn't want to wear wigs powdered their hair with a type of gold dust. They styled their hair with hanging curls all around their heads, held in place with circular silver pins. Every wealthy Roman woman of fashion had at least one slave to frizz and curl her hair.
16. The time, when wigs first came into use, cannot now be ascertained. It is certain, however, that they were worn by females a long time before they became fashionable among the men.
16. It's hard to pinpoint exactly when wigs first became popular. However, it's clear that women wore them long before they became trendy for men.
17. Wigs, perukes, or periwigs, were revived in the seventeenth century. In the reign of Louis XIII., or about the year 1629, they became fashionable at Paris; and, as that city was generally imitated by the rest of Europe in things of this nature, they soon became common. The wigs were very large, as may be seen by examining ancient portraits, and were covered with a profusion of hair-powder. At first, it was disreputable for young people to wear them, as the loss of the hair at an early age was attributed to a disease, which was, of itself, discreditable.
17. Wigs, perukes, or periwigs, made a comeback in the seventeenth century. During Louis XIII's reign, around 1629, they became trendy in Paris; and since that city was often followed by the rest of Europe in fashion, they quickly became popular everywhere. The wigs were very big, as you can see in old portraits, and they were heavily coated with hair powder. Initially, it was considered shameful for young people to wear them, as losing hair at a young age was thought to be due to a disease, which was seen as disgraceful.
18. When wigs were first introduced into England,[109] some of the clergy opposed them violently, considering their use more culpable than wearing long hair; since, as they alleged, it was more unnatural. Many preachers inveighed against wigs in their sermons, and cut their own hair shorter to manifest their abhorrence of the reigning mode.
18. When wigs were first brought to England,[109] some members of the clergy strongly opposed them, believing that wearing wigs was worse than having long hair; they argued it was more unnatural. Many preachers condemned wigs in their sermons and cut their hair short to show their disdain for the current trend.
19. The worldly-wise, however, observed that a periwig procured for the wearer a degree of respect and deference which otherwise might not have been accorded; and hence there was a strong tendency to the use of this appendage. The judges and physicians, especially, understood well this influence of the wig, and gave to it all the advantages of length and breadth. The fashion, at length, was adopted by the ecclesiastics themselves, not only in England, but in most of the European kingdoms, as well as in the British colonies of America.
19. The worldly-wise, however, noticed that wearing a wig earned the person a level of respect and deference that they might not have received otherwise; so there was a strong tendency to use this accessory. Judges and physicians, in particular, understood the wig's influence well and made sure to style it to its fullest advantage. Eventually, this fashion was embraced by the clergy too, not just in England, but in most European countries and in the British colonies of America.
20. The fashion, however, except in cases of baldness, wherein alone it is excusable, is now nearly banished from Europe and America. This desirable change was effected principally by the example of republican America, and by the influence of the French Revolution. The law passed in England in 1795, imposing a tax of a guinea a head per annum on those who wore hair-powder, contributed to the same result, as well as to diminish the use of that article.
20. The trend, except in cases of baldness, where it's understandable, is now almost gone from Europe and America. This welcome change mainly happened because of the example set by republican America and the effects of the French Revolution. The law passed in England in 1795, which imposed a tax of a guinea a year on those who wore hair powder, also helped achieve this outcome and reduced the use of that product.
21. The manufacture of wigs and false curls is an important branch of the business of the barber. The first process in forming a wig is to produce, in the hair about to be used for this purpose, a disposition to curl. This is done by winding it on a cylinder of wood or earth, and afterwards boiling it in water. It is then dried, and baked in an oven. Thus prepared, it is woven on a strong thread, and is subsequently sewn on a caul fitted to the head. False curls are made on the same principle.
21. Making wigs and fake curls is an important part of a barber's business. The first step in creating a wig is to prepare the hair that's going to be used by curling it. This is done by wrapping it around a wooden or clay cylinder and then boiling it in water. After that, it's dried and baked in an oven. Once prepared, it is woven onto a strong thread and then sewn onto a cap that fits the head. Fake curls are made using the same method.
22. Wigs and false curls were not made in ancient[110] times precisely in the same manner; although their appearance, when finished, was probably similar. The hair was then attached directly to a piece of thin leather, by means of some adhesive substance, or composition.
22. Wigs and fake curls weren't made in ancient[110] times exactly the same way; although their finished look was likely similar. The hair was then attached directly to a piece of thin leather using some kind of glue or mixture.
23. Many barbers, especially those who have a reputation for making wigs and false curls in a fashionable style, keep for sale perfumery, as well as a variety of cosmetics.
23. Many barbers, especially those known for creating fashionable wigs and false curls, sell perfumes and a range of cosmetics.
24. From the eleventh to the eighteenth century, surgical operations were almost exclusively performed by the barbers and bath-keepers. As phlebotomy was one of the chief sources of profit to the barbers, they adopted a sign emblematical of this operation. It consisted of a pole, representing the staff which the individual held in his hand, while the blood was flowing from the arm. The white band wound spirally about the pole, represented the fillet of linen with which the arm was afterwards secured.
24. From the 11th to the 18th century, surgical operations were mostly carried out by barbers and bath attendants. Since bloodletting was one of the main ways barbers made money, they used a sign that symbolized this practice. It featured a pole, representing the staff the person held while blood was being drawn from their arm. The white band wrapped around the pole symbolized the linen used to secure the arm afterward.
25. It is hardly necessary to remark, that the same sign is still employed by the barbers; although, with a few exceptions, they have ceased to perform the operation of which it was significant.
25. It’s hardly worth mentioning that barbers still use the same sign, although, with a few exceptions, they no longer perform the service it used to represent.

THE TANNER, AND THE CURRIER.
THE TANNER.
1. The art of tanning consists in converting hides and skins into leather, by impregnating them with astringent matter.
1. The art of tanning involves turning hides and skins into leather by soaking them in astringent substances.
2. It is impossible to determine the period at which the art of tanning was discovered. It was doubtless known to the ancients, and probably to the antediluvians, in some degree of perfection; since skins were applied as means of clothing the human body, before the arts of spinning and weaving were practised. It is likely, however, that they were applied to this purpose, for a considerable time, in their natural state; and that accident, at length, suggested the means of rendering them more applicable, by saturating them with certain mineral or vegetable substances.
2. It's impossible to pinpoint when the art of tanning was first discovered. The ancients definitely knew about it, and probably even those who lived before the flood had some knowledge of it; after all, animal skins were used to cover the human body before spinning and weaving became common crafts. However, it's likely that for a significant period, these skins were used in their natural form, and eventually, some sort of accident led to the idea of treating them with specific mineral or plant substances to make them more suitable for use.
3. Although the art of converting skins into leather[112] was practised in remote ages, yet it was not until near the end of the eighteenth century, that the true principle of the process was understood. Before this time, it was supposed, that the astringent principle of the agents employed, was a resinous substance, which adhered mechanically to the fibres, and thus rendered them firm and insoluble. The correct explanation was first given by Deyeux, and afterwards more fully developed by M. Seguin. These chemists clearly proved, that the formation of leather was the result of a chemical union between a substance called tannin, and the gelatinous part of the skin.
3. Although the process of turning skins into leather[112] has been done for centuries, it wasn't until the late eighteenth century that the real principle behind it was understood. Before then, people thought that the astringent quality of the materials used was a resinous substance that stuck to the fibers, making them strong and insoluble. The correct explanation was first presented by Deyeux, and later expanded upon by M. Seguin. These chemists clearly demonstrated that the making of leather is the result of a chemical reaction between a substance called tannin and the gelatinous part of the skin.
4. The subject, however, was not thoroughly understood, and reduced to scientific principles, until the year 1803, when Sir Humphrey Davy gave it a careful investigation, in a series of chemical experiments. These inquiries resulted in the conviction, that the method of tanning which had been in general use, may, with a few alterations, be considered preferable to that by which the process is carried on with more rapidity.
4. The topic, however, wasn't fully understood and broken down into scientific principles until 1803, when Sir Humphrey Davy conducted a detailed investigation through a series of chemical experiments. These studies led to the conclusion that the tanning method commonly used could, with a few adjustments, be seen as better than the faster process.
5. The skin which envelopes the bodies of animals, consists of three layers. That on the outside is a thin, white, elastic membrane, called the cuticle, or scarf skin; that on the inside is a strong membrane, denominated the cutis, or true skin; between these two is a very thin membrane, to which anatomists have given the name rete mucosum, and in which is situated the substance which gives color to the animal. The cutis is composed of fibres, which run in every direction, and, being by far the thickest layer, is the one that is converted into leather.
5. The skin that covers the bodies of animals has three layers. The outer layer is a thin, white, elastic membrane called the cuticle or scarf skin; the inner layer is a strong membrane known as the cutis or true skin; between these two is a very thin membrane that anatomists refer to as rete mucosum, which contains the substance that gives color to the animal. The cutis is made up of fibers that run in every direction and, being the thickest layer, is the one that turns into leather.
6. The skins of large animals, such as those of the ox and horse, are denominated hides; and those of smaller animals, as of the calf, goat, and sheep, are called skins. Of the former description, is made thick, of the latter, thin leather. The process of tanning different skins varies in many particulars, according[113] to the nature of the leather, and the uses to which it is to be applied.
6. The hides of large animals, like oxen and horses, are called hides; whereas those of smaller animals, such as calves, goats, and sheep, are referred to as skins. The former type is made into thick leather, while the latter is processed into thin leather. The tanning process for different skins varies in many ways, depending on the type of leather and its intended use.
7. The general process of changing thick hides into sole-leather, is as follows: They are first soaked in water, to free them from dirt and blood; and then, if rigid, they are beaten and rubbed, or rolled under a large stone, to render them pliable. They are next soaked in lime-water, or hung up in a warm room, and smoked, until a slight putrescency takes place. The hair, cuticle, rete mucosum, on one side, and the fleshy parts on the other, are then scraped off, on a beam, with a circular knife.
7. The general process of turning thick hides into sole leather is as follows: They are first soaked in water to remove dirt and blood. If they are stiff, they are then beaten and rubbed or rolled under a large stone to make them flexible. Next, they are soaked in lime water or hung in a warm room and smoked until a slight decay sets in. The hair, top layer of skin, and underlying tissue on one side, as well as the fleshy parts on the other, are then scraped off on a beam with a circular knife.
8. Nothing now remains but the cutis, or true skin. Several hides, in this state of preparation, are put together into a vat, for the purpose of impregnating them with tannin. This substance is found in astringent vegetables, and is obtained, in a proper state for application, by infusion in water. In that condition, it is called ooze, which is first applied in a weak state.
8. Nothing is left now but the skin, or true skin. Several hides, in this stage of preparation, are placed in a vat to soak them in tannin. This substance is found in astringent plants and is extracted, ready for use, by steeping it in water. In this form, it’s called ooze, which is initially applied in a diluted state.
9. After the ooze, of different degrees of strength, has been renewed several times, they are put between layers of bark, and suffered to remain several months, fresh bark, from time to time, being supplied. The whole process generally occupies from twelve to sixteen months. When strong solutions of tannin are used, the leather is formed in a much shorter time; but, in that case, it is much more rigid, and more liable to crack. It is rendered smooth and compact, by beating it with a wooden beetle, or by passing it between rollers.
9. After the ooze, which varies in strength, has been refreshed several times, the items are placed between layers of bark and left for several months, with fresh bark added periodically. The entire process usually takes about twelve to sixteen months. When strong tannin solutions are used, the leather develops much more quickly; however, this makes it stiffer and more prone to cracking. It is then made smooth and dense by pounding it with a wooden mallet or by running it between rollers.
10. Oak bark, on account of its cheapness, and the quantity of tannin which it contains, is more extensively employed by tanners than any other vegetable substance. In sections of country, where this kind cannot be conveniently obtained, the bark of the hemlock, spruce, and chestnut, the leaves of the sumach, and various other astringents, are substituted.[114]
10. Oak bark, because it's inexpensive and has a lot of tannin, is used more by tanners than any other plant material. In areas where this kind isn’t easily accessible, they use the bark of hemlock, spruce, and chestnut, the leaves of sumac, and other astringent materials instead.[114]
11. The process of tanning calf-skins is somewhat different in many of its details. They are first put into a solution of lime, where they remain during ten or fifteen days, and are then scraped on both sides on the beam, with a circular knife, as in the former case, and for the same purpose. They are then washed in water, and afterwards immersed in an infusion of hen or pigeon's dung. Here they are left for a week or ten days, according to the state of the weather and other circumstances; during which time, they are frequently handled, and scraped on both sides. By these means, the lime, oil, and saponaceous matter, are discharged, and the skin is rendered pliable.
11. The process of tanning calf skins is a bit different in several details. They are first soaked in a lime solution for about ten to fifteen days, and then scraped on both sides with a circular knife, just like in the previous method, for the same reason. After that, they are washed in water and then soaked in a mixture of hen or pigeon droppings. They are left in this infusion for a week or ten days, depending on the weather and other factors; during this time, they are often handled and scraped on both sides. This process helps remove the lime, oil, and soap-like substances, making the skin soft and flexible.
12. They are next put into a vat containing weak ooze, and afterwards removed to several others of regularly increasing strength. In the mean time, they are taken up and handled every day, that they may be equally acted upon by the tanning principle. The time occupied in the whole process, is from two to six months. The light and thin sorts of hides, designed for upper leather, harnesses, &c., are treated in a similar manner.
12. They are then placed in a vat filled with a weak solution, and later moved to several others with gradually increasing strength. In the meantime, they are picked up and handled every day so that they can be evenly affected by the tanning process. The entire process takes between two to six months. The lighter and thinner types of hides, meant for upper leather, harnesses, etc., are treated in a similar way.
13. The tanner procures his hides and skins from various sources, but chiefly from the butcher, and from individuals who kill the animals for their own consumption. Great quantities of dry hides are also obtained from South America, where cattle are killed in great numbers, principally for the sake of this valuable envelope of their bodies.
13. The tanner gets his hides and skins from different places, mainly from butchers and from people who kill animals for their own use. Large amounts of dry hides are also sourced from South America, where cattle are slaughtered in vast numbers, mostly for this valuable outer layer of their bodies.
THE CURRIER.
1. It is the business of the currier to dress the thinner kinds of leather. In most cases, in the United States, except in and near large cities, the business of tanning and currying are usually united in the same individual; or, at least, the two branches of business are carried on together, by the aid of workmen, skilled in their respective trades.[115]
1. The job of the currier is to finish lighter types of leather. In many areas of the United States, outside of big cities, tanning and currying often fall under the same person; or, at the very least, both processes are handled together with the help of workers who are experts in their fields.[115]
2. The mode of dressing the different kinds of skins, varies in some respects; but, as the general method of operating is the same in every sort, a description applicable in one case will convey a sufficiently accurate idea of the whole. We shall, therefore, select the calf-skin, since it is more frequently the subject of the currier's skill than any other.
2. The way of processing different types of hides varies in some ways; however, since the overall technique is the same across all types, a description that applies to one will give a clear enough understanding of the rest. Therefore, we will focus on calfskin, as it is the most common material that curriers work with.
3. The skin is first soaked in water, until it has become sufficiently soft, and then shaved with the currier's knife, on the inner side, over the currier's beam. It is then placed on a table, somewhat inclined from the workman, and scoured on both sides with the edge of a narrow, smooth stone, set in a handle, and again, with an iron sleeker of a similar shape. The skin is next stuffed with a composition of tallow and tanner's oil, on the flesh side, and then hung up to dry. Afterwards it is rubbed on the hair side with a board, and again scraped on the flesh side with the knife. Having been thus prepared, the skin is blacked on the flesh side with lampblack and tanner's oil, and subsequently rubbed with paste, applied with a brush. When it has been dried, the whole process is finished by rubbing both sides with a glass sleeker.
3. The skin is first soaked in water until it becomes soft, then shaved on the inner side with a currier's knife over the currier's beam. It is then placed on a table that is slightly tilted away from the worker, and scrubbed on both sides using the edge of a narrow, smooth stone attached to a handle, and again with an iron sleeker of a similar shape. Next, the skin is stuffed with a mixture of tallow and tanner's oil on the flesh side, and then hung up to dry. After that, it is rubbed on the hair side with a board and scraped on the flesh side with the knife. Once prepared, the skin is blackened on the flesh side with lampblack and tanner's oil, and then rubbed with paste applied with a brush. After it dries, the entire process is completed by polishing both sides with a glass sleeker.
4. Horse hides are blacked on the hair side, or, as the curriers term it, on the grain, with a solution of copperas water. Leather designed for harnesses, for covering carriages, and for other similar purposes, is also blacked on that side in the same manner.
4. Horse hides are blackened on the hair side, or, as the curriers call it, on the grain, with a solution of copperas water. Leather meant for harnesses, for covering carriages, and for other similar uses, is also blackened on that side in the same way.
5. The trade of the currier is divided into two or three branches. Some dress only calf-skins and other thick leather designed for shoes, harnesses, and carriages; others confine themselves to dressing skins, which are to be applied to binding books, and to other purposes requiring thin leather. It may be well to remark here, that the dressers of thin leather usually tan the skins themselves, using the leaves of sumach, instead of bark.
5. The work of a currier is split into two or three branches. Some focus only on tanning calf-skins and other thick leathers meant for shoes, harnesses, and carriages; others specialize in treating thinner leathers used for bookbinding and other applications that require lighter materials. It's worth noting here that those who work with thin leather typically tan the skins themselves, using sumac leaves instead of bark.

THE SHOE AND BOOT MAKER.
1. As the shoe is an article of primary utility, it was used, more or less, in the earliest ages. Some writers suppose, that the Deity, in clothing man with skins, did not leave him to go barefooted, but gave him shoes of the same material.
1. Since shoes are a basic necessity, they were used, to some degree, in the earliest times. Some writers believe that when the Deity clothed man with animal skins, He didn’t leave him barefoot, but provided him with shoes made from the same material.
2. The shoes of the ancient Egyptians were made of the papyrus. The Chinese, as well as the inhabitants of India, and some other nations of antiquity, manufactured them from silk, rushes, linen, wood, the bark of trees, iron, brass, silver, and gold, and sometimes ornamented them with precious stones.
2. The shoes of ancient Egyptians were made from papyrus. The Chinese, along with people from India and several other ancient cultures, crafted shoes from silk, reeds, linen, wood, tree bark, iron, brass, silver, and gold, occasionally decorating them with precious stones.
3. The Romans had various coverings for the feet, the chief of which were the calceus and the solea. The calceus somewhat resembled the shoe we wear at present, and was tied upon the instep with a latchet[117] or lace. The solea, or sandal, was a thick cork sole, covered above and beneath with leather, and neatly stitched on the edge. It left the upper part of the foot bare, and was fastened to it by means of straps, which were crossed over the instep, and wound about the ankle. Roman citizens wore the calceus with the toga, when they went abroad in the city, while the solea was worn at home and on journeys. The solea was also used at entertainments; but it was changed for the calceus, when the guests were about to surround the table.
3. The Romans had different types of footwear, the main ones being the calceus and the solea. The calceus looked somewhat like the shoes we wear today and was fastened on the instep with a strap or lace[117]. The solea, or sandal, had a thick cork sole, covered on top and bottom with leather, and neatly stitched around the edges. It left the tops of the feet exposed and was held in place with straps that crossed over the instep and wrapped around the ankle. Roman citizens wore the calceus with their togas when going out in the city, while the solea was used at home and during travels. The solea was also worn at parties, but it was switched out for the calceus when the guests were about to sit at the table.
4. The senators wore shoes, which came up to the middle of the leg, and which had a golden or silver crescent on the top of the foot. The shoes of the women were generally white, sometimes red, scarlet, or purple, and were adorned with embroidery and pearls; but those of the men were mostly black. On days of public ceremony, however, the magistrates wore red shoes.
4. The senators wore shoes that reached mid-calf and featured a golden or silver crescent on the top of the foot. The women’s shoes were usually white, but sometimes they were red, scarlet, or purple, decorated with embroidery and pearls; the men generally wore black shoes. However, on days of public ceremonies, the magistrates wore red shoes.
5. Boots were used in very ancient times, and were primarily worn, as a kind of armor, with a view of protecting the lower extremities in battle. They were, at first, made of leather, afterwards of brass or iron, and were proof against the thrusts and cuts of warlike weapons. The boot was called ocrea by the Romans, who, as well as the Greeks, used it in the army, and in riding on horseback, and sometimes in pedestrian journeys.
5. Boots have been around since ancient times and were mainly worn as a type of armor to protect the lower legs in battle. Initially, they were made of leather, then later from brass or iron, providing protection against the thrusts and cuts of weapons. The Romans referred to the boot as ocrea, and both the Romans and Greeks used them in the army, while riding horses, and occasionally during walks.
6. The fashion of boots and shoes, like every other part of dress, has been subject to a number of changes, as regards both their form and material. In Europe, about one thousand years ago, the greatest princes wore shoes with wooden soles. In the reign of William Rufus, of England, the shoes of the great had long, sharp points, stuffed with tow, and twisted like a ram's horn. The clergy preached against this fashion; but the points continued to increase in length,[118] until the reign of Richard the Second, when they were tied to the knees with chains of silver or gold. In the year 1463, Parliament interposed, and prohibited the manufacture or use of shoes or boots with pikes exceeding two inches in length.
6. The styles of boots and shoes, like every other aspect of clothing, have gone through many changes in both design and materials. In Europe, about a thousand years ago, the most important nobles wore shoes with wooden soles. During the reign of William Rufus in England, wealthy people wore shoes with long, sharp points, stuffed with tow, and twisted like a ram's horn. The clergy spoke out against this trend, but the points kept getting longer,[118] until the reign of Richard the Second, when they were tied to the knees with chains made of silver or gold. In 1463, Parliament stepped in and banned the production or use of shoes or boots with pikes longer than two inches.
7. Lasts adapted to each foot, commonly called rights and lefts, were not introduced into England, until about the year 1785; nor was cramping, or crimping, the front part of boots practised there for ten years after that period. These improvements did not become generally known, or, at least, were not much used, in the United States, for many years after their adoption in Great Britain.
7. Shoe lasts made to fit each foot, commonly known as rights and lefts, were not introduced in England until around 1785; nor was the practice of cramping, or crimping, the front part of boots done there for ten years after that. These improvements didn't become widely recognized, or at least weren't used much, in the United States for many years after they were adopted in Great Britain.
8. Many facts, besides the preceding, might be adduced to prove, that the art of making shoes and boots, although uninterruptedly practised from the earliest ages, has received many important improvements within the last fifty years.
8. Many facts, in addition to the ones mentioned earlier, could be presented to demonstrate that the art of making shoes and boots, while having been continuously practiced since ancient times, has undergone significant improvements over the past fifty years.
9. In Europe and America, boots and shoes are commonly made of leather. In shoes for females, however, it is not unusual to use prunello, which is a kind of twilled, worsted cloth. In all cases, thick leather is used for the soles.
9. In Europe and America, boots and shoes are usually made of leather. For women's shoes, though, it’s not uncommon to use prunello, which is a type of twilled, worsted fabric. In all cases, thick leather is used for the soles.
10. The business of making boots and shoes is carried on very systematically in large establishments. The materials are cut out and fitted by the foreman, or by the person who carries on the business, whilst the pieces are stitched together, and the work finished, by workmen who sit upon the bench.
10. The process of making boots and shoes is carried out very systematically in large factories. The materials are cut and fitted by the foreman or the business owner, while the pieces are stitched together and finished by workers who sit on the bench.
11. As a matter of convenience, the trade have fixed upon certain sizes, which are designated by numbers; and, corresponding to these, the lasts are formed by the last-maker; but, to be still more exact, individuals sometimes procure lasts corresponding to their feet, on which they cause their boots and shoes to be made.
11. For convenience, the trade has settled on specific sizes, which are marked by numbers; and, in line with these, the lasts are created by the last-maker. However, to be even more precise, some individuals obtain lasts that match their own feet, and have their boots and shoes made on those.
12. The following is a description of the process[119] of making a leather shoe: after the materials have been cut out according to the measure, or size, and the parts of the uppers have been stitched together, the sole-leather is hammered on the lapstone, tacked to the last, and trimmed with a knife. The upper leather is next stretched on the last with a pair of pincers, fastened to its proper place with tacks, and then sewed to the bottom of the sole with a waxed thread. A narrow strip of leather, called a welt, is also fastened to the sole by similar means, and to this is stitched another sole. A heel being added, the shoe is finished by trimming and polishing it with appropriate instruments.
12. Here’s a description of the process[119] of making a leather shoe: after the materials are cut out to size, and the parts of the uppers are stitched together, the sole leather is hammered on the lapstone, attached to the last, and trimmed with a knife. The upper leather is then stretched over the last with a pair of pincers, secured in place with tacks, and sewn to the bottom of the sole using waxed thread. A narrow strip of leather, called a welt, is also attached to the sole in a similar way, and to this another sole is stitched on. Once a heel is added, the shoe is finished by trimming and polishing it with the right tools.
13. The edges of fine leather shoes and boots, are trimmed with thin strips of the like material, whilst those of prunello, and other thin shoes for ladies, are bound with narrow tape. The binding is applied by females with thread, by means of a common needle.
13. The edges of fine leather shoes and boots are trimmed with thin strips of the same material, while the edges of prunello and other lightweight women's shoes are finished with narrow tape. Women apply the binding using thread and a regular needle.
14. Shoe-thread is commonly spun from flax; that from hemp is much stronger, and was formerly preferred; but it is now used only for very strong work. The greater part of the shoe-thread used in the United States, is spun by machinery, at Leeds, in England, from Russian flax. The wax employed by shoemakers, was formerly composed of tar and rosin; but it is now most usually made of pitch.
14. Shoe thread is usually made from flax; the kind made from hemp is much stronger and used to be preferred, but now it's only used for very heavy-duty work. Most of the shoe thread used in the United States is machine-spun in Leeds, England, from Russian flax. The wax that shoemakers use used to be made from tar and rosin, but it's now typically made from pitch.
15. The shoemaker, in sewing together different parts of his work, uses threads of various sizes, which are composed of several small threads of different lengths. A hog's bristle is fastened to each end of it, which enables the workman to pass it with facility through the holes made with the awl.
15. The shoemaker, while stitching different parts of his work, uses threads of various sizes, made up of several smaller threads of different lengths. A hog's bristle is attached to each end, which allows the worker to easily pass it through the holes made with the awl.
16. An expeditious way of fastening the soles of boots and shoes to the upper leathers, is found in the use of wooden pegs or brass nails. The old method, however, is generally preferred, on several accounts;[120] but chiefly, because the work is more durable, and because it can be more easily repaired.
16. A quick way to attach the soles of boots and shoes to the upper leather is by using wooden pegs or brass nails. However, the traditional method is usually preferred for several reasons;[120] but mainly because it lasts longer and is easier to repair.
17. Journeymen working at this trade most usually confine their labours to particular kinds of work; as few can follow every branch with advantage. Some make shoes and boots for men; others confine their labours to those designed for ladies; but, by their aid, the master-shoemaker can, and usually does, supply every kind at his store.
17. Journeymen in this trade usually specialize in specific types of work, as not many can effectively handle every branch. Some make shoes and boots for men, while others focus on those made for women. However, with their help, the master shoemaker can and typically does offer every type in his shop.
18. It is no uncommon thing in the country, for the farmers to purchase leather, and employ the shoemaker to make it up; and this is done, in most cases, on their own premises. The shoemaker employed in this way, removes from house to house, changing his location, whenever he has completely served a whole family in his vocation. In such cases, he is said, by the trade, to be whipping the cat. The set of tools with which he operates, is called his kit.
18. It's quite common in the countryside for farmers to buy leather and hire a shoemaker to make shoes from it, usually working right on their property. The shoemaker travels from house to house, moving on once he has finished working for an entire family. In these situations, he is referred to in the trade as whipping the cat. The collection of tools he uses is known as his kit.
19. The shoemaker usually buys his leather from the manufacturer; and procures his tools, tacks, and various other articles of a similar nature, at the finding stores. In some cases, the shoemaker with little or no capital, gets his materials from the leather-cutter, who makes it a business to supply them ready cut to the proper size and shape. There are, however, but few leather-cutters in our country; but, in England, this branch of trade is one of considerable importance, and is frequently connected with that of the leather-dresser.
19. The shoemaker usually buys his leather from the manufacturer and gets his tools, tacks, and other similar supplies from the finding stores. In some instances, a shoemaker with little or no capital sources his materials from the leather-cutter, who provides them pre-cut to the right size and shape. However, there are only a few leather-cutters in our country; in England, though, this trade is quite significant and is often linked to the leather-dressing business.

THE SADDLER AND HARNESS-MAKER, AND THE TRUNK-MAKER.
THE SADDLER AND HARNESS-MAKER.
1. The invention of the saddle has been attributed to the Selians, a people of ancient Franconia. Under this impression, it has been supposed that the Latins gave it the name of sella. The period at which it was first used, cannot be ascertained. It is certain, however, that the horse had been rendered subservient to man, several centuries before this convenient article was thought of.
1. The invention of the saddle is credited to the Selians, an ancient group from Franconia. Because of this, it’s been believed that the Latins named it sella. The exact time it was first used is unclear. However, it is certain that horses were being used by humans for several centuries before this handy tool was created.
2. At first, the rider sat upon the bare back of the animal, and guided him with a switch, but afterwards with a strap put round the nose. In the course of time, the rider came to use, upon the back of the horse, the skins of beasts, in order to render his seat[122] more easy. The Greeks, and many other refined nations of antiquity, sometimes used superb trappings, composed of cloth, leather, and skins dressed with the hair on; and, in addition to the gold, silver, and precious stones, with which these were ornamented, the horses were often otherwise decked with bells, collars, and devices of various kinds.
2. At first, the rider sat directly on the bare back of the animal and guided it with a switch, but later he used a strap around the nose. Over time, the rider began to use animal skins on the horse's back to make his seat[122] more comfortable. The Greeks and many other sophisticated cultures of ancient times sometimes used elaborate decorations made of cloth, leather, and fur-lined skins; in addition to the gold, silver, and precious stones that adorned these, the horses were often decorated with bells, collars, and various embellishments.
3. The Romans, in the days of the republic, deemed it more manly to ride on the bare back of the animal than on coverings. At a later period, they used a kind of square pannel, without stirrups; and about the year 340 of the Christian era, they began to ride on saddles. It appears, that those first employed were very heavy, as the Emperor Theodosius, in the same century, forbade the use of any which weighed over sixty pounds. The use of saddles was established in England by Henry the Seventh, who enjoined on his nobility the practice of riding upon them.
3. In the days of the Roman Republic, the Romans thought it was more masculine to ride bareback than on any type of covering. Later on, they used a square panel without stirrups, and around the year 340 AD, they started using saddles. It seems that the first saddles were quite heavy, as Emperor Theodosius in that same century banned the use of any saddle that weighed more than sixty pounds. The practice of using saddles in England was established by Henry the Seventh, who required his nobles to ride with them.
4. The frame of a saddle is called a tree. It is not made by the saddlers, but by persons who confine their attention to this branch of business. The trees are constructed of wood, with a small quantity of iron, and covered with canvas.
4. The frame of a saddle is called a tree. It’s not made by saddlers but by people who focus solely on this part of the business. The trees are made of wood, with a bit of iron, and covered with canvas.
5. In making a common saddle, the workman first extends two strips of straining web from the pommel to the hinder part of the tree, and fastens them with tacks. The tree is then covered on the upper side with two thicknesses of linen cloth, between which a quantity of wool is afterwards interposed. A covering of thin leather, usually made of hog's-skin, is next tacked on, and the flaps added. Under the whole are placed the pads and saddle-cloth; the former of which is made of thin cotton or linen cloth, and thin leather, stuffed with hair. The addition of four straps, two girths, two stirrup-leathers, and as many stirrups, completes the whole operation.
5. To make a standard saddle, the worker first stretches two strips of straining web from the front to the back of the saddle tree and secures them with tacks. The top side of the tree is covered with two layers of linen cloth, with a layer of wool placed in between. Next, a covering of thin leather, usually from pigskin, is tacked on, followed by the addition of the flaps. Underneath all of this, pads and a saddle cloth are placed; the pads are made of thin cotton or linen cloth and thin leather, stuffed with hair. Finally, the assembly is completed with four straps, two girths, two stirrup leathers, and a pair of stirrups.
6. The roughness, or the little indentations in the[123] flaps, are produced by passing the leather between rollers, in contact with a rough surface, or by beating it with a mallet, on the face of which has been fastened a piece of the skin from a species of shark, commonly called the dog-fish.
6. The rough texture, or the small indentations in the[123] flaps, is created by running the leather between rollers against a rough surface or by striking it with a mallet that has a piece of skin from a type of shark, typically known as dogfish, attached to its face.
7. Saddles are often covered with buckskin, curiously stitched into figures, and having the spaces between the seams stuffed with wool; this is particularly the case in side-saddles. The form of saddles, and the quality of the materials, together with the workmanship, are considerably varied, to suit the purposes to which they are to be applied, and to accommodate the fancy of customers.
7. Saddles are often made with buckskin, intricately stitched into patterns, and the spaces between the seams filled with wool; this is especially true for side-saddles. The design of saddles, the quality of the materials, and the craftsmanship all vary greatly to meet the specific needs they are intended for and to satisfy customer preferences.
8. The process of making bridles and harness for horses, is extremely simple. The leather is first cut out with a knife of some description, but usually with one of a crescent-like form, or with a blade set in a gauge, and then stitched together with the kind of thread used by shoemakers. The awl employed in punching the holes is straight; and needles are most commonly used, instead of the bristles which point the shoemaker's threads. The mode of manufacturing saddle-bags, portmanteaus, and valises, is too obvious to need description.
8. Making bridles and harnesses for horses is really straightforward. The leather is first cut out with a knife of some sort, usually one that has a crescent shape or a blade set in a gauge, and then stitched together with the type of thread that shoemakers use. The awl used for punching the holes is straight, and needles are more commonly used instead of the bristles that typically thread shoemaker's thread. The way of making saddle bags, portmanteaus, and suitcases is too obvious to need explaining.
THE TRUNK-MAKER.
1. The manufacture of trunks is equally simple with that of making harness. In common cases, it consists chiefly in lining the inside of a wooden box with paper, or some kind of cloth, and covering the outside with a skin, or with leather, which is fastened to the wood by means of tacks. Narrow strips of leather are fastened upon hair trunks with brass nails, by way of ornament, as well as to confine the work.
1. Making trunks is just as straightforward as making harnesses. Usually, it mainly involves lining the inside of a wooden box with paper or some type of fabric and covering the outside with a skin or leather, which is secured to the wood with tacks. Narrow strips of leather are attached to hair trunks with brass nails for decoration, as well as to hold everything together.
2. Instead of a wooden box, oblong rims of iron, and very thick, solid pasteboard, fastened together by[124] means of strong thread, are used in the best kinds of trunks. The frame or body, thus formed, is covered with some substantial leather, which is first stuck on with paste, and then secured by sewing it to the pasteboard with a waxed thread. Over the whole, are applied strips of iron, fastened with brass or copper nails with large heads. The lines and figures on the leather, added by way of ornament, are produced by a crease, a tool made of wood, ivory, or whalebone. Its form is much like that of the blade of a common paper-folder.
2. Instead of a wooden box, strong iron edges and very thick, sturdy cardboard, held together by[124] strong thread, are used in the best types of trunks. The frame or body, once assembled, is covered in durable leather, which is first glued on and then sewn to the cardboard with a waxed thread for extra support. Over it all, strips of iron are attached with large-headed brass or copper nails. The designs and patterns on the leather, used for decoration, are made using a crease, a tool crafted from wood, ivory, or whalebone. Its shape resembles that of a typical paper-folder blade.
3. How long trunk-making has been a separate trade, cannot be exactly ascertained. The trunk-makers in France were incorporated into a company, in 1596. In the United States, this branch of business is very commonly united with that of the saddler and harness-maker.
3. It's hard to say exactly how long trunk-making has been its own trade. The trunk-makers in France formed a company in 1596. In the United States, this type of work is often combined with that of saddlers and harness-makers.

THE SOAP-BOILER, AND THE CANDLE-MAKER.
THE SOAP-BOILER.
1. The business of the soap-boiler consists in manufacturing soap, by the combination of certain oily and alkaline substances.
1. The work of the soap maker involves producing soap by combining specific oily and alkaline ingredients.
2. The earliest notice of this useful article occurs in the works of Pliny, in which it is stated, that soap was composed of tallow and ashes; that the mode of combining them was discovered by the Gauls; but that the German soap was the best.
2. The first mention of this useful product appears in the writings of Pliny, where it's noted that soap was made from tallow and ashes; the method of combining them was discovered by the Gauls, but German soap was considered the best.
3. For many ages before the invention of soap, saponaceous plants, and several kinds of earth, together with animal matters and the ley from ashes, were employed for the purpose of cleansing the skin, and articles of clothing. The idea of combining[126] some of these substances, with the view of forming soap, probably originated in accident.
3. For many years before soap was invented, plants that produce soap-like substances, various types of earth, and animal materials, along with lye made from ashes, were used to clean skin and clothing. The concept of mixing[126] some of these materials to create soap likely came about by chance.
4. The vegetable oils and animal fats, capable of saponification, are very numerous; but those most commonly employed in the manufacture of the soaps of commerce, are olive-oil, whale-oil, tallow, lard, palm-oil, and rosin; and the alkalies with which these are most frequently combined, are soda, the ley of ashes, or its residuum, potash.
4. There are many vegetable oils and animal fats that can be turned into soap, but the ones most commonly used in making commercial soaps include olive oil, whale oil, tallow, lard, palm oil, and rosin. The alkalis that are most often paired with these are soda, lye from ashes, or its residue, and potash.
5. Soda is sometimes called the mineral alkali; because it is found, in some parts of the world, in the earth. It was known to the ancients, at a very early period, under the denomination of natron. It received this appellation from the lakes of Natron, in Egypt, from the waters of which it was produced by evaporation, during the summer season.
5. Soda is sometimes referred to as the mineral alkali because it can be found in the ground in certain parts of the world. The ancients were aware of it very early on and called it natron. This name comes from the Natron lakes in Egypt, where it was produced through evaporation of the water during the summer.
6. The soda of commerce is now chiefly obtained from the salsola, a genus of plants which grows on the sea-shore. In Spain, the plant from which soda is obtained is denominated barilla; hence, the substance produced from it by incineration has received the same appellation. The ashes of a sea-weed which grows on the coasts of Scotland and Ireland, is called kelp. In Europe, barilla and kelp are more extensively employed in the manufacture of soap than any other alkaline substances; but, in this country, where wood is so much used for fuel, common ashes are generally preferred.
6. The soda used in commerce is mainly sourced from the salsola, a type of plant that grows along the coastline. In Spain, the plant used for soda is called barilla; therefore, the substance created from it through burning is also referred to as such. The ashes from a seaweed that grows on the shores of Scotland and Ireland are known as kelp. In Europe, barilla and kelp are more widely used in soap-making than any other alkaline substances, but in this country, where wood is commonly used for fuel, regular ashes are typically favored.
7. The process of making the ordinary brown or yellow soap, from wood-ashes, is conducted in the following manner. The alkali is first obtained in a state of solution in water, by leeching the ashes as described in page 26, and then poured, in a weak state, into a copper or iron caldron, having a large wooden tub carefully affixed to the top of it.
7. The process of making regular brown or yellow soap from wood ashes is done like this: First, the alkali is dissolved in water by leeching the ashes as described in page 26, and then it's poured, in a diluted form, into a copper or iron pot with a large wooden tub securely attached to the top.
8. When the ley has been properly heated, the tallow, either in a tried state or in the suet, is gradually[127] added. More ley, of greater concentration, is poured in; and the ingredients are moderately boiled for several hours; while a person, as represented in the preceding cut, aids their chemical union by agitating them with a wooden spatula.
8. When the lye is properly heated, the tallow, whether in a rendered state or in the suet, is gradually[127] added. More lye, with a higher concentration, is poured in, and the ingredients are gently boiled for several hours, while someone, as shown in the previous illustration, helps their chemical combination by stirring them with a wooden spatula.
9. After a quantity of rosin has been added, and properly incorporated with the other materials, the fire is withdrawn until the next morning, when it is again raised; then, with the view of forming the paste into hard soap, a quantity of muriate of soda (common salt) is added. The muriatic acid of this substance, uniting with the potash, forms with it muriate of potash, which dissolves in the water, while the soda combines with the tallow and rosin. Hard soap, therefore, contains no potash; although this alkali is generally employed during the early part of the process of making it.
9. After adding a certain amount of rosin and mixing it well with the other materials, the fire is turned off until the next morning, when it is started up again. To turn the mixture into hard soap, a quantity of common salt (muriate of soda) is added. The muriatic acid in this salt reacts with the potash, creating muriate of potash, which dissolves in the water, while the soda combines with the tallow and rosin. As a result, hard soap doesn't contain any potash, even though this alkali is typically used earlier in the soap-making process.
10. After the addition of the muriate of soda, the boiling and stirring are continued two or three hours, when the fire is withdrawn, and the contents of the caldron are suffered to be at rest. When the soap has completely separated from the watery part and extraneous matters, it is laded into another caldron, again diluted with strong ley, and heated. The paste having been brought to a proper consistence, more common salt is added as before, and for the same purposes.
10. After adding the salt, boiling and stirring continue for two to three hours until the heat is turned off and the mixture is allowed to settle. Once the soap has fully separated from the water and other impurities, it is transferred to another pot, mixed with more strong lye, and heated again. Once the mixture has reached the right consistency, more salt is added, just like before, for the same reasons.
11. The chemical part of the process having been thus completed, the soap is laded into single wooden boxes, or into one or more composed of several distinct frames, which can be removed separately from the soap, after it has become solid enough to stand without such support. The soap is cut into bars, of nearly a uniform size, by means of a small brass wire.
11. After the chemical part of the process is finished, the soap is placed into individual wooden boxes or into one or more larger ones made up of several separate frames that can be taken out individually from the soap once it has hardened enough to stand on its own. The soap is cut into bars, approximately the same size, using a thin brass wire.
12. Manufacturers of soap have contrived various methods of adulterating this article, or of adding ingredients[128] which increase its weight, without adding to its value. The most common means employed for this purpose is water, which may be added, in some cases, in considerable quantities, without greatly diminishing the consistence of the soap.
12. Soap makers have come up with different ways to cheapen their product by adding ingredients[128] that increase its weight without improving its quality. The most common method used for this is adding water, which can be included in large amounts in some cases without significantly affecting the soap's consistency.
13. This fraud may be detected by letting the soap lie for some time exposed to the atmosphere. The water will thus be evaporated, and its quantity can be known by weighing the soap, after its loss of the superfluous liquid. To prevent evaporation, while the soap remains on hand, it is said, that some dealers keep it in saturated solutions of common salt. Another method of adulteration is found in the use of pulverized lime, gypsum, or pipe-clay. These substances, however, can be easily detected by means of a solution in alcohol, which precipitates them.
13. You can spot this fraud by leaving the soap out in the air for a while. The water will evaporate, and you can measure how much is lost by weighing the soap afterward. To stop evaporation while storing the soap, some sellers reportedly keep it in saturated salt solutions. Another way of adulterating soap involves using powdered lime, gypsum, or pipe-clay. However, these substances are easy to detect with an alcohol solution, which will cause them to precipitate.
14. The process of manufacturing soft soap, differs but little in its details from that described in the preceding paragraphs. The chief difference consists in omitting the use of salt. Soft soap, therefore, is composed of a greater proportion of water, and more alkali than is necessary to saturate the unctuous matters. Soft soap is made by almost every family in the country, from ashes, grease, and oily matters, reserved for the purpose.
14. The process of making soft soap isn't very different from what was described earlier. The main difference is that salt is not used. As a result, soft soap contains more water and more alkali than what's needed to saturate the greasy substances. Almost every household in the country makes soft soap from ashes, grease, and oily substances saved for this purpose.
15. The celebrated Marseilles white soap, is composed of
15. The famous Marseilles white soap is made of
Soda, | 6. |
Olive-oil, | 60. |
Water, | 34. |
Castile soap, of
Castile soap, from
Soda, | 9. |
Olive-oil, | 76.5. |
Water, with a little coloring matter, | 14.5. |
Fine toilet-soaps are made with oil of almonds, nut-oil, palm-oil, suet, or butter, combined with soda or[129] potash, according to their preparation in a solid or pasty state.
Fine toilet soaps are made with almond oil, nut oil, palm oil, suet, or butter, mixed with soda or[129] potash, depending on whether they are prepared in a solid or paste form.
16. In the manufacture of white soap, the tallow is more carefully purified, and no rosin is used. In other particulars, the process differs but little from that employed in the production of the common kind. Two tons of tallow should yield three tons of white soap. In making the same quantity of common brown or yellow soap, twelve hundred weight less is required, on account of the substitution of that amount of yellow rosin.
16. In making white soap, the tallow is purified more thoroughly, and no rosin is included. Otherwise, the process is quite similar to that used for the regular kind. Two tons of tallow should produce three tons of white soap. To make the same amount of regular brown or yellow soap, twelve hundred weight less is needed due to using that amount of yellow rosin instead.
17. The mottled appearance of some soaps is caused by dispersing the ley through it, towards the close of the operation, or by adding a quantity of sulphate of iron, indigo, or the oxide of manganese. Castile soap, now manufactured in the greatest perfection at Marseilles, in France, receives its beautifully marbled appearance from the sulphate of iron.
17. The spotted look of some soaps happens when the lye is mixed in towards the end of the process, or by adding a certain amount of iron sulfate, indigo, or manganese oxide. Castile soap, which is now produced with the highest quality in Marseille, France, gets its lovely marbled look from the iron sulfate.
THE CANDLE-MAKER.
1. The subject of the candle-maker's labors may be defined to be a wick, covered with tallow, wax, or spermaceti, in a cylindrical form, which serves, when lighted, for the illumination of objects in the absence of the sun. The business of candle-making is divided into two branches; the one is confined to the manufacturing of tallow candles, and the other, to making those composed of wax or spermaceti.
1. The focus of the candle-maker's work is a wick, coated with tallow, wax, or spermaceti, shaped in a cylindrical form, which provides light when lit, in the absence of sunlight. The candle-making business is split into two branches: one specializes in producing tallow candles, while the other makes those made from wax or spermaceti.
2. The process of making candles from tallow, as conducted by the tallow-chandler, needs only a brief description, since it differs but little from the method pursued by families in the country, with which most persons are familiar. The difference lies chiefly in the employment of a few conveniences, by which the candles are more rapidly multiplied.
2. The process of making candles from tallow, as done by the tallow-chandler, only needs a short description, since it’s very similar to the method used by families in the countryside, which most people know. The main difference is the use of a few tools that help produce the candles more quickly.
3. The first part of the process consists in preparing a wick, to serve as a foundation. The coarse[130] and slightly twisted yarn used for this purpose, is spun in the cotton-factories; and, being wound into balls, is, in that form, sold to the tallow-chandlers, as well as to individuals who make candles for their own consumption.
3. The first part of the process is to prepare a wick, which serves as a base. The thick and slightly twisted yarn used for this is spun in cotton factories and sold in balls to candle makers and individuals who make their own candles.
4. A sufficient number of threads is combined, to form a wick of a proper size; and, as they are wound from the balls, they are measured off, and cut to the proper length, by a simple contrivance, which consists of a narrow board, a wooden pin, and the blade of a razor. The pin and razor are placed perpendicular to the board, at a distance determined by the length of the proposed wick. The wicks are next put upon cylindrical rods, about three feet long; and a great number of these are arranged on a long frame.
4. A sufficient number of threads is combined to create a wick of the right size. As they are wound from the spools, they are measured and cut to the correct length using a simple device made of a narrow board, a wooden pin, and a razor blade. The pin and razor are positioned upright against the board, with a gap that matches the desired wick length. The wicks are then placed on cylindrical rods that are about three feet long, and many of these rods are lined up on a long frame.
5. To obtain the tallow in a proper state for use, it is separated from the membranous part of the suet, by boiling the latter in an iron or copper kettle, and then subjecting the cracklings to the action of a press. The substance that remains, after the tallow has been expressed, is called greaves, which are sometimes applied to fattening ducks for market. This is especially the case in the city of London.
5. To prepare the tallow for use, it’s separated from the fatty tissue by boiling the suet in an iron or copper pot, then pressing the cracklings. The leftover material after the tallow has been extracted is called greaves, which are sometimes used to fatten ducks for sale. This is especially common in London.
6. The tried tallow is prepared for application to the wicks, by heating it to a proper temperature. It is then poured into a suitable receptacle, where it is kept in order either by a moderate fire underneath, or by the occasional addition of hot tallow.
6. The tried tallow is warmed up to the right temperature before it’s applied to the wicks. It’s then poured into a suitable container, where it stays in order either by a gentle heat underneath or by occasionally adding more hot tallow.
7. The broaches, as the sticks with their wicks are called, are taken up, several at a time, either between the fingers or by means of a simple instrument denominated a rake, and dipped into the tallow. They are then returned to the frame, and suffered to cool, while successive broaches are treated in the same way. The dipping is repeated, until the candles have been thickened to the proper size.
7. The broaches, which are the sticks with their wicks, are picked up, several at a time, either with the fingers or with a simple tool called a rake, and dipped into the tallow. They are then put back in the frame and allowed to cool, while more broaches are processed in the same way. The dipping is repeated until the candles have been thickened to the right size.
8. In the preceding plate, is represented a workman[131] in the act of dipping several broaches of candles, suspended on a rake, which he holds in his hands. The mode of making dipped candles just described, is more generally practised than any other, and in this manner five or six hundred pounds can be made by one hand, in a single day. In some establishments, however, a more complicated apparatus is used, by which every part of the process is greatly expedited.
8. In the previous illustration, you can see a worker[131] dipping several candle wicks that are hanging on a rake he’s holding. The method of making dipped candles just mentioned is more commonly used than any other, allowing one person to produce five or six hundred pounds in a single day. However, in some places, a more complex setup is used that speeds up every part of the process significantly.
9. Mould candles are made very differently. The moulds consist of a frame of wood, in which are arranged several hollow cylinders, generally made of pewter. At the lower extremity of each cylinder, is a small hole, for the passage of the wick, which is introduced by means of a hook on the end of a wire. The cotton is fastened at the other end, and placed in a perpendicular situation in the centre of the shafts, by means of a wire, which passes through the loops of the wicks. The melted tallow, having been poured on the top of the wooden frame, descends into each mould. After the candles have become sufficiently cold, they are extracted from the cylinders with a bodkin, which is inserted into the loop of the wick. One person can thus mould two or three hundred pounds in a day.
9. Molded candles are made in a very different way. The molds consist of a wooden frame that holds several hollow cylinders, usually made of pewter. At the bottom of each cylinder, there’s a small hole for the wick, which is threaded in using a hook on the end of a wire. The cotton is secured at the other end and positioned vertically in the center of the cylinders with a wire that goes through the loops of the wicks. Melted tallow is poured on top of the wooden frame and flows down into each mold. Once the candles have cooled enough, they are removed from the cylinders using a bodkin, which is inserted into the wick's loop. One person can mold two or three hundred pounds in a day.
10. Candles are also made of bees-wax and spermaceti; but the mode of their manufacture differs in no particular from that of common mould candles. The wicks for wax-candles are usually made of a peculiar kind of cotton, which grows in Asiatic Turkey.
10. Candles are also made from beeswax and spermaceti; however, their manufacturing process is the same as that of regular molded candles. The wicks for wax candles are typically made from a special type of cotton that grows in Turkey.
11. Before the wax is applied to this purpose, the coloring matter is discharged. This is effected by bleaching the wax, in the following manner. It is first divided into flakes, or thin laminæ, by pouring it, in a melted state, through a colander upon a cylindrical wheel, which, at the same time, is kept revolving, while partly immersed in cold water. The[132] wax, having been removed from the water, is placed upon a table or floor covered with some kind of cloth. Here it is occasionally sprinkled with water, until the bleaching has been completed. The process occupies several weeks, or even months, according to the state of the weather, that being best which is most favorable to a rapid evaporation.
11. Before the wax is used for this purpose, the color is removed. This is done by bleaching the wax in the following way. It is first broken into flakes or thin layers by pouring it, while melted, through a colander onto a spinning cylindrical wheel that is partly dipped in cold water. After the wax is taken out of the water, it is placed on a table or floor covered with some fabric. Here, it is occasionally sprayed with water until the bleaching is complete. The process takes several weeks or even months, depending on the weather, with conditions that promote quick evaporation being the most effective.
12. Spermaceti is a substance separated from sperm oil, which is obtained from a species of whale, called physeter macrocephalus, or spermaceti cachalot. This oil is obtained from both the head and body of the animal, but that procured from the former contains twice the quantity of spermaceti.
12. Spermaceti is a substance extracted from sperm oil, which comes from a type of whale known as physeter macrocephalus, or spermaceti cachalot. This oil is taken from both the head and body of the whale, but the oil from the head has twice the amount of spermaceti.
13. To separate the spermaceti from the oil yielded by the body, it is first heated, then put into casks, and suffered to stand two or three weeks, in order to granulate. The oily part is now filtrated through strainers; and the remainder, which is called foots, is again heated, and put into casks. After having stood several weeks, these are put into bags, and submitted to the action of a powerful press. The spermaceti thus obtained, is melted and moulded into cakes. The oil thus separated from the spermaceti, is called spring or fall strained; because it is filtered and expressed only during those seasons of the year.
13. To separate the spermaceti from the oil produced by the body, it is first heated, then placed into barrels, and allowed to sit for two or three weeks to granulate. The oily part is then filtered through strainers; the leftover material, called foots, is heated again and put back into barrels. After several weeks, this is put into bags and pressed with a strong force. The spermaceti obtained this way is melted and shaped into cakes. The oil separated from the spermaceti is called spring or fall strained because it’s filtered and pressed only during those times of the year.
14. The oil from the head of the whale is treated like that from the body, in almost every particular. The difference consists, principally, in omitting the use of the strainer, and in the employment of stronger bags and a more powerful press. The oil obtained from the head-matter, is called pressed, since it is separated by the action of the press only. It is also denominated winter-strained, because the operation is performed in the cold weather.
14. The oil from the whale's head is processed just like the oil from its body, in almost every way. The main difference is that they skip using the strainer and use stronger bags and a more powerful press. The oil obtained from the head-matter is called pressed since it's separated only by the press. It's also known as winter-strained because this process happens in cold weather.
15. The spermaceti, having been melted and moulded into cakes, is reserved until the succeeding summer, when it is cut into thin shavings, by means of a[133] large shave, similar to the spoke-shave of the wheelwrights, and again pressed as before. The oil of this last pressing is called taut pressed, and is the least valuable kind, since a slight degree of cold causes it to become thick. The spermaceti obtained from the oil of the body, and that from the head-matter, are melted together, and purified by means of potash-ley.
15. The spermaceti, after being melted and shaped into cakes, is kept until the next summer, when it’s cut into thin shavings using a[133] large shave, similar to the spoke-shave used by wheelwrights, and then pressed again as before. The oil from this last pressing is called taut pressed, and it’s the least valuable type since a little bit of cold makes it thick. The spermaceti collected from the oil in the body and that from the head matter are melted together and purified with potash-ley.
16. The sperm-oil, thus freed from the spermaceti, is extensively used in lamps as a means of illumination; and, for many purposes, it is far more convenient than tallow. In the country, lard is frequently employed instead of oil, especially by the German population. In some European and Asiatic countries, vegetable oils supply the place of animal fats, in this application.
16. The sperm oil, now separated from the spermaceti, is widely used in lamps for lighting; and for many uses, it's much more practical than tallow. In rural areas, lard is often used instead of oil, especially by the German community. In some European and Asian countries, vegetable oils are used in place of animal fats for this purpose.
17. The origin of the art of making candles is not known. It is evident, however, that the business is comparatively modern, since the Greeks and Romans, as well as other nations of antiquity, employed torches of pine and fir, and lamps supplied with oil, in the production of artificial light. The words in the Scriptures translated candle, imply nothing more nor less than a light produced by some kind of oil consumed in a lamp.
17. The origins of candle-making are unclear. However, it’s clear that the practice is relatively modern, as the Greeks and Romans, along with other ancient civilizations, used pine and fir torches and oil lamps to create artificial light. The term candle in the Scriptures refers to nothing more or less than light generated by oil burned in a lamp.
18. The lamps in ancient times were suspended by a chain or cord from the ceiling, or supported on stands and moveable tables, which were called by the Romans lampadaria, or candelabra. Many specimens of this utensil are preserved in several museums of Europe, and some have lately been found in the ruins of Herculaneum.
18. The lamps in ancient times were hung from the ceiling using a chain or cord, or they were placed on stands and movable tables, which the Romans called lampadaria or candelabra. Many examples of this type of equipment are preserved in various museums across Europe, and some have recently been discovered in the ruins of Herculaneum.
19. The Chinese make their candles from the tallow obtained from the seeds and capsules of the tallow-tree. This tree, which is produced in great abundance in China, is said to grow in various parts of South Carolina and Georgia. In appearance, it resembles the Lombardy poplar.
19. The Chinese make their candles from the fat extracted from the seeds and pods of the tallow tree. This tree, which grows in large quantities in China, is said to also be found in several areas of South Carolina and Georgia. It looks similar to the Lombardy poplar.

THE COMB-MAKER, AND THE BRUSH-MAKER.
THE COMB-MAKER.
1. The comb is a well-known instrument, employed in cleansing, dressing, and confining the hair. It is made of various materials, but most commonly of tortoise-shell, the horns and hoofs of cattle, ivory, bone, and several kinds of hard wood.
1. The comb is a popular tool used for cleaning, styling, and managing hair. It can be made from different materials, but it's mostly made of tortoise shell, cattle horns and hooves, ivory, bone, and various types of hardwood.
2. It is impossible to determine the period of the world at which it was introduced, since history and tradition, the sources from which we obtain information of this nature, are silent with regard to its origin. It is evident, however, that the comb is an instrument of primary necessity; and hence it must have been invented in the earliest ages. This opinion is confirmed by the fact, that the comb has been[135] frequently found in use amongst savages, when first visited by civilized men.
2. It's impossible to pinpoint when in history the comb was introduced because both history and tradition, which are our sources for this information, don’t mention its origin. However, it's clear that the comb is a basic necessity, so it likely was invented in the earliest times. This idea is supported by the fact that the comb has been[135] often seen in use among primitive people when they were first encountered by civilized societies.
3. Combs employed in fixing the hair, are made of tortoise-shell, or of the horns of cattle. The genuine tortoise-shell is taken from the testudo imbricata, or hawk's-bill turtle; but a kind of shell, inferior in quality, is obtained from the testudo caretta, or loggerhead turtle. These turtles inhabit the seas of warm and temperate climates; but they are especially numerous in the West Indian seas, where shell is a valuable article of commerce. That from St. Domingo is especially esteemed for its brilliancy of shade and color.
3. Combs used for styling hair are made from tortoise shell or cattle horns. Real tortoise shell comes from the testudo imbricata, or hawk's-bill turtle; however, a lower-quality shell is sourced from the testudo caretta, or loggerhead turtle. These turtles are found in warm and temperate seas, with a particularly high population in the West Indian waters, where shell is a valuable trade item. The tortoise shell from St. Domingo is especially prized for its brilliant shades and colors.
4. The shell of the hawk's-bill turtle was extensively employed for ornamental purposes by the refined nations of antiquity; although we have no account of its application to the manufacture of combs. The Greeks and Romans decorated with it the doors and pillars of their houses, as well as their beds and other furniture. The Egyptians dealt largely with the Romans in this elegant article.
4. The shell of the hawksbill turtle was widely used for decorative purposes by the sophisticated cultures of the past, although we don’t have records of its use in making combs. The Greeks and Romans used it to adorn the doors and columns of their homes, along with their beds and other furniture. The Egyptians traded a lot with the Romans for this beautiful item.
5. The general length of the hawk's-bill turtle is about three feet from the bill to the end of the shell; but it has been known to measure five feet, and to weigh five or six hundred pounds. In the Indian Ocean, especially, specimens of prodigious magnitude are said to have occurred.
5. The average length of a hawksbill turtle is about three feet from its beak to the end of its shell; however, it's been known to reach up to five feet and weigh between five or six hundred pounds. In the Indian Ocean particularly, there have been reports of remarkably large specimens.
6. The shell employed in the arts, grows upon the back and feet of the animal. That on the back, consists of thirteen laminæ, or plates, which lap over each other, like tiles on the roof of a house. The plates vary in thickness from one-eighth to one-fourth of an inch, according to the age and size of the turtle. The quantity of merchantable shell obtained from a single subject of the usual size, is about eight pounds, which, at the usual price, is worth sixty or seventy dollars.[136]
6. The shell used in crafts grows on the back and feet of the animal. The one on the back is made up of thirteen layers or plates that overlap each other like roof tiles. The thickness of the plates ranges from one-eighth to one-quarter of an inch, depending on the turtle's age and size. The amount of usable shell obtained from a typical turtle is about eight pounds, which is usually worth sixty or seventy dollars.[136]
7. The process of making combs from the horns of cattle, is not difficult to be understood. The tips and buts are first cut off with a saw, and the remaining portion is also divided longitudinally on one side with the same instrument. The horns are then soaked for several days, and afterwards boiled in oil, to render them pliable. They are next spread out and pressed between hot iron plates. This operation clarifies the horn, and produces a plate of proper thickness.
7. The process of making combs from cattle horns is not hard to understand. The tips and ends are first cut off with a saw, and then the remaining part is also split longitudinally on one side using the same tool. The horns are soaked for several days and then boiled in oil to make them flexible. They are then spread out and pressed between hot iron plates. This step clarifies the horn and creates a plate of the right thickness.
8. After the plates thus produced, have been cut in pieces corresponding in size to the proposed combs, and when these have been shaved to a suitable thickness with instruments adapted to the purpose, the teeth are cut either with a twinning saw, as represented in the preceding cut, or with a twinning machine.
8. After the plates have been cut into pieces that match the size of the intended combs, and once these pieces have been shaved to the right thickness using the right tools, the teeth are cut either with a twinning saw, as shown in the previous image, or with a twinning machine.
9. In the former case, the plate is fastened with a wooden clamp, by the part which is designed to be left for the back of the comb; and when twins, or two combs, are to be formed from one piece, the other end is bent down, so as to render the upper surface considerably convex. To this surface the twinning saw is applied by the hand of the workman, who makes a number of incisions; which are completed both ways with two different kinds of saws, and the end of each tooth is cut from the back of the opposite comb with an instrument called a plugging awl.
9. In the first case, the plate is secured with a wooden clamp, at the part that’s meant to be the back of the comb; and when two combs are to be made from one piece, the other end is bent down to create a noticeably convex upper surface. The twinning saw is then used by the worker, who makes multiple cuts; these are completed in both directions with two different types of saws, and the end of each tooth is cut from the back of the opposite comb using a tool known as a plugging awl.
10. The twinning machine was invented, about twenty years ago, by a Mr. Thomas, of Philadelphia; but it has been successfully improved by several individuals since that time. It is, altogether, an ingenious and useful contrivance. The cutting part consists of two chisels, which are made to act on the plate alternately, and in a perpendicular direction, each chisel cutting one side of two teeth, and severing one from the opposite back, at every stroke. It is impossible, however, to form a clear conception of the manner in[137] which the machine operates, except by actual inspection. It performs the work with great rapidity; since from one to two hundred dozens of combs can be cut in twelve hours; whereas, not one-fourth of that number can be twinned in the old method, during the same time.
10. The twinning machine was invented about twenty years ago by a Mr. Thomas from Philadelphia, but since then, several people have successfully improved it. Overall, it is a clever and useful device. The cutting part consists of two chisels that work on the plate alternately and straight up and down, with each chisel cutting one side of two teeth and separating one from the opposite side with every stroke. However, it's impossible to fully understand how the machine works without seeing it in action. It operates very quickly; between one to two hundred dozen combs can be cut in twelve hours, while the old method can manage less than a quarter of that number in the same time.
11. After the teeth have been rounded, and in other respects brought to the proper form with suitable instruments, the combs are polished by rubbing them first with the dust of a peculiar kind of brick, then by applying them to a moving cylinder covered with buff leather, charged with rotten-stone, ashes, or brick-dust; and, finally, by rubbing them with the hand, charged with rotten-stone and vinegar.
11. After the teeth have been rounded and shaped properly with the right tools, the combs are polished by first rubbing them with a specific type of brick dust, then by using a moving cylinder covered in soft leather and coated with rotten-stone, ashes, or brick dust. Finally, they are rubbed by hand with a mix of rotten-stone and vinegar.
12. The combs are next colored, or stained; and, as the tortoise-shell is by far the best and most expensive material for this kind of comb, the great object of the manufacturer is to produce colors as nearly resembling those of the real shell as practicable. This is done in considerable perfection, in the following manner:
12. The combs are then colored or stained; since tortoise-shell is the best and most expensive material for this type of comb, the main goal of the manufacturer is to create colors that closely match those of the real shell as closely as possible. This is accomplished with considerable skill, in the following way:
13. The combs are first dipped in aqua-fortis, and then covered with a paste made of lime, pearlash, and red lead. To produce the requisite variety of shades, both taste and judgment are necessary in applying the composition, and in determining the time which it should remain upon the combs. To give the combs a still stronger resemblance to shell, they are also immersed for fifteen or twenty minutes in a dye of Nicaragua.
13. The combs are first soaked in aqua-regia, then coated with a mixture of lime, pearlash, and red lead. To achieve the needed range of colors, both skill and discernment are required in applying the mixture and deciding how long it should stay on the combs. To enhance their resemblance to shells, they are also dipped for fifteen to twenty minutes in a dye from Nicaragua.
14. The combs having been covered with oil, they are next heated upon iron plates, and brought to the desired shape by bending them upon wooden blocks with a woollen list. The whole process is finished by rubbing off the oil with a silk handkerchief.
14. After coating the combs with oil, they are heated on iron plates and shaped by bending them over wooden blocks using a wool fabric. The process is completed by wiping off the oil with a silk handkerchief.
15. The general process of making shell combs differs but little from that which has been just described,[138] varying only in a few particulars, in compliance with the peculiar nature of the material.
15. The overall process of creating shell combs isn't much different from what has just been described,[138] with only a few specifics changing to accommodate the unique qualities of the material.
16. On account of the great value of shell, the workmen are careful to make the most of every portion of it; accordingly, when a piece falls short of the desired size, it is enlarged by welding to it another of smaller dimensions. The union is effected, by lapping the two pieces upon each other, and then pressing them together between two plates of hot iron. The heat of the iron is prevented from injuring the shell, by the interposition of a wet linen cloth, and by immersing the whole in hot water. In a similar manner, broken combs are often mended; and by the same method, two pieces of horn can also be joined together.
16. Because shell is so valuable, the workers are careful to use every bit of it; so, when a piece is smaller than needed, they enlarge it by welding a smaller piece to it. They do this by overlapping the two pieces and then pressing them together between two hot iron plates. To prevent the heat from damaging the shell, they use a wet linen cloth and dip the whole thing in hot water. Similarly, broken combs are often repaired this way, and two pieces of horn can also be joined using the same method.
17. Both horn and shell combs are often stamped with figures, and otherwise ornamented with carved work. In the latter case, the ornaments are produced, by removing a part of the material with a saw and graver. The saw employed is not more than the twelfth of an inch in width; and, being fastened to a frame, it is moved up and down, with great rapidity, by means of the foot, while the part of the comb to be cut away is applied to the teeth. The operator is guided in the work by a pattern, which has been struck on paper from an engraved plate.
17. Horn and shell combs are often stamped with designs and decorated with carved details. In the latter case, the decorations are created by cutting away part of the material using a saw and a graver. The saw used is no more than a twelfth of an inch wide; it’s secured to a frame and is moved up and down quickly by foot while the area of the comb that needs to be removed is placed against the teeth of the saw. The person working is guided by a pattern that has been transferred onto paper from an engraved plate.
18. Combs for dressing and cleansing the hair, are made of horn, shell, bone, ivory, and wood; but it is unnecessary to be particular in describing the manner in which every kind of comb is manufactured. We will only add, that the teeth of fine ivory and bone combs are cut with a buzz, or circular saw, which, fastened to a mandrel, is moved in a lathe.
18. Combs for styling and cleaning hair are made from horn, shell, bone, ivory, and wood; however, there's no need to go into detail about how each type of comb is made. We will just mention that the teeth of high-quality ivory and bone combs are cut using a buzz or circular saw, which is attached to a mandrel and operated in a lathe.
THE BRUSH-MAKER.
1. There are few manufactured articles in more general use than brushes. This has arisen from their[139] great utility, and the low prices at which they can be purchased. The productions of the brush-maker's labor are denominated variously, according to the purposes to which they are to be applied.
1. There are hardly any products that are more commonly used than brushes. This comes from their[139] usefulness and the affordable prices at which they are sold. The items produced by brush makers are named differently based on the specific purposes they serve.
2. The operations connected with this business are very simple, as there is scarcely a tool employed which is not familiar to every other class of mechanics. The brush-maker, however, does not manufacture every part of the brush. He procures his wooden stocks and handles from various sources, but chiefly from the turner, and bone handles, from the tooth-brush handle-maker.
2. The tasks involved in this business are very straightforward, as almost every tool used is familiar to other types of mechanics. However, the brush-maker doesn’t produce every component of the brush. He gets his wooden stocks and handles from different suppliers, mostly from the turner, and bone handles from the tooth-brush handle-maker.
3. The first part of the process which may be considered as belonging particularly to the brush-maker, consists in boring the holes for the reception of the bristles. This is done with a bit of a proper size, which is kept in motion with a lathe, while the wood is brought against it with both hands. To enable the operator to make the holes in the right place and in the proper direction, a pattern is applied to the hither side of the stock.
3. The first part of the process that specifically belongs to the brush-maker involves drilling holes for the bristles. This is done using a bit of the appropriate size, which is rotated with a lathe while the wood is pressed against it with both hands. To help the operator position the holes accurately and in the correct direction, a template is applied to the front side of the wood.
4. The greater part of the bristles used by the brush-makers in the United States, are imported from Russia and Germany. Large quantities, however are obtained from Pennsylvania, and some parts of the Western States. American bristles are worth from thirty to fifty cents per pound, a price sufficiently high, one would suppose, to induce the farmers to preserve them, when they butcher their swine. Were this generally done, a tolerable supply of the shorter kinds of bristles might be obtained in our own country.
4. Most of the bristles used by brush makers in the United States come from Russia and Germany. However, large amounts are also sourced from Pennsylvania and some areas in the Western States. American bristles are valued at thirty to fifty cents per pound, which seems like a high enough price to encourage farmers to save them when they butcher their pigs. If this practice were common, we could have a decent supply of the shorter types of bristles right here in our country.
5. When the bristles come into the hands of the brush-maker, the long and short, and frequently those of different colors, are mixed together. These are first assorted, according to color; and those of a whitish hue are afterwards washed with potash-ley and soap, to free them from animal fat, and then[140] whitened by bleaching them with the fumes of brimstone.
5. When the bristles reach the hands of the brush-maker, the long and short ones, often in different colors, are mixed together. First, they are sorted by color; then, the whitish ones are washed with potash-lye and soap to remove animal fat, and afterward[140] bleached with sulfur fumes to whiten them.
6. The bristles are next combed with a row of steel teeth, for the purpose of placing them in a parallel direction, and with a view of depriving them of the short hair which may be intermixed. The workman, immediately after combing a handful, assorts it into separate parcels of different lengths. This is very readily done, by pulling out the longest bristles from the top, until those which remain in the hand have been reduced to a certain length, which is determined by a gauge marked with numbers. At each pulling, the handful is reduced in height near half an inch.
6. The bristles are then brushed with a row of steel teeth to align them in a parallel direction and to remove any short hairs that might be mixed in. The worker, right after combing a handful, sorts it into separate bunches of varying lengths. This is done easily by pulling out the longest bristles from the top until the remaining ones in hand reach a specific length, as indicated by a gauge marked with numbers. With each pull, the height of the handful is decreased by nearly half an inch.
7. The stocks and the bristles having been thus prepared, they are next fastened together. This is effected either with wire or by a composition of tar and rosin. The wire is used in all cases in which the fibre is doubled; but when the bristles are required in their full length, as in sweeping-brushes, the adhesive substance is employed.
7. Once the stocks and bristles are prepared, they are then secured together. This is done either with wire or a mixture of tar and rosin. Wire is used in all situations where the fiber is doubled; however, when bristles are needed at their full length, like in sweeping brushes, the adhesive substance is used.
8. It is superfluous to enter into detail, to show the manner in which the wire and composition are applied in fixing the bristles, as any person, with an ordinary degree of observation, can readily comprehend the whole, by examining the different kinds of brushes which are met with in every well-regulated household. The bristles, after having been fixed to the stock or handle, are trimmed with the shears or knife, according as they are required to be equal or unequal in length.
8. There’s no need to go into detail about how the wire and material are used to attach the bristles, since anyone with basic observation skills can easily understand it by looking at the various types of brushes found in any organized home. Once the bristles are attached to the handle, they are trimmed with scissors or a knife, depending on whether they need to be the same length or different lengths.
9. The brush is next handed over to the finisher, who applies to the back of the stock a thin veneer of wood, which secures the wire against the oxidizing influence of the atmosphere, and gives to the brush a finished appearance. The stock, together with the veneer, is then brought to the desired shape with suitable[141] instruments, polished with sand-paper, and covered with varnish.
9. The brush is then given to the finisher, who applies a thin layer of wood to the back of the stock. This layer protects the wire from oxidation due to the air and gives the brush a polished look. The stock, along with the veneer, is then shaped with appropriate[141] tools, polished with sandpaper, and coated with varnish.
10. Those brushes which the manufacturer designs to be ornamented, are sent in great quantities to the ornamenter, who applies to them various figures, in gold or Dutch leaf, japan or bronze, and sometimes prints, which have been struck on paper from engraved plates.
10. The brushes that the manufacturer makes to be decorated are sent in large amounts to the ornamenter, who adds different designs to them using gold or Dutch leaf, Japanese finishes, or bronze, and sometimes prints that have been transferred onto paper from engraved plates.

THE TAVERN-KEEPER.
1. A house in which travellers are entertained is denominated a tavern, inn, coffee-house, hotel, or house of public entertainment; and an individual who keeps a house of this description, is called an inn-keeper or tavern-keeper. Of these establishments there are various grades, from the log cabin with a single room, to the splendid and commodious edifice with more than a hundred chambers.
1. A place where travelers are welcomed is called a tavern, inn, coffee house, hotel, or public entertainment venue; and a person who runs such a place is known as an innkeeper or tavern keeper. These establishments vary in quality, from a simple log cabin with one room to a luxurious building with over a hundred rooms.
2. This business is one of great public utility; since, by this means, travellers obtain necessary refreshments and a temporary home, with very little trouble on their part, and that, in most cases, for a reasonable compensation. This is especially the case in the United States, where the public houses, taking them together, are said to be superior to those of any other country.[143]
2. This business is really important for the public; it allows travelers to get the necessary food and a place to stay with minimal effort on their part, and usually for a fair price. This is especially true in the United States, where the inns are said to be better than those in any other country.[143]
3. Travellers, in the early ages of the world, either carried with them the means of sustenance, and protection from the weather, or relied upon the hospitality of strangers; but, as the intercourse between different places for the purposes of trade, increased, houses of public entertainment were established, which at first were chiefly kept by women.
3. In the early ages of the world, travelers either brought their own food and shelter from the weather or depended on the kindness of strangers. However, as trade between different areas grew, public inns were set up, which were initially run mostly by women.
4. The people of antiquity, in every age and nation, whether barbarous or civilized, were, however, remarkable for their hospitality. We find this virtue enjoined in the Mosaic writings, and scriptures generally, in the poems of Homer, as well as in other distinguished writings, which have descended to our times. The heathen nations were rendered more observant of the rites of hospitality by the belief, that their fabulous gods sometimes appeared on earth in human shape; and the Jews and ancient Christians, by the circumstance, that Abraham entertained angels unawares.
4. The people of ancient times, in every age and culture, whether barbaric or civilized, were known for their hospitality. This virtue is emphasized in the Mosaic writings and scriptures in general, as well as in the poems of Homer and other notable works that have survived to our time. The pagan nations were more careful about hospitality because they believed their mythological gods sometimes appeared on earth in human form; the Jews and early Christians were influenced by the story of Abraham unknowingly hosting angels.
5. On account of the occasional acts of violence committed by both the guest, and the master of the house, it became necessary to take some precautions for their mutual safety. When, therefore, a stranger applied for lodgings, it was customary among the Greeks for both to swear by Jupiter, that they would do each other no harm. This ceremony took place, while each party stood with his foot placed on his own side of the threshold; and a violation of this oath by either party, excited against the offender the greatest horror.
5. Because of the occasional violent acts committed by both the guest and the host, it became necessary to take some precautions for their mutual safety. So, when a stranger requested lodgings, it was customary among the Greeks for both to swear by Jupiter that they would not harm each other. This ceremony happened while each person stood with one foot on their own side of the threshold, and breaking this oath by either party provoked great horror toward the offender.
6. The Greeks and Romans, in common with the people of many other nations, were in the habit of making arrangements with persons at a distance from their homes, for mutual accommodation, when either party might be in the vicinity of the other. In these agreements, the contracting parties included their posterity, and delivered to each other tokens,[144] which might be afterwards exhibited in proof of ancient ties of hospitality between the families. They swore fidelity to each other by the name of Jupiter, who was surnamed the Hospitable; because he was supposed to be the protector of strangers, and the avenger of their wrongs.
6. The Greeks and Romans, like many other cultures, often made arrangements with people far from their homes for mutual support whenever either one happened to be near the other. In these agreements, the parties involved included their descendants and exchanged tokens,[144] which could later be shown as proof of the long-standing hospitality ties between their families. They pledged loyalty to each other by the name of Jupiter, known as the Hospitable; he was believed to be the guardian of strangers and the avenger of their mistreatment.
7. This relation was considered a very intimate one, especially by the Romans; and, in their language, it was called hospitium, or jus hospitii; hence, the guest and entertainer were both called hostes, a word from which host is derived, which is employed to designate both the landlord and the guest. The Roman nobility used to build, for the reception of strangers, apartments called hospitalia, on the right and left of the main building of their residence.
7. This relationship was seen as very close, especially by the Romans; in their language, it was called hospitium, or jus hospitii; thus, both the guest and the host were referred to as hostes, a term that gave rise to the word host, which is used to refer to both the landlord and the guest. The Roman nobility would build separate accommodations for receiving guests, known as hospitalia, on either side of the main building of their home.
8. During the middle ages, also, hospitality was very commonly practised; and the virtue was not considered one of those which might be observed or neglected at pleasure; the practice of it was even enjoined by statute, in many countries, as a positive duty, which could not be neglected with impunity. In some cases, the moveable goods of the inhospitable person were confiscated, and his house burned. If an individual had not the means of entertaining his guest, he was permitted to steal, in order to obtain the requisite supply.
8. During the Middle Ages, hospitality was widely practiced; it was not viewed as optional, but rather as a duty that had to be fulfilled. In many countries, laws made it a requirement, and failing to practice hospitality could lead to serious consequences. In some cases, the belongings of an inhospitable person could be seized, and their house could even be burned down. If someone could not afford to host a guest, they were allowed to steal to get what they needed for the occasion.
9. The nobles of Europe, during this period, were generally distinguished for their cordial entertainment of strangers, and their immediate adherents. Their extraordinary liberality arose, in part, from the general customs of the age, and partly from a desire to attach to their interests as great a number of retainers as possible, with a view to maintain or increase their political importance. Strangers were also entertained at the monasteries, which were numerous in almost every kingdom of Europe. Several of these institutions were established in solitary places,[145] with the express purpose of relieving travellers in distress.
9. During this time, the nobles of Europe were typically known for their warm hospitality towards strangers and their loyal followers. Their generous nature came partly from the common customs of the era and partly from a desire to gather as many supporters as possible to maintain or enhance their political power. Strangers were also welcomed at the monasteries, which were widespread across almost every European kingdom. Many of these institutions were located in remote areas,[145] specifically to help travelers in need.
10. It is evident, that the arrangements for mutual accommodation, and the hospitable character of the ancients, were unfavorable to the business of keeping tavern; but the free intercourse between different nations, which arose from the Crusades, and the revival of commerce, contributed greatly to the habit of regularly entertaining strangers for a compensation, and led to the general establishment of inns.
10. It’s clear that the way people accommodated each other and the hospitality of ancient times made it difficult to run taverns. However, the open exchange between different nations that came from the Crusades, along with the revival of trade, greatly encouraged the practice of regularly hosting strangers for a fee, which led to the widespread establishment of inns.
11. These inns, however, were not, at first, well supported; inasmuch as travellers had been long accustomed to seek for lodgings in private houses. In Scotland, inns were established by law, A.D. 1424; and, to compel travellers to resort to them, they were forbidden, under a penalty of forty shillings, to use private accommodations, where these public houses were to be found.
11. These inns, however, weren't initially very popular because travelers had long gotten used to staying in private homes. In Scotland, inns were legally established in 1424, and to encourage travelers to use them, people were banned from staying in private accommodations if public houses were available, with a fine of forty shillings for those who did.
12. How far legislative enactments have been employed for the establishment of inns in other countries, we have not been able to learn, as the authorities to which we have referred for information on this point are silent with regard to it. We know, however, that laws have been made in almost every part of Europe, as well as in the United States, with the view of compelling the landlord to preserve proper order, and to accommodate his customers at reasonable charges.
12. We haven't been able to find out how much legislative action has been used to establish inns in other countries since the sources we've checked are quiet on this issue. However, we do know that laws have been enacted in almost every part of Europe and in the United States to ensure that landlords maintain proper order and provide reasonable prices for their customers.
13. In the United States, and in all other commercial countries, this business has become one of great importance, not only to the individuals who have engaged in it, but also to the community in general. Within the present century, the amount of travelling has greatly increased, and the excellence of the public houses has advanced in the same ratio. Some of these establishments in the cities and large towns, are among the most extensive and splendid edifices of the country; and, in every place through which there[146] is much travelling, they are usually equal or superior to the private dwellings of the neighborhood.
13. In the United States and other commercial countries, this industry has become very important, not just for the people involved but also for the community as a whole. In this century, travel has significantly increased, and the quality of public accommodations has improved accordingly. Some of these establishments in cities and large towns are among the most impressive and grand buildings in the country, and in any place with a lot of travel, they often match or exceed the private homes in the area.
14. The business of keeping tavern, however, is not always confined to the proper object of entertaining travellers, or persons at some distance from home. A public house is frequently the resort of the people who live in the immediate vicinity, and is often the means of doing much injury, by increasing dissipation.
14. Running a tavern, however, isn’t just about serving travelers or people who are far from home. A pub is often a hangout spot for locals and can lead to a lot of harm by contributing to excessive drinking.
15. In all cases in which ardent spirits are proposed to be sold, a license must be obtained from the public authorities, for which must be paid the sum stipulated by law; but any person is permitted to lodge travellers, and to supply them with every necessary means of cheer and comfort for a compensation, without the formality of a legal permission; yet, a license to sell liquors is called a tavern-license; because most tavern-keepers regard the profits on the sale of ardent spirits as one of their chief objects.
15. Whenever strong alcoholic beverages are intended to be sold, a license must be obtained from the local authorities, and the fee set by law must be paid; however, anyone is allowed to accommodate travelers and provide them with all essential comforts for a fee, without needing formal legal permission. Still, a license to sell alcohol is known as a tavern license, because most tavern owners see the profits from selling strong drinks as one of their main goals.
16. A public house in which no strong drink is sold, is called a temperance tavern; and such establishments are becoming common; but they are not, at present, so well supported as those in which the popular appetite is more thoroughly complied with. The time, however, may not be far distant, when the public sentiment will undergo such a salutary change, that the tavern-keepers generally will find it their best policy to relinquish the sale of this poisonous article.
16. A bar that doesn’t serve strong drinks is called a temperance tavern, and these places are becoming more common. However, they aren't as popular right now as those that cater to people's usual cravings. But the time might not be too far away when public opinion shifts enough that tavern owners will realize it's in their best interest to stop selling this harmful beverage.
17. As travellers often apply to the bar for "something to drink," merely to remunerate the landlord for the use of his fire, or some little attention, the friends of temperance would essentially promote their cause, by encouraging the practice of paying for a glass of water, or some trifle of this kind. This would increase the number of temperance taverns, and, perhaps, be the means of preventing many generous people from forming those dissipated habits, which are so often attended with ruinous results.
17. Since travelers often go to the bar for "something to drink," just to pay the landlord for using his fire or for a little service, friends of temperance could really support their cause by encouraging the habit of paying for a glass of water or something similar. This would boost the number of temperance taverns and might help prevent many good people from developing those unhealthy habits that often lead to disastrous outcomes.

THE HUNTER.
1. Hunting and fishing are usually considered the primary occupations of man; not because they were the first employments in which he engaged, but because they are the chief means of human sustenance among savage nations.
1. Hunting and fishing are often seen as the main activities of humans; not because they were the first jobs people took on, but because they are the main sources of food among primitive societies.
2. The great and rapid increase of the inferior animals, and, probably, the diminished fertility of the soil after the deluge, caused many branches of the family of Noah to forsake the arts of civilized life, especially after the dispersion caused by the confusion of tongues.
2. The significant and rapid rise of lower animals, along with the likely decrease in soil fertility after the flood, led many branches of Noah's family to abandon civilized living, especially following the scattering that happened due to the confusion of languages.
3. Many of these families, or tribes, continued in this barbarous state for several ages, or until their increase of numbers, and the diminished quantity of wild game, rendered a supply of food from the objects[148] of the chase extremely precarious. Necessity then compelled them to resort to the domestication of certain animals, and to the cultivation of the soil. But the practice of hunting wild animals is not confined to the savage state; as it is an amusement prompted by a propensity inherent in human nature.
3. Many of these families, or tribes, remained in this primitive state for several centuries, or until their growing population and the decline of wild game made finding food through hunting very unreliable. Necessity then forced them to start domesticating certain animals and farming the land. However, the practice of hunting wild animals isn’t limited to uncivilized societies; it’s an activity driven by a natural instinct in humans.
4. The earliest historical notice of this sport is found in the tenth chapter of Genesis, in which Nimrod is styled, "a mighty hunter before the Lord." So great was his prowess in this absorbing pursuit, that he was proverbially celebrated on this account even in the time of Moses. Nimrod is the first king of whom we read in history; and it is by no means improbable, that his skill and intrepidity in subduing the wild beasts of the forest, contributed largely towards elevating him to the regal station.
4. The earliest mention of this sport can be found in the tenth chapter of Genesis, where Nimrod is described as "a mighty hunter before the Lord." His incredible talent in this captivating activity was so well known that he was famously recognized for it even during Moses' time. Nimrod is the first king we learn about in history, and it’s quite likely that his talent and bravery in conquering the wild animals of the forest played a significant role in his rise to kingship.
5. Although the spoils of the chase are of little consequence to men, after they have united in regular communities, in which the arts of civilized life are cultivated; yet the propensity to hunt wild animals continues, and displays itself more or less among all classes of men.
5. Even though the rewards of the hunt mean little to people once they've come together in established communities where the skills of civilized life are developed, the urge to hunt wild animals persists and is shown to varying degrees among all groups of people.
6. The reader of English history will recollect, that William the Conqueror, who began his reign in the year 1066, signalized his passion for this amusement, by laying waste, and converting, into one vast hunting-ground, the entire county of Hampshire, containing, at that time, no less than twenty-two populous parishes. Severe laws were also enacted, prohibiting the destruction of certain kinds of game, except by a few persons having specified qualifications. With some modifications, these laws are still in force in Great Britain.
6. Anyone who reads English history will remember that William the Conqueror, who started his reign in 1066, showed his love for hunting by turning the entire county of Hampshire into one huge hunting ground, which at that time included twenty-two busy parishes. Strict laws were also created, banning the killing of certain types of game, except for a select few individuals with specific qualifications. With a few changes, these laws are still in effect in Great Britain.
7. In other countries of Europe, also, large tracts have been appropriated by the kings and nobles to the same object. This tyrannical monopoly is attempted to be justified by the unreasonable pretension, that all[149] wild animals belong, of right, to the monarch of the country, where they roam.
7. In other European countries as well, large areas have been taken over by kings and nobles for the same purpose. This oppressive monopoly is tried to be justified by the unreasonable belief that all[149] wild animals rightfully belong to the monarch of the country where they live.
8. The quadrupeds most hunted in Europe, are the stag, the hare, the fox, the wolf, and the wild boar. These beasts are pursued either on account of their intrinsic value, or for sport, or to rid the country of their depredations. In some instances, all three of these objects may be united. The method of capturing or killing the animals is various, according to the character and objects of the persons engaged in it.
8. The most commonly hunted animals in Europe are the deer, the hare, the fox, the wolf, and the wild boar. These creatures are pursued for their value, for sport, or to eliminate their destructive presence in the countryside. Sometimes, all three reasons come into play. The methods used to capture or kill these animals vary depending on the goals and interests of those involved.
9. In Asia, the wolf is sometimes hunted with the eagle; but, in Europe, the strongest greyhounds are employed to run him down. This task, however, is one of extreme difficulty, as he can easily run twenty miles upon a stretch, and is besides very cunning in the means of eluding his pursuers. Chasing the fox on horseback, with a pack of hounds, is considered an animating and manly sport, both in Europe and in North America.
9. In Asia, wolves are sometimes hunted with eagles, but in Europe, the fastest greyhounds are used to chase them down. This is a challenging task because a wolf can easily run up to twenty miles at a time and is also very clever at avoiding capture. Fox hunting on horseback with a pack of hounds is seen as an exciting and masculine sport in both Europe and North America.
10. The most prominent victim of the hunter, in Africa, is the lion. He is usually sought in small parties on horseback with dogs; but sometimes, when one of these formidable animals has been discovered, the people of the neighborhood assemble, and encircle him in a ring, three or four miles in circumference. The circle is gradually contracted, until the hunters have approached sufficiently near to the beast, when they dispatch him, usually with a musket-ball.
10. The most notable victim of the hunter in Africa is the lion. Hunters typically search for them in small groups on horseback with dogs. However, sometimes when one of these powerful animals is spotted, locals gather and form a ring around it, spanning three or four miles. The circle gradually tightens until the hunters get close enough to the animal, at which point they kill it, usually with a musket ball.
11. In the southern parts of Asia, tiger-hunting is a favorite amusement. Seated upon an elephant, trained especially for the purpose, the hunter is in comparative safety, while he pursues and fires upon the tiger, until his destruction is effected.
11. In the southern parts of Asia, hunting tigers is a popular pastime. Sitting on an elephant that's specially trained for this purpose, the hunter is relatively safe while tracking and shooting the tiger until it's killed.
12. The white bear and the grisly bear are the most formidable animals in North America; yet they are industriously hunted by both Indians and white[150] men, on account of the value of their flesh and skins. Bisons, or, as they are erroneously called, buffaloes, are found in great numbers in the vast prairies which occur between the Mississippi and the Rocky Mountains. They are commonly met with in droves, which sometimes amount to several thousands.
12. The polar bear and the grizzly bear are the most powerful animals in North America; yet they are actively hunted by both Native Americans and white men because of the worth of their meat and hides. Bison, or as they are mistakenly called, buffalo, are found in large numbers in the vast prairies located between the Mississippi River and the Rocky Mountains. They are often seen in herds that can number in the thousands.
13. When the Indian hunters propose to destroy these animals, they ride into the midst of a herd, and dispatch them with repeated wounds; or, they get a drove between themselves and a precipice, and, by shouting and yelling, cause the animals to crowd each other off upon the rocks below. In this manner, great numbers are disabled and taken at once. The hunters, at other times, drive the bisons into inclosures, and then shoot them down at their leisure. The hide of this animal is dressed with the hair adhering to it; and skins, in this state, are used by the savages for beds, and by the white people, in wagons, sleighs, and stages.
13. When the Indian hunters decide to kill these animals, they ride into the middle of the herd and stab them repeatedly; or they get a group of them between themselves and a cliff, and by shouting and yelling, make the animals push each other off the rocks below. This way, they can disable and capture a large number at once. Sometimes the hunters drive the bison into pens and then shoot them down at their convenience. The hide of this animal is processed with the hair still on it; and these skins are used by the Native Americans for beds, and by white people in wagons, sleighs, and stages.
14. North America, and the northern parts of Asia, have been, and, in some parts, still are, well stocked with fur-clad animals; and these are the principal objects of pursuit, with those who make hunting their regular business. Some of these animals were common in every part of North America, when this portion of the western continent was first visited by Europeans; and a trade in peltries, more or less extensive, has been carried on with the natives, ever since the first settlement of the country.
14. North America and the northern regions of Asia have been, and in some areas still are, full of fur-bearing animals, which are the main targets for those who hunt for a living. Some of these animals were found throughout North America when Europeans first explored this part of the western continent, and a trade in furs has been established with the local populations since the country was first settled.
15. For the purpose of conducting this trade with advantage, a company was formed in England, in 1670, by Prince Rupert and others, to whom a charter was granted, securing to them the exclusive privilege of trading with the Indians about Hudson's Bay. Another company was formed in 1783-4, called the North-West Fur Company. Between these companies, there soon arose dissensions and hostilities, and[151] many injuries were mutually inflicted by the adherents of the parties. Both associations, however, were at length united, under the title of the Hudson's Bay Fur Company. The Indian trade, on the great lakes and the Upper Mississippi, has long been in possession of the North American Fur Company. Most of the directors of this company reside in the city of New-York.
15. To conduct this trade more effectively, a company was established in England in 1670 by Prince Rupert and others, who were granted a charter that gave them the exclusive right to trade with the Indigenous peoples around Hudson's Bay. Another company, called the North-West Fur Company, was formed in 1783-84. Soon, disagreements and conflicts arose between these companies, and[151] both sides inflicted various harms on each other. Eventually, both groups merged under the name Hudson's Bay Fur Company. The North American Fur Company has long held the Indian trade around the Great Lakes and the Upper Mississippi. Most of the directors of this company live in New York City.
16. The companies just mentioned supply the Indians with coarse blue, red, and fine scarlet cloths, coarse cottons, blankets, ribands, beads, kettles, firearms, hatchets, knives, ammunition, and other articles adapted to the wants of the hunters, receiving, in return, the skins of the muskrat, beaver, otter, martin, bear, deer, lynx, fox, &c.
16. The companies just mentioned provide the Native Americans with rough blue, red, and fine scarlet fabrics, coarse cottons, blankets, ribbons, beads, kettles, guns, hatchets, knives, ammunition, and other items suited to the needs of the hunters, and in exchange, they receive the skins of muskrat, beaver, otter, marten, bear, deer, lynx, fox, etc.
17. The intercourse with the Indians is managed by agents, called clerks, who receive from the company a salary, ranging from three to eight hundred dollars per annum. The merchandise is conveyed to the place of trade, in the autumn, by the aid of Canadian boatmen and half-Indians. The most considerable portion of the goods are sold to the Indians on a credit, with the understanding of their making payment in the following spring; but, as many neglect this duty, a high price is affixed to the articles thus intrusted to savage honesty. The clerk furnishes the debtor with a trap, having his own name stamped upon it, to show that the hunter has pledged every thing which may be caught in it.
17. The trade with the Native Americans is handled by agents known as clerks, who receive a salary from the company that ranges from three to eight hundred dollars a year. The goods are transported to the trading post in the fall, with the help of Canadian boatmen and mixed-heritage individuals. Most of the merchandise is sold to the Native Americans on credit, with the agreement that they will pay in the following spring; however, since many fail to do so, a high price is set on the items given to their trustworthiness. The clerk provides the borrower with a trap that has his name stamped on it, indicating that the hunter has pledged everything caught in it.
18. Each clerk is supplied with four laborers and an interpreter. The latter attends to the store in the absence of the clerk, or watches the debtors in the Indian camp, lest they again sell the produce of their winter's labors. The peltries, when obtained by the clerk, are sent to the general agent of the company.
18. Each clerk is provided with four laborers and an interpreter. The interpreter manages the store when the clerk is away, or keeps an eye on the debtors in the Indian camp to prevent them from selling the produce of their winter's work again. The furs, once acquired by the clerk, are sent to the company's general agent.
19. The fur trade is also prosecuted, to some extent, by a class of men in Missouri, who proceed[152] from the city of St. Louis, in bodies comprising from fifty to two hundred individuals. After having ascended the Missouri river, or some of its branches, and, perhaps, after having passed the Rocky Mountains, they separate, and pursue the different animals on their own individual account, either alone or in small parties. The Indians regard these men as intruders on their territories; and, when a favorable opportunity is presented, they frequently surprise and murder the wandering hunters, and retain possession of their property.
19. The fur trade is also carried out, to some extent, by a group of men in Missouri, who set out from the city of St. Louis in groups of fifty to two hundred individuals. After traveling up the Missouri River or one of its branches, and possibly after crossing the Rocky Mountains, they split up and hunt different animals on their own, either solo or in small teams. The Native Americans see these men as trespassers on their land; when the chance arises, they often ambush and kill the roaming hunters and take their belongings.
20. In consequence of the unremitted warfare which has, for a long time, been carried on against the wild animals of North America, their number has been greatly diminished; and, in many parts, almost every species of the larger quadrupeds, and the fur-clad animals, has been exterminated. Even on the Mississippi, and the great lakes, the latter description of animals has been so much reduced in number, that the trade in peltries, in those parts, has become of little value. Another half century will, probably, nearly terminate the trade in every part of North America.
20. As a result of the ongoing battles that have been waged against the wild animals of North America for a long time, their numbers have greatly declined; in many areas, almost every species of the larger mammals and fur-bearing animals has been wiped out. Even on the Mississippi River and the Great Lakes, these animals have been reduced in such numbers that the trade in furs in those regions has lost much of its value. If things continue as they are, another fifty years will likely nearly end the trade across North America.
21. The fur trade was prosecuted with considerable success, during the latter part of the last century, principally by the English, on the north-west coast of America, and the adjacent islands. The peltries obtained by these enterprising traders, were carried directly to China. The trade was interrupted for a while by the Spaniards, who laid claim to those regions, and seized the British traders engaged there, together with the property in their possession. This affair, however, was afterwards amicably adjusted by the Spanish and English governments; and the whole trade, from California north and to China, was opened to the latter.
21. The fur trade was successfully carried out in the latter part of the last century, mainly by the English, on the northwest coast of America and the nearby islands. The furs collected by these adventurous traders were taken directly to China. The trade faced some interruptions from the Spaniards, who claimed those areas and seized British traders and their goods. However, this issue was later resolved peacefully between the Spanish and English governments, and the entire trade route from California north to China was opened to the English.
22. The fur trade, in those parts, is now chiefly in[153] the hands of the Russian Company in America, which has a capital of a million of dollars invested in the business. Most of the persons owning the stock, are merchants, residing at Irkutsk, a town of Siberia, which is the centre of the fur trade of that country. The skins obtained in Russian America are chiefly procured from the sea-otter, and several species of seal, together with those from foxes, of a blue, black, and gray color, which are brought from the interior. Parties of Russian hunters have already passed the Rocky Mountains, and interfered with the trade of the Hudson's Bay Company. The fur trade of Siberia is chiefly carried on with China.
22. The fur trade in that area is now mainly in the hands of the Russian Company in America, which has invested a million dollars in the business. Most of the shareholders are merchants living in Irkutsk, a town in Siberia that serves as the center of the fur trade in that region. The skins obtained from Russian America mainly come from sea otters and several types of seals, along with foxes in blue, black, and gray, which are sourced from the interior. Groups of Russian hunters have already crossed the Rocky Mountains, disrupting the trade of the Hudson's Bay Company. The Siberian fur trade primarily operates with China.
23. The chief objects of the hunters in Siberia, are the black fox, the sable, the ermine, the squirrel, the beaver, and the lynx. In the region near the Frozen Ocean, are also caught blue and white foxes. Siberia is the place of banishment for the Russian empire; and the exiles were formerly required to pay to the government an annual tribute of a certain number of sable-skins. The conquered tribes in Siberia, were also compelled to pay their taxes in the skins of the fox and sable; but now, those of less value, or money, are frequently substituted.
23. The main targets of hunters in Siberia are the black fox, sable, ermine, squirrel, beaver, and lynx. In the area near the Frozen Ocean, blue and white foxes are also caught. Siberia is a region of exile for the Russian empire, and exiles used to have to pay the government an annual tribute of a certain number of sable skins. The conquered tribes in Siberia were also forced to pay their taxes with fox and sable skins; however, now, less valuable skins or money are often used instead.
24. Although the skins of beasts were the first means employed to clothe the human body, yet it does not appear that the Greeks and Romans, and the other refined nations of antiquity, ever made use of furs for this purpose. The custom of wearing them, originated in those regions, where the fur-clad animals were numerous, and where the severity of the climate required this species of clothing. The use of furs was introduced into the southern parts of Europe by the Goths, Vandals, Huns, and other barbarous nations, which overran the Roman empire.
24. While animal hides were the first materials used to dress the human body, it seems that the Greeks, Romans, and other sophisticated cultures of ancient times never wore furs for this purpose. The practice of wearing furs started in areas where fur-bearing animals were abundant and where the harsh climate demanded this type of clothing. The use of furs was brought into southern Europe by the Goths, Vandals, Huns, and other barbaric tribes that invaded the Roman Empire.

THE FISHERMAN.
1. Although permission was given by the Deity, immediately after the flood, to employ for human sustenance "every moving thing that liveth," yet it is not probable, that fishes were used as food, to any considerable extent, for several centuries afterwards. It is stated by Plutarch, that the Syrians and Greeks, in very ancient times, abstained from fish. Menelaus, one of Homer's heroes, complains, on a certain occasion, that his companions had been reduced by hunger to the necessity of eating fish; and there is no mention in Homer, that the Grecians, at any time, used this food at the siege of Troy, although, for the ten years during which that contest was carried on, their camp was on the sea-shore.
1. Even though the Deity allowed people to eat "every moving thing that lives" right after the flood, it's unlikely that fish were eaten in any significant amounts for many centuries after that. Plutarch notes that the Syrians and Greeks, in very ancient times, avoided fish. Menelaus, one of Homer's heroes, once complained that his companions had been so hungry they had to eat fish; yet, there's no mention in Homer of the Greeks eating this food during the siege of Troy, even though their camp was by the seaside for the ten years of the conflict.
2. Moses, the Jewish lawgiver, is very explicit in[155] designating the land animals which might be used by the Israelites as food; and he was equally so with regard to the animals which inhabit the waters. We learn, from the twelfth chapter of Numbers, that the children of Israel, while journeying to the land of Canaan, "remembered the fish which they did eat," in Egypt.
2. Moses, the Jewish lawgiver, clearly outlines in[155] which land animals the Israelites can eat, and he does the same for the animals that live in the water. In the twelfth chapter of Numbers, we see that the children of Israel, while traveling to the land of Canaan, "remembered the fish that they ate" in Egypt.
3. This is the earliest notice on record, of the actual use of that class of animals for food; although it is probable, that they had been applied to this purpose, in Egypt, six or seven hundred years before that period, or soon after the settlement of this country by the descendants of Ham.
3. This is the earliest known record of the actual use of that type of animal for food; however, it’s likely that they were used for this purpose in Egypt six or seven hundred years before this time, or soon after this country was settled by the descendants of Ham.
4. For a long time before the advent of Our Saviour, fishing had been a regular business, even in Judea; and from the class of men who followed this occupation, he chose several of his apostles. At the time just mentioned, fish had become a common article of diet, in all parts of the world subject to the Roman power, and probably in almost all other countries.
4. For a long time before the arrival of Our Savior, fishing was a common trade, even in Judea; and from the group of people who practiced this profession, he chose several of his apostles. At that time, fish had become a staple food everywhere under Roman rule, and likely in almost all other regions as well.
5. The methods of catching fish, pursued in ancient times, were similar to those of the present day; for then, as now, they were caught with a hook, with a spear, and with a seine or net, according to the character of the animal, and the nature of the fishing station. But the great improvements in navigation, made since the twelfth century, have given modern fishermen the command of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, and, consequently, a knowledge of many species of fish which were formerly unknown.
5. The ways of catching fish used in ancient times were similar to those used today; back then, just like now, they were caught with a hook, a spear, or a net, depending on the type of fish and the fishing location. However, the major advancements in navigation since the twelfth century have allowed modern fishermen to access the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, leading to the discovery of many fish species that were unknown before.
6. According to Linnæus, the great naturalist, about four hundred species of fish have come to our knowledge; and he presumes, that those which remain unknown are still more numerous. Notwithstanding this great variety, the chief attention of fishermen is confined to a few kinds, which are the most[156] easily caught, and which are the most valuable when taken.
6. According to Linnæus, the renowned naturalist, we've identified around four hundred species of fish, and he believes that there are even more undiscovered ones. Despite this wide variety, fishermen mainly focus on a few types that are the easiest to catch and the most valuable when caught.
7. Every place which contains many inhabitants, and which is located in the vicinity of waters well stored with fish, is supplied with these animals by men who make fishing a business; still, these fisheries may be considered local in their benefits, and perhaps do not require particular notice in this article. We will only remark, therefore, that, in large cities, fresh fish are sold either in a fish-market, or are hawked about the streets. The wives of the fishermen are very often employed in selling the fish caught by their husbands. The fisheries which are of the greatest consequence, in general commerce, are those which relate to herring, mackerel, salmon, seal, and whale.
7. Every place with a lot of people, especially near waters rich in fish, is served by fishermen who make a living from fishing; however, these fisheries are usually seen as local in their advantages and may not need specific mention in this article. We will only point out that, in large cities, fresh fish are sold either at a fish market or are hawked along the streets. The fishermen's wives often help sell the fish caught by their husbands. The most significant fisheries in overall commerce are those focused on herring, mackerel, salmon, seal, and whale.
8. Herring Fishery.—There are several species of herring; but, of these, four kinds only are of much importance, viz., the common herring, the shad, the hard head, and the alewife; of which, the first is the most valuable, being by far the most numerous, and being, also, better adapted than the others for preservation.
8. Herring Fishery.—There are several types of herring, but out of these, only four are significantly important: the common herring, the shad, the hard head, and the alewife. Among these, the common herring is the most valuable, as it is by far the most abundant and also better suited for preservation than the others.
9. The winter residence of the common herring is within the arctic circle, whence it emigrates, in the spring, to more southern portions of the globe, for the purpose of depositing its spawn. The first body of these migratory animals, appears on the coasts of both Europe and America, in April, or about the first of May; but these are only the precursors of the grand shoals which arrive in a few weeks afterwards.
9. The winter home of the common herring is within the Arctic Circle, from where it moves south in the spring to lay its eggs. The first group of these migratory fish shows up on the coasts of both Europe and America in April, or around the beginning of May; however, these are just the early arrivals before the larger schools come in a few weeks later.
10. Their first approach is indicated by the great number of birds of prey, which follow them in their course; but, when the main body appears, the number is so great, that they alter the appearance of the ocean itself. In this last and principal migration, the shoals are five or six miles in length, and three or[157] four in breadth; and, before each of these columns, the water is driven in a kind of ripple. Sometimes, the fish sink together ten or fifteen minutes, and then rise again to the surface, when they reflect, in clear weather, the rays of the sun, in a variety of splendid colors.
10. Their first sign is the large number of birds of prey that follow them on their journey; but when the main group shows up, there are so many that they change the look of the ocean itself. In this final and main migration, the schools stretch five or six miles long and three or four wide; and in front of each of these groups, the water is pushed into a kind of ripple. Sometimes, the fish dive down for ten or fifteen minutes and then come back to the surface, where they reflect the sunlight in a range of brilliant colors on clear days.
11. These fish proceed as far south as France, on the coasts of Europe, and as far as Georgia, in America, supplying every bay, creek, and river, which opens into the Atlantic. Having deposited their spawn, generally in the inland waters, they return to their head-quarters in the Arctic Ocean, and recruit their emaciated bodies for another migration in the following spring.
11. These fish move as far south as France, along the coasts of Europe, and as far as Georgia in America, filling every bay, creek, and river that leads into the Atlantic. After laying their eggs, usually in inland waters, they return to their main area in the Arctic Ocean to regain their strength for another migration the next spring.
12. In a few weeks, the young ones are hatched by the genial heat of the sun; and, as they are not found in southern waters in the winter, it is evident that they proceed northward in the fall, to their paternal haunts under the ice, and thus repair the vast destruction of their race, which had been caused by men, fowl, and fish, in the previous season.
12. In a few weeks, the young ones are hatched by the warm sun; and since they aren't found in southern waters during the winter, it’s clear that they move north in the fall to their original habitats under the ice, thus helping to replenish their population, which was decimated by humans, birds, and fish in the previous season.
13. These fish are caught in nearly every river, from Maine to Georgia, which has a free communication with the Atlantic; but the most extensive fisheries are on the Hudson and Delaware Rivers, and on those which flow into the Chesapeake Bay.
13. These fish are caught in almost every river, from Maine to Georgia, that connects with the Atlantic; however, the largest fisheries are in the Hudson and Delaware Rivers, as well as in those that flow into Chesapeake Bay.
14. The instrument employed in catching these fish is called a seine, which is a species of net, sometimes in length several hundred fathoms, and of a width suiting the depth of the water in which it is to be used. The two edges of the net-work are fastened each to a rope; and, to cause the seine to spread laterally in the water, pieces of lead are fastened to one side, and pieces of cork to the other.
14. The tool used to catch these fish is called a seine, which is a type of net that can be several hundred fathoms long and varies in width to match the depth of the water where it's used. Each edge of the net is attached to a rope, and to help the seine spread out in the water, pieces of lead are attached to one side and pieces of cork to the other.
15. In spreading the seine in the water, one end is retained on land by a number of persons, while the rest of it is strung along from a boat, which is rowed[158] in the direction from the shore. The seine having been thus extended, the further end is brought round, in a sweeping manner, to the shore; and the fish that may be included are taken into the boats with a scoop-net, or are hauled out upon the shore. In this way, two or three hundred thousands are sometimes taken at a single haul. This fish dies immediately after having been taken from the water; hence the common expression, "As dead as a herring."
15. When setting the seine in the water, one end is held on land by several people, while the other end is stretched out from a boat, which is rowed[158] toward the shore. Once the seine is extended, the other end is brought back in an arching motion to the shore, and the fish caught in it are scooped into the boats with a net or pulled onto the shore. This way, two or three hundred thousand fish can sometimes be caught in a single haul. These fish die right after being taken out of the water, which is why we say, "As dead as a herring."
16. The herrings are sold, as soon as caught, to people who come to the fishing stations to procure them; or, in case an immediate sale cannot be effected, they are cured with salt, and afterwards smoked, or continued in brine. In the Southern states, the herring is generally thought to be superior to any other fish for the purpose of salting down; although the shad and some others are preferred while fresh.
16. The herrings are sold as soon as they are caught to people who come to the fishing stations to buy them; if an immediate sale isn't possible, they are cured with salt and then smoked, or kept in brine. In the Southern states, herring is usually considered the best fish for salting, although shad and a few others are preferred when fresh.
17. The importance of this fishery is superior to that of any other; since the benefits resulting from it are more generally diffused. The ancients, however, do not appear to have had any knowledge of this valuable fish. It was first brought into notice by the Dutch, who are said to have commenced the herring fishery on the coasts of Scotland, in the year 1164, and to have retained almost exclusive possession of it, until the beginning of the present century.
17. The significance of this fishery is greater than any other because the benefits it provides are more widely shared. However, the ancients don’t seem to have known about this valuable fish. It was first recognized by the Dutch, who are said to have started the herring fishery along the coasts of Scotland in 1164 and held nearly exclusive rights to it until the start of this century.
18. The shad is a species of herring, which inhabits the sea near the mouths of rivers, and which ascends them in the spring, to deposit its spawn. It is caught in all the rivers terminating on our Atlantic coasts, as well as in some of the rivers of the North of Europe. This fish is captured in the same manner and often at the same time with the common herring. It is highly esteemed in a fresh state; although it is not so good when salted, as the herring and some other kinds of fish.
18. The shad is a type of herring that lives in the sea near river mouths and swims upstream in the spring to lay its eggs. It’s found in all the rivers that flow into our Atlantic coast, as well as in some rivers in Northern Europe. This fish is caught in the same way and often around the same time as the common herring. It’s considered very valuable when fresh, although it doesn't taste as good when salted compared to herring and some other fish.
19. Mackerel Fishery.—The common mackerel is[159] a migratory fish, like the herring, and ranks next to that tribe of fishes in regard to numbers, and perhaps in general utility. Its place of retirement in the winter, is not positively known; but it is supposed by some, to be far north of the arctic circle; and by others, to be in some part of the Atlantic farther south. Shoals of this fish appear on the coasts of both Europe and America, in the summer season. Of this fish there are twenty-two species.
19. Mackerel Fishery.—The common mackerel is[159] a migratory fish, similar to herring, and is one of the most populous fish types, perhaps even more useful overall. Its winter resting place is not definitively known; some believe it to be far north of the Arctic Circle, while others think it’s located in a southern part of the Atlantic. Schools of this fish show up along the coasts of both Europe and America during the summer. There are twenty-two species of this fish.
20. The mode of catching the mackerel, is either with a net or with hooks and lines. The latter method succeeds best, when the boat or vessel is driven forward by a gentle breeze; and, in this case, a bit of red cloth, or a painted feather, is usually employed as a bait. Several hooks are fastened to a single line, and the fish bite so readily, that the fishermen occasionally take one on each hook at a haul. The mackerel is cured in the usual manner, and packed in barrels, to be sold to dealers.
20. Mackerel can be caught either with a net or with hooks and lines. The second method works best when the boat is being pushed forward by a light breeze; in this case, a piece of red cloth or a painted feather is often used as bait. Several hooks are attached to one line, and the fish bite so eagerly that fishermen sometimes catch one on each hook in a single haul. The mackerel is cured in the usual way and packed in barrels to be sold to dealers.
21. This fish was well known to the ancients, as one of its places of resort, in the summer, was the Mediterranean Sea. It was highly esteemed by the Romans, for the reason, that it was the best fish for making their sarum, a kind of pickle or sauce much esteemed by this luxurious people.
21. This fish was well known to ancient cultures, as one of its summer habitats was the Mediterranean Sea. The Romans valued it highly because it was the best fish for making their sarum, a type of pickle or sauce that was very popular among this extravagant society.
22. Salmon Fishery.—The salmon is a celebrated fish, belonging to the trout genus. It inhabits the seas on the European coasts, from Spitzbergen to Western France; and, on the western shore of the Atlantic, it is found from Greenland to the Hudson River. It also abounds on both coasts of the North Pacific Ocean. The length of full-grown salmon is from three to four feet; and their weight, from ten to fifteen pounds.
22. Salmon Fishery.—Salmon is a well-known fish that belongs to the trout family. It lives in the seas along the European coasts, from Spitzbergen to Western France; on the western side of the Atlantic, you can find it from Greenland to the Hudson River. It’s also plentiful on both coasts of the North Pacific Ocean. Mature salmon usually range from three to four feet in length and weigh between ten and fifteen pounds.
23. As soon as the ice has left the rivers, the salmon begin to ascend them, for the purpose of depositing their spawn. It has been ascertained that these[160] fish retain a remarkable attachment to the river which gave them birth; and, having once deposited their spawn, they ever afterwards choose the same spot for their annual deposits. This latter fact has been established by a curious Frenchman, who, fastening a ring to the posterior fin of several salmon, and then setting them at liberty, found that some of them made their appearance at the same place three successive seasons, bearing with them this distinguishing mark.
23. Once the ice melts in the rivers, salmon start to swim upstream to spawn. It's been noted that these[160] fish have an incredible loyalty to the river where they were born; after they spawn, they consistently return to the same spot for their annual egg-laying. This was shown by a curious Frenchman who attached a ring to the tail fin of several salmon and released them. He found that some returned to the same spot for three consecutive seasons, still wearing the identifying mark.
24. In ascending the rivers, these fish usually proceed together in great numbers, mostly swimming in the middle of the stream; and, being very timid, a sudden noise, or even a floating piece of timber, will sometimes turn them from their course, and send them back to the sea; but having advanced a while, they assume a determined resolution, overcoming rapids and leaping over falls twelve or fifteen feet in perpendicular height.
24. When these fish swim upstream, they usually travel in large groups, mostly sticking to the middle of the river. Since they are quite shy, a sudden noise or even a floating log can sometimes scare them and send them back to the ocean. However, after progressing for a bit, they gather their courage and tackle rapids, jumping over waterfalls that are twelve to fifteen feet high.
25. Salmon are caught chiefly with seines, and sometimes seven or eight hundred are captured at a single haul; but from fifty to one hundred is the most usual number, even in a favorable season. They are also taken in weirs, which are inclosures so constructed that they admit the ingress, but not the regress of the fish.
25. Salmon are mainly caught with nets, and sometimes seven or eight hundred can be caught in one haul; however, on average, the typical catch is between fifty and one hundred, even in a good season. They are also caught in weirs, which are structures designed to allow fish to enter but prevent them from leaving.
26. The salmon fisheries are numerous in Great Britain and Ireland, as well as in most of the northern countries of Europe. In the United States, the most valuable fisheries of this kind are on the rivers in Maine, whence the towns and cities farther south are principally supplied with these fish, in a fresh condition. They are preserved in ice, while on their way to market. In the cured state, salmon is highly esteemed; although it is not easily digested.
26. There are many salmon fisheries in Great Britain and Ireland, as well as in most of the northern European countries. In the United States, the top salmon fisheries are in the rivers of Maine, from which towns and cities further south mainly get their supply of fresh fish. They are kept on ice while being transported to market. Cured salmon is very popular, although it’s not the easiest to digest.
27. Cod Fishery.—There are several species of cod-fish, or gadus; but the most important and interesting of the class, is the common cod. These fish[161] are found in great abundance on the south and west coasts of Iceland, on the coasts of Norway, off the Orkney and Western Isles, and in the Baltic Sea. Farther south, they gradually diminish in numbers, and entirely disappear, some distance from the Straits of Gibraltar.
27. Cod Fishery.—There are several types of cod fish, or gadus; but the most significant and noteworthy is the common cod. These fish[161] are found in large numbers along the south and west coasts of Iceland, on the coasts of Norway, off the Orkney and Western Isles, and in the Baltic Sea. As you move further south, they gradually decrease in number and eventually disappear a short distance from the Straits of Gibraltar.
28. But the great rendezvous of cod-fish is on the coasts of Labrador, the banks of Newfoundland, Cape Breton, and Nova Scotia. They are invited to these situations by the abundance of small fish, worms, and other marine animals of the crustaceous and testaceous kinds, on which they feed. The fishermen resort, in the greatest numbers, to the banks, which, stretch along the eastern coasts of Newfoundland about four hundred and fifty miles. The water on these banks varies from twenty to fifty fathoms in depth.
28. But the main gathering spot for cod is along the coasts of Labrador, the banks of Newfoundland, Cape Breton, and Nova Scotia. They come to these areas because there are plenty of small fish, worms, and other marine creatures that they feed on. The fishermen flock in huge numbers to the banks, which stretch for about four hundred and fifty miles along the eastern coasts of Newfoundland. The water in these banks ranges from twenty to fifty fathoms deep.
29. By negociations with Great Britain, the French, Dutch, Spanish, and Americans, have acquired the right to catch and cure fish, both on the Grand Banks, and several other places on the coasts of the English possessions in North America. The number of vessels employed on the several fishing stations, during each successive season, amounts to six or seven thousand, each measuring from forty to one hundred and twenty tons, and carrying eight or ten men.
29. Through negotiations with Great Britain, the French, Dutch, Spanish, and Americans have gained the right to catch and process fish, both on the Grand Banks and in several other locations along the coasts of British territories in North America. The number of vessels used at various fishing spots during each season totals around six or seven thousand, each ranging from forty to one hundred twenty tons and carrying eight to ten crew members.
30. The fishing on the Grand Banks commences in April, and continues until about the first of August. Here, the fish are caught exclusively with hooks, which are usually baited with a small fish called the capelin, as well as with herring, clams, and the gills of the cod itself. But this fish is not very particular in its choice of bait, it biting greedily at almost any kind which may be presented. An expert fisherman will frequently catch from one hundred to three hundred cod in a single day.
30. Fishing on the Grand Banks starts in April and goes on until around the beginning of August. Here, fish are caught only using hooks, which are typically baited with a small fish called capelin, along with herring, clams, and even the gills of the cod itself. However, this fish isn’t very picky about its bait; it will bite eagerly at just about any kind that's offered. An experienced fisherman can often catch between one hundred and three hundred cod in a single day.
31. As soon as the fish have been caught, their[162] heads are cut off, and their entrails taken out. They are then salted away in bulk in the hold; and, after having lain three or four days to drain, they are taken to another part of the vessel, and again salted in the same manner. The fishermen from New-England, however, give them but one salting while on the fishing station; but, as soon as a cargo has been obtained, it is carried home, where conveniences have been prepared for curing the fish to greater advantage. By pursuing this plan, two or three trips are made during the season. Some of the fish are injured before they are taken from the vessel; and these form an inferior quality, called Jamaica fish, because such are generally sold in that island, for the use of the negroes.
31. As soon as the fish are caught, their[162] heads are cut off, and their insides are removed. They are then bulk-salted in the hold, and after resting for three or four days to drain, they are moved to another part of the boat and salted again in the same way. However, fishermen from New England only salt them once while at the fishing spot; once enough fish are collected, they are taken home where facilities are set up for better curing. Following this method, two or three trips are made during the season. Some of the fish get damaged before being removed from the boat, and these are considered a lower quality, known as Jamaica fish, because they are typically sold on that island for the use of the Black community.
32. The fish which are caught on the coasts of Labrador, at the entrance of Hudson's Bay, in the Straits of Belleisle, and on fishing stations of similar advantages, are cured on the shore. They are first slightly salted, and then dried in the sun, either on the rocks, or on scaffolds erected for the purpose. In these coast fisheries, the operations commence in June, and continue until some time in August. The cod are caught in large seines, as well as with hook and line.
32. The fish caught along the coasts of Labrador, at the entrance of Hudson's Bay, in the Straits of Belleisle, and at similar fishing spots are processed on the shore. They are first lightly salted and then dried in the sun, either on the rocks or on scaffolds set up for this purpose. These coastal fisheries start in June and last until sometime in August. Cod are caught using large nets, as well as hooks and lines.
33. Seal Fishery.—There are several species of the seal; but the kind which is most numerous, and most important in a commercial view, is the common seal. It is found on the sea-coasts throughout the world, but in the greatest numbers in very cold climates, where it furnishes the rude inhabitants with nearly all their necessaries and luxuries.
33. Seal Fishery.—There are several species of seals; however, the most common and commercially significant one is the harbor seal. It is found along coastlines around the globe, but it is most abundant in very cold climates, where it provides the local populations with nearly all their essentials and luxuries.
34. The animal is valuable to the civilized world, on account of its skin and oil. The oil is pure, and is adapted to all the purposes to which that from the whale is applied. In the spring of the year, the seals are very fat; and, at that time, even small ones will[163] yield four or five gallons of oil. The leather manufactured from the skins, is employed in trunk-making, in saddlery, and in making boots and shoes.
34. The animal is valuable to the modern world because of its skin and oil. The oil is pure and can be used for all the same purposes as whale oil. In the spring, the seals are very fat, and at that time, even the smaller ones can provide four or five gallons of oil. The leather made from the skins is used for making trunks, saddles, and boots and shoes.
35. Since the whale fishery has declined in productiveness in the northern seas, sealing has arisen in importance; and accordingly, vessels are now frequently fitted out for this purpose, in both Europe and America; whereas, a few years since, it was regarded only as a part of the objects of a whaling voyage.
35. As the whale fishery has become less productive in the northern seas, sealing has become more important. Now, ships are often equipped for this purpose in both Europe and America, while just a few years ago, it was viewed as just one part of a whaling trip.
36. Our countrymen of New-England have particularly distinguished themselves in this branch of business; and the part of the globe which they have found to be the most favorable to their objects, has been the islands in the Antarctic Ocean. A sealing voyage to that quarter often occupies three years, during which time the hunters are exposed to great hardships, being often left in small detachments on desolate islands, for the purpose of pursuing the animals to greater advantage.
36. Our fellow countrymen in New England have really stood out in this line of work, and the area of the world they've found to be the best for their goals has been the islands in the Antarctic Ocean. A sealing trip to that region often lasts three years, during which the hunters face significant challenges, often being left in small groups on barren islands to hunt the animals more effectively.
37. The best time for sealing in the Arctic Ocean, is in March and April, when the seals are often met with in droves of several thousands on the ice, which is either fixed, or floating in large pieces. When the sealers meet with one of these droves, they attack the animals with clubs, and stun them by a single blow on the nose. After all that can be reached, have been disabled in this way, the skin and blubber are taken off together.
37. The best time for sealing in the Arctic Ocean is in March and April when there are often thousands of seals on the ice, which can be either solid or in large chunks. When the sealers come across one of these groups, they hit the animals with clubs and knock them out with a single blow to the nose. Once all the accessible seals have been taken care of this way, the skin and blubber are removed together.
38. This operation is called flenching, and is sometimes a horrible business; since some of the seals, being merely stunned, occasionally recover, and, in their denuded state, often make battle, and even leap into the water, and swim off. The skins, with the blubber attached to them, are packed away in the hold; and, in case the vessel is to return home soon, they are suffered to remain there, until she arrives in port; but, when this is not expected, the skins, as[164] soon as convenient, are separated from the blubber, and the latter is put into casks. There are other methods of capturing the seal; but it is, perhaps, not necessary to enter into further details.
38. This process is called flenching, and it can be quite gruesome; some seals, being only stunned, sometimes wake up and, in their vulnerable state, fight back and even jump into the water, swimming away. The skins, with the blubber still attached, are stored in the hold. If the ship is expected to head back home soon, the skins are left there until it reaches port; however, if that’s not likely, the skins are separated from the blubber as[164] soon as possible, and the blubber is placed in barrels. There are other ways to catch seals, but it may not be necessary to go into more detail.
39. Whale Fishery.—There are five species of the whale, of which the Balæna Physalis, or razor-back, is the largest. When full grown, it is supposed to be about one hundred feet in length, and thirty or thirty-five feet in circumference. It is so powerful an animal, that it is extremely difficult to capture it; and, when captured, it yields but little oil and whalebone. The species to which whalers direct their attention is denominated the Mystecetus, or the right whale.
39. Whale Fishery.—There are five species of whales, and the Balæna Physalis, or razor-back, is the largest. When fully grown, it is estimated to be about one hundred feet long and thirty or thirty-five feet in circumference. This animal is so powerful that it is extremely difficult to catch; and when it is caught, it produces very little oil and whalebone. The species that whalers focus on is called the Mystecetus, or the right whale.
40. The mystecetus is found, in the greatest numbers, in the Greenland seas, about the island of Spitzbergen, in Davis' Straits, in Hudson's and Baffin's Bays, and in the northern parts of the Pacific Ocean. It is also found in the Antarctic Ocean, and along the coasts of Africa and South America, and occasionally on the coasts of the United States.
40. The mysticete is most commonly found in the waters around Greenland, near the island of Spitzbergen, in Davis' Straits, in Hudson's and Baffin's Bays, and in the northern parts of the Pacific Ocean. It's also present in the Antarctic Ocean, along the coasts of Africa and South America, and sometimes along the coasts of the United States.
41. Each vessel engaged in this fishery, is generally fitted out by several individuals, who receive, of the return cargo of oil and whalebone, a portion corresponding to the amount which they have contributed to the common stock, after the men have received their proportion of it. Should the voyage prove altogether unsuccessful, which seldom happens, the owners lose the amount of the outfit, and the captain and hands, their time.
41. Each boat involved in this fishery is typically outfitted by several people, who receive a share of the oil and whalebone cargo based on how much they contributed to the collective fund, after the crew has taken their share. If the voyage ends up being completely unsuccessful, which rarely occurs, the owners lose the cost of the outfitting, while the captain and crew lose their time.
42. The whalers commence operations in the northern latitudes, in the month of May; but the whales are most plentiful in June, when they are met with between the latitudes 75° and 80°, in almost every variety of situation, sometimes in the open seas, at others in the loose ice, or at the edges of the fields and floes, which are near the main, impervious body of ice.[165]
42. The whalers start their activities in the northern latitudes in May; however, the whales are most abundant in June, when they're found between latitudes 75° and 80°, in almost every kind of location, sometimes in open waters, other times among loose ice, or at the edges of the fields and floes that are close to the main, solid mass of ice.[165]
43. On the fishing station, the boats are kept always ready for instant service, being suspended from davits, or cranes, by the sides of the ship, and being furnished with a lance and a harpoon, to the latter of which is attached about one hundred and twenty fathoms of strong but flexible rope. When the weather and situation are favorable, the crow's nest, which is a station at the mast-head, is occupied by some person with a telescope.
43. At the fishing station, the boats are always ready for immediate use, suspended from davits or cranes on the sides of the ship, and equipped with a lance and a harpoon, the latter of which is attached to about one hundred and twenty fathoms of strong but flexible rope. When the weather and conditions are good, the crow's nest, which is a lookout station at the top of the mast, is occupied by someone with a telescope.
44. The moment a whale is discovered, notice is given to the watch below, who instantly man one or two boats, and row with swiftness to the place. Sometimes, a boat is kept manned and afloat near the ship, that no time may be lost in making ready; or, two or three are sent out on the look-out, having every thing ready for an attack.
44. The moment a whale is spotted, the watch below is notified, and they quickly man one or two boats, rowing swiftly to the location. Sometimes, a boat is kept manned and ready near the ship so there's no delay in getting prepared; or, two or three are sent out on the look-out, fully equipped for an attack.
45. The whale being very timid and cautious, the men endeavor to approach him unperceived, and strike him with the harpoon, before he is aware of their presence. Sometimes, however, he perceives their approach, and dives into the water, to avoid them; but, being compelled to come again to the surface to breathe, or, as it is termed, to blow, they make another effort to harpoon him. In this way, the whalers often pursue him for a considerable time, and frequently without final success. The animal, when unmolested, remains about two minutes on the surface, during which time he blows eight or nine times, and then descends for five or ten minutes, and often, while feeding, for fifteen or twenty.
45. The whale is very shy and careful, so the men try to sneak up on him and hit him with the harpoon before he realizes they’re there. Sometimes, though, he senses them and dives underwater to get away. But since he has to come back up to breathe, or as it’s called, to blow, they make another attempt to harpoon him. In this way, the whalers often chase him for a long time, often without success. When left alone, the whale stays at the surface for about two minutes, during which time he blows eight or nine times, then descends for five to ten minutes, and often, when feeding, for fifteen to twenty.
46. When the whale has been struck, he generally dives towards the bottom of the sea either perpendicularly or obliquely, where he remains about thirty minutes, and sometimes nearly an hour. The harpoon has, near its point, two barbs, or withers, which cause it to remain fast in the integuments under the skin; and the rope attached to it, is coiled in the bow[166] of the boat in such a way, that it runs out without interruption. When more line is wanted, it is made known to the other boats by the elevation of an oar. Should the rope prove too short for the great descent of the whale, it becomes necessary to sever it from the boat, lest the latter be drawn under water; for this emergency, the harpooner stands ready with a knife.
46. When the whale is hit, it usually dives deep into the sea, either straight down or at an angle, where it stays for about thirty minutes, and sometimes almost an hour. The harpoon has two barbs near its tip that help keep it lodged in the skin. The rope connected to it is coiled in the front of the boat so it can be released smoothly. If more line is needed, the other boats are alerted by raising an oar. If the rope is too short for the whale's deep dive, it's necessary to cut it loose from the boat to avoid being pulled underwater. In case this happens, the harpooner is prepared with a knife.
47. When the whale reappears, the assisting boats make for the place with their greatest speed; and, if possible, each harpooner plunges his weapon into the back of the creature. On convenient occasions, he is also plied with lances, which are thrust into his vitals. At length, overcome with wounds, and exhausted by the loss of blood, his approaching dissolution is indicated by a discharge of blood from his blow-holes, and sometimes by a convulsive struggle, in which his tail, raised, whirled, and jerked in the air, resounds to the distance of several miles. The whale having been thus conquered, and deprived of life, the captors express their joy with loud huzzas, and communicate the information to the ship by striking their flag.
47. When the whale comes back into view, the support boats hurry to the spot as fast as they can; and, if possible, each harpooner drives his weapon into the creature's back. At opportune moments, he is also attacked with lances that are plunged into his vital organs. Eventually, beaten down with injuries and drained of blood, his impending death is signaled by blood pouring from his blowholes, and sometimes by a spasmodic struggle, in which his tail, raised and flailing in the air, echoes for miles around. After the whale has been defeated and killed, the captors celebrate their victory with loud cheers and signal the ship by lowering their flag.
48. A position near a large field of solid ice is very advantageous; because a whale diving under it is obliged to return again to blow; and this circumstance gives opportunity to make upon him several attacks. Close fields of drift ice present great difficulties; since the boats cannot always pass through them with sufficient celerity. In that case, the men sometimes travel over the ice, leaping from one piece to another, and carrying with them lances and harpoons, with which they pierce the animal as often as possible. If they succeed in thus killing him, they drag him back under the ice with the fast line.
48. Being positioned near a large area of solid ice is really beneficial; because when a whale dives beneath it, it has to come back up to breathe; and this situation provides a chance to attack it several times. Close fields of drifting ice create major challenges since boats can't always maneuver through them quickly enough. In those cases, the men sometimes travel over the ice, jumping from one piece to another, carrying lances and harpoons to stab the animal as often as they can. If they manage to kill it this way, they pull it back under the ice using a strong line.
49. The whale, having been towed to the ship, and secured alongside, is raised a little by means of powerful[167] blocks, or tackle. The harpooners, with spurs fastened to the bottom of their feet to prevent them from slipping, descend upon the huge body, and, with spades and knives adapted to this particular purpose, cut the blubber into oblong pieces, which are peeled off, and hoisted upon deck with the speck-tackle. These long strips are then cut into chunks, which are immediately packed away in the hold. After the animal has been thus successively flenched, and the whale-bone taken out, the carcase is dismissed to the sharks, bears, and birds of prey.
49. The whale, once it has been towed to the ship and secured alongside, is lifted slightly using powerful[167] blocks or tackle. The harpooners, with spurs attached to the bottoms of their feet to prevent slipping, climb onto the massive body and, using special spades and knives, cut the blubber into rectangular pieces, which are then peeled off and lifted onto the deck with the speck-tackle. These long strips are subsequently chopped into chunks and packed away in the hold. After the animal has been systematically flensed and the whale bone removed, the carcass is left for the sharks, bears, and birds of prey.
50. The blubber is somewhat similar, in consistence, to the fat which surrounds the body of the hog, although not quite so solid. In young whales, its color is yellowish white; and, in old ones, yellow or red. Its thickness varies in different parts and in different individuals, from eight to twenty inches. The weight of a whale sixty feet in length, is about seventy tons, of which the blubber weighs about thirty tons.
50. The blubber is somewhat similar in texture to the fat that surrounds a pig's body, although it’s not quite as solid. In young whales, it’s a yellowish-white color, while in older ones, it’s yellow or red. Its thickness changes in different areas and in different whales, ranging from eight to twenty inches. A whale that is sixty feet long weighs about seventy tons, with the blubber making up about thirty tons of that weight.
51. The whale-bone is situated in the mouth. About three hundred laminæ, or blades, grow parallel to each other on either side of the upper jaw, being about half an inch thick, and ten or twelve inches wide, where they are united by the gum. As the whale grows old, they increase in length, and approach from each side to the roof of the mouth. The whale, while feeding, swims with his mouth wide open, which admits a great quantity of water containing insects or small fish, on which he subsists. The whale-bone acts as a filter, or strainer, in retaining the little animals, while the water passes off at the corners of the mouth.
51. The baleen is found in the mouth. About three hundred plates grow parallel to one another on either side of the upper jaw, each about half an inch thick and ten to twelve inches wide, where they attach to the gums. As the whale ages, these plates grow longer and move closer together toward the roof of the mouth. When feeding, the whale swims with its mouth wide open, allowing a large amount of water filled with tiny insects or fish to enter, which it consumes. The baleen serves as a filter, trapping the small animals while the water drains out at the corners of the mouth.
52. Before the whalers leave the fishing station, they cut the blubber into small pieces, and put it into close casks. Sometimes, however, when the ship has been very successful, there is a deficiency of casks. In that case, it is slightly salted, and packed away in[168] the hold. But, as the ship must necessarily pass through a warmer climate, on her voyage homeward, the blubber, while packed in this manner, is liable to melt and be wasted, unless the weather should prove uncommonly cool.
52. Before the whalers leave the fishing station, they chop the blubber into small pieces and put it into sealed casks. However, when the ship has been very successful, there sometimes aren’t enough casks. In that case, it’s lightly salted and stored away in[168] the hold. But since the ship has to pass through a warmer climate on the way home, the blubber, when packed this way, may melt and be lost unless the weather stays unusually cool.
53. When the vessel has arrived in port, the blubber is found to be melted. To separate the oil from the fritters, or fenks, as the integuments and other impurities are called, the contents of the casks are poured into copper boilers, and heated. The heat causes a part of the latter to sink to the bottom, and the former is drawn off into coolers, where other extraneous matters settle. The pure or fine oil is then drawn off for sale. An inferior quality of oil, called brown oil, is obtained from the dregs of the blubber.
53. When the ship arrives in port, the blubber is found to be melted. To separate the oil from the fritters or fenks, which are the integuments and other impurities, the contents of the casks are poured into copper boilers and heated. The heat causes some of the impurities to sink to the bottom, and the oil is then drawn off into coolers, where other unwanted materials settle. The pure or high-quality oil is then drawn off for sale. A lower quality of oil, known as brown oil, is obtained from the leftover dregs of the blubber.
54. The spermaceti cachalot, or Physeter Macrocephalus, is an animal belonging to the norwal genus; although it is generally denominated the spermaceti whale. It is found in the greatest abundance in the Pacific Ocean, where it is sought by American and other whalers, for the sake of the oil and spermaceti. This animal is gregarious, and is often met with in herds containing more than two hundred individuals.
54. The spermaceti cachalot, or Physeter Macrocephalus, is an animal that belongs to the narwhal genus; however, it's commonly referred to as the spermaceti whale. It is most commonly found in the Pacific Ocean, where American and other whalers hunt it for its oil and spermaceti. This animal is social and is often seen in groups of over two hundred individuals.
55. Whenever a number of the cachalot are seen, several boats, manned each with six men provided with harpoons and lances, proceed in pursuit; and, if possible, each boat strikes or fastens to a distinct animal, which, in most cases, is overcome without much difficulty. Being towed to the ship, it is deprived of its blubber, and the matter contained in the head, which consists of spermaceti combined with a small proportion of oil. The oil is reduced from the blubber, soon after it has been taken on board, in "try works," with which every ship engaged in this fishery is provided.
55. Whenever a group of sperm whales is spotted, several boats, each crewed by six men with harpoons and lances, chase after them. Ideally, each boat manages to strike or attach to a different whale, which is usually subdued without much trouble. Once towed back to the ship, the whale is stripped of its blubber and the material from its head, which is made up of spermaceti mixed with a little oil. The oil is extracted from the blubber shortly after it’s brought on board using the "try works" that every ship involved in this fishery has.
56. About three tons of oil are commonly obtained from a large cachalot of this species, and from one[169] to two tons from a small one, besides the head-matter. The manner in which these two products are treated, when brought into port, has been described in the article on candle-making.
56. About three tons of oil are usually obtained from a large sperm whale of this species, and from one[169] to two tons from a smaller one, in addition to the head matter. The way these two products are processed once they reach port has been explained in the article on candle-making.
57. The Biscayans were the first people who prosecuted the whale fishery, as a commercial pursuit. In the twelfth, thirteenth, and fourteenth centuries, they carried on this business to a considerable extent; but the whales taken by them were not so large as those which have since been captured in the polar seas. At length, the whales ceased to visit the Bay of Biscay, and the fishery in that quarter was of course terminated.
57. The Biscayans were the first people to engage in whale fishing as a business. During the twelfth, thirteenth, and fourteenth centuries, they pursued this industry to a significant degree; however, the whales they caught were not as large as those that have since been captured in the polar seas. Eventually, the whales stopped coming to the Bay of Biscay, and naturally, the fishery there came to an end.
58. The voyages of the English and Dutch to the Northern Ocean, in search of a passage to India, led to the discovery of the principal haunts of the whale, and induced individuals in those nations to fit out vessels to pursue these animals in the northern latitudes, the harpooners and part of the crews being Biscayans. The whales were found in the greatest abundance about the island of Spitzbergen, and were, at first, so easily captured, that extra vessels were sent out in ballast, to assist in bringing home the oil and whalebone; but the whales, retiring to the centre of the ocean, and to the other side to the Greenland seas, soon became scarce about that island.
58. The journeys of the English and Dutch to the Northern Ocean, looking for a route to India, led to the discovery of the main spots where whales gathered, and encouraged people in those countries to outfit ships to hunt these animals in the northern waters, with harpooners and some of the crew being from Biscay. Whales were found in great numbers around the island of Spitzbergen and were so easily caught at first that additional ships were sent out empty to help bring back the oil and whale bones; however, the whales eventually moved to the middle of the ocean and to the other side into the Greenland seas, becoming scarce around that island.
59. The whale fishery was revived, as above stated, about the beginning of the seventeenth century; and, with the Dutch, it was in the most flourishing condition in 1680, when it employed about two hundred and sixty ships, and fourteen thousand men. The wars about the beginning of the nineteenth century, extending their baleful influence to almost every part of the ocean, annihilated this branch of business among the Dutch; and, in 1828, only a single whale-ship sailed from Holland.
59. The whale fishery was revived, as mentioned earlier, around the beginning of the seventeenth century; and by 1680, it was thriving with the Dutch, employing about two hundred sixty ships and fourteen thousand men. However, the wars in the early nineteenth century had a devastating impact on nearly every part of the ocean, wiping out this industry for the Dutch; by 1828, only one whale ship was still sailing from Holland.
60. The English whale fishery was, at first, carried[170] on by companies enjoying exclusive privileges; but the pursuit was attended with little success. In 1732, Parliament decreed a bounty of twenty shillings per ton, on every whaler measuring more than two hundred tons; and, although this bounty was increased in 1749 to forty shillings, yet the English whale fishery has never been very flourishing.
60. The English whale fishery initially operated through companies that had exclusive rights, but it had limited success. In 1732, Parliament established a bounty of twenty shillings per ton for every whaler over two hundred tons; even though this bounty was raised to forty shillings in 1749, the English whale fishery has never really thrived.
61. The whale fishery has been carried on with greater success from the United States than from any other country. It was begun by the colonists, on their own shores, at a very early period; but the whales having abandoned the coasts of North America, these hardy navigators pursued them into the northern and southern oceans.
61. The whale fishery has been more successful in the United States than in any other country. It started with the colonists on their own shores quite a long time ago, but since the whales left the coasts of North America, these brave navigators followed them into the northern and southern oceans.
62. The number of American vessels now employed in pursuit of the spermaceti cachalot and the mystecetus, amounts to about four hundred, and the number of men to about ten thousand. The inhabitants of the island of Nantucket, and of the town of New-Bedford, are more extensively engaged in these fisheries than the people of any other part of the United States.
62. There are currently around four hundred American ships hunting for spermaceti whales and mysticetes, with a crew of about ten thousand men. The residents of Nantucket Island and New Bedford are more involved in these fisheries than people from any other part of the United States.

THE SHIPWRIGHT.
1. The earliest notice we have of the construction of a building to float on water, is that which relates to Noah's Ark. This was the largest vessel that has ever been built, and the circumstance proves that the arts, at that early period, had been brought to considerable perfection; yet, as several centuries had elapsed, after the flood, before the descendants of Noah had much occasion for floating vessels, the art of constructing them seems to have been measurably lost.
1. The first record we have of a structure designed to float on water is about Noah's Ark. This was the biggest ship ever built, and this fact shows that technology at that early time had advanced significantly. However, since several centuries passed after the flood before Noah's descendants had much need for boats, the skills needed to build them seem to have been largely forgotten.
2. Early records, which perhaps are worthy of credit, state that the Egyptians first traversed the river Nile upon rafts, then in the canoe; and that, to these succeeded the boat, built with joist, fastened together with wooden pins, and rendered water-tight by[172] interposing the leaves of the papyrus. To this boat was, at length, added a mast of acanthus, and a sail of papyrus; but, being prejudiced against the sea because it swallowed up their sacred river, which they worshipped as a god, they never attempted to construct vessels adapted to marine navigation.
2. Early records, which might be trusted, say that the Egyptians first crossed the Nile on rafts, then in canoes; after that, they built boats made of planks joined with wooden pegs, and made them waterproof by[172] putting in layers of papyrus. Eventually, they added a mast made of acanthus and a sail made of papyrus; however, they were biased against the sea because it engulfed their sacred river, which they worshiped as a god, so they never tried to build boats suited for ocean travel.
3. The Phœnicians, a nation nearly as ancient as the Egyptian, being situated directly on the sea, without the advantages of a noble river, were compelled to provide means for sailing on a wider expanse of water. It is said, however, that they first traversed the Mediterranean, and even visited distant islands, with no better means of conveyance than a raft of timber. This is rendered somewhat probable, from the fact, that the Peruvians, even at the present time, venture upon the Pacific Ocean on their balza, a raft made from a spongy tree of that name.
3. The Phoenicians, a nation almost as ancient as the Egyptians, were located right by the sea but lacked a great river, which forced them to develop better ways to sail on the open water. It’s said that they were the first to explore the Mediterranean and even visit far-off islands, using nothing more than a wooden raft. This seems somewhat plausible since the Peruvians still risk traveling on the Pacific Ocean using their balza, a raft made from a spongy tree of the same name.
4. The vessels first constructed by the Phœnicians, were used for commercial purposes. They were flat-bottomed, broad, and of a small draught; and those of the Carthaginians and Greeks were similar in shape. The ships of war, in early times, were generally mere row-boats, in which the combatants rushed upon each other, and decided the combat by valor and physical strength.
4. The ships originally built by the Phoenicians were used for trade. They had flat bottoms, were wide, and had a shallow draft; the ships of the Carthaginians and Greeks were similar in design. In ancient times, warships were mostly just rowboats, where fighters charged at each other, and battles were determined by bravery and physical strength.
5. By successive improvements, the ships of antiquity were, at length, brought to combine good proportion with considerable beauty. The prows were sometimes ornamented with the sculptured figures of heathen deities, and otherwise adorned with paint and gilding, while the sterns, which were usually in the form of a shield, were elaborately wrought in carved work. The approved length of a ship of war, was six or eight times its breadth; and that for mercantile purposes, four times the breadth; hence, the distinction of long ships, and round ships.
5. With continuous improvements, ancient ships were eventually designed to achieve a balance of good proportions and significant beauty. The prows were sometimes decorated with carved figures of pagan gods and were also embellished with paint and gold, while the sterns, typically shaped like shields, were intricately carved. The recommended length for a warship was six to eight times its width, while for commercial vessels, it was four times the width; thus, the distinction between long ships and round ships.
6. Both the long and round ships had a single mast, which could be taken down or elevated at pleasure.[173] These vessels were, however, propelled with oars on occasions that required it; and the former, in their improved state, were properly galleys with one, two, or three banks of oars, which extended from one end of the vessel to the other. The rowers were all placed under the deck; and, in time of battle, the combatants contended above, being in part defended from the missiles of opposing foes by shields carried on the arm, and by screens and towers placed on the deck. The bow of each vessel was armed with a brazen or iron beak, with which the contending parties often stove in the sides of each other's vessels.
6. Both the long and round ships had a single mast that could be raised or lowered as needed.[173] These ships, however, were also powered by oars when necessary; and the long ships, in their advanced design, were actually galleys with one, two, or three rows of oars extending from one end of the ship to the other. The rowers were all positioned below deck, and during battles, the fighters battled above, partly protected from enemy projectiles by shields carried on their arms, and by screens and towers positioned on the deck. The front of each ship was equipped with a bronze or iron ram, with which the opposing parties often smashed in the sides of each other's vessels.
7. The general size of vessels in the best days of antiquity, was not greater than that of our sloops and schooners; but there are instances on record, which prove that they occasionally equalled in capacity the largest of modern times. In the early ages, they were very small, and, for several centuries, were drawn upon the shore at the termination of every voyage. Stranding, however, became impracticable, after the increase in size, and the addition of the keel. The anchor and cable were, therefore, invented, to confine the ship at a suitable distance from the shore. At first, the anchor was nothing more than a large stone. Afterwards, it was wood and stone combined; and, finally, iron was the sole material.
7. In the best days of ancient times, the typical size of ships wasn't much larger than our current sloops and schooners. However, there are recorded instances that show they sometimes matched the capacity of the largest ships today. In the early days, vessels were quite small, and for several centuries, they were pulled up on the shore at the end of every journey. However, as ships grew in size and added keels, pulling them ashore became impractical. As a result, the anchor and cable were invented to keep the ship at a safe distance from the shore. Initially, the anchor was just a large stone. Eventually, it became a combination of wood and stone, and finally, it was made solely from iron.
8. The invasion of the Roman empire by the northern barbarians, caused the operations of war to be almost exclusively conducted on the land. This, together with the destruction of commerce during the general desolation of those ruthless incursions, and the barbarism of the conquerors, occasioned a retrogression, and, in some parts of Europe, nearly the total destruction of the art of building ships.
8. The invasion of the Roman Empire by northern tribes forced most military operations to happen on land. This, along with the devastation of trade during those brutal raids and the savagery of the conquerors, led to a decline, and in some areas of Europe, almost completely wiped out the art of shipbuilding.
9. The active trade which arose in the Mediterranean, during the middle ages, and the naval enterprises connected with the Crusades, occasioned a revival[174] of the art of constructing ships; yet, it did not advance beyond the condition in which the Carthaginians had left it, until about the middle of the fourteenth century. At this era, the inconsiderable galleys of former times began to be superseded by larger vessels, in which, however, oars were not entirely dispensed with.
9. The active trade that developed in the Mediterranean during the Middle Ages, along with the naval efforts related to the Crusades, led to a revival[174] of shipbuilding skills. However, it didn't progress beyond the level that the Carthaginians had achieved until around the mid-fourteenth century. During this time, the small galleys of earlier periods started to be replaced by larger ships, although oars were still used to some extent.
10. The great change in the general construction of vessels, arose from the discovery of the polarity of the magnet, and the application of astronomy to nautical pursuits; for, by these means, the mariner was released from his dependence on the sight of the land, in guiding his vessel on its course. Larger ships were therefore constructed, capable of withstanding more violent storms and loftier waves.
10. The significant change in how ships were built came from discovering the magnet's polarity and applying astronomy to navigation. This allowed sailors to navigate their vessels without needing to see land. As a result, larger ships were built that could endure stronger storms and taller waves.
11. To the Italians, Catalans, and Portuguese, was ship-building most considerably indebted, in the early days of its revival. The Spaniards followed up their discovery of the New World with a rapid improvement in both the form and size of their ships; some of which even rated at two thousand tons burden. In more modern times, it is said, that the Spaniards and French are entitled to the credit of nearly all the improvements which have been made in the theory of the art, the English having never contributed essentially to advance it, although the greatest naval power of this or any other time.
11. The Italians, Catalans, and Portuguese played a significant role in advancing shipbuilding during its early revival. After discovering the New World, the Spaniards quickly improved both the design and size of their ships, with some reaching a capacity of two thousand tons. In more recent times, it's said that the Spaniards and French are credited with nearly all the advancements in the theory of this art, while the English, despite being the greatest naval power of this or any other era, have not made essential contributions to its progress.
12. In the United States, very great improvements have been made in the construction of vessels, since the commencement of the present century. Our builders, however, are less guided by scientific rules than by experience and a practised eye; yet, it is generally conceded, that our ships of war and first-rate merchantmen, are superior in swiftness and beauty to those of any other country.
12. In the United States, there have been significant advancements in shipbuilding since the beginning of this century. However, our builders tend to rely more on experience and a trained eye than on scientific principles. Still, it is widely accepted that our warships and top-quality merchant ships are faster and more beautiful than those of any other country.
13. In Europe, the first thing done towards building a vessel, is to exhibit it in three distinct views by as many separate drawings; but, in the United States,[175] the builder commences by framing a complete wooden model of the proposed construction—the thing itself in miniature. From this practice of our naval architects, have arisen the superior beauty and excellence of our vessels.
13. In Europe, the first step in designing a ship is to present it in three different views through separate drawings; however, in the United States,[175] builders start by creating a full wooden model of the proposed design—a miniature version of the actual vessel. This approach by our naval architects has led to the enhanced beauty and quality of our ships.
14. The timber generally used in the construction of American vessels, is live-oak, pine, chestnut, locust, and cedar. The trees of mature growth are chosen, and girdled in the beginning of winter, at which time they contain but little sap. When sufficiently dry and hardened, the trees are felled; and, after the timber has been roughly hewn, it is carefully stored in some dry, airy place, not much exposed to wind or sun.
14. The wood commonly used to build American ships includes live oak, pine, chestnut, locust, and cedar. Mature trees are selected and girdled at the start of winter when they have very little sap. Once they are dry and hardened enough, the trees are cut down; and after the wood is roughly shaped, it is stored carefully in a dry, well-ventilated area, away from too much wind or sunlight.
15. In collecting ship-timber, the greatest difficulty is found in procuring the crooked sticks, which form the sides or ribs of the skeleton of a vessel. In countries where ship-timber has become an object of careful cultivation, this difficulty is anticipated by bending the young trees to the desired form, and confining them there, until they have permanently received the proper inclination. The timber is brought to market in its rough state, and sold by the foot.
15. When collecting ship timber, the biggest challenge is getting the curved pieces that make up the sides or ribs of a ship's framework. In places where ship timber is carefully cultivated, this issue is addressed by bending young trees into the desired shape and keeping them that way until they permanently assume the right angle. The timber is sold in its raw form and priced by the foot.
16. The timber having been selected, the workmen proceed to fashion the various parts of the proposed vessel with appropriate tools, being guided in their operations by patterns, which have been made after the exact form of the various parts of the model. Much care is taken to avoid cutting the wood contrary to the grain, that its strength may not be impaired.
16. Once the wood has been chosen, the workers start to shape the different parts of the intended boat using the right tools, following patterns that are created to match the exact shapes of the model's components. They take great care to avoid cutting the wood against the grain to ensure its strength isn't compromised.
17. After all the parts of the frame have been made ready, they are put together. The several blocks of timber on which the vessel is raised, are called the stocks; and to these pieces, the foundation, called the keel, is temporarily fastened in an inclined position. The keel is inserted into the stern-post at one end, and into the stem at the other. The floor-timbers are next fixed in the keel, every other one being there[176] firmly bolted and riveted. Each of these timbers is a branch and part of the body of a tree; and, when composing a part of a vessel, they bear the same relation to it as the ribs to the human body. With equal propriety, the keel has been compared to the vertebral column, or back-bone.
17. After all the parts of the frame are ready, they're assembled. The various blocks of wood that lift the vessel are called the stocks; and to these pieces, the foundation, known as the keel, is temporarily attached in a slanted position. The keel is connected to the stern-post at one end and to the stem at the other. The floor-timbers are then secured in the keel, with every other one being firmly bolted and riveted. Each of these timbers is a branch and part of a tree; and, when part of a vessel, they relate to it in the same way that ribs relate to the human body. Similarly, the keel has been compared to the vertebral column or backbone.
18. The next step is to apply and fasten the planks, which serve not only to exclude the water, but to bind all the parts firmly and harmoniously together. Simple as this part of the operation may seem to be, it is the most difficult to be effected, and requires a pre-concerted plan as much as any other part of the fabric. When it is necessary to bend a plank at the bow or stern, it is heated by steam, and then forced into place with screws and levers. The planks are fastened with iron or copper bolts.
18. The next step is to apply and secure the planks, which not only keep out the water but also hold all the parts together tightly and cohesively. Although this part of the process may seem straightforward, it's actually the most challenging to achieve and requires a well-thought-out plan just like any other part of the structure. When it's necessary to curve a plank at the front or back, it's heated with steam and then pushed into place using screws and levers. The planks are secured with iron or copper bolts.
19. The planking having been finished, and several particulars attended to, which cannot be well understood from description, the vessel is ready for the work of the caulker, who carefully stops all the seams with oakum, and smears them with pitch. After the superfluous pitch has been cleared away with the scraper, water is pumped into the hold, to ascertain if there is any leak.
19. Once the planking is done and a few details taken care of that are hard to explain, the vessel is ready for the work of the caulker, who carefully fills all the seams with oakum and covers them with pitch. After the excess pitch is removed with the scraper, water is pumped into the hold to check for any leaks.
20. The bottom of the vessel is next sheathed either with sheets of copper or pine boards, to protect it from the worms. The latter materials are employed when the planks have been fastened with iron since the copper would cause the bolt-heads to corrode, if placed against them. In either case, sheets of paper, soaked in hot pitch, are interposed between the planks and the sheathing.
20. The bottom of the vessel is then covered either with sheets of copper or pine boards to protect it from the worms. Pine boards are used when the planks are secured with iron, as copper would cause the bolt heads to corrode if they were in direct contact. In both cases, sheets of paper soaked in hot pitch are placed between the planks and the covering material.
21. The vessel is now ready to be removed from the stocks to the water. This removal is called launching, which, in many cases, requires much skill in the preparation and successive management. If there is no permanent inclined plane in the slip, on which the vessel may glide into the water, a temporary[177] one is prepared, consisting of two platforms of solid timber, erected one on each side of the keel, at a distance of a few feet from it, and extending from the stem into the water. Upon this double platform which is called the ways, is erected another set of timbers, and the space between these and the vessel is filled all along with wedges. The whole of this superstructure is called the cradle, and the extremities of it are fastened to the keel, at the bow and stern, with chains and ropes.
21. The boat is now ready to be moved from the building area to the water. This process is called launching, which often requires a lot of skill in the preparation and subsequent handling. If there isn't a permanent inclined plane in the slip for the boat to slide into the water, a temporary[177] one is set up, made of two solid timber platforms, one on each side of the keel, positioned a few feet away from it, extending from the front of the boat into the water. On this double platform, called the ways, another set of timbers is constructed, and the space between these and the boat is filled along the way with wedges. The entire structure is called the cradle, and its ends are secured to the keel at the front and back with chains and ropes.
22. Every thing having been thus prepared, the wedges are simultaneously driven on both sides. By this means, the vessel is raised from the stocks, and made to rest entirely on the cradle. After the shores have been all removed, the cradle, with its weighty burden, begins to move; and, in a moment, the vessel is launched upon its destined element.
22. With everything ready, the wedges are driven in on both sides at the same time. This lifts the vessel off the stocks and sets it completely on the cradle. Once all the shores are taken away, the cradle, now carrying its heavy load, starts to move; and in an instant, the vessel is launched into the water.
23. Among the ancients, a launch was ever an occasion of great festivity. The mariners were crowned with wreaths, and the ship was bedecked with streamers and garlands. Safely afloat, she was purified with a lighted torch, an egg, and brimstone, and solemnly consecrated to the god whose image she bore. In our less poetic times, there is no lack of feasting and merriment; although the ceremony of consecration is different, the oldest sailor on board merely breaking a bottle of wine or rum over the figure-head—still, perchance, the image of father Neptune or Apollo.
23. In ancient times, a ship launch was always a huge celebration. The sailors wore crowns of flowers, and the ship was decorated with ribbons and garlands. Once it was safely in the water, it was blessed with a lit torch, an egg, and sulfur, and then formally dedicated to the god represented by its figurehead. In our less romantic era, there’s still plenty of feasting and fun; though the blessing ceremony has changed, with the oldest sailor simply smashing a bottle of wine or rum over the figurehead—often still depicting Father Neptune or Apollo.
24. The vessel, now brought to the wharf, is to be equipped. The mode of doing this, is varied according as it may be a ship, brig, hermaphrodite brig, schooner, or sloop. The masts are first erected, and these are supplied with the necessary apparatus of spars, rigging, and sails. The latter are furnished by the sail-maker, who is sometimes denominated the ship's tailor.
24. The vessel, now at the dock, is ready to be equipped. The way this is done varies depending on whether it’s a ship, brig, hermaphrodite brig, schooner, or sloop. The masts are put up first, and these are fitted with the required equipment like spars, rigging, and sails. The sails are provided by the sail-maker, who is sometimes referred to as the ship's tailor.

THE MARINER.
1. The business of the mariner consists in navigating ships and other vessels from one port to another. This is an employment that requires much decisive resolution; and Horace has well said, that "his breast must have been bound with oak and triple brass, who first committed his frail bark to the tempestuous sea." There is certainly nothing which speaks louder in praise of human ingenuity, than that art by which man is able to forsake the land, contend successfully with winds and waves, and reach, with unerring certainty, his destined port in some distant part of the world.
1. The job of a sailor involves navigating ships and other vessels from one port to another. This is a role that requires a lot of determination; as Horace wisely said, "Only a heart bound with oak and triple brass would first launch his fragile boat into the stormy sea." There’s really nothing that highlights human ingenuity more than the skill that allows people to leave solid ground, fight against winds and waves, and reliably reach their intended destination in some far-off part of the world.
2. Nor are the skill and intrepidity exhibited in this arduous employment, more worthy of our admiration, than the wonderful advantages resulting from it; for,[179] we are indebted to the exercise of this art, for those improvements in our condition, which arise from the exchange of the superfluities of one country for those of another, and, above all, for the interchange of sentiments, which renders human knowledge coextensive with the world.
2. The skills and bravery shown in this tough job are just as impressive as the amazing benefits we gain from it. Thanks to this practice, we owe our improved living conditions to the exchange of excess goods between countries and, most importantly, to the sharing of ideas that makes human knowledge reach every corner of the globe.[179]
3. Ship-building is so intimately connected with the art of navigation, that the historical part of the former subject is equally applicable to the latter. It is, therefore, unnecessary to be particular on this point. We shall merely supply some omissions in the preceding article.
3. Shipbuilding is closely linked to the art of navigation, so the historical aspects of the former also apply to the latter. Therefore, there's no need to go into specifics about this. We'll just fill in some gaps from the previous article.
4. The sailors of antiquity confined their navigation chiefly to the rivers, lakes, and inland seas, seldom venturing out of sight of land, unless, from their knowledge of the coasts ahead, they were certain to meet with it again in a short time. When they thus ventured from the land, or were driven from it by tempests, the stars and planets were their only guides.
4. The sailors of ancient times mostly navigated rivers, lakes, and inland seas, rarely going out of sight of land unless they were confident they'd see it again soon based on their knowledge of the coasts ahead. When they did venture out or were forced away by storms, the stars and planets were their only guides.
5. The qualifications of a skilful pilot or master, even for the Mediterranean seas, in those days, required more study and more practical information, than are necessary to render a mariner a complete general navigator, in the present improved state of the science of navigation; for then he must needs be acquainted, not only with the general management of the ship, but also with all the ports, land-marks, rocks, quicksands, and other dangers, which lay in the track of his course. Besides this, he was required to be familiar with the course of the winds, and the indications that preceded them, together with the movements of the heavenly bodies, and the influence which they were supposed to exert on the weather. Nor was the ability to read the various omens which were gathered from the sighing of the wind in the trees, the murmurs of the waters, and their dash upon the[180] shore, the flight of birds, and the gambol of fishes, a qualification to be dispensed with.
5. The qualifications of a skilled pilot or captain, even for the Mediterranean seas back then, required more study and practical knowledge than what’s necessary today for a mariner to be a complete navigator, given the current advancements in navigation science. Back then, a navigator had to be familiar not only with general ship management but also with all the ports, landmarks, rocks, quicksands, and other dangers along his route. On top of that, he needed to understand wind patterns and the signs that came before them, as well as the movements of celestial bodies and their supposed impact on the weather. Additionally, the ability to interpret various omens from the rustling of the wind in the trees, the murmurs of water, the waves crashing on the shore, the flight of birds, and the movements of fish was essential.
6. A voyage, in ancient times, was a momentous undertaking, and was usually preceded by sacrifices to those gods who were supposed to preside over the winds and the waves. All omens were carefully regarded; and a very small matter, such as the perching of swallows on the ship, or an accidental sneeze to the left, was sufficient to delay departure. When, under proper auspices, a vessel or fleet had set sail, and had advanced some distance, it was customary to release a number of doves, which had been brought from home. The safe arrival of these birds at the houses of the voyagers, was considered an auspicious omen of the return of the fleet.
6. In ancient times, going on a voyage was a big deal, and it usually involved making sacrifices to the gods believed to control the winds and waves. Every omen was taken seriously; even something small, like swallows landing on the ship or someone sneezing to the left, could delay the departure. Once a ship or fleet had set sail under good signs and made some progress, it was common to release several doves that had been brought from home. If these birds safely arrived at the homes of the travelers, it was seen as a positive sign for the fleet’s return.
7. Having escaped the multiplied dangers of the sea, the sailors, on their return, fulfilled the vows which they had made before their departure, or in seasons of peril, offering thanks to Neptune, and sacrifices to Jupiter, or some other of their gods, to whose protection they may have committed themselves. Those who had suffered shipwreck, felt themselves under greater obligations of gratitude; and, in addition to the usual sacrifices, they commonly offered the garment in which they had been saved, together with a pictorial representation of the disaster. If the individual escaped only with life, his clothing having been totally lost, his hair was shorn from the head, and consecrated to the tutelar deity.
7. After surviving the many dangers of the sea, the sailors, on their return, fulfilled the promises they had made before leaving or during times of danger, giving thanks to Neptune and making sacrifices to Jupiter or other gods they had entrusted themselves to. Those who had experienced shipwreck felt an even stronger sense of gratitude; in addition to the usual offerings, they would often present the garment they had been wearing when they were saved, along with a painting depicting the disaster. If a person escaped with only their life, having lost all their clothing, they would shave their head and dedicate their hair to their protective deity.
8. There is much that is beautiful in these simple acts of piety; and similar customs, with regard to shipwrecked mariners, are still in existence in the Catholic countries of the Mediterranean; but the worship of the heathen deities having been discontinued, a favourite saint, or perchance the true God, is substituted for them. Although such acts of piety may not avail to avert impending danger, yet their natural[181] tendency doubtless is to inspire courage to meet it, when it may arise.
8. There’s a lot of beauty in these simple acts of devotion, and similar customs for shipwrecked sailors still exist in Catholic countries around the Mediterranean. However, the worship of pagan gods has been replaced by a favored saint or perhaps the true God. While these acts of devotion may not prevent danger from coming, they certainly tend to inspire courage to face it when it does arise.
9. The Carthaginians, for several centuries, were more extensively engaged in commerce, than any other people of antiquity; and, as they carried on their lucrative trade with other nations and their own colonies, by means of ships, they exceeded all others in the art of navigation. Not content with exploring every nook and corner of the Mediterranean, they passed the Pillars of Hercules, as the promontories of the Straits of Gibraltar were then called, and visited the Atlantic coasts of Europe, as far north as the Scilly Islands, then denominated the Cassorides. It is asserted by Pliny, that Hanno even circumnavigated Africa.
9. For several centuries, the Carthaginians were more involved in trade than any other people from ancient times. They conducted their profitable commerce with other nations and their own colonies through ships, surpassing everyone else in navigation skills. Not satisfied with exploring every corner of the Mediterranean, they ventured beyond the Pillars of Hercules, which were what people then called the promontories of the Straits of Gibraltar, and traveled to the Atlantic coasts of Europe, reaching as far north as the Scilly Islands, which were then known as the Cassorides. Pliny claims that Hanno even sailed all the way around Africa.
10. The destruction of Carthage by the Romans, in the year before Christ 146, interfered with improvements in the art of navigation; and the invasion of the northern barbarians, several centuries afterwards, extinguished nearly all the knowledge which had been previously acquired; nor was it again revived, and brought to the state in which it existed in the most flourishing era of antiquity, until about the middle of the fourteenth century.
10. The Romans destroyed Carthage in 146 BC, which halted progress in navigation; and the invasion of the northern tribes, several centuries later, wiped out almost all the knowledge that had been gathered before. It wasn’t until around the mid-fourteenth century that navigation was revived and brought back to the level it had reached during the peak of ancient times.
11. After the period just mentioned, improvements in this art followed each other in close succession. The chief cause of this rapid advance was the discovery of the polarity of the magnet, and the consequent invention of the mariner's compass. The power of the loadstone to attract iron, was early known to the Greeks and Chinese; but its property of pointing in a particular direction, when suspended, and left to move freely, was not suspected until about the year 1200 of our era.
11. After the mentioned period, advancements in this field came quickly one after another. The main reason for this rapid progress was the discovery of magnetic polarity and the resulting invention of the mariner's compass. The ability of loadstone to attract iron was known to the Greeks and Chinese long ago; however, its property of indicating a specific direction when suspended and allowed to move freely wasn't recognized until around the year 1200.
12. At first, mariners were accustomed to place the magnetic needle on a floating straw, whenever they needed its guidance; but, in 1302, one Flavio[182] Giaio, an obscure individual of the kingdom of Naples, placed it on a permanent pivot, and added a circular card. Still, it was nearly half a century after this, before navigators properly appreciated, and implicitly relied on this new guide. The compass did not reach its present improved state, until the middle of the sixteenth century.
12. In the beginning, sailors would put the magnetic needle on a floating straw whenever they needed its direction; however, in 1302, a little-known man named Flavio[182] Giaio from the kingdom of Naples put it on a fixed pivot and added a circular card. Even so, it took almost fifty more years before navigators truly recognized and depended on this new tool. The compass didn't evolve into its current improved form until the mid-sixteenth century.
13. As soon as the reputation of this instrument had become well established, navigation assumed a bolder character; and the capacity of vessels having been enlarged to meet this adventurous spirit, oars were laid aside as inapplicable, and sails alone were relied upon, as means of propulsion.
13. Once the reputation of this instrument was firmly established, navigation took on a bolder nature; and with the size of ships increased to match this adventurous spirit, oars were set aside as unsuitable, and sails were solely depended upon for propulsion.
14. Navigation, in the early days of its revival, was indebted to the Portuguese for many valuable improvements. To them, also, is the world under obligation for many splendid discoveries, among which was that of a passage by sea to India. This long-desired discovery was made in 1497, by Vasco de Gama, who had been sent out for the purpose by Emanuel, king of Portugal.
14. In the early days of its revival, navigation relied heavily on the Portuguese for many important improvements. The world also owes a debt of gratitude to them for numerous remarkable discoveries, including finding a sea route to India. This long-awaited discovery happened in 1497, by Vasco de Gama, who was sent out for this purpose by Emanuel, the king of Portugal.
15. Five years before Vasco de Gama had found his way to India, by the way of the Cape of Good Hope, Columbus made his discovery of the New World. This great man had conceived or adopted the idea, that the form of our earth was spherical, in opposition to the generally received opinion, that it was an extended plane; and learning that India stretched to an unknown distance eastward, he supposed, that, by sailing in an opposite direction, the navigator would meet with its eastern extremity.
15. Five years before Vasco de Gama found his way to India around the Cape of Good Hope, Columbus discovered the New World. This great man believed or accepted the idea that the Earth is round, unlike the common belief at the time that it was a flat surface. Learning that India extended far to the east, he assumed that by sailing in the opposite direction, a navigator would reach its easternmost point.
16. Pursuing this idea, he applied successively to the governments of several states and kingdoms for patronage to enable him to test its correctness; and having, at length, succeeded in obtaining three small vessels, with the necessary equipments, from Ferdinand and Isabella, sovereigns of Arragon and Castile,[183] he proceeded on his proposed voyage, which resulted in the discovery of the American continent.
16. Following this idea, he repeatedly approached the governments of various states and kingdoms for support to help him verify its accuracy; and finally, after managing to secure three small ships, along with the necessary supplies, from Ferdinand and Isabella, the rulers of Aragon and Castile,[183] he set off on his planned voyage, which led to the discovery of the American continent.
17. These two great discoveries gave another powerful impulse to navigation; and inventions and improvements multiplied in rapid succession. The learned and ingenious, who at different times have turned their attention to the subject of navigation, have supplied the mariner with various means, by which he can direct his course on the deep with accuracy and certainty.
17. These two major discoveries gave a huge boost to navigation, leading to a rapid succession of inventions and improvements. Scholars and inventors who have focused on navigation at different times have provided sailors with various tools to accurately and reliably navigate the seas.
18. The instruments now employed in navigation, are the mariner's compass, the azimuth compass, the quadrant, the sextant, the chronometer, the half minute-glass, the log, and the sounding-line. In addition to these, the general navigator needs accurate maps and charts, lists of the latitude and longitude of every part of the world, the time of high water at every port, and a book of navigation, containing tables, to aid him in performing various calculations with facility; and, with a view to calculate the longitude by observation, he should be furnished with the Nautical Almanac, containing the places and declinations of the fixed stars and planets, and especially the distances of the moon from the sun and other heavenly bodies.
18. The tools used for navigation today include the mariner's compass, the azimuth compass, the quadrant, the sextant, the chronometer, the half minute-glass, the log, and the sounding-line. Besides these, a navigator needs accurate maps and charts, lists of the latitude and longitude for every part of the world, the times of high tide at each port, and a navigation book with tables to help him perform various calculations easily. To calculate longitude by observation, he should have the Nautical Almanac, which includes the positions and declinations of the fixed stars and planets, particularly the distances of the moon from the sun and other celestial bodies.
19. The mariner's compass, as has been before observed, is employed to indicate the various points of the horizon; but the magnetic needle varying more or less from the exact northern and southern direction, the azimuth compass is used, to show the degree of that variation. The quadrant and sextant are employed to ascertain the altitude and relative position of the heavenly bodies, that the mariner may determine the latitude and longitude in which his vessel may be. The chronometer is nothing more than a watch, designed to measure time with great accuracy. This instrument is used to determine the longitude.[184]
19. The mariner's compass, as mentioned earlier, is used to show the different points of the horizon; however, since the magnetic needle can vary slightly from the exact north and south, the azimuth compass is used to indicate the degree of that variation. The quadrant and sextant are used to measure the altitude and position of celestial bodies so that the mariner can determine the latitude and longitude of their vessel. The chronometer is essentially a watch designed to keep time very accurately. This instrument is used to figure out the longitude.[184]
20. The log is used for ascertaining the velocity of the ship on the water. It consists of a quadrangular piece of wood, eight or nine inches long, to which is attached a small cord, having knots in it, at proper distances from each other. In the application, the log is thrown upon the water, where it will not be disturbed by the wake of the ship; and the cord, being wound upon a reel, passes from it as fast as the vessel moves in the water. The number of knots, which pass off every half minute, indicates the number of miles which the ship sails per hour; hence, in nautical language, knots and miles are synonymous terms. The sounding-line is a small cord, with several pounds of lead of a conical figure attached to it; and is employed in trying the depth of the water, and the quality of the bottom.
20. The log is used to measure the speed of the ship on the water. It consists of a rectangular piece of wood, around eight or nine inches long, attached to a small cord with knots at regular intervals. To use it, the log is thrown into the water, where it won't be affected by the ship’s wake; the cord, which is wound onto a reel, unwinds as the vessel moves through the water. The number of knots that come off every half minute shows how many miles the ship travels per hour; thus, in nautical terms, knots and miles mean the same thing. The sounding line is a small cord with several pounds of conical lead attached; it's used to measure the depth of the water and check the quality of the seabed.
21. Navigation is either common or proper. The former is usually called coasting, as the vessel is either on the same or neighboring coast, and is seldom far from land, or out of sounding. The latter is applied to long voyages upon the main ocean, when considerable skill in mathematics and astronomy, together with an aptness in the use of instruments for celestial observations, are required in the captain or master.
21. Navigation is either common or proper. The former is usually called coasting, as the vessel is either along the same or nearby coast and is rarely far from land or out of sight of the bottom. The latter refers to long journeys across the open ocean, where the captain or master needs a good understanding of math and astronomy, along with skill in using instruments for celestial observations.
22. The application of steam to the purposes of navigation, is one of the greatest achievements of modern science and art. The great utility of this agent is particularly conspicuous in our vast country, where large rivers and bays and mighty lakes are numerous, and where an energetic people and an active commerce require a rapid intercommunication. Steamboats are but little used on the great oceans; as merchandise can there be more cheaply and safely transported in vessels propelled by sails. Since the year 1839, two lines of steam packets have been running regularly between this country and Great Britain.[185] They commonly occupy, in crossing the Atlantic, between twelve and fifteen days.
22. The use of steam for navigation is one of the greatest achievements of modern science and technology. Its significant utility is especially evident in our vast country, where there are many large rivers, bays, and great lakes, and where a dynamic population and active trade need fast communication. Steamboats are not widely used on the open oceans, as goods can be transported more cheaply and safely in sail-powered vessels. Since 1839, two lines of steam packets have been operating regularly between this country and Great Britain.[185] They usually take about twelve to fifteen days to cross the Atlantic.
23. The chief obstacle to the employment of steam, in long voyages, arises from the difficulty of generating a sufficient quantity of this agent, with the fuel which could be carried without overburdening the vessel; but a remedy for this inconvenience will probably be found, in improvements in the construction of steam-generators.
23. The main challenge of using steam for long journeys is the difficulty in producing enough of it with the amount of fuel that can be carried without overloading the ship. However, a solution to this issue will likely be discovered through advancements in the design of steam generators.
24. The power of confined steam acting by its expansive force, was discovered by the celebrated Marquis of Worcester, about the middle of the seventeenth century; but the first working steam-engine was constructed in 1705, by Thomas Newcomen, a blacksmith of Dartmouth, Devonshire, England. About the year 1769, James Watt, a native of Glasgow, added a great number of improvements of his own invention.
24. The power of steam, when confined, acting through its expanding force, was discovered by the famous Marquis of Worcester around the mid-seventeenth century; however, the first practical steam engine was built in 1705 by Thomas Newcomen, a blacksmith from Dartmouth, Devonshire, England. Around 1769, James Watt, from Glasgow, made a significant number of improvements with his own inventions.
25. Steam navigation was first suggested in England, in 1736, by Jonathan Hulls. It was first tried in practice in France, in 1782, by the Marquis de Jouffroy, and nearly at the same time by James Rumsey, of Virginia, and John Fitch, of Philadelphia; but it was first rendered completely successful at New-York, in 1807, by Robert Fulton.
25. The idea of steam navigation was first proposed in England in 1736 by Jonathan Hulls. It was first tested in France in 1782 by the Marquis de Jouffroy, and around the same time by James Rumsey from Virginia and John Fitch from Philadelphia; however, it was Robert Fulton who achieved full success with it in New York in 1807.
26. The sailors employed by the captain, to aid him in navigating his ship, are called a crew; and the individuals composing it are responsible to the captain, the captain to the owners, and the owners to the merchants, for all damages to goods, arising from negligence or bad management.
26. The sailors hired by the captain to help him navigate his ship are called a crew; and the individuals making up the crew are accountable to the captain, the captain to the owners, and the owners to the merchants for any damages to goods caused by negligence or poor management.
27. In England, ample provisions are made at Greenwich Hospital or by pensions, for seamen disabled by age or otherwise. These benefits, however, are extended only to those who have been engaged in the national service. This noble and politic institution is supported partly by public bounty, and in part[186] by private donations, and a tax of sixpence per month, deducted from the wages of all the seamen of the nation. Marine Hospitals, for the temporary accommodation of seamen, suffering from disease, have been established in several cities of the continent of Europe, as well as of the United States.
27. In England, there are plenty of provisions at Greenwich Hospital or through pensions for sailors who are disabled due to age or other reasons. However, these benefits are only available to those who have served in the national military. This admirable and practical institution is funded partly by public support and partly[186] by private donations, along with a tax of six pence per month, deducted from the wages of all sailors in the country. Marine Hospitals, which provide temporary care for sailors suffering from illness, have been set up in several cities across Europe and also in the United States.
28. Mariners have ever been a distinct class of men, and, in their general characters, very similar in every age of the world. Their superstitious regard of the many signs of good and bad luck, is nearly the same now, that it was two or three thousand years ago. In ancient times, they had their lucky and unlucky days; and now, very few sailors are willing to leave port on Friday, lest the circumstance bring upon them some disaster, before the conclusion of the proposed voyage.
28. Sailors have always been a unique group of people, and, in their overall traits, they have been quite similar throughout history. Their superstitions about various signs of good and bad luck are almost the same today as they were two or three thousand years ago. In ancient times, they had their lucky and unlucky days; and now, very few sailors are eager to set sail on a Friday, fearing that this might lead to disaster before the voyage ends.
29. Superstitions of this nature, however, are not confined to the navigators of the deep. Even in this country, where the inhabitants enjoy superior intellectual advantages, and boast a high degree of intelligence, thousands of persons who have never been on board of a ship, are still under the influence of such heathen notions, notwithstanding their pretended belief in Christianity, which, in all cases, when properly understood, would prevent the forebodings of evil, or expectations of good, from unimportant prognostics.
29. Superstitions like these aren’t just limited to deep-sea navigators. Even in this country, where people have access to better education and claim to be highly intelligent, thousands of individuals who have never set foot on a ship still hold onto these primitive beliefs. This persists despite their supposed adherence to Christianity, which, when truly understood, would prevent them from worrying about bad omens or expecting good fortune from insignificant signs.

THE MERCHANT.
1. The word merchant, in its most extended application, signifies, a person who deals in merchandise. This definition, with some exceptions, agrees very well with general usage in this country; although, in England, the term is principally restricted to those dealers who export and import goods on their own account, either in their own or in chartered vessels. In the United States, dealers of this class are denominated importing and exporting merchants; or simply, importers and exporters.
1. The word merchant, in its broadest sense, refers to a person who sells goods. This definition, with some exceptions, aligns closely with common usage in this country; however, in England, the term mainly applies to those traders who import and export goods for their own benefit, either using their own ships or chartered vessels. In the United States, this type of trader is called importing and exporting merchants, or simply importers and exporters.
2. Such merchants, both here and in Europe, are distinguished from each other by the kind of goods in which they traffic, or by the foreign country in which they have their chief correspondence; thus, one who deals in tobacco is called a tobacco-merchant; a[188] wholesale dealer in wines is called a wine-merchant; a West India, East India, or Turkey merchant, exports goods to, and imports goods from, those respective countries.
2. Merchants, both here and in Europe, are distinguished from one another by the types of goods they trade in or by the foreign countries they primarily deal with. For example, someone who sells tobacco is known as a tobacco merchant; a wholesale trader in wines is referred to as a wine merchant; and a West India, East India, or Turkey merchant exports and imports goods to and from those specific countries.
3. The business of merchants, in foreign countries, is usually transacted by agents, called factors, or commission merchants, to whom goods are consigned to be sold, and by whom other articles of merchandise are purchased and returned according to order. Sometimes an agent, called a supercargo, accompanies the vessel; or the captain may act in this capacity. Goods, however, are often obtained by order, without the intervention of an agency of any kind.
3. Merchants usually conduct their business in foreign countries through agents known as factors or commission merchants, who are given goods to sell and purchase other merchandise according to orders. Sometimes an agent, called a supercargo, travels with the ship, or the captain may take on this role. However, goods are often acquired by order, without any agents involved.
4. Almost every sort of foreign merchandise is subject to the imposition of duties by the government of the country in which it is received. These duties are paid at the Custom-House, to persons appointed by the constituted authorities to collect them. As soon as a vessel from abroad has entered the harbor, it is visited by a custom-house officer, called a Tide-Waiter, whose business it is to see that no part of the cargo is removed, until measures have been taken to secure the customs.
4. Almost every type of foreign goods is subject to taxes imposed by the government of the country where they are received. These taxes are paid at the Custom-House to officials appointed by the authorities to collect them. Once a vessel from overseas enters the harbor, a customs officer, known as a Tide-Waiter, checks to ensure that no part of the cargo is removed until customs procedures have been completed.
5. Goods brought into the country by importers, are frequently sold, in succession, to several merchants of different grades, before they come to the hands of the consumers. Cloths or stuffs of different kinds, for instance, may be first sold by the bale to one merchant, who, in turn, may dispose of them by the package to another, and this last may retail them in small quantities to a greater number of customers.
5. Goods brought into the country by importers are often sold multiple times to different merchants before reaching consumers. For example, various types of cloth may first be sold in bulk to one merchant, who then sells them in smaller packages to another merchant, and that merchant may then sell them in small quantities to many customers.
6. Dealers in a small way, in cities and large towns, are frequently denominated shop-keepers; but those who do an extensive retail business, are usually called merchants or grocers, according as they deal in dry goods or groceries. In cities, the extensive[189] demand for goods enables retailers to confine their attention to particular classes of articles; such as groceries, hardware, crockery, a few kinds of dry goods, or some articles of domestic manufacture; but in other places, where trade is more limited, the merchant is obliged to keep a more general assortment.
6. Small-scale sellers in cities and large towns are often called shopkeepers, but those who run a larger retail operation are typically referred to as merchants or grocers, depending on whether they sell dry goods or groceries. In cities, the high demand for products allows retailers to focus on specific types of items, like groceries, hardware, crockery, certain dry goods, or some locally made products. In other areas, where business is more restricted, merchants have to offer a wider range of goods.
7. The general retail merchant is compelled to transact business with a great number of wholesale dealers, to whom he pays cash in hand, or agrees to pay it at some future period, say, in four, six, nine, or twelve months. The people in his vicinity, in turn, purchase his goods on similar conditions, with this difference, that they often substitute for cash agricultural and other productions, which the merchant, at length, turns into ready money.
7. The general retail merchant has to do business with many wholesalers, paying them cash upfront or agreeing to pay later, like in four, six, nine, or twelve months. The people nearby buy his products under similar terms, except they often trade agricultural and other products instead of cash, which the merchant eventually converts into cash.
8. Barter, or the exchange of commodities, prevails to a great extent, in country places, in almost every part of the United States. In such exchanges, the currency of the country is made the standard of reference: for example; a merchant receiving from a customer twenty bushels of wheat, estimated at one dollar per bushel, gives in return twenty dollars' worth of goods, at his marked prices; or, in other words, he gives credit for the wheat, and charges the goods. On the same principle, merchants of the first class often exchange the productions of their own country for those of another.
8. Barter, or trading goods directly, is still common in rural areas across the United States. In these exchanges, the local currency serves as a reference point. For example, if a merchant receives twenty bushels of wheat valued at one dollar each from a customer, they will provide goods worth twenty dollars based on their marked prices in return; in other words, they give credit for the wheat and charge for the goods. Similarly, top-tier merchants often trade their own country’s products for those from another country.
9. Merchants, or store-keepers, as they are indifferently called in some places, whose location is distant from the seaboard, visit the city in which they deal once or twice a year, for the purpose of laying in their stock of goods; but, in order to keep up their assortment, they sometimes order small lots in the interim. Retailers more conveniently situated, purchase a smaller amount of goods at a time, and replenish their stores more frequently.[190]
9. Merchants, or store owners, as they are sometimes called in different areas, who are located far from the coast, visit the city where they do business once or twice a year to stock up on goods. However, to maintain their inventory, they occasionally order small lots in between. Retailers who are better located buy smaller quantities of goods at a time and restock their stores more often.[190]
10. Commerce, on the principles of barter, or a simple exchange of one commodity for another, must have been practised in the early days of Adam himself; although we have no positive record of the fact; for it cannot be imagined that the arts, which are stated in the Scripture to have flourished long before the flood, could have existed without commercial transactions. The period at which the precious metals began to be employed as a standard of value, or as a medium of commercial intercourse, is not known. They were used for this purpose in the time of Abraham, and probably many centuries before his day.
10. Commerce, based on the principles of barter, or simply exchanging one good for another, must have been practiced in the early days of Adam himself; although we have no concrete evidence of this fact. It's hard to believe that the skills mentioned in the Scriptures, which were said to thrive long before the flood, could have existed without some form of commercial transactions. We don't know when precious metals started being used as a standard of value or as a medium for trade, but they were definitely used for this purpose during Abraham's time, and likely many centuries before him.
11. The earliest hint respecting the existence of trade between different nations, is to be found in the book of Genesis, where the transaction regarding the sale of Joseph to the Ishmaelites, or Midianites, is mentioned. These merchants, it appears, were travelling in a caravan to Egypt, then the most cultivated and refined part of the world. Their camels were loaded with balm, myrrh, and spices. The first of these articles was the production of Gilead; the second, of Arabia; and the last was probably from India; as in that country the finer spices are produced. If this were really the case, commerce, in its widest sense, was carried on much earlier than is generally supposed.
11. The first indication of trade between different nations can be found in the book of Genesis, where it talks about the sale of Joseph to the Ishmaelites, or Midianites. These merchants were traveling in a caravan to Egypt, which was the most cultivated and refined area of the world at that time. Their camels were loaded with balm, myrrh, and spices. The balm was produced in Gilead, myrrh came from Arabia, and the spices were likely from India, as that's where the finest spices are produced. If this is true, then trade, in its broadest sense, was happening much earlier than most people think.
12. The fertility of Egypt, and its central position, made it an emporium of commerce; and there it flourished, in an eminent degree, long before it was cultivated in Europe and in Western Asia. For several ages, however, the Egyptians, on account of their superstitious prejudices against the sea, carried on no maritime commerce.
12. The fertility of Egypt, along with its central location, turned it into a hub of trade; and it thrived significantly long before Europe and Western Asia saw similar development. However, for many centuries, the Egyptians refrained from engaging in maritime trade due to their superstitious fears of the sea.
13. The Phœnicians were the first people who used the Mediterranean Sea, as a highway for the transportation of merchandise. Tyre and Sidon were their chief cities; and the latter was called a great,[191] and the former a strong city, even in the time of Joshua, fifteen hundred years before the advent of Christ. These people, in their original association as a nation, possessed but a small territory; and, being surrounded by many powerful nations, they never attempted its enlargement on the land side.
13. The Phoenicians were the first people to use the Mediterranean Sea as a route for transporting goods. Tyre and Sidon were their main cities; Sidon was known as a great,[191] and Tyre was called a strong city, even during the time of Joshua, fifteen hundred years before Christ. As a nation, they originally had only a small territory; surrounded by many powerful nations, they never tried to expand their land.
14. The settlement of the Israelites in the "Promised Land," circumscribed their limits to a very small territory, and compelled them to colonize a great number of their inhabitants. The colonies which they formed in the various countries bordering upon the Mediterranean and on the islands, enlarged the boundaries of civilization, and greatly extended their trade.
14. The settlement of the Israelites in the "Promised Land" limited their territory to a small area and forced them to establish colonies with many of their people. The colonies they created in different countries around the Mediterranean and on the islands expanded the reach of civilization and significantly increased their trade.
15. The Phœnicians continued their colonial system for many centuries after the period just mentioned, and even extended it to the Atlantic coasts of Europe. But the most distinguished of all their colonies was the one which founded the city of Carthage, on the northern coast of Africa, about the year 869 before Christ. Elissa, or, as she is otherwise called, Dido, the reputed leader of this colony, makes a conspicuous figure in one of the books of Virgil's Æneid.
15. The Phoenicians continued their colonial system for many centuries after the period just mentioned, and even expanded it to the Atlantic coasts of Europe. But the most notable of all their colonies was the one that founded the city of Carthage, on the northern coast of Africa, around the year 869 BC. Elissa, or as she is also known, Dido, the reputed leader of this colony, is a prominent figure in one of the books of Virgil's Aeneid.
16. Carthage, adopting the same system which had so long been pursued by the great cities of Phœnicia, rose, in a few centuries, to wealth and splendor. But, changing, at length, her mercantile for a military character, she ruled her dependent colonies with a rod of despotism. This produced a spirit of resistance on the part of her distant subjects, who applied to Rome for aid to resist her tyranny. The consequence of this application was the three "Punic wars," so renowned in history, and which terminated in the destruction of Carthage, in the year 146 before the Christian era. During the first Punic war, Carthage contained seven hundred thousand inhabitants; but at its destruction, scarcely five thousand were found within its walls.[192]
16. Carthage, following the same approach that the great cities of Phoenicia had pursued for a long time, grew to wealth and glory in just a few centuries. However, eventually shifting from a focus on trade to a military one, she governed her colonies with an iron fist. This led to a spirit of resistance among her far-off subjects, who sought help from Rome to fight against her cruelty. The result of this request was the three "Punic wars," which are famous in history, and ended with the destruction of Carthage in 146 BC. During the first Punic war, Carthage had seven hundred thousand residents, but at the time of its destruction, there were barely five thousand left within its walls.[192]
17. The period of the greatest prosperity of Tyre, may be placed 588 years before Christ, at which time the remarkable prophecies of Ezekiel concerning it were delivered. Soon after this, it was greatly injured by Nebuchadnezzar; and was finally destroyed by Alexander the Great, about the year 332 before Christ.
17. The height of Tyre's prosperity can be set at 588 BC, when the notable prophecies of Ezekiel about it were made. Shortly after this, it suffered significant damage from Nebuchadnezzar and was ultimately destroyed by Alexander the Great around 332 BC.
18. A new channel was opened to commerce by the monarch just mentioned, he having founded a city in Egypt, to which he gave the name of Alexandria. His object seems to have been, to render this city the centre of the commercial world; and its commanding position, at the mouth of the Nile, was well calculated to make it so; since it was easy of access from the west by the Mediterranean, from the east by the Red Sea, and from the central countries of Asia by the Isthmus of Suez.
18. A new trade route was established by the aforementioned monarch, who founded a city in Egypt and named it Alexandria. His goal appears to have been to make this city the hub of global commerce, and its strategic location at the mouth of the Nile was perfect for that purpose; it was easily accessible from the west via the Mediterranean, from the east through the Red Sea, and from the central regions of Asia via the Isthmus of Suez.
19. The plans of Alexander were carried out with vigor by Ptolemy, who received Egypt as his portion of the Macedonian empire, after the death of his master; and, by his liberality, he induced great numbers of people to settle in the new metropolis for the purposes of trade. Far south, on the Red Sea, he also founded a city, which he called Berenice, and which he designed as a depôt for the precious commodities brought into his kingdom from India. From this city, goods were transported on camels across the country, to a port on the Nile; and thence they were taken down the river to Alexandria.
19. Ptolemy carried out Alexander's plans with determination after receiving Egypt as his part of the Macedonian empire following his master's death. Through his generosity, he attracted many people to settle in the new capital for trade. Further south, on the Red Sea, he also founded a city called Berenice, which he intended as a storage hub for valuable goods brought into his kingdom from India. From this city, goods were transported on camels across the country to a port on the Nile, and then taken down the river to Alexandria.
20. Ptolemy also kept large fleets both on the Mediterranean and on the Red Sea, for the protection of commerce, and the defence of his dominions; yet, the Egyptians, even under the Ptolemies, never attempted a direct trade to India. They, as the Phœnicians and their own progenitors had done for ages, depended upon the Arabian merchants for the productions of that country.
20. Ptolemy also maintained large fleets in both the Mediterranean and the Red Sea to protect commerce and defend his territories; however, the Egyptians, even during the Ptolemaic period, never tried to trade directly with India. They relied on Arabian merchants for goods from that region, just like the Phoenicians and their ancestors had for ages.
21. The Greeks, before their subjugation to the[193] Roman power, had paid much attention to nautical affairs; but this had been chiefly for warlike dominion, rather than for commercial purposes. The city of Corinth, however, had become wealthy by the attention of its inhabitants to manufactures and trade; but it was destroyed by the same barbarian people who, about this time, annihilated Carthage. Both of these cities were afterwards favored by Julius Cæsar; but they never regained anything like their former importance.
21. Before being conquered by the[193] Roman Empire, the Greeks focused a lot on maritime activities; however, this was mainly for military dominance instead of commercial reasons. The city of Corinth, on the other hand, became affluent due to the residents' focus on manufacturing and trade; but it was destroyed by the same barbarian tribes that wiped out Carthage around this time. Both cities were later supported by Julius Caesar; however, they never achieved anything close to their previous significance.
22. Rome having, at length, obtained the complete dominion of the Mediterranean Sea, and the countries bordering upon it, as well as that of many others more distant, and less easy of access, became the great mart for the sale of merchandise of every description, from all parts of the known world. For the various commodities brought to the city, the Romans paid gold and silver; as they had nothing else to export in return. The money which they had exacted as tribute, or which they had obtained by plunder, was thus returned to the nations from which it had been taken.
22. After finally gaining complete control over the Mediterranean Sea and the surrounding countries, as well as many more distant and harder-to-reach areas, Rome became the major marketplace for selling all kinds of goods from across the known world. The Romans paid in gold and silver for the various products brought to the city, as they had nothing else to trade in return. The money they had collected through taxes or obtained through conquest was then given back to the nations it had been taken from.
23. The subjected provinces continued to pour their choicest productions into Rome, as long as she retained the control of the empire; and thus they contributed to enervate, by the many luxuries they afforded, the power by which they had been subdued. The eternal city, as she is sometimes called, in the days of her extensive dominion, contained about three millions of inhabitants; and, although this immense population was chiefly supplied by importations, the Romans never esteemed the character of a merchant. They despised the peaceful pursuits of industry, whilst they regarded it honorable to attack without provocation, and plunder without remorse, the weaker nations of the earth.
23. The conquered provinces kept sending their best goods to Rome as long as it maintained control over the empire; this contributed to weakening the very power that had subdued them through the luxuries they provided. The eternal city, as it’s sometimes called, had about three million residents during its vast dominion. Even though this huge population was mostly supplied by imports, the Romans never valued the role of a merchant. They looked down on the peaceful pursuits of trade, while considering it honorable to attack without cause and plunder the weaker nations of the world without guilt.
24. In the year 328 of the Christian era, Byzantium[194] was made the seat of government of the Roman empire by Constantine, who, with a view of perpetuating his own name, called his new capital Constantinople. However necessary this removal may have been, to keep in subjugation the eastern provinces, it was fatal to the security of the western division. The rivalry between the two cities produced frequent contests for dominion; and these, together with the general corruption and effeminacy of the people themselves, rendered it impossible to resist the repeated and fierce invasions of the barbarous people from the northern parts of Europe.
24. In the year 328 AD, Byzantium[194] became the capital of the Roman Empire under Constantine, who aimed to immortalize his name by naming the new capital Constantinople. While this move was likely necessary to maintain control over the eastern provinces, it seriously undermined the security of the western part of the empire. The rivalry between the two cities led to constant battles for power, and combined with the widespread corruption and decadence among the people, it made it impossible to fend off the repeated and fierce invasions by barbarian tribes from northern Europe.
25. These invasions commenced in the latter part of the fourth century; and, in less than two hundred years, a great portion of the inhabitants was destroyed, and the whole Western empire was completely subverted. The conquerors were too barbarous to encourage or protect commerce; and, like the arts of peace and civilization generally, it sunk, with few exceptions, amid the general ruin.
25. These invasions started in the late fourth century; and, in under two hundred years, a significant portion of the population was wiped out, and the entire Western empire was utterly destroyed. The conquerors were too brutal to support or safeguard trade; and, similar to the arts of peace and civilization overall, it declined, with few exceptions, amidst the widespread devastation.
26. The empire of Constantinople, or, as it is usually called, the Eastern empire, continued in existence several centuries after the Western empire had been overrun; and commerce continued to flow, for a considerable time, through some of its former channels to the capital. At length, the Indian trade, which had so long been carried on chiefly through Egypt by the Red Sea, was changed to a more northern route, through Persia.
26. The empire of Constantinople, or what is commonly known as the Eastern empire, lasted for several centuries after the Western empire was overrun; and trade continued to move, for quite a while, through some of its old routes to the capital. Eventually, the Indian trade, which had primarily been conducted through Egypt by the Red Sea, switched to a more northern path through Persia.
27. Soon after the commencement of the pretended mission of Mohammed, or Mahomet, in 609 of the Christian era, the power of the Arabians, since called Saracens, began to rise. The followers of the Prophet, impelled by religious zeal, and allured by plunder, in less than 150 years extended their dominion almost to the borders of China on the one side, and to the Mediterranean and Atlantic on the other. The trade[195] of the East, of course, fell into their hands; and they continued to enjoy it, until they, in turn, were subdued by the Turks.
27. Shortly after Mohammed's mission began in 609 AD, the power of the Arabians, later known as Saracens, started to grow. The Prophet's followers, driven by religious fervor and motivated by the promise of loot, expanded their territory in less than 150 years almost to the borders of China on one side and to the Mediterranean and Atlantic on the other. The trade[195] of the East naturally fell into their control, and they maintained it until they were eventually conquered by the Turks.
28. So great was the prejudice of the Christians against the followers of Mohammed, that, for a long time, it was considered heretical for the former to trade with the latter; but the Saracens having a vast extent of territory, and having control of the Mediterranean and Red Seas, as well as of the Persian Gulf, carried on an extensive trade among themselves.
28. The bias of Christians against the followers of Mohammed was so strong that, for a long time, it was seen as heretical for them to do business with each other. However, the Saracens had a huge amount of land and controlled the Mediterranean and Red Seas, along with the Persian Gulf, allowing them to engage in extensive trade among themselves.
29. The first European power which rose to commercial eminence, after the destruction of the Western empire, was the republic of Venice. This important city owed its origin to some fugitives, who fled for their lives to a number of small islands in the Adriatic Sea, during the invasion of Italy by the Huns, under Attila, in the year 452.
29. The first European power to become a major commercial force after the fall of the Western Empire was the Republic of Venice. This significant city was founded by some refugees who escaped for their lives to several small islands in the Adriatic Sea during the invasion of Italy by the Huns, led by Attila, in the year 452.
30. The houses first built by the refugees, were constructed of mud and seagrass; and, so insignificant were they in their appearance, that a writer of that period compares them to a collection of the nests of water-fowls. The number of these islands, on which so splendid a city was afterwards built, was, according to some, seventy-two; but, according to others, ninety, or even one hundred and fifty. For a considerable time, the distinction of rich and poor was not known; for all lived upon the same fish-diet, and in houses of similar form and materials.
30. The houses first built by the refugees were made of mud and seagrass; they looked so unimpressive that a writer from that time compared them to a bunch of waterfowl nests. Some say there were seventy-two islands where such a magnificent city was eventually constructed, while others claim there were ninety or even one hundred and fifty. For a long time, there was no distinction between the rich and the poor, as everyone lived on the same fish diet and in houses made from the same materials and design.
31. In less than a century, the inhabitants of these islands had established a regular government; and, in the year 732, we find them venturing beyond the Adriatic into the Mediterranean, even as far as Constantinople, trading in silks, purple draperies, and Indian commodities. In 813, the French commenced trading to Alexandria, and, in a few years, the Venetians followed their example, in despite of the ecclesiastical prohibitions against intercourse with the followers[196] of Mohammed. In the tenth century, Amalfi, Pisa, Genoa, and Florence, began to rival Venice in trade.
31. In less than a hundred years, the people of these islands had set up a formal government; and by the year 732, they were already venturing beyond the Adriatic into the Mediterranean, reaching as far as Constantinople, where they traded in silks, purple fabrics, and Indian goods. In 813, the French started trading with Alexandria, and within a few years, the Venetians followed suit, despite the church's bans on dealing with the followers[196] of Mohammed. By the tenth century, Amalfi, Pisa, Genoa, and Florence began to compete with Venice in trade.
32. The crusades, which, for two centuries from the year 1095, engaged so much of the attention of the Christian nations of Europe, greatly promoted the interests of the commercial cities of Italy; as the armies in these expeditions were dependent on them for provisions, and for the means of crossing the sea, which lay between them and the Holy Land. They also gave a new and powerful impulse to commerce in general, by giving the people, in the unrefined parts of Europe, a knowledge of the elegances and luxuries of the East.
32. The crusades, which captivated the Christian nations of Europe for two centuries starting in 1095, significantly benefited the commercial cities of Italy. The armies involved in these campaigns relied on these cities for food and for transportation across the sea to the Holy Land. They also gave a major boost to trade overall by introducing people in the less developed parts of Europe to the refined goods and luxuries of the East.
33. In the thirteenth century, commerce and manufactures began to command considerable attention in Germany and the adjacent states; but as the seas and rivers were infested with pirates, and the roads with banditti, it became necessary for those engaged in commerce to adopt measures to protect their commodities, while on the way from one place to another. The citizens of Hamburg and Lubeck first united for this purpose; and the advantages of such a union of strength becoming apparent, many other cities soon entered into the confederation.
33. In the thirteenth century, trade and manufacturing started to gain significant attention in Germany and the surrounding areas; however, with pirates on the seas and bandits on the roads, those involved in commerce needed to take steps to protect their goods while traveling from one location to another. The citizens of Hamburg and Lubeck were the first to join forces for this reason, and as the benefits of such a partnership became clear, many other cities quickly joined the alliance.
34. This association was denominated the Hanse, or league, and the cities thus united were called Hanse Towns. Most of the commercial towns in the northern parts of the continent of Europe, at length, became parties to the Hanseatic league. The number of these cities varied, at different periods; but in the days of the greatest prosperity of the association, it amounted to eighty-five.
34. This group was called the Hanse, or league, and the cities that joined it were known as Hanse Towns. Most of the trade towns in the northern part of Europe eventually became members of the Hanseatic league. The number of these cities changed over time, but during the height of the league's success, there were eighty-five.
35. Representatives from the different cities met triennially at Lubeck, where their common treasury and archives were kept. By this assembly, which was called a diet, rules for the regulation of commercial[197] intercourse were made, and other business transacted, which related to the general welfare of the confederation.
35. Representatives from various cities met every three years in Lubeck, where they stored their shared treasury and archives. This gathering, known as a diet, established rules for regulating commercial[197] interactions and handled other matters related to the overall welfare of the confederation.
36. In the fourteenth century, the league, in all parts of Europe, attained a high degree of political importance, and developed that commercial policy which it had originated, and which has since been adopted by all civilized nations. The objects of the allied cities were now declared to be—to protect their commerce against pillage, to guard and extend their foreign trade, and, as far as possible, to monopolize it, to maintain and extend the privileges obtained from the princes of different nations, and to make rules or laws for the regulation of trade, as well as to establish the necessary tribunals for their due execution. The decisions of their courts were respected by the civil authorities of the countries to which their trade extended.
36. In the fourteenth century, the league became significantly important politically across Europe and developed the commercial policy it initially created, which has since been adopted by all civilized nations. The goals of the allied cities were now stated as—protecting their trade from theft, safeguarding and expanding their foreign trade, and, as much as possible, monopolizing it. They aimed to maintain and expand the privileges granted by different national rulers and to establish rules or laws for regulating trade, along with setting up the necessary courts to ensure these laws were enforced. The decisions made by their courts were respected by the civil authorities in the countries where their trade reached.
37. The treasury was chiefly supplied by duties on merchandise; and the great wealth thus acquired enabled the allied cities to obtain commercial privileges from needy princes, for pecuniary accommodations. The league, in defending its commerce, even carried on wars against kingdoms; and, at length, by its wealth and naval power, became mistress of the Northern seas, and rendered the different cities of the confederation in a great measure independent of the sovereigns of the countries in which they were situated.
37. The treasury was mainly funded by taxes on goods, and the substantial wealth gained allowed the allied cities to secure trade privileges from cash-strapped rulers in exchange for financial support. The league, in protecting its trade, even waged wars against kingdoms; ultimately, through its wealth and naval strength, it became dominant in the Northern seas and made the various cities in the confederation largely independent from the rulers of the regions they were in.
38. The conduct of the Hanse Towns, at length, excited the jealousies of those sovereigns who had, for a long time, favored their union; and the princes of Europe generally, becoming acquainted with the value of commerce, both as means of enriching their people, and of filling their own coffers, combined against the association. In 1518, the governments of several states commanded all their cities to withdraw[198] from the league, which soon after voluntarily excluded some others. After this the Hanse gradually sunk in importance, and finally ceased to exist in 1630.
38. Eventually, the actions of the Hanse Towns sparked jealousy among the rulers who had long supported their alliance. As European princes recognized the significance of trade for enriching their people and boosting their own wealth, they banded together against the league. In 1518, several governments ordered all their cities to leave[198] the league, which later voluntarily excluded a few more. After that, the Hanse Towns gradually declined in significance and ultimately ceased to exist in 1630.
39. The trade to the East Indies continued to be carried on through Persia and Egypt, subject to the extortions of the Saracens, and the still severer exactions of the merchants of the Italian cities, until the route to those countries, by the Cape of Good Hope, was discovered.
39. Trade with the East Indies continued through Persia and Egypt, facing the exploitation from the Saracens and the even harsher demands of the merchants from the Italian cities, until the route to those countries around the Cape of Good Hope was discovered.
40. The use of this new pathway of commerce, combined with the discovery of America, caused an entire change in both the political and commercial state of Europe. A strong desire of visiting the remote parts of the world, thus laid open to the people of Europe, immediately arose, not only among the Portuguese and Spaniards, but also among other nations. Colonies were soon planted in the East and in the West; and the whole world may be said to have been inspired with new energy.
40. The introduction of this new trade route, along with the discovery of America, completely transformed the political and commercial landscape of Europe. A strong interest in exploring distant parts of the world quickly developed among Europeans, not just the Portuguese and Spaniards, but also other nations. Colonies were quickly established in both the East and the West, and the entire world seemed to be energized with a fresh vitality.
41. The Portuguese, being considerably in advance of the other Atlantic nations in the art of navigation, soon gained the entire control of the East India trade, and were thus raised to great eminence, prosperity, and power. Their dominions became extensive in Africa and Asia, and their navy superior to any that had been seen for several ages before.
41. The Portuguese, being far ahead of other Atlantic nations in navigation, quickly took complete control of the East India trade, which elevated them to great prominence, wealth, and power. Their territories expanded significantly in Africa and Asia, and their navy became superior to any that had been seen for several centuries before.
42. In 1580, or eighty-three years after Vasco de Gama found his way, by the Cape, to Calicut, Portugal was subdued by Philip II., king of Spain. The Spaniards, however, were not enriched by the conquest; since their commercial energy and enterprise had been destroyed, by the vast quantities of the precious metals obtained from their American possessions.
42. In 1580, or eighty-three years after Vasco de Gama navigated around the Cape to Calicut, Portugal was taken over by Philip II, the king of Spain. However, the Spaniards didn't benefit from the conquest; their business drive and ambition had been weakened by the large amounts of precious metals coming from their American territories.
43. In 1579, the people of Holland, with those of six neighboring provinces, being then subject to Spain,[199] united, under the Prince of Orange, for the purpose of regaining their liberties. This produced a sanguinary war, which continued for thirty years, during which time the Dutch wrested from the Spaniards most of their Portuguese possessions in India, and, in addition to this, formed many other settlements in various places from the River Tigris even to Japan. Batavia, on the Island of Java, was made the grand emporium of trade, and the seat of the government of their East India possessions.
43. In 1579, the people of Holland, along with those from six neighboring provinces that were under Spanish control,[199] came together under the Prince of Orange to fight for their freedom. This led to a brutal war that lasted thirty years, during which the Dutch took most of the Spaniards’ Portuguese territories in India and established several other settlements in places ranging from the River Tigris all the way to Japan. Batavia, located on the island of Java, became the main trading hub and the center of government for their East India holdings.
44. The prosperity of the United Provinces increased with great rapidity; and, as they were but little interfered with by other nations in their Eastern dominions, they enjoyed, for half a century or more, almost the whole of the trade of the East. Besides this, they shared largely with the rest of the world in almost every other branch of trade. After the year 1660, other nations, by great exertions, succeeded in obtaining considerable shares of the commerce of the East; yet the Dutch still retain valuable possessions there.
44. The prosperity of the United Provinces grew rapidly, and since they faced little interference from other nations in their Eastern territories, they enjoyed almost the entire Eastern trade for over fifty years. In addition to this, they also participated significantly in nearly every other area of trade around the world. After 1660, other nations worked hard to gain substantial portions of the Eastern commerce; still, the Dutch continue to hold valuable territories there.
45. The chief articles exported from Britain, in ancient times, were tin, lead, copper, iron, wool, and cattle; for which they received in return, gold, silver, and manufactured articles. But the commerce of the British Islands was inconsiderable, when compared with that of many kingdoms on the Continent, until the beginning of the eighteenth century.
45. The main products exported from Britain in ancient times were tin, lead, copper, iron, wool, and cattle, for which they got back gold, silver, and manufactured goods. However, the trade of the British Islands was small compared to that of many countries on the Continent until the early eighteenth century.
46. When Elizabeth ascended the throne of England, in 1558, the circumstances of the nation required an extensive navy for its protection; and the great attention which the queen paid to this means of defence, gave animation to all maritime concerns. Under her patronage, several companies for trading in foreign countries were formed, which, at that time, and for a long period afterwards, were very beneficial to trade in general. In her reign, also, the colonial[200] system of England had its origin, which contributed eventually, more than any thing else, to the commercial prosperity of that nation. Since the reign of this wise and judicious princess, the commerce and manufactures of Great Britain have been, with a few interruptions, steadily advancing; and, in these two particulars, she surpasses every other nation.
46. When Elizabeth became queen of England in 1558, the country needed a strong navy for protection, and her commitment to this defense strategy sparked interest in all maritime activities. Under her support, several trading companies were established for international commerce, which proved to be very beneficial to trade both then and for a long time after. Her reign also marked the beginning of England's colonial system, which ultimately played a crucial role in the nation’s commercial success. Since this wise and sensible queen's time, Britain’s trade and manufacturing have steadily progressed, with only a few exceptions, surpassing every other nation in these areas.
47. The United States possess superior local advantages for trade, and embrace a population unsurpassed for enterprise and energy. Since the Revolution, the resources of our country have been rapidly developing. Our exports and imports are already next in amount to those of Great Britain and France and the extensive improvements which have been made by the different states, to facilitate internal intercourse, are increasing with great rapidity.
47. The United States has great local advantages for trade and a population unmatched in entrepreneurship and drive. Since the Revolution, our nation's resources have been developing quickly. Our exports and imports are already second in volume only to those of Great Britain and France, and the significant improvements made by various states to enhance internal communication are growing rapidly.
48. The banking system is very intimately interwoven with commercial affairs in general. Banks are of three kinds, viz., of discount, of deposit, and of circulation. The term bank, in its original application, signified a place of common deposit for money, and where, in commercial transactions, individuals could have the amount, or any part of the amount, of their deposits transferred to each other's accounts.
48. The banking system is closely connected to commercial activities overall. There are three types of banks: discount, deposit, and circulation. The term bank, in its original sense, referred to a place where money could be held collectively, allowing individuals to transfer the total or any part of their deposits to each other's accounts during commercial transactions.
49. The term bank is derived from the Italian word banco, which signified a kind of bench, or table, on which the Jews were accustomed to place the money which they proposed to lend in the markets of the principal towns. The first bank was established in Venice, about the middle of the twelfth century; the Bank of Genoa, in 1345; the Bank of Amsterdam, in 1607; the Bank of Hamburg, in 1619; the Bank of Rotterdam, in 1635. These were all banks of mere deposit and transfer.
49. The term bank comes from the Italian word banco, which referred to a type of bench or table where Jews used to put the money they intended to lend in the main town markets. The first bank was founded in Venice around the middle of the 12th century; the Bank of Genoa in 1345; the Bank of Amsterdam in 1607; the Bank of Hamburg in 1619; and the Bank of Rotterdam in 1635. These were all just banks for deposits and transfers.
50. Lending-houses may be traced to a very ancient origin. They were, at first, supported by humane persons, with a view of lending money to the[201] poor, on pledges, without interest. Augustus Cæsar appropriated a part of the confiscated effects of criminals to this purpose; and Tiberias, also, advanced a large capital, to be lent for three years, without interest, to those who could give security in lands equal to twice the value of the sum borrowed.
50. Lending-houses have a very ancient origin. They were initially funded by kind individuals who aimed to lend money to the[201] poor, on collateral, without charging interest. Augustus Cæsar allocated some of the confiscated property of criminals for this purpose, and Tiberius also provided a substantial amount of capital to be lent for three years, without interest, to those who could secure it with land valued at twice the amount borrowed.
51. In the early ages of Christianity, free gifts were collected and preserved by ecclesiastics, partly to defray the expenses of divine service, and partly to relieve the poor of the church; and the funds thus provided came, at length, to be called montes pietatis—mountains of piety. This appellation was afterwards applied to the loaning-houses, established in modern Italy in imitation of those of antiquity.
51. In the early days of Christianity, church leaders collected and stored free gifts, partially to cover the costs of worship and partly to help the poor in the church. The funds collected eventually became known as montes pietatis—mountains of piety. This term was later used for the loaning-houses set up in modern Italy as a copy of those from ancient times.
52. In course of time, the loaning-houses were permitted by the Roman pontiff to charge a moderate interest on a part of their capital, and, finally, upon the whole of it; still, they retained, for a long period, the original denomination of montes pietatis. The receiving of interest on loans was declared lawful by the Pope, about the middle of the fifteenth century. Soon after this period, all the cities of Italy hastened to establish these institutions; and their example was, at length, followed in other parts of Europe.
52. Over time, the lending houses were allowed by the Pope to charge a reasonable interest on part of their capital, and eventually on all of it; however, they kept the original name of montes pietatis for a long time. The Pope declared it legal to charge interest on loans around the middle of the fifteenth century. Shortly after this, all the cities in Italy rushed to set up these institutions, and eventually, other parts of Europe followed their lead.
53. But long before the Pope had granted this privilege, individuals were in the habit of loaning money at an exorbitant usury. These were principally Jews and merchants from Lombardy; hence, all persons in those countries, who dealt in money, came to be called Lombard merchants. The prohibitions of the Church against receiving interest were eluded, when necessary, by causing it to be paid in advance, by way of present or premium.
53. But long before the Pope had given this privilege, people were already lending money at extremely high-interest rates. These were mainly Jews and merchants from Lombardy; as a result, everyone in those regions who dealt with money came to be known as Lombard merchants. The Church's rules against charging interest were often sidestepped when needed by having it paid upfront as a gift or bonus.
54. In the twelfth century, many of the dealers in money were expelled from England, France, and the Netherlands, for usurious practices; and, in order to regain possession of their effects, which they had, in[202] their haste, left in the hands of confidential friends, they adopted the method of writing concise orders or drafts. Hence originated bills of exchange, so convenient in commercial transactions.
54. In the 12th century, many moneylenders were kicked out of England, France, and the Netherlands for charging excessively high interest rates. To get their belongings back, which they had quickly left with trusted friends, they started writing short orders or drafts. This led to the creation of bills of exchange, which became very useful in business transactions.
55. The Bank of England was established in the year 1694. Hitherto, the banks of deposit, and loaning-houses, were entirely distinct; but, in this institution, these two branches of pecuniary operations were united. It seems, also, that this was the first bank that issued notes, to serve as a medium of circulation, and to supply, in part, the place of gold and silver.
55. The Bank of England was founded in 1694. Until then, deposit banks and lending institutions were completely separate; however, this institution brought those two areas of financial operations together. It also appears this was the first bank to issue notes to be used as a form of currency, partially replacing gold and silver.
56. In the United States, banking institutions are very numerous. They are all established by companies, incorporated by the legislatures of the different states, or by the congress of the United States. The act which grants the privileges of banking, also fixes the amount of the capital stock, and divides it into equal shares. The holders of the stock choose the officers to transact the business of the corporation.
56. In the United States, there are a lot of banking institutions. They are all set up by companies that are incorporated by the legislatures of different states, or by the U.S. Congress. The law that grants banking privileges also defines the amount of capital stock and divides it into equal shares. The shareholders elect the officers to manage the corporation's business.
57. Our banks receive deposits from individual customers, loan money on notes of hand, acceptances, and drafts, issue notes of circulation, and purchase and sell bills of exchange. They are usually authorized, by their charters, to loan three times the amount, and to issue bank-notes to twice the amount, of the capital stock paid in. Few banking companies, however, exercise these privileges to the full extent, lest the bank be embarrassed by too great a demand for specie. As soon as a bank ceases to pay specie for its notes, it is said to be broken, and its operations must cease.
57. Our banks accept deposits from individual customers, lend money based on promissory notes, acceptances, and drafts, issue banknotes, and buy and sell bills of exchange. They are typically allowed by their charters to lend up to three times the amount of their paid-in capital and to issue banknotes worth up to twice that amount. However, few banking companies fully utilize these privileges to avoid being overwhelmed by too much demand for cash. Once a bank stops redeeming its notes for cash, it is considered to be bankrupt, and its operations must shut down.
58. The Bank of North America was the first institution of this kind, established in the United States. It was incorporated by Congress, in 1781, at the suggestion of Robert Morris. In 1791, after the union[203] of the states had been effected under the present constitution, the first Bank of the United States was incorporated, with a capital of ten millions of dollars. Most of the states soon followed this example; and, before the beginning of the present century, the whole banking capital amounted to near thirty millions of dollars.
58. The Bank of North America was the first institution of its kind established in the United States. Congress incorporated it in 1781 at the suggestion of Robert Morris. In 1791, after the states united under the current constitution, the first Bank of the United States was formed with a capital of ten million dollars. Most states quickly followed suit, and by the beginning of this century, the total banking capital reached nearly thirty million dollars.
59. The charter of the first Bank of the United States expired, by its own limitation, in 1811; and a new one, with a capital of thirty-five millions of dollars, was established in 1816, which also closed its concerns, as a national bank, in 1836, President Jackson having vetoed the bill for its recharter. In that year the number of banks was 567, and the bank capital $251,875,292. In the year 1840, the number of banks had increased to 722, and their capital to $358,442,692.
59. The charter for the first Bank of the United States expired on its own in 1811; a new one was created in 1816 with a capital of thirty-five million dollars, which also shut down its operations as a national bank in 1836 after President Jackson vetoed the bill to renew its charter. In that year, there were 567 banks, with a total bank capital of $251,875,292. By 1840, the number of banks had risen to 722, and their total capital reached $358,442,692.

THE AUCTIONEER.
1. The Auctioneer is one who disposes of property at public sale to the highest bidder. The sale of property in this manner is regulated, in some particulars, by legislative enactments, which have for their object the prevention of fraud, or the imposition of duties.
1. The Auctioneer is someone who sells property at a public auction to the highest bidder. The sale of property this way is governed, in certain ways, by laws aimed at preventing fraud or imposing responsibilities.
2. In Pennsylvania, the present law provides for three classes of auctioneers, each of which is required to pay to the state a specified sum for a license. The first class pays two thousand dollars per annum; the second, one thousand; and the third, two hundred; and, besides this, one and a half per cent. on the amount of all their sales is required to be paid into the treasury of the state. To each class are granted privileges corresponding to the cost of the license.[205]
2. In Pennsylvania, the current law establishes three categories of auctioneers, each of whom must pay a specified amount to the state for a license. The first category pays two thousand dollars per year; the second category pays one thousand; and the third category pays two hundred. Additionally, they are required to contribute one and a half percent of their total sales to the state treasury. Each category receives privileges that correspond to the cost of their license.[205]
3. In the state of New-York, the number of auctioneers for the cities, villages, and counties, is limited by law; and all persons who would follow the business are compelled to give security for the faithful execution of its duties. The state requires a duty of one per cent. on all merchandise imported from beyond the Cape of Good Hope, one and a half per cent. on such as may be imported from other foreign countries, and two per cent. on wines and ardent spirits, whether foreign or domestic. The laws and usages regarding sales at auction, in most of the United States, are similar, in their general principles, to those of Pennsylvania or New-York.
3. In New York, the number of auctioneers for cities, towns, and counties is limited by law, and anyone wanting to pursue this business must provide a bond to ensure they carry out their duties faithfully. The state imposes a duty of one percent on all goods imported from beyond the Cape of Good Hope, one and a half percent on items imported from other foreign countries, and two percent on wine and spirits, whether they are foreign or domestic. The laws and practices concerning auctions in most of the United States generally align with those of Pennsylvania or New York.
4. A great amount of merchandise, both foreign and domestic, in our principal cities, is sold by auction; and the price which staple commodities there command is generally considered a tolerable criterion of their value at the time. It very frequently happens, however, that articles which are not in steady demand, are sold at a great sacrifice. Auctioneers seldom import goods, nor is it usual for them to own the property which they sell.
4. A lot of goods, both imported and local, are sold by auction in our main cities, and the prices that staple items fetch there are usually seen as a pretty good indicator of their value at the moment. However, it often happens that items that aren't in high demand are sold at a significant loss. Auctioneers rarely bring in goods themselves, nor is it common for them to own the properties they sell.
5. In all cases, before an auction is held, due notice is given to the public. This is usually done by the circulation of a printed hand-bill, by a crier, or by an advertisement in a newspaper; or all three of these modes may be employed to give publicity to one and the same sale.
5. In every case, before an auction takes place, the public is properly notified. This is usually done through the distribution of a printed flyer, by a person announcing it, or by an ad in a newspaper; all three methods may be used to publicize the same sale.
6. Persons desirous of becoming purchasers at the proposed auction, assemble at the time appointed; and, after the auctioneer has stated the terms of sale, as regards the payment of whatever may be purchased, he offers the property to the persons present, who make their respective bids, he, in the mean time, crying the sum proposed. When no further advance is expected, he knocks down the article to the last bidder.
6. People who want to buy at the upcoming auction gather at the scheduled time; after the auctioneer explains the payment terms for anything that might be bought, he presents the property to those present, who place their bids while he, in the meantime, calls out the amount being offered. When no one is expected to bid higher, he closes the deal with the last bidder.
7. A mode of sale was formerly, and, in some[206] cases is still, practised, in various parts of Europe, called sale by inch of candle. The things for sale are offered in the ordinary manner, as has been described in the preceding paragraph, and, at the same time, a wax-candle, an inch in length, is lighted. The purchasers bid upon each other, until the candle has been all consumed; and the last bidder, when the light goes out, is entitled to the articles or goods in question.
7. A method of selling that used to be popular, and is still practiced in some[206] parts of Europe, is known as sale by inch of candle. The items for sale are presented in the usual way, as described in the previous paragraph, and at the same time, a wax candle that’s one inch long is lit. Buyers place bids against each other until the candle burns out; the last person to place a bid when the light goes out wins the items being sold.
8. Auctioneers, in large cities, hold their sales at regular periods; sometimes, every day or evening. On extensive sales of merchandise, credits of two, three, four, six, or nine months, are commonly given. In such cases, the auctioneer often gives his own obligations for the goods, and receives in return those of the purchasers.
8. Auctioneers in big cities hold their sales regularly; sometimes every day or evening. For large merchandise sales, they often offer credit terms of two, three, four, six, or nine months. In these situations, the auctioneer typically issues his own promises for the goods and, in exchange, receives promises from the buyers.
9. This mode of sale is employed in the disposition of property taken by process of law for the payment of debts, in every part of the world, where the influence of European law has extended. It is used in preference to any other; because it is the most ready way of sale, and is moreover the most likely method to secure to the debtor something like the value of his property.
9. This method of selling is used to dispose of property seized by law to pay debts, in every part of the world where European law has had an impact. It is preferred over other methods because it is the quickest way to sell, and it is also the most likely approach to ensure that the debtor receives something close to the value of their property.
10. Executors and administrators often employ this convenient method of sale, in settling the estates of deceased persons; and they, as well as sheriffs and constables, ex-officio, or by virtue of their office, have a lawful right to act in the capacity of auctioneer, in performing their respective duties; and no tax is required by the state, in such cases.
10. Executors and administrators often use this convenient method of sale to settle the estates of deceased individuals; they, along with sheriffs and constables, ex-officio, or by virtue of their position, have the legal right to act as auctioneers while carrying out their duties; and no tax is required by the state in these situations.
11. The sale by auction was in use among the Romans, even in the early days of their city. It was first employed in the disposition of spoils taken in war; hence a spear was adopted as a signal of a public sale; and this continued to be the auctioneer's emblem, even after this mode of sale was extended[207] to property in general. The red flag and spear, or rather the handle of that instrument, both emblematical of blood and war, are still employed for the same purpose.
11. Auction sales were common among the Romans, even in the early days of their city. They were first used to distribute spoils taken in war; that’s why a spear was chosen as a signal for a public sale. This remained the auctioneer's symbol, even after this method of selling was broadened[207] to include property in general. The red flag and spear, or rather the handle of that tool, both symbolizing blood and war, are still used for the same purpose.
12. Several attempts have been made in the United States, to suppress sales of merchandise by auction; but these endeavors were unsuccessful, since experience had proved this mode of effecting exchanges to be prompt and convenient; and since some of the states had derived considerable revenue from the duties. So long as conflicting interests remain as they are, this mode of sale will be likely to continue.
12. Several attempts have been made in the United States to limit sales of goods by auction, but these efforts were unsuccessful, as experience showed that this method of trading is quick and convenient. Additionally, some states have earned significant revenue from the duties. As long as conflicting interests remain the same, this method of sale will likely continue.

THE CLERGYMAN.
1. The Lord Jesus Christ, our Saviour, during his visit of mercy to the world, chose from among his disciples twelve men, to be his especial agents in establishing his church. These men, in our translation of the New Testament, are denominated apostles. The grand commission which they received was, "Go ye into all the world, and preach my gospel to every creature."
1. The Lord Jesus Christ, our Savior, during his visit of mercy to the world, chose twelve men from among his disciples to be his special representatives in establishing his church. In our translation of the New Testament, these men are called apostles. The main mission they received was, "Go into all the world and preach my gospel to every creature."
2. The apostles commenced their noble enterprise on that memorable day of Pentecost, which next occurred after the ascension of their Master; and, in the city of his inveterate enemies, soon succeeded in establishing a church of several thousand members. The doctrines of Christianity soon spread to other cities and countries; and, before the close of that[209] century, they were known and embraced, more or less, in every province of the Roman empire.
2. The apostles started their important mission on that memorable day of Pentecost, which came shortly after the ascension of their Master; and, in the city of his relentless enemies, they quickly succeeded in establishing a church with several thousand members. The teachings of Christianity rapidly spread to other cities and countries; and, by the end of that[209] century, they were known and accepted, to varying degrees, in every province of the Roman Empire.
3. The apostles, however, were not the only agents engaged in spreading and maintaining the doctrines of Christianity; for, in every church, persons were found capable of taking the supervision of the rest, and of exercising the office of the ministry. These were ordained either by the apostles themselves, or by persons authorized by them to perform the ceremony.
3. The apostles weren't the only ones involved in spreading and maintaining the teachings of Christianity; in every church, there were people who were able to oversee others and serve in the ministry. They were appointed either by the apostles themselves or by individuals authorized by them to carry out the process.
4. After the Church had passed through a great variety of persecutions, during a period of nearly three centuries, the Christians became superior in numbers to the pagans in the Roman empire. In the early part of the fourth century, a free toleration in religious matters was declared by Constantine the Great, who took the Church under his especial protection.
4. After the Church went through a lot of persecution for nearly three hundred years, Christians became more numerous than pagans in the Roman Empire. In the early fourth century, Constantine the Great announced a policy of religious tolerance and placed the Church under his special protection.
5. The Christians of the first and second centuries usually worshipped God in private houses, or in the open air in retired places, chiefly on account of the persecutions to which they were often subjected. It was not until the third century, that they ventured to give greater publicity to their service, by building churches for general accommodation. When the Cross had obtained the ascendency, in the subsequent age, many of the heathen temples were appropriated to Christian purposes; and many splendid churches were erected, especially by Constantine and his successors.
5. Christians in the first and second centuries typically worshipped God in private homes or outdoors in secluded areas, mainly because of the persecutions they often faced. It wasn't until the third century that they started to make their services more public by building churches for everyone to use. Once the Cross became dominant in the following era, many pagan temples were converted for Christian use, and numerous impressive churches were built, especially by Constantine and his successors.
6. In the middle ages, a great number of edifices were erected for the performance of divine worship, which, in loftiness and grandeur, had never been surpassed; and the greater part of these remain to the present day. Some of the most famous churches are, St. Peter's, at Rome; Notre Dame, at Paris; St. Stephen's, at Vienna; the church of Isaac, at St. Petersburg;[210] the minsters at Strasburg and Cologne and St. Paul's, in London.
6. During the Middle Ages, a huge number of buildings were constructed for worship, reaching heights and grandeur that had never been seen before; many of these still stand today. Some of the most famous churches include St. Peter's in Rome, Notre Dame in Paris, St. Stephen's in Vienna, the Church of Isaac in St. Petersburg,[210] the minsters in Strasbourg and Cologne, and St. Paul's in London.
7. Up to the time of the great change in favor of Christianity, just mentioned, the whole Church had often acted together in matters of common interest, through the medium of general councils; and this practice continued for several centuries afterwards. But the variance and dissensions between the Pope of Rome, and the Patriarch of Constantinople, combined with some other causes, produced, about the close of the ninth century, a total separation of the two great divisions of the Church.
7. Up until the major shift towards Christianity that was just mentioned, the entire Church often worked together on issues of shared concern through general councils; this practice continued for several centuries afterward. However, the disagreements and conflicts between the Pope of Rome and the Patriarch of Constantinople, along with some other factors, led to a complete split between the two major divisions of the Church near the end of the ninth century.
8. At the time of this schism, the whole Christian world had become subject to these two prelates. The part of the Church ruled by the Patriarch, was called the Eastern, or Greek Church; and that part which yielded obedience to the Pope, was denominated the Western, or Latin Church. Many attempts have been since made to reunite these two branches of the Church; but these endeavors have hitherto proved unsuccessful.
8. At the time of this split, the entire Christian world was under the influence of these two leaders. The section of the Church governed by the Patriarch was known as the Eastern, or Greek Church; while the part that obeyed the Pope was referred to as the Western, or Latin Church. Many attempts have been made since then to bring these two branches of the Church back together, but so far, those efforts have not succeeded.
9. The conquest of the Roman empire, so often mentioned in the preceding pages, was particularly injurious to the Church, especially that part of it subject to the Roman pontiff; since it nearly extinguished the arts and sciences, and since the barbarous conquerors were received into the Church, before they had attained the proper moral qualifications. From these causes, chiefly, arose the conduct of the Church, in the middle ages, which has been so much censured by all enlightened men, and which has been often unjustly attributed to Christianity herself, rather than to the ignorance and barbarism of the times.
9. The conquest of the Roman Empire, frequently mentioned in the earlier sections, was particularly harmful to the Church, especially to that part under the authority of the Pope. It nearly extinguished the arts and sciences, and the barbaric conquerors were accepted into the Church before they had developed the necessary moral standards. These factors primarily led to the behavior of the Church during the Middle Ages, which has been heavily criticized by enlightened thinkers and has often been wrongly blamed on Christianity itself, rather than on the ignorance and brutality of the times.
10. In the year 1517, while Leo X. occupied the papal chair, Martin Luther, of Saxony, commenced his well-known opposition to many practices and doctrines in the Church, which he conceived to be departures[211] from the spirit of primitive Christianity. He was soon joined in his opposition by Philip Melancthon, Ulric Zuingle, and finally by John Calvin, as well as by many other distinguished divines of that century, in various parts of Europe.
10. In 1517, while Leo X was the Pope, Martin Luther from Saxony began his famous opposition to many practices and beliefs in the Church that he saw as straying from the essence of early Christianity. He was quickly joined in his efforts by Philip Melanchthon, Ulrich Zwingli, and eventually John Calvin, along with many other prominent theologians of that century from different parts of Europe.
11. These men, with their followers and abettors, for reasons too obvious to need explanation, received or assumed the appellation of Reformers; and, on account of a solemn protest which they entered against a certain decree which had been issued against them, they also became distinguished by the name of Protestants. The latter term is now applied to all sects, of whatever denomination, in the western division of the Church, that do not acknowledge the authority of the Roman See.
11. These men, along with their supporters and allies, for reasons that are clear and don't need further explanation, took on the title of Reformers; and because of a formal protest they made against a specific decree issued against them, they also became known as Protestants. Today, this term is used for all groups, regardless of their specific beliefs, in the western part of the Church that do not recognize the authority of the Roman See.
12. The Protestant division of the Church is called by the Roman Catholics, the Western schism, to distinguish it from that of the Greek Church, which is termed the Eastern schism. The Protestants are divided into a great number of sects, or parties; and, although they differ from each other in many of their religious sentiments, they agree in their steady opposition to the Roman Catholics.
12. The Protestant split in the Church is referred to by Roman Catholics as the Western schism, distinguishing it from the Greek Church, which is known as the Eastern schism. Protestants are divided into many different sects or groups; and, although they have various religious beliefs, they all consistently oppose Roman Catholics.
13. The ostensible object of the founders of all the churches differing from the Romish communion, has been, to bring back Christianity to the state in which it existed on its first establishment; and to prove their positions in doctrine and church government, they appeal to the Scriptures, and sometimes to the Christian writers of the first four or five centuries. The advocates of the "mother church," on the contrary, contend that, being infallible, she can never have departed from primitive principles, on any point essential to salvation.
13. The apparent goal of the founders of all the churches that differ from the Roman Catholic Church has been to restore Christianity to the form it had at its very beginning. To support their beliefs in doctrine and church governance, they reference the Scriptures and occasionally the early Christian writers from the first four or five centuries. In contrast, supporters of the "mother church" argue that, being infallible, it can never stray from the fundamental principles that are essential to salvation.
14. As to the government of the several churches it is, in most cases, either Episcopal or Presbyterian. In the former case, three orders of clergymen are recognized;[212] viz., bishops, presbyters, and deacons; and these three orders are supposed, by the advocates of episcopacy, to have been ordained by the apostles. This opinion is supported by the circumstance, that these orders are mentioned in the Scriptures; and also by the fact, supposed to be sustained by the primitive fathers, that they were uniformly established early in the second century.
14. Regarding the governance of the various churches, it is mostly either Episcopal or Presbyterian. In the Episcopal case, there are three levels of clergy recognized; [212] namely, bishops, presbyters, and deacons; and supporters of episcopacy believe that these three levels were appointed by the apostles. This belief is backed by the fact that these levels are mentioned in the Scriptures, as well as by the idea, believed to be supported by early church fathers, that they were consistently established in the early second century.
15. It is believed by Episcopalians, that these three orders of ministers were instituted in the Christian Church, in imitation of the Jewish priesthood; the bishop representing the high-priest; the presbyters, the priests; and the deacons, the Levites.
15. Episcopalians believe that these three orders of ministers were established in the Christian Church as a way to mimic the Jewish priesthood; the bishop stands for the high priest, the presbyters represent the priests, and the deacons correspond to the Levites.
16. On the other hand, the advocates of the Presbyterian form of government, assert, that in the first century of the Church, bishop and presbyter were the same order of ministers, and that the former was nothing more than a presbyter, who presided in Christian assemblies, when met to consult on church affairs.
16. On the other hand, supporters of the Presbyterian form of government argue that in the first century of the Church, bishops and presbyters were the same level of ministers, and that a bishop was simply a presbyter who led Christian gatherings when they met to discuss church matters.
17. The deacons in the churches that have renounced episcopacy, are not classed among the clergy, but are chosen from among the private members, to manage the temporalities of the congregation, or church, to which they belong, to assist the minister, on some occasions, in religious assemblies, or to take the lead in religious worship in his absence. Under this form of government, therefore, there is recognized but one order of ministers, and every clergyman is denominated presbyter, priest, or elder.
17. The deacons in churches that have rejected episcopacy are not considered part of the clergy but are selected from the regular members to manage the church's operations and finances, assist the minister during some gatherings, or lead worship in his absence. Under this governance structure, there is only one order of ministers, and every clergyman is referred to as a presbyter, priest, or elder.
18. The literary and religious qualifications required of candidates for orders have varied in different ages of the Church, according to the existing state of literature and religion; and the requirements in these two particulars are now different, in the several denominations. Nearly all, however, require the profession in the candidate, that he believes he is moved[213] by the Holy Ghost to take upon him the office of the ministry. Some churches require a collegiate education, with two or three years of the study of divinity; but others, only such as is usually obtained in common schools, combined with a tolerable capacity for public speaking.
18. The literary and religious qualifications needed for candidates for orders have changed throughout different eras of the Church, based on the current state of literature and religion; and the requirements in these two areas are now different across various denominations. However, almost all require candidates to profess that they feel moved[213] by the Holy Spirit to take on the role of ministry. Some churches require a college education, along with two or three years of studying theology, while others only require what is typically learned in regular schools, paired with a decent ability to speak in public.
19. The clergy in the Roman Catholic Church, is of two kinds; the one regular, comprehending all the religious who have taken upon themselves monastic vows; the other secular, comprehending all the ecclesiastics who do not assume these obligations. The latter, however, in common with the former, take a vow of perpetual celibacy.
19. The clergy in the Roman Catholic Church has two types: the regular clergy, which includes all the religious members who have taken monastic vows, and the secular clergy, which includes all the ecclesiastics who do not have these obligations. However, both types take a vow of lifelong celibacy.
20. It is the especial duty of clergymen, to preach the gospel, to administer the ordinances, and to enforce the discipline of that branch of the Church to which they belong. They are also expected to administer consolation to persons in distress of mind, arising from the complicated evils of this life, to unite persons by the bonds of matrimony, and, finally, in attending on the burial of the dead, to perform the last ceremony due from man to man.
20. It is the special responsibility of clergy to preach the gospel, perform the sacraments, and uphold the discipline of their specific branch of the Church. They are also expected to provide comfort to those experiencing mental distress caused by the complex problems of life, to join people in marriage, and, finally, when attending funerals, to carry out the last rites owed from one person to another.
21. Ministers of the gospel occupy an elevated stand in all Christian communities, both on account of the high tone of moral feeling which they generally possess, and on account of the interest which the people at large feel in the subject of religion. The work of the ministry is emphatically a work of benevolence; and no man can perform it with satisfaction to himself, or with acceptance to the people of his charge, if destitute of love to God and man.
21. Ministers of the gospel hold a prominent position in all Christian communities, both because of the strong moral values they typically embody and due to the widespread interest people have in religion. The work of the ministry is fundamentally about helping others; no one can do it successfully or be accepted by the people they serve if they lack love for God and humanity.
22. In most of the kingdoms of Europe, some one of the several denominations is supported by legal enactments; but, in the United States, every branch of the Church enjoys equal favor, so far as legislation is concerned. In most cases, the institutions of religion are supported by voluntary contributions or subscriptions.[214]
22. In many European countries, one or more religious denominations receive support through laws; however, in the United States, every branch of the Church is treated equally in terms of legislation. Generally, religious institutions are funded through voluntary donations or subscriptions.[214]
23. The salary received by ministers of the gospel, in the United States, is exceedingly various in the different denominations, and in the same denomination from different congregations. In some instances, they receive nothing for their services, in others, a liberal compensation.
23. The salary that ministers of the gospel receive in the United States varies greatly between different denominations and even within the same denomination across different congregations. In some cases, they receive no payment for their services, while in others, they are paid quite well.
24. It is but justice to this profession to remark, that, taking the ability of its members into account, there is no employment less productive of wealth; and this is so evidently the case, that some denominations distribute, annually, a considerable amount among the widows and orphans of those who have devoted their lives to the ministry.
24. It’s only fair to point out that, considering the skills of its members, there’s no job less productive in terms of generating wealth; this is so clear that some organizations give out a significant amount of money each year to support the widows and orphans of those who dedicated their lives to the ministry.
25. The meagre support which the ministry usually receives, arises, in part, from the opinion too commonly entertained, that this profession ought to be one of benevolence exclusively, and that ministers should, therefore, be contented with a bare subsistence, and look for their reward in the consciousness of doing their duty, and in the prospect of future felicity. This is a very convenient way of paying for the services of faithful servants, and of relieving the consciences of those whose duty it is to give them a liberal support.
25. The minimal support that the ministry typically gets comes, in part, from the widespread belief that this profession should be purely about compassion and that ministers should be satisfied with just getting by, finding their reward in the satisfaction of doing their job and the hope of future happiness. This is a very convenient way to compensate dedicated workers and ease the minds of those responsible for providing them with generous support.

ATTORNEY AT LAW.
1. A lawyer is one who, by profession, transacts legal business for others, who, in this relation, are called clients. A lawyer is either an attorney or councillor, or both. The part of legal business, belonging peculiarly to the attorney, consists in preparing the details of the pleadings and the briefs for the use of the councillor, whose especial province it is to make the argument before the court. When the lawyer prepares his own case and makes the argument, as he generally does, he acts in the capacity of both attorney and councillor. In the court of chancery the lawyer is denominated solicitor, and in the admiralty court, proctor. Before a person is permitted to practise law in our courts, he is required to pass through a regular course of study, and afterwards[216] undergo an examination before persons learned in the law.
1. A lawyer is a professional who handles legal matters for others, referred to as clients in this context. A lawyer can be an attorney, counselor, or both. The work that specifically involves the attorney includes preparing the details of the pleadings and briefs for the counselor's use, whose main role is to present arguments in court. When the lawyer prepares their own case and makes the argument, as is usually the case, they function as both attorney and counselor. In the court of chancery, a lawyer is called a solicitor, and in the admiralty court, they are referred to as proctor. Before someone can practice law in our courts, they must complete a formal course of study and then[216] take an examination before legal experts.
2. This profession has its foundation in the numerous and complicated laws which have been adopted by men, to govern their intercourse with each other. These laws, as they exist in our country, may be divided into constitutional and municipal. Constitutional law is that by which the government of the United States, and those of the different states, have been established, and by which they are governed in their action. The Constitution of the United States is the supreme law of the land.
2. This profession is based on the many complex laws created by people to regulate their interactions with one another. These laws, as they exist in our country, can be divided into constitutional and municipal. Constitutional law is what establishes and governs the government of the United States and the various states in their actions. The Constitution of the United States is the highest law in the country.
3. Municipal law embraces those rules of civil conduct prescribed by the supreme power of the state, or of the United States; and is composed of statute and common law. Statute law is the express will of the legislative part of the government, rendered authentic by certain forms and ceremonies prescribed by the Constitution.
3. Municipal law includes the rules of civil conduct set by the highest authority of the state or the United States and consists of statute and common law. Statute law is the clear intention of the legislative branch of the government, made official through specific procedures and formalities outlined by the Constitution.
4. Common law is a system of rules and usages, which have been applied in particular cases of litigation. It originated in the dictates of natural justice, and cultivated reason, and is found more particularly in the reports of the decisions of the courts of justice. The common law is employed in cases which positive enactments do not reach, and in construing and applying positive enactments. The common law of England has been adopted by every state in the Union, except Louisiana.
4. Common law is a system of rules and practices that have been applied in specific legal cases. It originated from the principles of natural justice and developed reasoning, and it can be found primarily in the reports of court decisions. Common law is used in situations that are not covered by specific laws and in interpreting and applying those laws. The common law of England has been adopted by every state in the U.S. except Louisiana.
5. The Constitution of the United States, and those of the several states, provides for three departments in their respective governments, viz., the legislative, the executive, and the judicial. It is the chief province of the first to enact laws, and of the second and third to see that they are duly executed.
5. The Constitution of the United States, along with those of the various states, establishes three branches in their respective governments: legislative, executive, and judicial. The main role of the legislative branch is to create laws, while the executive and judicial branches are responsible for ensuring those laws are properly enforced.
6. The judicial power of the United States is vested in one supreme court and two inferior courts. The[217] Supreme Court is now composed of seven justices who commence their session in the Capitol, at Washington, on the second Monday in January. The two inferior courts are the District and Circuit Courts. In the first of these presides a single judge; in the second, one of the justices of the Supreme Court, and the district judge.
6. The judicial power of the United States is held by one supreme court and two lower courts. The[217] Supreme Court currently has seven justices who start their session in the Capitol in Washington on the second Monday of January. The two lower courts are the District and Circuit Courts. The District Court has one judge, while the Circuit Court is presided over by one of the Supreme Court justices along with the district judge.
7. The judiciary of the United States takes cognisance of all cases which arise under the Constitution, laws, and treaties, of the United States, and likewise of those cases arising under the law of nations. It also embraces all cases of admiralty and maritime jurisdiction, as well as those controversies to which the government of the United States is a party, the controversies between two states, between a state and citizens of another state, between citizens of different states, and between a state or citizens thereof, and foreign states, citizens, or subjects.
7. The judiciary of the United States handles all cases that come up under the Constitution, laws, and treaties of the United States, as well as those that arise under international law. It also covers all cases involving admiralty and maritime issues, as well as disputes where the United States government is a party, conflicts between two states, between a state and citizens of another state, between citizens of different states, and between a state or its citizens and foreign states, citizens, or subjects.
8. The judicial systems of all the states correspond, in many respects, with each other. In all, the office of justice of the peace is similar. To these magistrates, the general police of the counties is chiefly committed, as they have authority to cause criminals, and other disturbers of the peace, to be arrested; and, if the offence is small, to fix the penalty; but, if the offence is too great to be brought within their jurisdiction, they commit the offenders to prison, to be reserved for trial before a higher tribunal.
8. The judicial systems of all the states are quite similar in many ways. In all of them, the role of justice of the peace is alike. These magistrates mainly oversee the overall law enforcement in the counties, as they have the authority to arrest criminals and others who disrupt the peace. If the offense is minor, they can determine the penalty; however, if the offense is too serious for their jurisdiction, they send the offenders to jail to wait for trial in a higher court.
9. In many of the states, the common magistrates of the county, or a select number of them, form a court, called County Sessions, which has a comprehensive jurisdiction in matters of police, and in regulating the affairs of the county; such as building courthouses, assessing county taxes, opening roads, and licensing taverns.
9. In many states, the local magistrates of the county, or a select few of them, make up a court known as County Sessions, which has broad authority over police matters and managing county affairs; this includes building courthouses, setting county taxes, opening roads, and licensing taverns.
10. In Virginia, the County Sessions is an important[218] court. Its jurisdiction extends to many criminal cases, and to those of a civil nature involving the amount of $300. Although a great amount of business passes through these courts, the justices discharge all their duties without compensation. In most of the states, the common magistrates, in their individual or collective capacity, have jurisdiction over civil cases, varying in their greatest amount from thirteen to one hundred dollars, a right of appeal being reserved to a higher court.
10. In Virginia, the County Sessions is an important[218] court. It has the authority to handle many criminal cases and civil cases involving amounts of up to $300. Although there’s a lot of activity in these courts, the justices perform all their duties without getting paid. In most states, local magistrates, either individually or together, have jurisdiction over civil cases, with amounts ranging from thirteen to one hundred dollars, and the right to appeal is reserved for a higher court.
11. No definite qualifications are required by law or usage for practising in the magistrates' courts, accordingly, there are many persons who plead causes here, who do not properly belong to the profession of law; these are called pettifoggers, and the practice itself, by whomsoever performed, is called pettifogging. Lawyers of inferior abilities and acquirements are, also, frequently termed pettifoggers.
11. There are no specific qualifications needed by law or custom to practice in the magistrates' courts, so there are many people who represent cases here who don’t really belong to the legal profession; these individuals are called pettifoggers, and the practice itself, no matter who performs it, is referred to as pettifogging. Lawyers who have lesser skills and knowledge are also often labeled as pettifoggers.
12. In all the states, a class of county courts is established, denominated Courts of Common Pleas, County Courts, District or Circuit Courts, which have original jurisdiction of civil actions at law, or indictments for crimes. Over these are established the Superior or Supreme Courts, or Courts of Error and Appeal, to which appeals are admitted from the inferior courts.
12. In all the states, there’s a type of county court known as Courts of Common Pleas, County Courts, or District or Circuit Courts, which have the original authority to handle civil lawsuits or criminal charges. Above these are the Superior or Supreme Courts, or Courts of Error and Appeal, where appeals can be made from the lower courts.
13. Civil cases are frequently decided on principles of equity; and, in some states, courts of chancery are established for this purpose. But, in most of the states, there are no decisions of this kind; or the same courts act as courts of law and equity, as is the case with the courts of the United States.
13. Civil cases are often resolved based on principles of fairness, and in some states, there are specific courts set up for this purpose. However, in most states, there aren't any decisions like this, or the same courts handle both legal and equitable cases, as is the case with the courts of the United States.
14. There are several other courts that might be mentioned; but enough has been said of these institutions, to give an idea of the extensive range of the profession of the law. It may be well to remark here, that few lawyers aspire to the privilege of practising in the supreme courts; since, to be successful there[219] it would require not only great abilities, but more extensive reading than the profession generally are willing to encounter.
14. There are a few other courts worth mentioning, but we've already covered enough about these institutions to give a sense of the broad scope of the legal profession. It's worth noting that not many lawyers aim for the privilege of practicing in the supreme courts; to succeed there[219] requires not just exceptional skills but also a level of reading that most in the profession aren’t willing to take on.
15. When a client has stated his case in detail to his attorney, it is the province of the latter to decide upon the course most proper to be pursued in regard to it. If the client is the plaintiff, and litigation is determined upon, the attorney decides upon the court in which the case should be brought forward, and also upon the manner in which it should be conducted.
15. When a client has explained their situation thoroughly to their attorney, it's up to the attorney to determine the best course of action. If the client is the plaintiff and they decide to proceed with litigation, the attorney will choose the court where the case should be filed and how the case should be handled.
16. The suit having been brought, say into the County Court, it is tried according to law. If it involves facts or damages, it is canvassed before a jury of twelve men, who are bound by oath or affirmation to bring in their verdict according to the evidence presented by both parties. It is the business of the lawyers, each for his own client, to sum up the evidence which may have been adduced, and to present the whole in a light as favorable to his own side of the question as possible.
16. Once the lawsuit is filed in the County Court, it is tried according to the law. If it deals with facts or damages, a jury of twelve people reviews it and is required by oath or affirmation to deliver a verdict based on the evidence provided by both sides. Each lawyer’s job is to summarize the evidence that has been presented and to present it in the most favorable way possible for their own client’s position.
17. When the case involves points of law which must needs be understood by the jury, to enable them to make a correct decision, the advocates of the parties present their views with regard to them; but, if these happen to be wrong, the judge, in his charge to the jury, rectifies the mistake or misrepresentation. The case having been decided, each party is bound to submit to the decision, or appeal, if permitted by law, to a higher tribunal.
17. When the case involves legal points that the jury needs to understand in order to make the right decision, the advocates for each side present their perspectives on those points. However, if those perspectives are incorrect, the judge corrects the mistake or misrepresentation in their instructions to the jury. Once the case is decided, each party must accept the decision or appeal to a higher court if allowed by law.
18. Causes to be determined on legal principles only, are brought before the judge or judges for adjudication. In such cases, the advocates present the statute or common law supposed to be applicable, and then reports of similar cases, which may have been formerly decided in the same or similar courts. These reports are the exponents of the common law of the case, and are supposed, in most instances, to furnish data for correct decisions.[220]
18. Cases that need to be decided based on legal principles only are presented to the judge or judges for judgment. In these situations, the attorneys submit the relevant statutes or common laws that they believe apply, along with reports of similar cases that have been decided in the same or similar courts before. These reports illustrate the common law for the case and are generally expected to provide the information needed for accurate decisions.[220]
10. Besides the management of causes in public courts, the lawyer has a great mass of business of a private nature; such as drawing wills, indentures, deeds, and mortgages. He is consulted in a great variety of cases of a legal nature, where litigation is not immediately concerned, and especially in regard to the validity of titles to real estate; and the many impositions to which the community is liable from defective titles, render the information which he is able to afford on this subject, extremely valuable.
10. In addition to handling cases in public courts, lawyers also deal with a large amount of private business, like drafting wills, contracts, deeds, and mortgages. They are consulted on a wide range of legal matters that don't involve immediate litigation, particularly about the validity of property titles. The numerous risks that the community faces from faulty titles make the insight they provide on this issue incredibly valuable.
20. In the preceding account of this profession, it is easy to perceive that it is one of great utility and responsibility. It is to the attorney, that the oppressed repair for redress against the oppressor; and to him, the orphan and friendless look, to aid them in obtaining or maintaining their rights. To this profession, also, as much as to any other, the American people may confidently look for the maintenance of correct political principles.
20. In the previous description of this profession, it's clear that it carries significant importance and responsibility. It is to the attorney that those who are wronged turn for help against their oppressors; and the orphan and those without support rely on them to help secure or protect their rights. This profession, just like any other, is someone the American people can trust to uphold sound political principles.

THE PHYSICIAN.
1. Among the various avocations of men, that of the physician deserves to be placed in the foremost rank. The profession is founded in the multiplicity of diseases to which humanity is liable, and in the medical qualities of certain substances, which have been found to supply a remedy.
1. Among the various careers people can choose, being a doctor deserves to be at the top. This profession is based on the many diseases that humans can suffer from and the healing properties of certain substances that have been discovered to provide cures.
2. It is implied, though not expressly declared, in the Scriptures, that the diseases and other calamities pertaining to our earthly condition, originated in the fall of man from his pristine innocence; and the Grecian fable of Pandora's box appears to have originated in a similar tradition. It seems that Jupiter, being angry at Prometheus, ordered Vulcan to make a woman endowed with every possible perfection. This workman having finished his task, and presented the[222] workmanship of his hands to the gods, they loaded her with presents, and sent her to Prometheus.
2. It’s suggested, though not explicitly stated, in the Scriptures that the diseases and other troubles related to our earthly existence began when man fell from his original innocence. The story of Pandora’s box in Greek mythology seems to come from a similar tradition. According to the tale, Jupiter, angered with Prometheus, commanded Vulcan to create a woman with every possible perfection. Once he completed his work and presented his creation to the gods, they showered her with gifts and sent her to Prometheus.
3. This prince, however, suspecting a trick, would have nothing to do with her; but Epimetheus was so captivated with her charms, that he took her to be his wife. The curiosity of Epimetheus led him to look into a box, given to her by Jupiter, which he had no sooner opened, than there issued from it the complicated miseries and diseases, which have since afflicted the family of man. He instantly shut the box; but all had flown, save Hope, which had not time to escape; and this is consequently the only blessing that permanently remains with wretched mortals.
3. This prince, suspicious of a trick, wanted nothing to do with her; but Epimetheus was so taken with her beauty that he made her his wife. Out of curiosity, Epimetheus opened a box that Jupiter had given her. As soon as he opened it, all kinds of hardships and diseases came pouring out, which have since troubled humanity. He quickly closed the box, but everything had escaped except for Hope, which didn’t have time to get away; and so, this is the only blessing that stays with miserable humans.
4. Since the introduction of moral evil into the world, it cannot be supposed that man has ever enjoyed the blessing of uninterrupted health; and, as it is an instinct of our nature to seek for means of relieving pain, we may safely infer that medicinal remedies were applied in the earliest ages of the human race.
4. Since moral evil entered the world, we can't assume that people have ever experienced constant health; and since it's part of our nature to look for ways to ease pain, we can reasonably conclude that medicinal remedies were used in the earliest times of humanity.
5. Among some of the ancient nations, the origin of diseases was attributed to the malignant influence of supernatural agents. This notion produced a corresponding absurdity, in the means of obtaining relief. Accordingly, idolatrous priests, astrologers, and magicians, were resorted to, who employed religious ceremonies, astrological calculations, and cabalistic incantations.
5. In some ancient societies, people believed that diseases came from the harmful effects of supernatural beings. This idea led to some ridiculous methods for seeking relief. As a result, people turned to idolatrous priests, astrologers, and magicians, who used religious rituals, astrological charts, and mystical spells.
6. The healing art was cultivated at a very early period in Egypt; but it was crippled in its infancy by ordinances, enjoining, without discrimination, the remedies for every disease, and the precise time and mode of their application. The practice was confined to the priests, who connected with it the grossest superstitions.
6. The healing art was developed early on in Egypt; however, it was restricted in its early stages by regulations that mandated specific cures for every illness, along with the exact timing and method of their use. The practice was limited to the priests, who associated it with various superstitions.
7. We are informed by the most ancient historians, that the Chaldeans and Babylonians exposed their sick[223] in places of public resort, and on the highways; and that strangers and others were required by law to give some advice in each case of disease. Amid the variety of suggestions which must necessarily have been given under such circumstances, it was expected that some would prove efficacious. This custom was well calculated to enlarge the boundaries of medical knowledge.
7. The oldest historians tell us that the Chaldeans and Babylonians placed their sick[223] in public areas and along the roads. Strangers and others were legally required to offer advice for each illness. Given the many suggestions that were likely made in these situations, it was expected that some would actually work. This practice was a great way to expand the limits of medical knowledge.
8. The first records of medicine were kept in the temples dedicated by the Greeks to Esculapius, who, on account of his skill in medicine, was honored as the god of health. The name or description of the disease, and the method of cure, were engraved on durable tablets, which were suspended, where they could be readily seen by visitors.
8. The earliest records of medicine were kept in temples established by the Greeks for Esculapius, who was revered as the god of health due to his expertise in medicine. The name or description of the illness and the treatment method were carved on durable tablets, which were displayed in places where visitors could easily see them.
9. But medicine did not assume the dignity of a distinct science, until the days of Hippocrates, who reckons himself the seventeenth from Esculapius in a lineal descent. This great man, who flourished about 400 years before the Christian era, is universally esteemed the "Father of Medicine." After his death, the science was cultivated by the philosophers of Greece, to whom, however, it owes but few improvements.
9. But medicine didn't really become a distinct science until the time of Hippocrates, who considered himself the seventeenth in a direct line from Esculapius. This remarkable man, who lived around 400 years before Christ, is widely regarded as the "Father of Medicine." After his death, the science was advanced by the philosophers of Greece, though it owes them only a few improvements.
10. After the dismemberment of the Macedonian empire, learning retreated from contending factions to Egypt, where it was liberally fostered by the Ptolemies. Under their patronage, a medical school at Alexandria became eminent, and the healing art flourished beyond all former example. To the disciples of this school, is the world indebted for the first correct description of the human structure. Their knowledge on this subject was obtained from the dissection of the bodies of criminals, which had been assigned to them by the government.
10. After the breakup of the Macedonian empire, education shifted away from competing factions to Egypt, where it was generously supported by the Ptolemies. With their backing, a medical school in Alexandria became renowned, and the practice of healing thrived like never before. The world owes its first accurate description of human anatomy to the students of this school. They gained their knowledge by dissecting the bodies of criminals, which the government had provided to them.
11. The acquisitions of the Greeks in medical science at length became the inheritance of the Romans;[224] but Rome had existed 535 years before a professional physician was known in the city. This inattention to the subject of medicine arose, chiefly, from an opinion, common to the semi-barbarous nations of those times, that maladies were to be cured by the interposition of superior beings. The sick, therefore, applied to their idolatrous priests, who offered sacrifices to the gods in their behalf, and practised over the body of the patient a variety of magical ceremonies.
11. The medical knowledge gained by the Greeks eventually became the legacy of the Romans;[224] but Rome had been around for 535 years before a professional doctor was known in the city. This lack of focus on medicine was mainly due to a common belief among the semi-barbaric nations of that time that illnesses could only be cured by the intervention of higher beings. As a result, the sick would turn to their idol-worshiping priests, who would make sacrifices to the gods on their behalf and perform various magical rituals over the patient's body.
12. Sacrifices were especially offered to the gods in cases of pestilence; and, on one occasion of this kind, a temple was erected to Apollo, who was regarded as the god of physic; and, on another, Esculapius, under the form of a serpent, was conducted from Epidaurus, in Greece, and introduced, with great pomp, upon an islet in the Tiber, which was thenceforth devoted to his particular service.
12. Sacrifices were particularly made to the gods during outbreaks of disease; and during one such event, a temple was built for Apollo, who was seen as the god of healing. On another occasion, Esculapius, depicted as a serpent, was brought from Epidaurus in Greece and ceremoniously introduced on an islet in the Tiber, which became dedicated to his service from then on.
13. Archagathus, a Greek, was the first who practised physic, as an art, at Rome; and he was soon followed by many more of his professional brethren. These pioneers of medicine, however, were violently opposed by Cato the Censor, who publicly charged them with a conspiracy to poison the citizens. But the patients under their care generally recovering, he began to regard them as impious sorcerers, who counteracted the course of nature, and restored men to life by means of unholy charms.
13. Archagathus, a Greek, was the first to practice medicine as a profession in Rome; he was quickly followed by many other doctors. However, these medical pioneers faced strong opposition from Cato the Censor, who publicly accused them of plotting to poison the citizens. But since most of the patients under their care recovered, he started to view them as wicked sorcerers who disrupted nature's course and brought people back to life through unholy magic.
14. Cato having succeeded in producing a general conviction, that the practice of these physicians was calculated to enervate the constitutions, and corrupt the manners of the people, restrictions were laid upon the profession, and practitioners were even forbidden to settle at Rome. But after the people had become more vicious and luxurious, diseases became more frequent and obstinate, and physicians more necessary. The restrictions were, therefore, at length removed.[225]
14. Cato successfully convinced everyone that these doctors' practices weakened people's health and corrupted their behavior, leading to restrictions on the profession, with practitioners even prohibited from settling in Rome. However, as the population became more immoral and indulgent, diseases became more common and stubborn, making physicians increasingly necessary. Eventually, the restrictions were lifted.[225]
15. Among the Roman writers on medicine, Celsus was the first who is worthy of consideration. He has been denominated the Roman Hippocrates, because he imitated the close observation and practice of that physician. His work, as well as that of his great prototype, is read with advantage, even at the present day. He flourished at or near the time of our Saviour.
15. Among the Roman writers on medicine, Celsus is the first who deserves attention. He is often called the Roman Hippocrates because he followed the careful observation and practice of that physician. His work, like that of his great predecessor, is still beneficial to read today. He thrived around the time of our Savior.
16. In the second century of the Christian era, Galen, a Greek physician from Pergamus, and a disciple of the Alexandrian school, settled in Rome. He was learned in all branches of medicine, and wrote more copiously on the subject generally, than any other person amongst the ancients. For 1300 years, his opinions were received as oracular, wherever medicine was cultivated.
16. In the second century AD, Galen, a Greek doctor from Pergamus and a student of the Alexandrian school, moved to Rome. He was knowledgeable in all areas of medicine and wrote more extensively on the topic than anyone else in ancient times. For 1300 years, his views were accepted as authoritative wherever medicine was practiced.
17. After the destruction of the Western empire by the barbarous nations, the science of medicine was cultivated only in the Greek empire, and chiefly at Alexandria, until it began to arrest the attention of the Arabians, in the seventh century. The works of several Greek philosophers and physicians were translated into Arabic, under the patronage of the caliphs, several of whom were zealous promoters of learning.
17. After the Western empire was destroyed by barbarian nations, the field of medicine was mainly developed in the Greek empire, especially in Alexandria, until it started to gain the attention of the Arabs in the seventh century. The works of several Greek philosophers and physicians were translated into Arabic, supported by the caliphs, many of whom were enthusiastic advocates for education.
18. In the eighth century, the Caliph Almansur established, at Bagdad, a hospital for the sick, and an academy, in which, among other branches of knowledge, was taught the medical art. But it was in Spain, that Arabian learning rose to the highest point, and produced the most successful results. The University of Cordova became the most celebrated in the world, and continued to maintain its reputation for a long series of years. Arabian medicine reached its greatest eminence, in the eleventh century, under Avicenna.
18. In the eighth century, Caliph Almansur set up a hospital for the sick and an academy in Baghdad, where various fields of knowledge, including medicine, were taught. However, it was in Spain that Arabic learning truly flourished and achieved remarkable success. The University of Cordova became the most famous in the world and maintained its reputation for many years. Arabic medicine reached its peak in the eleventh century with Avicenna.
19. In the tenth century, this science began to be[226] taught in the schools of other parts of Europe; but its professors derived their knowledge of the subject from the Arabian school, or from Arabic translations of the ancient authors; and this continued to be the case, until the conquest of Constantinople by the Turks, in 1453. At this time, many erudite Greeks fled into Italy, and carried with them the ancient writings.
19. In the tenth century, this science started being[226] taught in schools across other parts of Europe; however, the teachers learned about the subject from the Arabian school or from Arabic translations of ancient texts. This situation persisted until the Turks conquered Constantinople in 1453. At that point, many educated Greeks escaped to Italy, bringing the ancient writings with them.
20. Before the general revival of this science in Europe, the cure of diseases was chiefly confided, in the western nations, to the priests and monks, who, however, generally relied more upon religious ceremonies, and the influence of sacred relics, than upon the application of medical remedies. The superstitions of those barbarous times, respecting the means of curing diseases, have not yet entirely disappeared, even from the most enlightened nations of Christendom.
20. Before this science saw a general revival in Europe, the treatment of diseases was mostly left to priests and monks in Western countries. However, they typically depended more on religious rituals and the power of sacred relics than on actual medical treatments. The superstitions from those barbaric times about curing diseases haven’t completely vanished, even in the most enlightened nations of Christendom.
21. The science of chemistry began to attract much attention about the beginning of the sixteenth century; and the many powerful medical agents which it supplied, at length produced a great change in the theory and practice of medicine. Many valuable medicines of the vegetable kind, were also obtained from America. The discovery of the circulation of the blood by William Harvey, in 1620, imparted a new impulse to medicine; but, like chemistry, it gave rise to many absurd and hurtful theories.
21. The field of chemistry started gaining a lot of interest around the early sixteenth century, and the powerful medical substances it provided eventually led to significant changes in medical theory and practice. Many useful plant-based medicines were also sourced from America. The discovery of blood circulation by William Harvey in 1620 gave medicine a fresh boost; however, like chemistry, it also sparked many silly and harmful theories.
22. Researches in different branches of medicine were continued with ardor in the seventeenth century, in various parts of Europe; and numerous discoveries of importance were made, especially in anatomy. Many theories regarding the origin of diseases, and their treatment, were proposed, advocated, and controverted; but all these were overthrown by[227] Stahl, Boerhaave, and Hoffman, three eminent theorists, in the early part of the eighteenth century.
22. Research in different areas of medicine continued passionately in the seventeenth century across various parts of Europe, leading to many important discoveries, especially in anatomy. Numerous theories about the origins of diseases and their treatments were proposed, supported, and debated; however, all these were dismissed by[227] Stahl, Boerhaave, and Hoffman, three prominent theorists, in the early eighteenth century.
23. These distinguished men were followed by others of equal celebrity, in the same century, who, in part at least, exploded the doctrines of their predecessors. The present century, above all other periods, is remarkable for men eminent in this profession; and, although all do not exactly agree in opinion, yet, guided in their conclusions by a careful observation of facts, they are less under the influence of visionary theories than physicians of former times. Besides, many of the subjects of former controversy having been satisfactorily settled, there are now fewer causes of division and excitement among the medical profession.
23. These distinguished men were followed by others of equal fame in the same century, who, at least in part, debunked the ideas of their predecessors. The current century, more than any other time, is notable for the presence of prominent individuals in this field; and, although not everyone agrees on every point, they are more focused on their conclusions being grounded in careful observation of facts rather than being swayed by fanciful theories like physicians of the past. Additionally, many of the contentious issues from earlier debates have been satisfactorily resolved, leading to fewer sources of disagreement and conflict within the medical community.
24. Medical science comprises several branches, of which the following are the principal; viz., Anatomy, Surgery, Materia Medica, Chemistry, the Theory and Practice of Physic. On these subjects, lectures are given in several colleges and universities in Europe, and in the United States. In this country, an attendance on two regular courses of lectures entitles the student to the degree of Doctor of Medicine, provided he can sustain with sufficient ability, an examination before the professors, or, as they are usually termed, the medical faculty.
24. Medical science includes several branches, the main ones being Anatomy, Surgery, Materia Medica, Chemistry, and the Theory and Practice of Medicine. Lectures on these topics are held at various colleges and universities in Europe and the United States. In this country, completing two standard lecture courses qualifies a student for the Doctor of Medicine degree, as long as they can successfully pass an examination in front of the professors, or what are commonly called the medical faculty.
25. The degree of M. D. conferred by a college or university, is a passport to practice, in every state of the Union; and, in some states, none are permitted to attend the sick, professionally, without having first obtained a diploma conferring such degree. In other states, however, no legal restrictions are imposed on the practitioners of the healing art; or, they are licensed by a board of physicians, constituted by law for the purpose.
25. The M.D. degree awarded by a college or university is a ticket to practice in every state in the U.S.; and in some states, no one is allowed to treat the sick professionally without first obtaining this degree. In other states, however, there are no legal restrictions on those practicing medicine; instead, they may be licensed by a board of physicians set up by law for this purpose.
26. The practice of this profession is generally attended with great labor, and, in many cases, with[228] much perplexity. Diseases are often stubborn or incurable, and effectually baffle the most skilful practitioner. In most cases, however, diseases are under the control of medical skill; and the high satisfaction which a benevolent physician feels, in relieving the sufferings of his fellow-creatures, may serve as a recompense for the many adverse circumstances which attend the profession.
26. Practicing this profession usually involves a lot of hard work and, in many situations, a lot of confusion. Diseases can often be tough or impossible to treat, leaving even the most skilled doctors stumped. However, most of the time, diseases can be managed with medical expertise; and the deep sense of fulfillment a caring doctor experiences when alleviating the pain of others can make up for the many challenges that come with the job.

THE CHEMIST.
1. This globe, and every thing appertaining to it, is composed of substances, which exist either in a compound or simple state. It is the object of the scientific chemist to investigate the properties of these substances, and to show their action upon each other. By this science, therefore, compound bodies are reduced to the simple elements of which they are composed, or new combinations formed.
1. This globe and everything related to it is made up of substances that exist either as compounds or in their simple form. The goal of a scientific chemist is to study the properties of these substances and demonstrate how they interact with each other. Through this science, compound materials are broken down into the simple elements they consist of, or new combinations are created.
2. According to the preceding definitions, chemistry comprehends an immense variety of objects. It is scarcely possible to name a thing or phenomenon in the natural world, to which it does not directly or indirectly apply; even the growth of vegetables, and the preparation and digestion of our food, depend upon chemical principles.[230]
2. Based on the definitions above, chemistry covers an enormous range of substances. It’s hard to think of any object or phenomenon in nature that chemistry doesn’t relate to, either directly or indirectly; even the growth of plants and how we prepare and digest our food rely on chemical principles.[230]
3. The word chemistry is supposed to be of Egyptian origin, and, in its primary application, was the same with our phrase natural philosophy. Its meaning was afterwards restricted to the art of working those metals which were most esteemed. In the third century, it came to be applied to the pretended art of transmuting baser metals into gold. The science, in the latter sense of the word, was eagerly cultivated by the Greeks; and from them it passed to the Arabians, who introduced it into Europe under the name of alchemy.
3. The term chemistry is thought to have Egyptian roots and originally referred to what we now call natural philosophy. Its meaning later narrowed to the skill of working with the most valued metals. By the third century, it became associated with the claimed ability to turn base metals into gold. This concept was passionately pursued by the Greeks, and from them, it was passed to the Arabs, who brought it to Europe under the name of alchemy.
4. The professors of the art were dignified with the appellation of alchemistic philosophers, and the leading doctrine of the sect was, that all metals are composed of the most simple substances; and that, consequently, base metals were capable of being changed into gold; hence, the chief object of their researches was the discovery of an agent, by which this great change was to be effected. The substance supposed to possess this wonderful property was called "the philosopher's stone;" the touch of which was to change every kind of metal into gold.
4. The professors of the art were honored with the title of alchemical philosophers, and the main belief of the group was that all metals are made up of the simplest substances; therefore, common metals could be transformed into gold. As a result, their primary goal was to find a substance that could bring about this significant change. The material believed to have this amazing ability was known as "the philosopher's stone," which could turn any type of metal into gold just by touching it.
5. The greatest rage for alchemy prevailed between the tenth and sixteenth centuries. The writers on this subject who appeared during that period, are very numerous, most of whom are unintelligible, except to those initiated into the art. Many of them, however, display great acuteness, and an extensive acquaintance with natural objects. They all boast, that they are in possession of the philosopher's stone, and profess the ability of communicating a knowledge of making it to others.
5. The biggest obsession with alchemy happened between the tenth and sixteenth centuries. There were a lot of writers on this topic during that time, most of whom are hard to understand unless you’re familiar with the practice. However, many of them show great insight and a deep understanding of natural objects. They all claim to have the philosopher's stone and say they can teach others how to make it.
6. Their writings and confident professions gained almost implicit credit, and many unwary persons were thus exposed to the tricks of impostors, who offered to communicate their secret for a pecuniary reward. Having obtained the sum proposed, they[231] either absconded, or wearied out their patrons with tedious and expensive processes.
6. Their writings and confident claims gained almost automatic trust, putting many unsuspecting people at risk of being scammed by con artists who promised to reveal their secrets for money. After receiving the agreed amount, they[231] either disappeared or frustrated their clients with long and costly processes.
7. Chemists, for a long time, had supposed it possible to discover, by their art, a medicine which should not only cure, but prevent all diseases, and prolong life to an indefinite period, even to immortality. This notion gradually becoming prevalent, the word chemistry acquired a more extensive application, and embraced not only the art of making gold, but also that of preparing "the universal medicine." Some of these visionary men asserted, that the philosopher's stone was this wonderful panacea.
7. For a long time, chemists believed they could find a medicine that would not only cure but also prevent all diseases and extend life indefinitely, even leading to immortality. As this idea gained popularity, the term chemistry took on a broader meaning, encompassing not just the process of making gold but also the creation of "the universal medicine." Some of these dreamers claimed that the philosopher's stone was this amazing cure-all.
8. Few readers need be informed, that the researches for the philosopher's stone, and the universal remedy, were, at length, abandoned, as fruitless and visionary; yet the numerous experiments which had been instituted on these accounts, were attended with the incidental advantage of a considerable dexterity in the performance of chemical operations, together with the discovery of many new substances and valuable facts, which, without these strong incentives, would have remained, at least, much longer in obscurity.
8. Few readers need to be told that the search for the philosopher's stone and the universal remedy was eventually given up as useless and unrealistic; however, the many experiments conducted for these purposes led to some unexpected benefits, including a significant skill in carrying out chemical processes, along with the discovery of numerous new substances and valuable information that would have remained hidden for much longer without these strong motivations.
9. Although none of the medicines, produced in the chemical laboratory, answered the chimerical expectations of the chemists, in curing all diseases, and in rendering the perishable body of man immortal, yet they proved sufficiently valuable in the healing art, to command the attention of the profession all over Europe. The adoption of chemical medicines, however, was, at first, everywhere opposed, either as unsafe remedies, or as being inferior in efficacy to those which had been used for so many centuries.
9. Even though none of the medicines created in the chemical lab met the unrealistic hopes of the chemists to cure all diseases and make the human body immortal, they still turned out to be valuable enough in medicine to catch the attention of professionals across Europe. However, the acceptance of chemical medicines faced significant opposition at first, either being viewed as unsafe or considered less effective than those that had been used for centuries.
10. These prejudices having given way to the light of experience, chemical medicines came, at length, to occupy a conspicuous place in the Materia Medica; and their value within the present century has become[232] still more manifest. One of the most useful branches of chemistry, therefore, is to make the various preparations used in the medical art.
10. These biases have given way to the clarity of experience, and chemical medicines have finally taken a prominent role in the Materia Medica; their value in the current century has become[232] even more evident. Thus, one of the most valuable areas of chemistry is creating the various preparations used in medicine.
11. The most efficient agent in the introduction of chemical medicines, was Theophilus Paracelsus. This singular individual was born near Zurich, in Switzerland. Having studied chemistry under two masters, he commenced a rambling life, in pursuit of chemical and medical knowledge; and, having visited Italy, France, and Germany, where he met with many whimsical adventures, which contributed greatly to advance his reputation, he was elected, in 1527, to fill the chair of chemistry, in the University of Basle.
11. The most effective advocate for the introduction of chemical medicines was Theophilus Paracelsus. This unique individual was born near Zurich, Switzerland. After studying chemistry under two mentors, he led a wandering life in search of chemical and medical knowledge; he traveled through Italy, France, and Germany, where he had many strange adventures that greatly boosted his reputation. In 1527, he was appointed to the chair of chemistry at the University of Basel.
12. One of the first acts of this arrogant professor was to burn, with the utmost solemnity, while seated in his chair, the works of Galen and Avicenna, declaring to his audience, that if God would not impart the secrets of physic, it was not only allowable, but even justifiable, to consult the devil. He also treated his contemporaries with the same insolence, telling them, in a preface to one of his books, that "the very down on his bald pate had more knowledge than all their writers; the buckle of his shoes more learning than Galen and Avicenna; and his beard more experience than all their universities."
12. One of the first things this arrogant professor did was solemnly burn the works of Galen and Avicenna while sitting in his chair. He told his audience that if God wouldn’t share the secrets of medicine, it wasn’t just acceptable, but even justified, to consult the devil. He also treated his contemporaries with the same disrespect, claiming in the preface of one of his books that "the very hair on his bald head had more knowledge than all their writers; the buckle of his shoes had more learning than Galen and Avicenna; and his beard had more experience than all their universities."
13. It could not be expected, that a man with such a temper could long retain his situation; and, accordingly, he was driven from it, in 1528, by a quarrel with those who had conferred the appointment. From this time, he rambled about the country, chiefly in Germany, leading a life of extreme intemperance, in the lowest company. Nevertheless, he still maintained his reputation as a physician, by the extraordinary cures occasionally effected by his powerful remedies; although his failures were equally conspicuous.
13. It was unrealistic to think that a man with such a temperament could hold his position for long; as a result, he was forced out of it in 1528 after a disagreement with those who had given him the appointment. From that point on, he wandered around the country, primarily in Germany, living a life of excessive drinking and associating with questionable people. Despite this, he still kept his reputation as a physician, thanks to the remarkable cures he occasionally achieved with his strong remedies, though his failures were just as noticeable.
14. But the most signal failure of his remedies occurred[233] in his own person; for, after having boasted for many years of possessing an elixir which would prolong life to an indefinite period, he died, in 1541, at Salzburg, with a bottle of his immortal catholicon in his pocket. The medicines on which Paracelsus chiefly relied, were opium, antimony, and various preparations of mercury. He has the merit of applying the last, especially, to cases in which they had not been before used; and upon this circumstance, his great reputation depended.
14. But his biggest failure with his remedies happened[233] to him personally; after bragging for many years about having a potion that would extend life indefinitely, he died in 1541 in Salzburg with a bottle of his so-called immortal remedy in his pocket. The medicines Paracelsus mainly relied on were opium, antimony, and different types of mercury preparations. He is credited with using mercury, in particular, for cases where it hadn't been used before, and his reputation largely rested on this.
15. We have been thus particular in noticing this individual, because he was the first who gave public lectures on chemistry in Europe, and because he gave the first great impulse in favor of chemical medicines. He also carried his speculations concerning the philosopher's stone and the universal remedy, to the greatest height of absurdity; and, by exemplifying their inutility and fallacy in his own person, he contributed more than any one else to their disrepute, and subsequent banishment from the science.
15. We've been careful to mention this individual because he was the first to give public lectures on chemistry in Europe and because he significantly promoted the use of chemical medicines. He also took his theories about the philosopher's stone and the universal remedy to the height of absurdity; by demonstrating their uselessness and falsehood through his own experiences, he did more than anyone else to discredit them and eventually remove them from the field of science.
16. Researches for the philosopher's stone, and the universal remedy, having been, at length, relinquished, the chemical facts which had been collected became, in the general estimation, a heap of rubbish of little value. At this time, there arose an individual thoroughly acquainted with these facts, and capable of perceiving the important purposes to which they might be applied.
16. After finally giving up on the search for the philosopher's stone and the universal cure, the chemical facts that had been gathered were generally seen as a worthless pile of junk. During this time, an individual emerged who was well-versed in these facts and capable of recognizing the significant ways they could be utilized.
17. The name of this individual was John Joachim Becher. He published a work in 1669, entitled "Physica Subterranica," by which he gave a new direction to chemistry, by applying it to analyzing and ascertaining the constituent parts of material bodies; and his system is the foundation of the science, as it now exists.
17. This person's name was John Joachim Becher. He published a work in 1669 called "Physica Subterranica," which gave a new direction to chemistry by applying it to the analysis and identification of the components of materials. His system is the basis of the science as we know it today.
18. George Ernest Stahl, a medical professor in the University of Halle, adopted the theory of Becher,[234] and, after his death, edited the work just mentioned; but he so simplified and improved it, that he made it entirely his own; and, accordingly, it has always been distinguished by the appellation of the Stahlian theory. The principal work of Stahl, on this subject, was published in 1729; and, since that time, chemistry has been cultivated with ardor in Germany, and in other countries in the north of Europe.
18. George Ernest Stahl, a medical professor at the University of Halle, adopted Becher's theory,[234] and after Becher's death, he edited the aforementioned work; however, he simplified and enhanced it so much that it became entirely his own. Because of this, it's always been recognized as the Stahlian theory. Stahl's main work on this topic was published in 1729; and since then, chemistry has been actively pursued in Germany and other northern European countries.
19. In France, chemistry became a fashionable study, about the middle of the eighteenth century. It had, however, been cultivated there by a few individuals, long before that period. Men of eminence now appeared in all parts of the kingdom, and discoveries in the science were made in rapid succession. Some attention was also paid to it in Italy and Spain.
19. In France, chemistry became a popular subject around the mid-eighteenth century. However, it had been studied there by a few individuals long before that time. Prominent figures began to emerge all over the country, and discoveries in the field were made quickly and frequently. Some interest in chemistry was also seen in Italy and Spain.
20. In Great Britain, this subject attracted but little attention, except from a few individuals, until Dr. Cullen had become professor of the science, in the University of Edinburgh, in 1756. This accurate investigator of natural phenomena, succeeded in enkindling an enthusiasm for chemical investigations among the students; and the subsequent experiments of Dr. Black, Mr. Cavendish, Dr. Priestley, and Lavoisier, which resulted in the discovery of the constituent parts of air and water, diffused the same ardor through every part of the kingdom.
20. In Great Britain, this topic got very little attention, except from a few people, until Dr. Cullen became a professor of the subject at the University of Edinburgh in 1756. This careful investigator of natural phenomena sparked excitement for chemical research among the students; and the later experiments conducted by Dr. Black, Mr. Cavendish, Dr. Priestley, and Lavoisier, which led to the discovery of the components of air and water, spread that same enthusiasm throughout the entire country.
21. Lavoisier, the celebrated French chemist, having proved the Stahlian theory to be incorrect, founded another on the chemical affinities and combinations of oxygen with the various substances in nature. This system has been generally adopted; since it explains a great number of phenomena more satisfactorily than any other ever proposed. The great chemical agent, in the Stahlian system, was supposed to be an inflammable substance, which was denominated by the theorist phlogiston. To distinguish, therefore, the new theory from the one which it superseded,[235] it was called the pneumatic, or anti-phlogistic system.
21. Lavoisier, the famous French chemist, proved the Stahlian theory to be wrong and established a new one based on the chemical affinities and combinations of oxygen with different substances in nature. This system has been widely accepted because it explains many phenomena more effectively than any other theory. In the Stahlian system, the main chemical agent was thought to be a flammable substance called phlogiston. To differentiate the new theory from the one it replaced,[235] it was named the pneumatic, or anti-phlogistic system.
22. In 1787, a new technical nomenclature was devised, by the aid of which all the chemical facts are easily retained in the memory. Twelve or fifteen terms have been found sufficient for the foundation of a methodical language; and, by changing the terminations of these radicals, or by prefixing certain words or syllables, the changes that take place in bodies are clearly expressed. This valuable innovation originated with Lavoisier and three other French chemists.
22. In 1787, a new technical language was created that helps people easily remember all the facts about chemistry. About twelve to fifteen terms were considered enough to form a systematic vocabulary; by modifying the endings of these root words, or by adding specific words or syllables, the changes that occur in substances are clearly articulated. This important development started with Lavoisier and three other French chemists.
23. In the present century, many important discoveries have been made in this science; and, among those who have been distinguished for their researches into its mysteries, Sir Humphrey Davy, of Great Britain, shines pre-eminent. In the United States, it has many able professors; among whom are Professors Hare and Mitchell, of Philadelphia, Torrey, Renwick, and Draper, of New-York, Henry, of Princeton, Beck, of Albany, Silliman, of New-Haven, and Johnson, of Middletown.
23. In this century, there have been many important discoveries in this field; and among those who stand out for their research into its mysteries, Sir Humphrey Davy from Great Britain is particularly notable. In the United States, there are many capable professors, including Professors Hare and Mitchell from Philadelphia, Torrey, Renwick, and Draper from New York, Henry from Princeton, Beck from Albany, Silliman from New Haven, and Johnson from Middletown.
24. Chemistry is so extensive in its application, that we will not attempt to describe any of the operations of the laboratory. We, therefore, conclude this article by recommending this science to general attention; assuring the uninitiated, that it is beset with fewer difficulties than they are apt to suppose, and that every effort in the course will be attended with interesting facts and phenomena, which will abundantly reward the labor of investigation.
24. Chemistry has such a wide range of applications that we won't try to explain any of the laboratory processes. We’ll conclude this article by encouraging everyone to pay attention to this science, assuring those who are new to it that it has fewer challenges than they might think. Every effort made in studying chemistry will lead to interesting facts and phenomena that will more than compensate for the hard work involved.

THE DRUGGIST AND APOTHECARY.
1. The druggist is a wholesale dealer in drugs, which, in commerce, embrace not only articles used or recommended by the medical profession, but also spices, dye-stuffs, and paints. The commodities of his trade are obtained from almost every quarter of the globe; but especially from the countries bordering upon the Mediterranean Sea, and from the East Indies and Spanish America.
1. The pharmacist is a wholesale seller of drugs, which, in business, includes not just items used or suggested by doctors, but also spices, dyes, and paints. The products he trades in come from nearly every part of the world, especially from the countries around the Mediterranean Sea, as well as the East Indies and Spanish America.
2. The chemist looks to the druggist for most of the materials employed in his laboratory; and from him the apothecary, physician, and country merchant, obtain their chief supply of medicines. There are, however, but few persons in the United States, who confine themselves exclusively to this branch of business; for most of the druggists are also apothecaries,[237] and sometimes operative or manufacturing chemists.
2. The chemist relies on the pharmacist for most of the materials used in his laboratory; and from him, the apothecary, doctor, and local merchant get their main supply of medicines. However, there are very few people in the United States who limit themselves solely to this line of work; most pharmacists are also apothecaries,[237] and sometimes they are operational or manufacturing chemists.
3. Medicinals, when they come into the warehouse of the druggist, are usually in a crude state; and many, or most of them, must necessarily undergo a variety of changes, of a chemical or mechanical nature, before they can be applied in practice. The art by which these changes are effected is called Pharmacy, or Pharmaceutics; and the books which treat of pharmaceutical operations are denominated Pharmacopœias, or Dispensatories.
3. Medicinal substances, when they arrive at the pharmacist’s warehouse, are typically in a raw form; and many, if not most, need to go through various chemical or mechanical changes before they can be used in practice. The skill involved in making these changes is known as Pharmacy or Pharmaceutics; and the books that cover pharmaceutical processes are referred to as Pharmacopoeias or Dispensatories.
4. The operations of Pharmacy, which depend upon chemical principles, are conducted chiefly by the operative chemist; but those which consist merely in mechanical reduction, or in mixing together different ingredients, to form compounds, belong properly to the vocation of the apothecary.
4. The work in Pharmacy, which relies on chemical principles, is mainly carried out by the operative chemist; however, tasks that involve just mechanical grinding or mixing different ingredients to create compounds are typically the responsibility of the apothecary.
5. The apothecary sells medicines in small quantities, prepared for application. Many of the standing compound preparations which have been authorized by the Pharmacopœias, and which are in regular demand, he keeps ready prepared; but a great proportion of his business consists in compounding and putting up the prescriptions of the physician, as they are needed by the patient.
5. The pharmacist sells medications in small amounts, ready for use. Many of the standard compound preparations that are approved by the Pharmacopoeias and are in constant demand are kept pre-made; however, a significant part of his work involves mixing and preparing the prescriptions from the doctor as patients need them.
6. In country places, where there are generally no apothecary-shops, the physicians compound and prepare their own prescriptions; but in cities, where these establishments are numerous, the medical profession prefer to rid themselves of this trouble. In most cases, however, they keep by them a few remedies, which can be applied in cases of emergency.
6. In rural areas, where there usually aren’t any pharmacies, doctors mix and prepare their own prescriptions. But in cities, where there are plenty of these shops, doctors prefer to avoid this hassle. However, in most cases, they keep a few medications on hand for emergencies.
7. In Great Britain, the apothecary is permitted to attend sick persons, and administer medicines either according to his own judgment, or in conformity with the directions of the physician. He is, therefore, a physician of an inferior order; and, as his fees are[238] more moderate than those of the regular profession, his practice is extensive among persons who, from necessity or inclination, are induced to study economy.
7. In Great Britain, an apothecary is allowed to care for sick individuals and provide medications either based on his own judgment or following a doctor's instructions. Therefore, he is considered a lower-level physician; and since his fees are[238] more affordable than those of licensed doctors, he has a wide practice among people who, either out of need or preference, choose to save money.
8. The apothecaries in England, Scotland, and Ireland, are obliged to make up their standing medicines according to the formulas of the Dispensatories adopted in their respective countries; and their shops are subject to the visitation of censors, who have authority to destroy those medicines which they may consider unfit for use; so that unwholesome or inefficient remedies be not imposed upon the sick. The apothecaries' halls, in France, are also under the supervision of the medical faculty.
8. The pharmacists in England, Scotland, and Ireland are required to prepare their standard medications according to the formulas from the Dispensatories used in their countries. Their shops are also inspected by censors who have the power to dispose of any medicines they deem unfit for use, ensuring that ineffective or unsafe remedies are not given to the sick. The pharmacists' facilities in France are similarly overseen by the medical faculty.
9. In the United States, there is no censorship of this kind established by the public authorities; yet the physicians are careful to recommend apothecaries, in whom they have confidence, to prepare their prescriptions. The professors in our medical schools are, also, particular in naming to their students those druggists whom they consider men of honor; and omit, at least, to name those who have been detected in selling adulterated medicines.
9. In the United States, there’s no censorship of this type enforced by the government; however, doctors are careful to recommend trustworthy pharmacists to fill their prescriptions. The professors in our medical schools are also specific about pointing out to their students which druggists they see as reputable and avoid mentioning those who have been caught selling fake medicines.
10. We have, also, an incorporated college of pharmacy both in New-York and Philadelphia, and in each of these, chemical and pharmaceutical lectures are delivered by regular professors. These institutions, although of recent origin, have exerted an important influence in reforming and preventing abuses in the preparation of medicines; and public opinion, especially in the cities, is beginning to render it important for students in pharmacy to obtain a degree from one of these colleges. Under the auspices of the institution at Philadelphia, is published a quarterly journal, devoted to pharmaceutical science.
10. We also have a recognized college of pharmacy in both New York and Philadelphia, where regular professors deliver lectures on chemistry and pharmacy. Although these institutions are relatively new, they have had a significant impact on improving and preventing issues in medicine preparation. Public opinion, especially in urban areas, is starting to make it essential for pharmacy students to earn a degree from one of these colleges. Under the support of the institution in Philadelphia, a quarterly journal focused on pharmaceutical science is published.
11. A Pharmacopœia for the United States was formed at Washington, in 1820, by a delegation of physicians from the principal medical societies of the[239] Union. A revision of this work is expected to be made every ten years. Dispensatories, as they exist in this country, are founded upon the Pharmacopœias, and may be properly considered commentaries upon them, since the former contain the whole of the latter, together with more minute descriptions of the sensible and real properties of the medicines, as well as their history and exact mode of preparation.
11. A Pharmacopoeia for the United States was created in Washington in 1820 by a group of doctors from the main medical societies of the[239] Union. This work is expected to be updated every ten years. Dispensatories, as they are found in this country, are based on the Pharmacopoeias and can be seen as commentaries on them, since they include everything in the Pharmacopoeias along with more detailed descriptions of the actual and observable properties of the medicines, their history, and the exact methods of preparation.

THE DENTIST.
1. The human family is subject to a variety of diseases in the teeth, which generally cause the final destruction or loss of these important instruments, unless judicious remedies are applied in proper season. These remedies are administered by the dentist.
1. The human family is prone to different dental diseases, which usually lead to the eventual damage or loss of these important tools, unless appropriate treatments are applied in a timely manner. These treatments are provided by the dentist.
2. There are few persons, in proportion to the great mass of the people, who seem to be aware of the utility of dentistry; for, taking the United States together, not more than one person in a hundred ever resorts to the professors of this art, with the view of obtaining a remedy for any dental disease with which he may be afflicted. The common sentiment seems to be, that diseases of the teeth, and their final loss, at different periods of life, are inevitable inconveniences,[241] to which we must submit with the same philosophy with which we meet other misfortunes.
2. There are few people, compared to the large number of the population, who seem to recognize the value of dentistry; because, looking at the United States as a whole, only about one in a hundred individuals ever visits a dentist to get treatment for any dental issue they may have. The general attitude appears to be that dental diseases and losing teeth at different stages of life are unavoidable inconveniences,[241] which we must accept with the same mindset we use to deal with other difficulties.
3. To enable readers who have never examined this subject, to comprehend its general nature, we will give a slight sketch of some of the irregularities and diseases to which the teeth are liable, and, as we proceed, speak of the remedies applied by the dentist.
3. To help readers who have never looked into this topic understand its basic nature, we will provide a brief overview of some of the problems and diseases that can affect the teeth, and as we go along, we'll discuss the treatments used by dentists.
4. Two sets of teeth regularly appear, at different periods of life; one in infancy, and the other, at a later period. The first set consists of twenty, and the second of thirty-two teeth; the former are called infant, and the latter adult; and all these, at the age of six or seven, are upon the jaws at the same time.
4. Two sets of teeth emerge at different stages of life: one during infancy and the other later on. The first set has twenty teeth, and the second has thirty-two. The first set is known as infant teeth, while the second is referred to as adult teeth; by the age of six or seven, all these teeth are present in the jaws simultaneously.
5. At the age just mentioned, the infant teeth begin to give way to those which lie deeper in the sockets, and which are designed to supersede the former. As the new teeth advance, the roots of the first are absorbed; and, after having been thus deprived of their support, they are easily removed; sometimes, by a slight pressure of the tongue.
5. At the age just mentioned, baby teeth start to be replaced by the permanent ones that are positioned deeper in the gums. As the new teeth come in, the roots of the baby teeth dissolve; and after losing their support, they can be easily pushed out, sometimes with just a gentle press of the tongue.
6. In a majority of cases, the whole process is carried on by nature with the utmost regularity; but, as she is not uniformly successful in this operation, there is no other period at which the teeth of children require so much attention and care. Sometimes the second set rise in the socket without causing the absorption of the roots of the first. In such cases, the former approach in an improper direction; and, unless the latter are removed in season, deformity will be the consequence.
6. In most cases, the entire process happens naturally and quite regularly; however, since nature doesn’t always succeed in this process, there’s no other time when children’s teeth need as much attention and care. Sometimes, the second set comes in while the roots of the first set haven’t dissolved. In these cases, the first set may grow in the wrong direction, and if they aren’t removed in time, deformity will be the result.
7. When, however, these precautions have been neglected, and the teeth stand in an irregular manner, they can sometimes be reduced to symmetry by the dentist, without occasioning much pain. When the front teeth are too much crowded by reason of the restricted dimensions of the jaw, the small teeth, situated[242] next behind the eye, or canine teeth, are extracted, one on each side, to give room to the rest.
7. However, when these precautions are ignored and the teeth are irregular, a dentist can sometimes realign them with minimal discomfort. If the front teeth are overcrowded due to a small jaw, the small teeth located[242] right behind the eye, or canine teeth, are removed—one from each side—to make space for the others.
8. From the ages of six to fifteen years, the teeth of children should be examined, at least once in six months, by a dentist, who, if skilful, can seldom fail of rendering these ornaments of the human countenance regular, healthy, and beautiful. It is customary in England and France, for the proprietors of seminaries of learning to employ a dentist to visit their establishments regularly, for the purpose of performing such operations, and of administering such remedies, as their pupils may require.
8. From the ages of six to fifteen, children's teeth should be checked by a dentist at least once every six months. A skilled dentist can usually keep these features of the human face looking straight, healthy, and attractive. In England and France, it's common for schools to hire a dentist to visit regularly to perform any necessary procedures and provide treatments for their students.
9. The teeth are composed of very hard bone and enamel. The latter is a substance exceeding in density any other in the body. It covers the crown of the teeth, and is thickest in those parts which are most exposed to forcible contact in mastication; but, in no place, is it more than the twelfth of an inch in thickness.
9. The teeth are made up of very hard bone and enamel. The enamel is denser than any other substance in the body. It covers the crown of the teeth and is thickest in the areas that experience the most force while chewing, but it never exceeds a thickness of more than one-twelfth of an inch.
10. The most common disease of the teeth is caries, or decay, and almost every part of them is liable to be affected by it, but especially the sides of those in front, and the crowns of those on other parts of the jaws.
10. The most common dental disease is cavities, or decay, and almost every part of the teeth can be affected by it, especially the sides of the front teeth and the tops of the teeth in other areas of the jaws.
11. The disease begins its attack either on the enamel or on the bony portion, and gradually extends itself over the tooth, until it reaches the nerves which supply its natural cavity. These having become exposed to the sudden changes of temperature, and to the contact of extraneous substances in mastication, pain and inflammation are produced, and the extraction of the tooth very commonly becomes the only means of relief.
11. The disease starts by attacking either the enamel or the bony part of the tooth, and slowly spreads across the tooth until it affects the nerves in the pulp. Once these nerves are exposed to sudden temperature changes and the contact of foreign substances while chewing, it leads to pain and inflammation, often making tooth extraction the only relief option.
12. All persons are more or less subject to this disease, but some much more than others; and caries of a peculiar character has been so often traced through whole families, from one generation to another,[243] that it is considered hereditary, as much as any other disease to which the system is liable. In many cases, caries seems to be the effect of some serious disease which affected the constitution, while the teeth were in the early stages of formation.
12. Everyone can be affected by this disease, but some are much more susceptible than others; a specific type of tooth decay has often been seen passed down through families from one generation to the next,[243] making it seen as hereditary, just like any other disease that can affect the body. In many instances, tooth decay appears to result from a serious illness that impacted the body while the teeth were still forming.
13. Although the teeth of some individuals possess but little durability, and, when caries attacks them, go on rapidly to decay, in spite of all the aid which science and skill can afford, yet, there are comparatively but few instances in which seasonable and judicious treatment will not arrest the progress of the disease.
13. Even though some people's teeth aren't very durable and decay quickly when they get cavities, no matter how much help science and skill can provide, there are still relatively few cases where timely and thoughtful treatment won't stop the disease from getting worse.
14. When the teeth are but slightly affected with caries, especially on the sides, a cure may be accomplished by the removal of the decayed portion. This is effected, by the most approved dentists, chiefly with small cutting instruments. Formerly, the file and the saw were employed for this purpose; and, by their indiscriminate and injudicious use, many teeth were ruined, and the art of dentistry itself brought into disrepute.
14. When the teeth are only a bit affected by cavities, especially on the sides, a treatment can be done by removing the decayed part. The best dentists usually do this using small cutting tools. In the past, a file and a saw were used for this purpose, and their careless and improper use led to many teeth being damaged and made dentistry itself look bad.
15. Notwithstanding the injuries which have been inflicted by the improper application of the saw and file, in some instances they are indispensable; and, in the hands of the scientific operator, they need not be feared. They are especially useful in preparing the way for the employment of other instruments; for, in some cases, the affected part can with difficulty be reached by any other means. But filing the teeth for the purpose of improving their appearance, or for rendering the sides more accessible to the tooth-pick and brush, seems to be reprobated by the most intelligent part of the profession.
15. Despite the damage that can occur from using the saw and file incorrectly, in some situations they are essential; and when used by a skilled professional, there's no need to worry. They are particularly helpful in getting ready to use other tools, as sometimes the area in question is hard to access with anything else. However, filing the teeth to improve their appearance or to make the sides easier to clean with a toothpick and brush is generally frowned upon by the more knowledgeable members of the profession.
16. When the caries has penetrated far into the tooth, and, in its removal, a cavity of suitable form and dimensions can be produced, it is filled with some substance, with the view of protecting the bone from[244] the action of extraneous agents. The dentist is careful to remove every particle of the decayed portion, and to render the cavity perfectly dry by repeated applications of lint or raw cotton, before he attempts to fill it.
16. When the decay has gone deep into the tooth, and a properly shaped cavity can be created during its removal, it gets filled with a material to protect the tooth from[244] outside influences. The dentist makes sure to eliminate every bit of the decayed part and dries the cavity thoroughly with repeated uses of lint or raw cotton before attempting to fill it.
17. Gold is the only substance which possesses sufficient solidity to withstand the ordinary friction of mastication, and which, at the same time, is capable of resisting the chemical action of the substances that come in contact with it; yet lead and tin are frequently employed; and many have been made to believe that they answer as good, if not a better purpose, than gold itself. The durability of these metals, however, can never be depended upon, and they ought not to be employed, where the tooth is capable of resisting the mechanical force required to fill it properly with gold.
17. Gold is the only material that is solid enough to handle the normal wear from chewing, and is also able to resist the chemical reactions with other substances it comes into contact with. Yet, lead and tin are often used, and many people have been led to believe that they work just as well, if not better, than gold itself. However, the durability of these metals can never be trusted, and they shouldn’t be used when the tooth can handle the mechanical force needed to properly fill it with gold.
18. The metal is prepared for the use of the dentist by the gold-beater, in the manner described in the article which treats upon the business of the latter. The leaves, however, are not beaten so thin as those designed for the common purposes of the arts. The portion to be applied is cut from the leaf, and, after having been twisted a little, is forced into the cavity. The metal is rendered perfectly solid by means of instruments adapted to the purpose.
18. The metal is prepared for the dentist by the gold-beater, as explained in the section about that profession. However, the leaves aren't beaten as thin as those meant for typical artistic uses. The piece that will be used is cut from the leaf and, after being twisted a bit, is pressed into the cavity. Special instruments make the metal completely solid.
19. This operation, properly performed under favorable circumstances, generally renders the tooth as serviceable, to the end of life, as if it had never been diseased. The hopes of the patient, however, are sometimes disappointed by the unskilfulness of the operator, or by the general unhealthiness of the mouth, arising from tartar, other decayed teeth, or want of care in keeping them free from the lodgment of particles of food.
19. When done correctly in the right conditions, this procedure usually makes the tooth as usable for life as if it had never been unhealthy. However, patients' hopes can be dashed by the operator’s lack of skill or by overall poor mouth health caused by tartar, other decayed teeth, or neglect in keeping the teeth clean of food particles.
20. It is a common practice to have teeth extracted, when they are affected with pain; but this operation[245] is not always necessary. In many cases, the nerve can be paralyzed, and the tooth plugged. By these means, teeth which, under the ordinary treatment, would be prematurely sacrificed, are often retained, for years, in a serviceable state.
20. It's common to have teeth pulled when they're painful, but this isn’t always needed. In many situations, the nerve can be numbed, and the tooth can be filled. This way, teeth that would usually be taken out can often be kept in good condition for years.
21. The next most destructive affection to which the teeth are liable, is the accumulation of tartar. This is an earthy substance, deposited from the saliva, and is more or less abundant in different individuals. This deposit is extremely troublesome, and generally does much injury to the mouth, even before those who suffer from it are aware of the mischief.
21. The next most harmful issue that the teeth face is the buildup of tartar. This is a mineral substance that comes from saliva and varies in amount from person to person. This buildup is really bothersome and usually causes significant damage to the mouth, often before those affected even realize the problem.
22. The tartar on the teeth of some individuals, is of a black or greenish color, and very hard; on those of others, brown or yellow, and not so firm. When it is first deposited, it is soft, and can be easily removed with a tooth-brush; but, if suffered to remain, it soon becomes indurated, and gradually increases in thickness about the neck of the teeth. The gums become irritated and inflamed. The sockets are next absorbed, and the teeth, being left without their natural support, either fall out, or become so loose, that they can be easily removed.
22. The tartar on some people’s teeth is black or greenish and very hard; on others, it’s brown or yellow and not as firm. When it first builds up, it’s soft and can be easily brushed off; but if it’s left, it soon hardens and gradually thickens around the necks of the teeth. The gums get irritated and inflamed. Eventually, the sockets are absorbed, and the teeth, lacking their natural support, either fall out or become so loose that they can be easily removed.
23. From this cause, old people lose their teeth, when, in many cases, they are perfectly sound; but comparatively very few are aware of the origin of this deprivation, or suppose that these valuable instruments can be retained in old age. The loss is attributed to the deleterious effects of calomel, or is imagined to be an evil inseparable from advanced age.
23. Because of this, older people lose their teeth, even when they are perfectly healthy in many cases; however, very few realize the reason for this loss or believe that these valuable tools can be kept in old age. The loss is blamed on the harmful effects of calomel, or it’s thought to be a problem that comes with getting older.
24. The affection of the gums, arising from causes just mentioned, is frequently called scurvy, and, like caries, produces fetor of the breath; but, when these two diseases are combined, as is frequently the case, they render it extremely offensive. Besides, the effluvia arising from these diseased parts give rise to[246] many maladies which terminate fatally, if a remedy is not applied sufficiently early to save the patient.
24. Gum disease, caused by the factors mentioned earlier, is often referred to as scurvy and, like tooth decay, can result in bad breath; however, when these two conditions occur together, which is often the case, they can create a very unpleasant odor. Additionally, the odors from these affected areas can lead to[246] various illnesses that can be deadly if a remedy is not administered in time to save the patient.
25. The obvious remedy for diseases arising from tartar, is the removal of their cause. This is effected by the dentist, with small sharp cutting instruments of a suitable form. To prevent the tartar from accumulating again, and to restore the gums to a healthy state, nothing more is generally requisite than the daily use of a stiff, elastic brush, and the occasional application of some approved dentrifice or astringent wash. Sometimes it may be necessary to scarify the gums, or to apply leeches to them.
25. The clear solution for problems caused by tartar is to remove the source. This is done by the dentist using small, sharp cutting tools designed for the task. To stop tartar from building up again and to bring the gums back to a healthy condition, all that's usually needed is to use a stiff, flexible brush daily, along with the occasional use of a recommended toothpaste or astringent rinse. Sometimes, it might be necessary to make small cuts in the gums or to use leeches.
26. The operations of dentistry, mentioned in the preceding part of this article, are those which relate to the preservation of the teeth; and, if performed in a proper manner, and under favorable circumstances, they will, in most instances, prove effectual. But, as few persons resort to the dentist, until the near approach of deformity, or until they are impelled by pain to seek relief, a great proportion of dental operations consists in inserting artificial teeth, and in extracting those which are past recovery.
26. The dental procedures discussed earlier in this article focus on keeping teeth healthy; if done correctly and in good conditions, they will usually be effective. However, since most people only visit the dentist when they notice a problem or when pain drives them to seek help, a large percentage of dental work involves placing artificial teeth and removing those that can no longer be saved.
27. When a tooth has gone so far to decay, that it cannot be cured by stopping, it should not be suffered to remain in the mouth, lest it infect the rest. Front teeth, however, when the roots remain sound, and firmly based in the sockets, ought not to be extracted, as upon the latter artificial teeth can be placed with great advantage. In such cases, the removal of the crown only is necessary.
27. When a tooth has decayed to the point where it can't be fixed with a filling, it shouldn't be left in the mouth, as it might infect the others. However, front teeth, when the roots are healthy and securely anchored in the sockets, shouldn't be removed, because artificial teeth can be effectively placed on them. In these cases, only the crown needs to be taken out.
28. The instruments commonly employed in extracting teeth, are the key, or turnkey, the forceps, the hook, and the graver, or punch. These are supposed to be sufficient to perform all the operations of this kind which occur in practice; and, although many attempts have been made to invent others which might answer a better purpose, yet those we[247] have mentioned, in their improved state, are likely to continue in general use.
28. The tools usually used for tooth extraction are the key, or turnkey, the forceps, the hook, and the graver, or punch. These are considered adequate for all the dental procedures that come up in practice. Even though there have been many attempts to create other tools that might work better, the ones we[247] mentioned, in their updated versions, are likely to remain in common use.
29. It seems to be a common opinion, that any one can pull teeth, who has a turnkey, and sufficient physical strength to use it; accordingly, blacksmiths, barbers, and medical students, are the chief operators in this line of dental surgery. The many fatal accidents which must inevitably be the consequence, such as breaking the tooth or jaw-bone, are considered matters of course. These, however, seldom happen with skilful dentists; and it is to be regretted, that the latter are not always employed, where unskilfulness may produce such serious consequences.
29. It seems like a common belief that anyone can pull teeth if they have a pair of pliers and enough strength to use them; as a result, blacksmiths, barbers, and medical students are the main people doing this type of dental work. The many serious accidents that can happen, like breaking a tooth or jawbone, are just seen as normal. However, these issues rarely occur with skilled dentists, and it's unfortunate that they aren't always the ones doing the job when lack of skill can lead to such serious problems.
30. In the cut, at the head of this article, is represented a dentist, about to extract a tooth for a lady, who may be supposed to be in a state of alarm at the sight of the instruments; but he, having thrown his right hand, which holds them, behind him, shows the other containing nothing, with the view of allaying her fears. The manner in which teeth are extracted, needs no description, since it is an every-day operation in all parts of the world.
30. In the illustration at the top of this article, there's a dentist about to pull a tooth for a woman, who seems to be frightened by the sight of the tools. However, he has moved his right hand, which is holding the instruments, behind him to reveal his empty left hand, trying to calm her nerves. The way teeth are pulled doesn’t need explaining, as it’s a common procedure everywhere.
31. One of the chief sources of income to this profession, is the insertion of artificial teeth; for, although few are willing to expend much to prevent the loss of their teeth, many will incur great expense in supplying the deficiencies, after they have occurred. So perfectly and neatly is this operation performed, by some dentists, that it is difficult to distinguish between teeth which are natural, and those which are artificial.
31. One of the main sources of income for this profession is the placement of artificial teeth; because while not many are willing to spend a lot to avoid losing their teeth, many will spend a significant amount to replace them after they've been lost. Some dentists perform this procedure so skillfully and neatly that it can be hard to tell the difference between natural teeth and artificial ones.
32. The materials for artificial teeth were formerly found chiefly in the teeth and tusks of the hippopotamus, and in the teeth of some domestic animals; but, within a few years, a mineral composition, called porcelain, has come into great repute, since it is very beautiful, and is entirely proof against the most powerful acids.[248]
32. The materials used for artificial teeth were mainly sourced from the teeth and tusks of hippopotamuses and some domestic animals. However, in recent years, a mineral composition known as porcelain has gained popularity because it looks great and is completely resistant to even the strongest acids.[248]
33. Surgical operations upon the teeth were performed in ancient Greece and Rome, many of which were similar to those of the present day. The extraction of teeth must have been practised at a period of antiquity to which the records of medicine do not reach. The operation is recommended by Hippocrates, who describes many of the diseases to which the teeth are liable. He also mentions the practice of fixing the teeth by means of gold wire, and gives several formulas for making dentrifices.
33. Surgical procedures on teeth were conducted in ancient Greece and Rome, many of which resembled those we use today. Tooth extraction must have been common long before recorded medical history. Hippocrates recommends the procedure and describes various dental diseases. He also discusses the technique of securing teeth using gold wire and provides several recipes for making toothpaste.
34. Celsus, a Roman writer on medicine, who flourished about the beginning of the Christian era, seems to have been the first author who described the method of extracting teeth, and the first who notices the removal of tartar by means of cutting instruments, as well as filling carious teeth with lead and other substances, with the view of preventing further decay. Soon after this period, false teeth, of bone and ivory, were introduced. Actius, a writer of the fourth century, is the first who mentions the operation of filing the teeth.
34. Celsus, a Roman medical writer active around the beginning of the Christian era, appears to be the first author to describe how to extract teeth and the first to mention using cutting tools to remove tartar. He also noted the practice of filling decayed teeth with lead and other materials to prevent further decay. Shortly after this time, artificial teeth made of bone and ivory were introduced. Actius, a writer from the fourth century, is the first to mention the process of filing teeth.
35. The return of barbarism to Europe, nearly extinguished the knowledge of dentistry. As a branch of surgery, however, it was revived by the Arabian writer, Albucasis, in the tenth century; but, for many hundred years after this period, it received but little attention from men of science, the operations of surgery being confined chiefly to the barbers.
35. The return of barbarism to Europe almost wiped out the knowledge of dentistry. However, as a part of surgery, it was revived by the Arab writer, Albucasis, in the tenth century; but for many centuries after that, it didn’t get much attention from scientists, with surgical procedures mainly handled by barbers.
36. The first modern work on the diseases of the teeth was published at Lyons, in 1581. This was followed by many other publications on the same subject, in the succeeding century. In the year 1700, it began to be required in France, that all persons who intended to practise dentistry in that country, should undergo an examination, to test their qualifications. From this period is dated the establishment of the dental art as a distinct branch of medical practice.
36. The first modern book on dental diseases was published in Lyons in 1581. This was followed by many other publications on the same topic in the next century. In 1700, France started requiring that anyone who wanted to practice dentistry must pass an exam to demonstrate their qualifications. This marks the beginning of dentistry as a separate field of medical practice.

THE TEACHER.
1. Education, in antiquity, was entirely a matter of domestic concern. In countries where priestly or royal despotism prevailed, schools for the benefit of the sons of the great, and for the priests, were established. Moses, the Jewish lawgiver, was educated in a priestly school in Egypt, and Cyrus, at a seminary belonging to the Persian court. In Palestine, the Scriptures were taught in the schools of the prophets; and, at later periods, in the synagogues, and in the schools of the Rabbis, reading, committing to memory the sacred books, and hearing explanations of their meaning, constituted the chief exercises.
1. In ancient times, education was purely a family matter. In places where religious or royal control was strong, schools were created for the benefit of the wealthy and for priests. Moses, the Jewish lawgiver, was educated at a priestly school in Egypt, while Cyrus studied at a seminary associated with the Persian court. In Palestine, the Scriptures were taught in the schools of the prophets; later on, in synagogues and in the schools of the Rabbis, the main activities involved reading, memorizing the sacred texts, and listening to interpretations of their meanings.
2. In the Grecian cities, boys and girls were taught reading, writing, and arithmetic in private schools; and, after having completed the primary course, those[250] who aspired to higher degrees of knowledge, resorted to the instructions of the philosophers and sophists. This system was commenced as early as 500 years before the advent of Christ.
2. In Greek cities, boys and girls were taught reading, writing, and math in private schools; and after finishing the primary course, those[250] who wanted to gain more knowledge turned to the teachings of philosophers and sophists. This system started as early as 500 years before Christ.
3. Two hundred years after this period, the Romans began to have primary schools for boys, in the cities; and, from the time of Julius Cæsar, who conferred on teachers the right of citizenship, they possessed the higher institutions of the grammarians and the rhetoricians. In the former of these, were taught the Latin and Greek languages; and in the latter, young men of talent were prepared, by exercises in declamation, for speaking in public.
3. Two hundred years after this time, the Romans started having primary schools for boys in the cities. From the time of Julius Caesar, who granted teachers the right to citizenship, they had access to advanced institutions for grammar and rhetoric. In the grammar schools, students learned Latin and Greek, while in the rhetoric schools, talented young men practiced declamation to get ready for public speaking.
4. Children, among the Greeks and Romans, were accompanied to school by slaves, who, from the performance of this duty, were called pedagogues; but, after slaves and freedmen had made acquirements in literature and science, they were frequently employed as tutors; hence the term, at length, came to imply a teacher of children, and it is still used in reference to this employment, although we usually connect with it the idea of pedantry.
4. In ancient Greece and Rome, children were taken to school by slaves, who were known as pedagogues because of this role. However, once slaves and freedmen gained knowledge in literature and science, they often became tutors. Over time, the term evolved to mean a teacher of children, and it’s still used today in that context, although we often associate it with a sense of pedantry.
5. Until the time of Vespasian, who commenced his reign in the year 70 of the Christian era, the schools were sustained entirely by private enterprise. That emperor instituted public professorships of grammar and rhetoric with fixed salaries, for the purpose of educating young men for the public service; and, in A.D. 150, Antoninus Pius founded imperial schools in the larger cities of the Roman empire. The most celebrated place for the cultivation of science, in the ancient world, was Athens; and, to this city, students from all parts of Europe resorted, even as late as the ninth century.
5. Up until Vespasian, who began his reign in 70 AD, schools were completely funded by private efforts. That emperor established public teaching positions for grammar and rhetoric with set salaries to educate young men for government jobs. Then, in AD 150, Antoninus Pius created imperial schools in the bigger cities of the Roman Empire. The most renowned center for learning in the ancient world was Athens, and students from all over Europe traveled there, even as late as the ninth century.
6. Christianity, by degrees, gave a new turn to education; and, in the East, it came gradually under the influence of the clergy. Schools were instituted[251] in the cities and villages for catechumens, and, in some places, those of a higher grade, for the education of clergymen. Of the latter kind, that in Alexandria was the most flourishing, from the second to the fourth century.
6. Christianity gradually changed the direction of education; and in the East, it slowly came under the influence of the clergy. Schools were established[251] in cities and villages for catechumens, and in some areas, there were higher-level schools for training clergymen. Among these, the one in Alexandria thrived the most from the second to the fourth century.
7. From the fifth century, these higher institutions began to decline, and others, called cathedral or episcopal schools, seem to have taken their place. In these, besides theology, were taught the seven liberal arts—grammar, logic, rhetoric, arithmetic, geometry, astronomy, and music; of which the three first were called the trivium, and the four last the quadrivium. The text-book employed was the Encyclopædia of Marcianus Capella, of Africa. This compendium was published at Rome, A.D. 470; and, although a meagre production, it maintained its reputation in the schools of Europe more than 1000 years.
7. Starting in the fifth century, these higher institutions began to decline, and others, known as cathedral or episcopal schools, seemed to take their place. In these schools, in addition to theology, the seven liberal arts were taught—grammar, logic, rhetoric, arithmetic, geometry, astronomy, and music; the first three were called the trivium, and the last four the quadrivium. The textbook used was the Encyclopædia of Marcianus Capella from Africa. This compendium was published in Rome around A.D. 470, and although it was a limited work, it remained influential in European schools for over 1000 years.
8. The imperial schools established by Antoninus Pius, declined, and finally became extinct, in the confusion that followed the irruption of the barbarians; but their places were supplied by the parochial and cathedral schools just mentioned. These, however, were surpassed, in the sixth century, by the conventual schools, which were originally designed to prepare persons for the monastic life, but which soon began to be resorted to by laymen.
8. The imperial schools set up by Antoninus Pius declined and eventually disappeared amid the chaos that followed the invasion of the barbarians; however, they were replaced by the local and cathedral schools that were just mentioned. These, however, were outdone in the sixth century by the conventual schools, which were originally meant to train people for monastic life, but soon started to be used by non-clerics as well.
9. These schools were connected with the convents belonging to the order of St. Benedict, and served as the chief glimmering lights during the darkest period between ancient and modern civilization, in Europe. They flourished in Ireland, England, France, and Germany, from the sixth to the eleventh century. The teachers of these seminaries were called scholastici, and from them the scholastic philosophy derived its origin and name.
9. These schools were linked to the convents of the order of St. Benedict and acted as the main shining lights during the darkest times between ancient and modern civilization in Europe. They thrived in Ireland, England, France, and Germany from the sixth to the eleventh century. The teachers at these seminaries were known as scholastici, and scholastic philosophy got its origin and name from them.
10. In the year 789, Charlemagne, king of the Franks, issued a decree for the improvement of the[252] schools of his empire, and for increasing their number. Not only every bishop's see and every convent, but every parish, was to have its school; the two former for the education of clergymen and public officers, and the latter for the lower classes of people. This monarch instituted an academy of learned men, to whom he himself resorted for instruction, and whom he employed to educate his children, and a select number of the sons of the nobility and distinguished persons.
10. In the year 789, Charlemagne, king of the Franks, issued a decree to improve the[252] schools in his empire and to increase their number. Not only every bishopric and convent, but also every parish was required to have its own school; the first two for the education of clergymen and public officials, and the last for the lower classes. This king established an academy of scholars, whom he turned to for education, and he employed them to teach his children along with a select group of noble sons and notable individuals.
11. The encouragement which these schools had received from government was soon discontinued after the death of this monarch, and his school establishment declined like that of Alfred the Great, which was commenced in the ninth century, on a scale of equal liberality. The designs of the English monarch were frustrated by the invasions of the Danes.
11. The support these schools had gotten from the government was quickly cut off after the death of this king, and his school initiative fell apart just like Alfred the Great's, which started in the ninth century, with similar generosity. The English king's plans were disrupted by the invasions of the Danes.
12. In the mean time, the Jewish rabbis had schools in Syria and in Northern Africa, as well as in Europe, which contributed to the preservation of ancient learning. Arabian schools were also established, in the ninth century, by the followers of Mohammed, in their Eastern and African caliphates, and in their Moorish dominions in Spain. Through these institutions, the mathematical and medical sciences were again revived in Europe.
12. In the meantime, the Jewish rabbis had schools in Syria and Northern Africa, as well as in Europe, which helped preserve ancient knowledge. Arabian schools were also set up in the ninth century by the followers of Mohammed in their Eastern and African caliphates, and in their Moorish territories in Spain. These institutions helped to revive the mathematical and medical sciences in Europe once again.
13. The cathedral and conventual schools continued, for a long time, the principal institutions for education in Europe; and from them proceeded many eminent men. By degrees the light of science began to shine more brightly; teachers of eminence appeared in different places, who collected around them a great number of scholars; and a new kind of schools arose, the heads of which assumed the name of rectores.
13. The cathedral and convent schools remained the main educational institutions in Europe for a long time, and many notable figures emerged from them. Gradually, the light of science began to shine brighter; distinguished teachers appeared in various places, gathering many students around them, and a new type of school emerged, led by individuals who called themselves rectores.
14. In Paris, several of these teachers gave instructions in various branches, but chiefly in rhetoric,[253] philosophy, and theology. The schools thus collected under different masters, were, in 1206, united under one rector; and, on this account, the whole mass of teachers and scholars was denominated universitas. Universities, in other parts of Europe, arose in a similar manner, and some of them, about the same time. Those of Oxford and Cambridge, according to some writers, were established about the year 1200; and the two first of these institutions in Germany were founded at Prague and Vienna, the former in 1348, and the latter in 1365.
14. In Paris, several of these teachers offered lessons in different subjects, primarily in rhetoric, philosophy, and theology. The schools, led by different masters, came together in 1206 under one rector; because of this, the entire group of teachers and students was called universitas. Universities in other parts of Europe developed in a similar way, with some emerging around the same time. According to some sources, Oxford and Cambridge were established around the year 1200, while the first two universities in Germany were founded in Prague and Vienna, the former in 1348 and the latter in 1365.
15. The division of the students into four nations was an essential feature in the early universities. It arose from the circumstance that the pupils coming from different countries, spoke different languages. Those whose language was the same or similar, would naturally associate together, and attend the instructions of the same teachers. This division into nations is supposed to have grown up at Paris, previous to the formal union of the several schools under one rector.
15. The grouping of students into four nations was a key aspect of the early universities. It came about because students from different countries spoke different languages. Those who spoke the same or similar languages naturally grouped together and attended the same classes. This division into nations is believed to have originated in Paris, before the formal unification of the various schools under one rector.
16. The first teachers, from whose exertions the universities originated, commenced their public instructions without permission from established authority. Subsequently, the state and university were careful to prevent all persons from giving lectures, who were not well qualified for the employment. Examinations were therefore instituted to determine the capabilities of students. Those who were found competent, received a formal permission to teach, accompanied with certain symbols in the spirit of the age.
16. The first teachers, from whose efforts universities developed, started teaching publicly without any formal approval from those in power. Later, the state and universities made sure to stop anyone who wasn't properly qualified from giving lectures. Exams were created to assess students' abilities. Those deemed capable received official permission to teach, along with certain symbols reflecting the current trends.
17. The first academical degree was that of baccalaureus, the second, licentiatus; and the third magister. The last of these entitled the student to all the privileges of his former teachers, and constituted him one of the facultas artium—the faculty of the seven liberal arts, since called the philosophic faculty. The[254] other faculties were those of theology, law, and medicine. The first of these was instituted at Paris in 1259, and the two last, in 1260. The faculties elected deans from among their number, who, with the procuratores, or heads of the four nations of students, represented the university. These representatives possessed the power of conferring degrees in the different departments of literature and science.
17. The first academic degree was the baccalaureus, the second was licentiatus, and the third was magister. The last of these granted the student all the privileges of their previous teachers and made them a part of the arts faculty—the faculty of the seven liberal arts, which is now known as the philosophical faculty. The[254] other faculties were theology, law, and medicine. The theology faculty was established in Paris in 1259, followed by the law and medicine faculties in 1260. The faculties elected deans from among their members, who, along with the procuratores, or heads of the four nations of students, represented the university. These representatives had the authority to confer degrees in various fields of literature and science.
18. Among the public institutions of the early universities were the colleges, (collegia,) buildings in which students, especially those who were poor, might live together, under superintendents, without paying for their lodging. In some cases, they received their board, and frequently other allowances, gratis. These institutions were commenced at Paris; but here, as well as in other places, they did not continue the asylums of the necessitous only. In France and England, the buildings of universities are composed chiefly of these colleges, in which the students reside, and in which the business of instruction is mainly carried on.
18. Among the public institutions of the early universities were the colleges, (collegia), buildings where students, especially those who were economically disadvantaged, could live together under the guidance of supervisors without having to pay for their accommodation. In some cases, they also received their meals, and often other support, for free. These institutions started in Paris, but, like in other places, they didn't only serve as havens for those in need. In France and England, the university buildings primarily consist of these colleges, where students live and where most of the teaching occurs.
19. The teachers in the universities were at first paid for their services by the students. At a later period, the magistrates of the town or city where the institution was located, made presents to eminent scholars, to induce them to remain. This practice finally led to the payment of regular salaries. From and after the fourteenth century, universities were not left to grow up of themselves as formerly, but were expressly established by public authorities or by the popes.
19. At first, university teachers were paid by the students for their services. Later on, local officials from the town or city where the university was located would give gifts to prominent scholars to encourage them to stay. This eventually led to the establishment of regular salaries. Starting in the fourteenth century, universities were no longer allowed to develop on their own as they had in the past; instead, they were officially created by public authorities or by the popes.
20. The inactivity and luxury of the clergy, had led to the neglect of the old seminaries of learning. The universities were therefore necessary, not only to revive the taste for science and literature, but also to form a new body of teachers. These institutions, however, at length became subject to undue clerical[255] influence, since the monks obtained admission into them as teachers, and then labored to increase the importance of their several orders, as well as the power of the Roman pontiff.
20. The laziness and luxury of the clergy led to the neglect of the old seminaries of learning. The universities were necessary to not only revive interest in science and literature but also to train a new group of teachers. However, these institutions eventually fell under excessive clerical[255] influence when the monks got involved as teachers, and they worked to boost the importance of their different orders and the power of the Roman pope.
21. The monks, also, connected, with their convents, popular schools, and undertook the education of the children in the cities. But their method of instruction was exceedingly defective, since the intelligent investigation of the subjects studied was little encouraged, and since the memory of the pupils was brought into requisition to the almost entire exclusion of the other faculties of the mind.
21. The monks, along with their convents, started popular schools and took on the education of children in the cities. However, their teaching methods were very flawed because they did not encourage deep thinking about the subjects being taught, and they relied heavily on the students' memory, almost completely ignoring other mental faculties.
22. In the lower parish schools, the children were not permitted to learn to write, the monks being desirous of confining to the clergy the practice of this art, which was very lucrative before the invention of printing. The art was called ars clericalis; and, for a long time, the privilege of establishing writing schools for the children of citizens, was a matter of negotiation between the magistrates and the clergy.
22. In the local parish schools, children weren't allowed to learn to write, as the monks wanted to keep this skill exclusive to the clergy, which was quite profitable before printing was invented. This skill was called ars clericalis; for a long time, the right to set up writing schools for city kids was a point of negotiation between the officials and the clergy.
23. But the citizens becoming, at length, more independent, the magistrates themselves began to superintend the education of youth. Trivial schools were established, in which the trivium, and reading and writing, were taught; but for these, as well as for the cathedral and parish schools, which had been neglected for some time by the higher clergy, itinerant monks and students were employed as teachers.
23. As the citizens became more independent over time, the magistrates started to take charge of the education of young people. Trivial schools were set up to teach the trivium, along with reading and writing. However, since the cathedral and parish schools had been overlooked for a while by the higher clergy, wandering monks and students were hired as teachers for these schools.
24. The elder pupils of the highest class frequently wandered from one school to another, under the pretence of pursuing their studies, sometimes taking with them younger scholars, whom they compelled to beg or steal, in order to supply their wants. As late as the sixteenth century, Luther complains that these vacantivi (or idlers) were the persons chiefly employed as schoolmasters in Germany.
24. The older students of the highest grade often moved from one school to another, pretending to be studying, and sometimes they took younger students with them, forcing them to beg or steal to meet their needs. As late as the sixteenth century, Luther complained that these vacantivi (or idlers) were mostly the ones working as teachers in Germany.
25. A pious fraternity, called Jeronymites, consisting[256] of clergymen and laymen, who lived together, and occupied themselves partly in mechanic arts, and partly in the instruction of youth, exerted considerable influence on education in general. They first established themselves in Italy, and afterwards in the Netherlands, on the Rhine, and in Northern Germany.
25. A devoted group known as the Jeronymites, made up of clergy and laypeople, lived together and focused on both practical trades and teaching the young, significantly impacting education overall. They initially set up in Italy, then spread to the Netherlands, along the Rhine, and into Northern Germany.
26. Much was done during the last half of the fourteenth century, and in the one hundred years that followed, to encourage the study of the ancient classics. The attention of literary men was turned to these interesting remains of antiquity by the arrival of many learned Greeks, who had fled from Turkish oppression, and who had brought with them the ancient writings.
26. A lot happened during the last half of the fourteenth century, and in the hundred years that followed, to promote the study of ancient classics. The focus of literary figures shifted to these fascinating remnants of the past due to the arrival of many educated Greeks, who had escaped Turkish oppression and brought along the ancient texts.
27. These treasures of former civilization were unfolded to the modern world by the art of printing, which was invented in 1441; and the reformation, which commenced in 1517, also aided the advancement of education. The corporations of the German cities in which the reformed religion was received, founded seminaries, called gymnasia, and lyceums, with permanent professorships. A vast amount of property, belonging to the convents and the Church, was confiscated by the governments, and appropriated chiefly to the promotion of education.
27. These treasures of past civilizations were brought to the modern world through the invention of printing in 1441. The Reformation, which started in 1517, also helped advance education. The cities in Germany that embraced the reformed religion established seminaries, called gymnasia, and lyceums, with permanent teaching positions. A large amount of property that belonged to convents and the Church was taken by the governments and mainly used to promote education.
28. The schools in the countries which adhered to the Roman Catholic religion, however, continued in nearly the same state, until the Jesuit schools arose, towards the end of the sixteenth century. These, on account of the ability with which they were conducted, soon gained the ascendency, and for a long time maintained their reputation; but they, at length, degenerated, and finally became extinct, on the suppression of the order of Jesuits in 1773.
28. The schools in the countries that followed the Roman Catholic faith stayed pretty much the same until the Jesuit schools emerged in the late sixteenth century. Because they were run so effectively, these schools quickly took the lead and maintained their reputation for a long time. However, they eventually declined and ultimately disappeared after the Jesuit order was suppressed in 1773.
29. Italy, Spain, and Portugal, have, for a long time, been inactive in relation to education, it being left entirely to the clergy, and the efforts of the people in[257] their individual capacity. Much has been done in Austria, within fifty years, to advance this important interest. Under the late emperor, professorships were constituted, in the universities and cathedral seminaries, for the instruction of teachers; and gymnasia, common and Sunday schools, were established in almost every part of the kingdom.
29. Italy, Spain, and Portugal have long been inactive regarding education, which has been left entirely to the clergy and the efforts of individuals in[257] their own capacity. A lot has happened in Austria over the past fifty years to promote this important cause. Under the late emperor, positions were created in universities and cathedral seminaries for teacher training; and gymnasiums, public schools, and Sunday schools were set up in nearly every part of the kingdom.
30. The general organization of schools in France, in the eighteenth century, was similar to that of most other Catholic countries. The government did nothing for the education of the people at large; and the Church, which possessed a large proportion of the property of the nation, left the people in total ignorance; whence may have arisen much of the atrocity which marked the early part of the revolution.
30. The overall structure of schools in France during the eighteenth century was similar to that of many other Catholic countries. The government did very little for the education of the general public, and the Church, which owned a significant amount of the nation's property, allowed the people to remain completely uninformed. This might have contributed to a lot of the violence that characterized the early part of the revolution.
31. During the popular reign, the education of youth was declared to be under the care of the state, and many schools, called polytechnic, were established. Napoleon, also, afterwards instituted several military schools, and contemplated the introduction of a system of general education. With this view, he instituted an imperial university, which was to have the supreme direction of instruction in France; but his designs were but partially carried into effect.
31. During the popular reign, the education of young people was officially made the responsibility of the state, leading to the establishment of many schools known as polytechnic. Later, Napoleon set up several military schools and thought about introducing a system of general education. To this end, he created an imperial university, which was intended to oversee all education in France; however, his plans were only partially implemented.
32. When the Bourbons were again restored to the throne of France, they, with the clergy, labored to restore the old order of things; and, to keep the common people from becoming dangerous, the Lancasterian schools, established in 1816, were abolished. Efficient measures, however, have been lately adopted by Louis Philip to establish schools of different grades throughout his kingdom.
32. When the Bourbons were restored to the throne of France, they, along with the clergy, worked to bring back the old ways. To prevent the common people from becoming a threat, the Lancasterian schools, which were started in 1816, were shut down. However, recently, Louis Philip has implemented effective measures to establish schools of various levels across his kingdom.
33. In England and Ireland, although the middling and higher classes are comparatively well educated, no system of general instruction has ever been established for the benefit of the common people. Much, however, has been accomplished by charity[258] and Sunday schools; the former of which were commenced in 1698, and the latter in 1812. Besides these, there are numerous charitable foundations on which many persons of limited means have been educated at the higher institutions.
33. In England and Ireland, even though the middle and upper classes are relatively well-educated, there has never been a system of general education set up for the benefit of the common people. However, a lot has been achieved through charity[258] and Sunday schools; the former started in 1698 and the latter in 1812. In addition to these, there are many charitable organizations that have helped educate people with limited resources at higher institutions.
34. In Scotland, more liberal provisions have been made for general education. The system was commenced in the reign of William and Mary, when, by an act of Parliament, every parish was required to maintain a school. The people have so far improved their privileges, that nearly all of the inhabitants of that part of Great Britain can read and write.
34. In Scotland, more progressive measures have been established for general education. The system began during the reign of William and Mary when an act of Parliament mandated that every parish must support a school. The population has significantly enhanced their rights, resulting in nearly all residents of that area of Great Britain being able to read and write.
35. The government of Russia, during the last and present century, has directed some attention to the promotion of education. According to the decrees of the Emperor Alexander, schools of different grades were to be established throughout the empire; but these decrees have been yet only partially executed.
35. The Russian government, in the last century and this one, has focused some effort on promoting education. According to the decrees of Emperor Alexander, schools of various types were supposed to be set up across the empire; however, these decrees have only been partially carried out.
36. In no part of the world has the education of all classes of people been more encouraged than in the United States. This has arisen chiefly from the circumstance, that a remarkable proportion of the colonists were persons of education. This was particularly the case with those of New-England, where the instruction of youth, from the very beginning of the settlements, was made a matter of public concern.
36. Nowhere in the world has education for all classes of people been more supported than in the United States. This is mainly due to the fact that a significant number of the colonists were educated individuals. This was especially true in New England, where educating young people has been a public priority since the very start of the settlements.
37. The principle of making public provision for this purpose, thus early adopted, has never been deserted; on the contrary, it has become so deeply interwoven with the social condition of the people of New-England, that there are few families in that part of the Union, which are not within reach of a public school; and, in every state where the influence of the people from that section of the country is predominant, public schools have been organized by legal provisions, and a fund has been provided, by which at least a part of the expense of supporting them is paid.[259]
37. The principle of providing public resources for this purpose, which was adopted early on, has never been abandoned; instead, it has become so deeply ingrained in the social fabric of the people of New England that there are very few families in that part of the country who aren't close to a public school. In every state where the influence of people from that region is strong, public schools have been established through legal provisions, and a fund has been created to cover at least part of the costs of running them.[259]
38. In all the states in which these primary institutions are established by legislative enactments, they are kept in operation, in country places, between six and nine months of the year. A master is employed in the winter, and a mistress, in the summer: the former receives for his services from ten to fifteen dollars per month, and the latter, from seventy-five cents to two dollars per week, together with boarding. The teachers, however, during their engagement are compelled to reside in the different families of the district, their stay at each place being determined, with scrupulous exactness, by the number of children sent to the school.
38. In all the states where these primary institutions are set up by law, they operate in rural areas for about six to nine months each year. A master is hired in the winter, and a mistress in the summer: the master earns between ten to fifteen dollars a month, and the mistress makes between seventy-five cents to two dollars a week, along with room and board. However, during their contracts, the teachers are required to stay with different families in the district, and the duration of their stay at each place is determined precisely by the number of children enrolled in the school.
39. From the low salaries received for these important services, and the short periods for which engagements are made, it is evident, that teaching a district school cannot be pursued as a regular employment. These schools are, therefore, supplied by persons who, during the rest of the year, follow some other business; or by students, who rely, in part or entirely, on their own exertions to defray the expenses of their academical, collegiate, or professional education.
39. Given the low pay for these important roles and the brief time commitments involved, it's clear that teaching in a district school can't be a full-time job. As a result, these schools are staffed by people who spend the rest of the year working in other fields, or by students who partially or fully depend on their own efforts to cover the costs of their academic, college, or professional education.
40. These schools are, no doubt, institutions of great value; but, in the states where they have been established, they are evidently much overrated. They fail in accomplishing the ends for which they have been instituted, through the extreme tenacity with which the people adhere to ancient and defective methods of instruction, the frequent change of teachers, and the small compensation allowed for the services of competent instructors.
40. These schools are definitely valuable institutions; however, in the states where they exist, they are clearly overrated. They do not achieve the goals for which they were created due to the strong resistance of people to let go of outdated and flawed teaching methods, the frequent turnover of teachers, and the low pay offered to qualified instructors.
41. In the cities and populous towns or villages, the public schools are kept up during the whole of the year, and the system of instruction is generally better than that pursued in the country. In New-York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, and in some other cities,[260] the Lancasterian plan of mutual instruction, with many modifications, is preferred, principally on account of its cheapness.
41. In cities and large towns or villages, public schools operate all year round, and the teaching methods are usually better than those in rural areas. In New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, and a few other cities,[260] the Lancasterian system of mutual instruction, with various updates, is favored mainly because it’s more affordable.
42. Select-schools and private academies are, also, very numerous. These are located chiefly in the cities and populous towns, and are supported entirely by fees for tuition received from the parents or guardians of the pupils. These institutions do not differ essentially from those of a private nature in similar situations in other parts of the United States, where common schools are not established by law.
42. Select schools and private academies are also quite numerous. They're mainly found in cities and large towns and are funded entirely by tuition fees paid by the parents or guardians of the students. These institutions are essentially similar to other private schools in areas of the United States where public schools aren't established by law.
43. In the Southern states, wealthy families often employ private tutors. Sometimes two, three, or more families, and even a whole neighborhood, unite for the purpose of forming a school; and, to induce a teacher to commence or continue his labors among them, an adequate amount is made up beforehand by subscription. South of Pennsylvania, Delaware, and the Ohio River, such engagements are commonly made for a year, as, in that section of the Union, the opinion prevails, that a teacher can do but little towards improving his pupils in a much shorter time.
43. In the Southern states, wealthy families often hire private tutors. Sometimes two, three, or more families, and even an entire neighborhood, come together to create a school; and to encourage a teacher to start or keep teaching among them, they gather a sufficient amount of money beforehand through donations. South of Pennsylvania, Delaware, and the Ohio River, these contracts are usually made for a year, as people in that part of the country believe that a teacher can achieve very little in a much shorter time.
44. The literary institutions which are next above the common schools, and which are established by legislative authority, are the academies, of which there are between five and six hundred in the United States. Some of these have been founded by the funds of the state in which they are located, some, by the union of a few spirited individuals, or by private bequests.
44. The educational institutions that are above the common schools and are set up by legislative authority are the academies, of which there are about five to six hundred in the United States. Some of these have been established with funds from the state in which they are located, others by a group of enthusiastic individuals, or through private donations.
45. The course of instruction pursued in these seminaries of learning varies considerably from each other. In some of them, it is confined chiefly to the common branches of education; in others, the course is pretty extensive, embracing natural and moral philosophy, chemistry, belles lettres, and a sound course of mathematics, together with Latin, Greek,[261] and some of the modern languages. One great object in these institutions is to prepare students for college. The teacher who has charge of an academy is called the principal, while the teacher who may aid him in his labors is denominated the assistant or usher.
45. The educational programs offered in these learning institutions vary a lot from one another. In some, the focus is mainly on basic subjects; in others, the curriculum is quite comprehensive, covering natural and moral philosophy, chemistry, literature, and a solid mathematics program, along with Latin, Greek,[261] and some modern languages. A key goal of these schools is to prepare students for college. The person in charge of an academy is called the principal, while the teacher who assists him is referred to as the assistant or usher.
46. The highest institutions of learning among us are the colleges and universities. Between these, however, there seems to be but little difference, since the course of studies is nearly or quite the same in both, and since the charters obtained from the legislatures grant to both similar powers of conferring honorary degrees. The whole number of these establishments in the United States is about eighty.
46. The top educational institutions in our country are colleges and universities. However, there's not much difference between them, as the curricula are nearly identical, and both have charters from the legislatures that give them similar authority to award honorary degrees. Overall, there are about eighty of these institutions in the United States.
47. The principal teachers in the colleges are denominated professors, who confine their labors to communicating instructions in particular branches of literature or science. These are aided by assistants called tutors. The latter are generally young men, who devote two or three years to this employment, before entering upon the practice of a profession. The number of professors and tutors in the several colleges varies according to their amount of funds, and number of students.
47. The main teachers in the colleges are called professors, who focus on teaching specific areas of literature or science. They are supported by assistants known as tutors. These tutors are usually young men who spend two or three years in this role before starting their professional careers. The number of professors and tutors in each college varies based on their funding and the number of students.
Transcriber's Notes:
Obvious spelling and punctuation errors and inconsistencies were repaired, but period spellings retained (e.g. "grisly bear," "lama," "pistachoes," "hommony").
Obvious spelling and punctuation errors and inconsistencies were fixed, but period spellings were kept (e.g. "grisly bear," "lama," "pistachoes," "hommony").
Negociat- and negotiat-, whale-bone and whalebone, ancles and ankle, color- and colour-, endeavor- and endeavour-, favor- and favour-, labor- and labour-, neighbor- and neighbour-, were retained as in original.
Negotiate- and negotiate-, whale-bone and whalebone, ankles and ankle, color- and colour-, endeavor- and endeavour-, favor- and favour-, labor- and labour-, neighbor- and neighbour-, were kept as in the original.
Contents page, Preface page number reads "7" but actually appears on page "vii"; retained.
Contents page, Preface page number shows "7" but actually appears on page "vii"; retained.
Contents page, "Soapboiler" changed to more frequent "Soap-Boiler."
Contents page, "Soapboiler" changed to more frequent "Soap-Boiler."
P. ix, "removed from the ignorance," original reads "ignora ce."
P. ix, "removed from the ignorance," original reads "ignorance."
P. 16, "south-western parts," hyphen added for consistency within text.
P. 16, "southwestern parts," hyphen added for consistency within text.
P. 47, "maltster checks," original reads "malster."
P. 47, "maltster checks," original reads "malster."
P. 53, "render the wine palatable," original reads "palateable."
P. 53, "make the wine enjoyable," original reads "palateable."
P. 66, Illustration at start of "Manufacturer of Cloth" chapter has no caption in original.
P. 66, The illustration at the beginning of the "Manufacturer of Cloth" chapter doesn't have a caption in the original.
P. 101, "sewn together to form hats," original reads "sown."
P. 101, "sewn together to form hats," original reads "sown."
P. 174, "released from his dependence," original reads "dependance."
P. 174, "released from his dependence," original reads "dependance."
P. 185, "Thomas Newcomen," original reads "Newcomer."
P. 185, "Thomas Newcomen," originally reads "Newcomer."
P. 249, Illustration at start of "Teacher" chapter has no caption in original.
P. 249, The illustration at the beginning of the "Teacher" chapter has no caption in the original.
P. 249 and 252, "rabbis," original reads "rabbies."
P. 249 and 252, "rabbis," original reads "rabbies."
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!